JP6428709B2 - Game machine - Google Patents

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine.

  Conventionally, a lottery is performed in accordance with the winning of a game ball at the start opening, and a variation effect or a jackpot effect according to the lottery result is displayed on the liquid crystal screen. A gaming machine has been proposed that stores a lottery right up to a certain number and notifies the number by a symbol when winning at the start opening.

JP2013-13528A

  In this type of pachinko machine, when the lottery contents stored on hold are determined and notified first, the willingness to win at the starting point will decline after that, and the game will stop and wait for the lottery result. As a result, the player was bored.

  The present invention has been made to solve the above-described problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can reduce a problem that a player gets bored with a game early.

In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine according to claim 1 includes an acquisition unit capable of acquiring information based on the establishment of an acquisition condition, and a storage unit in which the information acquired by the acquisition unit is stored; A discriminating unit for executing discrimination based on the information stored in the storage unit; a display unit for displaying identification information for indicating a discrimination result by the discriminating unit; and a specific discrimination result on the display unit. Among the information stored in the storage means, the privilege granting means capable of giving a privilege advantageous to the player when the identification information for display is displayed, and before the determination by the determination means An identification symbol display means for displaying an identification symbol corresponding to the information on the display means; and an operation means operable by the player, wherein a predetermined number or more of the identification symbols are displayed based on a predetermined trigger. Have In addition, the predetermined display based on the operation of the symbol variable means capable of changing the display mode of the plurality of identification symbols displayed on the display means to a predetermined display mode, and the operation means Specific mode display means for displaying the plurality of identification symbols varied in the mode in a specific mode corresponding to the content determined by the determination unit, and the specific mode display unit displays the plurality of identification symbols. by combining those obtained by the variable display, wherein all SANYO to configure certain aspects corresponding to what is determined by the determining means, among the plurality of the identification symbols that are variably displayed so as to constitute the specific embodiments In a state where at least a part of the identification symbol is displayed, when the identification symbol is newly displayed in response to newly storing the information in the storage means, The newly displayed identification symbol may be variably displayed based on the operation of the operation means so that the newly stored information is in a specific mode corresponding to the content determined by the determination means. It is configured to be possible .

A gaming machine according to a second aspect is the gaming machine according to the first aspect, wherein the display means comprises a liquid crystal display.

According to claim 1 the gaming machine according, based on the establishment of acquisition condition, and acquiring means capable of acquiring information, and storage means for the information acquired by the acquisition means is stored, stored in the storage means Discriminating means for executing discrimination based on the information obtained, display means for displaying identification information for indicating the discrimination result by the discriminating means, and identification information for indicating the specific discrimination result on the display means Is displayed, the privilege granting means capable of giving a privilege advantageous to the player, and the identification corresponding to the information before the discrimination by the discrimination means among the information stored in the storage means In the case where there is an identification symbol display means for displaying a symbol on the display means, and an operation means that can be operated by the player, and when a predetermined number or more of the identification symbols are displayed based on a predetermined trigger, Display hand The display mode of the plurality of identification symbols displayed on the screen can be changed to a predetermined display mode, and the plurality of display modes can be changed to the predetermined display mode based on the operation of the operation unit. Specific identification display means for displaying the identification symbol in a specific aspect corresponding to the content determined by the determination means, wherein the specific aspect display means variably displays a plurality of the identification symbols. it is combined, the der those which constitute a particular manner corresponding to what is determined by the determining means is, at least a portion of the of the plurality of the identification symbols that are variably displayed so as to constitute the specific embodiments When the identification symbol is displayed and the identification symbol is newly displayed in response to the new information being stored in the storage means, the newly displayed identifier is displayed. Based on the operation of the operation means, the design can be variably displayed so that the newly stored information is in a specific mode corresponding to the content determined by the determination means. Is .

Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to reduce a problem that the player gets bored with the game at an early stage.

According to the gaming machine of the second aspect, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine of the first aspect, the following effect can be obtained. That is, the display means is composed of a liquid crystal display.

Therefore, there is an effect that various display modes can be displayed.

It is a front view of the pachinko machine in a 1st embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of a pachinko machine. It is a front view of a unit storage member. It is a front view of a unit storage member. It is a front perspective view of the protrusion operation | movement unit in the state which has arrange | positioned the base side displacement member and the relative displacement member in the retracted position. (A) is a disassembled front perspective view of a protruding operation unit, and (b) is a rear perspective view of a connecting rod. It is the front schematic diagram which illustrated the transmission means in front view typically. It is the front schematic diagram which illustrated the transmission means in front view typically. It is an exploded back perspective view of a base side displacement member and a relative displacement member. It is a back perspective view of a base side displacement member and a relative displacement member. It is a front view of a protrusion operation unit. It is a front view of a protrusion operation unit. It is a front view of a protrusion operation unit. It is a front perspective view of a protrusion operation unit. (A) is a side view of the projecting operation unit as viewed in the direction of arrow XVIIa in FIG. 16, and (b) is a partially enlarged side view of the projecting operation unit in the portion XVIIb in FIG. 17 (a). It is a front perspective view of a compound operation unit. It is a front perspective view of a compound operation unit. It is a disassembled front perspective view of a compound operation unit. It is a disassembled front perspective view of a compound operation unit. (A) is a front view of a driven member and a driven member, (b) is a side view of the driven member and the driven member as viewed in the direction of arrow XXIIb in FIG. 22 (a). (A) is a front view of a driven member, (b) is a back surface part of a driven member. FIG. 24 is a side view of the driven member as viewed in the direction of arrow XXIV in FIG. (A) is a front view of a driven member, (b) is a back surface part of a driven member. FIG. 26 is a side view of the driven member as viewed in the direction of arrow XXVI in FIG. (A) is a front schematic diagram of the driven member and driven member showing the relationship with the first guide groove, and (b) is a schematic front view of the driven member and driven member showing the relationship with the second guide groove. FIG. (A) is a front schematic diagram of the driven member and driven member showing the relationship with the first guide groove, and (b) is a schematic front view of the driven member and driven member showing the relationship with the second guide groove. FIG. (A) is a front schematic diagram of the driven member and driven member showing the relationship with the first guide groove, and (b) is a schematic front view of the driven member and driven member showing the relationship with the second guide groove. FIG. (A) is a front schematic diagram of the driven member and driven member showing the relationship with the first guide groove, and (b) is a schematic front view of the driven member and driven member showing the relationship with the second guide groove. FIG. (A) is a front schematic diagram of the driven member and driven member showing the relationship with the first guide groove, and (b) is a schematic front view of the driven member and driven member showing the relationship with the second guide groove. FIG. (A) is a front schematic diagram of the driven member and driven member showing the relationship with the first guide groove, and (b) is a schematic front view of the driven member and driven member showing the relationship with the second guide groove. FIG. It is a front perspective view of a rotation operation unit. It is a disassembled front perspective view of a rotation operation unit. It is a disassembled back perspective view of a rotation operation unit. It is a longitudinal cross-sectional view of a rotation operation unit. (A) is a rear view of a main-body part, (b) is a partial enlarged rear view of the main-body part which expands and shows the XXXVII part of Fig.37 (a). It is a front view of a rotation operation unit. 38A is a cross-sectional view of the rotational operation unit taken along the line XXXIXa-XXXIXa in FIG. 38A, and FIG. 38B is a cross-sectional view of the rotational operation unit 600 taken along the line XXXIXb-XXXIXb in FIG. . (A) is the figure which showed typically the area division setting and effective line setting of the display screen, (b) is the figure which illustrated the actual display screen. (A)-(b) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the display aspect of the normal holding | maintenance effect. (A)-(b) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the display mode of 8 productions. (A)-(b) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the display mode in the fluctuation pattern of a composite display mode. (A)-(b) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the display mode in the fluctuation pattern of a composite display mode. It is a timing chart which showed the period setting after power-on of a pachinko machine. (A)-(b) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the display mode in a time production period. (A) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the display mode in a time effect period, (b) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the display mode in a time effect extension period. (A) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the display mode at the time of the end of a time production period. It is the schematic diagram which showed the electrical structure of the pachinko machine in 2nd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the outline | summary of various counters. (A) is the schematic diagram which showed typically a part of content of ROM in a main controller, (b) is the schematic diagram which showed typically a part of content of RAM in a main controller. is there. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a special hit random number table, (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a special hit type selection table, and (c) is a normal hit random number table. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically. (A) is the schematic diagram which showed typically a part of ROM content of a voice lamp control apparatus, (b) is the model which showed typically a part of RAM content of a voice lamp control apparatus. FIG. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of a display control apparatus. It is the schematic diagram which showed an example of the display data table typically. It is the schematic diagram which showed an example of the transfer data table typically. It is the schematic diagram which showed an example of the drawing list typically. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol fluctuation | variation process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is the flowchart which showed the special symbol change start process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the start winning process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the prefetch process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the normal symbol fluctuation | variation process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the through gate passage process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the NMI interruption process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the starting process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the main process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is the flowchart which showed the starting process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the time setting process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the main process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the command determination process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the notice selection processing performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the winning command reception processing which is executed by MPU inside the sound lamp control device. It is the flowchart which showed the fluctuation | variation display setting process performed by MPU in an audio | voice lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the fluctuation pattern selection process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the button effect selection process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the synchronous production management process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the extended production | presentation setting process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the pending | holding number display update process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the frame button input monitoring and production | presentation process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the button production execution process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the background image setting process performed by MPU in an audio lamp control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the main process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the boot process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. (A) is the flowchart which showed the command interruption process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus, (b) is the flowchart which showed the V interruption process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. is there. It is the flowchart which showed the command determination process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. (A) is the flowchart which showed the fluctuation pattern command process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus, (b) is the flowchart which showed the stop classification command process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. is there. It is the flowchart which showed the notice command process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the pending | holding command process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the effect command process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. (A) is the flowchart which showed the back image change command process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus, (b) is the flowchart which showed the error command process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. is there. It is the flowchart which showed the display setting process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the warning image setting process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the pointer update process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. (A) is the flowchart which showed the transfer setting process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus, (b) is the flowchart which showed the resident image transfer setting process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. is there. It is the flowchart which showed the normal image transfer setting process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. It is the flowchart which showed the drawing process performed by MPU in a display control apparatus. (A) is the schematic diagram which showed an example of the display mode of the pachinko machine in 3rd Embodiment, (b) is the figure which compared the magnitude | size of the pixel of a main liquid crystal and a sub liquid crystal. (A)-(b) is the schematic diagram which showed an example of the display mode of the pachinko machine in 3rd Embodiment. (A)-(b) is the schematic diagram which showed an example of the display mode of the pachinko machine in 3rd Embodiment. (A)-(b) is the schematic diagram which showed an example of the display mode of the pachinko machine in 3rd Embodiment. (A) is the schematic diagram which showed an example of the display mode of the pachinko machine in 3rd Embodiment, (b) is a display size comparison with the main liquid crystal of the pachinko machine 10 in 3rd Embodiment, and a sub liquid crystal. FIG. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of the display control apparatus of the pachinko machine in 3rd Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the fluctuation pattern command process performed by MPU in the display control apparatus of the pachinko machine in 3rd Embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in 4th Embodiment. (A)-(b) is the figure which showed the internal structure of the distribution unit in 4th Embodiment. It is a time chart for demonstrating the production | presentation control regarding the reserved symbol production in 4th Embodiment. (A) is the figure which showed typically the area division setting and effective line setting of the display screen in 4th Embodiment, (b) is the figure which illustrated the actual display screen in 4th Embodiment. is there. (A)-(b) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the display mode of the normal holding | maintenance effect in 4th Embodiment. (A)-(b) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the display mode of 8 productions in 4th Embodiment. (A) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the display mode of 8 productions in 4th Embodiment, (b) The model which showed typically the display mode of the additional prize production in 4th Embodiment. FIG. (A)-(b) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the display mode of the special continuation effect in 4th Embodiment. It is a time chart for demonstrating the flow regarding the composite display effect in 4th Embodiment. (A)-(b) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the display mode of the composite display effect in 4th Embodiment. (A)-(b) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the display mode of the composite display effect in 4th Embodiment. (A)-(b) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the display mode of the composite display effect in 4th Embodiment. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the display mode of the composite display effect in 4th Embodiment. It is a time chart for demonstrating the flow regarding the time effect in 4th Embodiment. (A)-(b) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the display mode of the time effect in 4th Embodiment. (A)-(b) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the display mode of the time effect in 4th Embodiment. (A)-(b) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the display mode of the time effect in 4th Embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of the pachinko machine in 4th Embodiment. (A) is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of a ROM in the main controller in the fourth embodiment, and (b) is a block showing an electrical configuration of a RAM in the main controller in the fourth embodiment. FIG. (A) is a block diagram which shows the electrical structure of ROM in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 4th Embodiment, (b) is the electric structure of RAM in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 4th Embodiment. FIG. (A) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the effect time selection table in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 4th Embodiment, (b) is the effect selected by the effect time selection table in 4th Embodiment. It is the schematic diagram which showed the time table of time typically. It is the flowchart which showed the special symbol fluctuation | variation process 2 performed by MPU in the main controller in 4th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the variable execution determination process performed by MPU in the main controller in 4th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the special symbol 1 fluctuation start process performed by MPU in the main controller in 4th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the special symbol 2 fluctuation | variation start process performed by MPU in the main controller in 4th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the start winning process 2 which is executed by MPU inside the main control unit in 4th execution form. It is the flowchart which showed the starting process 2 performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 4th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the time setting process 2 performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 4th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the main process 2 performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 4th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the frame button input monitoring / production | presentation process 2 performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 4th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the identification number input process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 4th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the eight holding | maintenance effect processes performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 4th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the button effect process performed by MPU in the audio lamp control apparatus in 4th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the notice selection process 2 performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 4th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the winning command reception process 2 which is executed by MPU inside the sound lamp control device in 4th execution form. It is the flowchart which showed the fluctuation | variation display setting process 2 performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 4th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the fluctuation pattern selection process 2 performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 4th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the button effect selection process 2 performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 4th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the setting process process in eight production performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 4th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the synchronous production management process 2 performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 4th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the production time setting process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 4th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the extended effect setting process 2 performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 4th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the pending | holding command process 2 performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in 4th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the production command process 2 performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in 4th Embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in a 5th embodiment. (A)-(b) is the figure which showed the internal structure of the distribution unit in 5th Embodiment. It is a time chart explaining the flow regarding the special symbol variation effect performed using the main screen and sub screen in a 5th embodiment. (A)-(b) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the display mode of the special symbol fluctuation effect in 5th Embodiment. (A)-(b) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the display mode of the special symbol fluctuation effect in 5th Embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows the electrical structure of the pachinko machine in 5th Embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of the display control apparatus in 5th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the main process 3 performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 5th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the prior pseudo fluctuation setting process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 5th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the command determination process 2 performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in 5th Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the drawing process 2 performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in 5th Embodiment.

  Embodiments of the present invention will be described below with reference to the accompanying drawings. First, with reference to FIGS. 1 to 39, as a first embodiment, an embodiment in which the present invention is applied to a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter simply referred to as “pachinko machine”) 10 will be described. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of a game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10.

  As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 includes an outer frame 11 in which an outer shell is formed by a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer shape that is substantially the same as the outer frame 11. And an inner frame 12 supported to be openable and closable. In order to support the inner frame 12, metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 11 at two upper and lower portions on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the side on which the hinge 18 is provided is used as an opening / closing axis. The frame 12 is supported so as to be openable and closable to the front front side.

  A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails, winning holes 63, 64, and the like is detachably mounted on the inner frame 12 from the back side. A ball ball game is played when a ball (game ball) flows down the front of the game board 13. The inner frame 12 has a ball launch unit 112a (see FIG. 4) that launches a ball to the front area of the game board 13 and a launch that guides the ball launched from the ball launch unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13. A rail (not shown) or the like is attached.

  On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 that covers the upper side of the front surface and a lower dish unit 15 that covers the lower side of the front frame 14 are provided. In order to support the front frame 14 and the lower dish unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached to two upper and lower portions on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the side on which the hinges 19 are provided is used as an opening / closing axis. 14 and the lower pan unit 15 are supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front front side. The locking of the inner frame 12 and the locking of the front frame 14 are respectively released by inserting a dedicated key into the key hole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

  The front frame 14 is assembled with decorative resin parts, electrical parts, and the like, and a window part 14c that is formed in an approximately elliptical shape is provided at a substantially central part thereof. A glass unit 16 having two plate glasses is disposed on the back side of the front frame 14, and the front surface of the game board 13 can be seen on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 16.

  On the front frame 14, an upper plate 17 that stores balls is formed in a substantially box shape that protrudes forward and the upper surface is opened, and prize balls and rental balls are discharged to the upper plate 17. The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed to be inclined downward to the right when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the sphere thrown into the upper plate 17 is guided to the ball launch unit 112a (see FIG. 4). A frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17. The frame button 22 is operated by the player when, for example, changing the stage of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) or changing the contents of the effect of super reach. The

  The front frame 14 is provided with light emitting means such as various lamps around it (for example, a corner portion). These light emitting means play a role of enhancing the effect of the game during the game by changing or controlling the light emission mode by turning on or blinking according to the change of the gaming state at the time of big hit or predetermined reach. On the peripheral edge of the window portion 14c, there are provided electric decoration portions 29 to 33 incorporating light emitting means such as LEDs. In the pachinko machine 10, these lighting parts 29 to 33 function as effect lamps such as jackpot lamps, and the lighting parts 29 to 33 are turned on by lighting or blinking of the built-in LEDs at the time of jackpot or reach effects. Alternatively, it blinks to notify that the jackpot is being hit or that the reach is one step before the jackpot. Further, in the upper left part of the front frame 14 as viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), there is provided a display lamp 34 which has built-in light emitting means such as LEDs and can display the payout of a prize ball and when an error occurs.

  In addition, a small window 35 is formed by attaching a transparent resin from the back side so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be visually recognized, on the lower side of the right illumination part 32, and a sticking space K1 (see FIG. 2) can be visually recognized from the front surface of the pachinko machine 10. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10, a plated member 36 made of ABS resin that is chrome-plated is attached to an area around the electric decoration parts 29 to 33 in order to bring out more gorgeousness.

  A ball rental operation unit 40 is disposed below the window 14c. The ball lending operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41, a ball lending button 42, and a return button 43. When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated in a state where a bill or a card is inserted into a card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, Loans are made. Specifically, the frequency display unit 41 is an area in which the remaining amount information such as a card is displayed, and the built-in LED is lit to display the remaining amount as the remaining amount information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain a lending ball based on information recorded on a card or the like (recording medium), and the lending ball is supplied to the upper plate 17 as long as there is a remaining amount on the card or the like. Is done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of a card or the like inserted into the card unit. In addition, in a pachinko machine in which a ball is lent directly to the upper plate 17 from a ball lending device or the like without using a card unit, a so-called cash machine does not require the ball lending operation unit 40. In this case, the ball lending operation unit 40 It is also possible to add a decorative seal or the like to the installation portion of the parts so that the component configuration is common. A pachinko machine using a card unit and a cash machine can be shared.

  In the lower plate unit 15 located on the lower side of the upper plate 17, a lower plate 50 for storing a ball that could not be stored in the upper plate 17 is formed in a substantially box shape having an open upper surface. Yes. On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 that is operated by a player to drive a ball into the front surface of the game board 13 is disposed.

  Inside the operation handle 51, a touch sensor 51a for permitting driving of the ball launch unit 112a, a launch stop switch 51b for stopping the launch of the ball during the pressing operation, and a rotation of the operation handle 51. A variable resistor (not shown) that detects the amount of movement (rotation position) based on a change in electrical resistance is incorporated. When the operation handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes in accordance with the amount of rotation operation. The resistance value of the variable resistor A ball is fired with a strength corresponding to (shooting strength), and the ball is driven into the front surface of the game board 13 with a jump amount corresponding to the player's operation. Further, when the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the firing stop switch 51b are turned off.

  In the lower part of the front of the lower plate 50, a ball removal lever 52 is provided for operating when the balls stored in the lower plate 50 are discharged downward. The ball removal lever 52 is always urged in the right direction. By sliding the ball release lever 52 in the left direction against the urge, the bottom opening formed in the bottom surface of the lower plate 50 is opened. A ball naturally falls from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball removal lever 52 is normally performed in a state where a box (generally referred to as “a thousand box”) for receiving the balls discharged from the lower plate 50 is placed below the lower plate 50. As described above, the operation handle 51 is disposed on the right side of the lower plate 50, and the ashtray 53 is attached on the left side of the lower plate 50.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 has a base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape when viewed from the front, a large number of nails (not shown) for ball guidance, windmills, rails 61 and 62, and general prizes. The opening 63, the first winning opening 64, the second winning opening 640, the variable winning device 65, the through gate 67, the variable display device unit 80 and the like are assembled, and the peripheral portion thereof is the back surface of the inner frame 12 (see FIG. 1). Attached to the side. The base plate 60 is made of a light-transmitting resin material and is formed so that the player can visually recognize various structures disposed on the back side of the base plate 60 from the front side. The general winning port 63, the first winning port 64, the second winning port 640, the variable winning device 65, and the variable display device unit 80 are disposed in a through hole formed in the base plate 60 by router processing. It is fixed from the front side with a tapping screw or the like.

  The front center portion of the game board 13 can be viewed from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c (see FIG. 1) of the front frame 14. The configuration of the game board 13 will be described below mainly with reference to FIG.

  An outer rail 62 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted on the front surface of the game board 13, and the strip-shaped metal plate is located on the inner side of the outer rail 62 in the same manner as the outer rail 62. The arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed by the above is planted. The inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62 surround the outer periphery of the front surface of the game board 13, and the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1) surround the front and rear. A game area in which a game is played is formed by the behavior of. The game area is an area formed on the front surface of the game board 13 and defined by two rails 61 and 62 and a resin outer edge member 73 that connects the rails (a winning opening is provided and fired). Area where the falling sphere flows).

  The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball fired from the ball launch unit 112a (see FIG. 4) to the upper part of the game board 13. A return ball preventing member 68 is attached to the front end portion of the inner rail 61 (upper left portion in FIG. 2) to prevent the ball once guided to the upper portion of the game board 13 from returning to the ball guide path again. Is done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right part in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flying portion of the sphere, and the ball launched at a predetermined momentum or more hits the return rubber 69 and gains momentum. Is bounced back to the center while being attenuated.

  First symbol display devices 37A and 37B each having a plurality of LEDs and a 7-segment display as light emitting means are disposed in the lower left portion of the game area when viewed from the front (lower left portion in FIG. 2). The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B display according to each control performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4), and mainly display the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. In the present embodiment, the first symbol display devices 37 </ b> A and 37 </ b> B are configured to be selectively used depending on whether the ball has won the first prize opening 64 or the second prize opening 640. Specifically, when the ball wins the first winning opening 64, the first symbol display device 37A operates, while when the ball wins the second winning opening 640, the first symbol display device 37A operates. The symbol display device 37B is configured to operate.

  In addition, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B indicate, by means of LEDs, whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the process of changing the probability, in the short time, or in the normal state by a lighting state, or whether the pachinko machine 10 is changing or not by a lighting state. , Indicating whether the stop symbol is a symbol corresponding to a probable jackpot, a symbol corresponding to a normal jackpot or a symbol that is out of place, by a lighting state, indicating the number of held balls by a lighting state, and a 7-segment display device, Displays numbers and errors. The plurality of LEDs are configured to have different emission colors (for example, red, green, and blue) of each LED, and the combination of the emission colors may suggest various gaming states of the pachinko machine 10 with a small number of LEDs. it can.

  In the present pachinko machine 10, a lottery is performed in response to winning of the first winning port 64 and the second winning port 640. In the lottery, the pachinko machine 10 determines whether or not it is a big hit (big hit lottery), and also determines the type of the big hit if it is determined to be a big hit. As the jackpot type determined here, 15R probability variation jackpot, 4R probability variation jackpot, and 15R normal jackpot are prepared. The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B not only indicate whether or not the lottery result is a jackpot as a stop symbol after the end of the variation, but if it is a jackpot, a symbol corresponding to the jackpot type is displayed. .

  Here, the “15R probability variation jackpot” is a probability variation jackpot in which the maximum number of rounds shifts to a high probability state after a jackpot of 15 rounds, and “4R probability variation jackpot” is a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of four. It is a probabilistic jackpot that shifts to a high probability state after. In addition, “15R normal jackpot” is a jackpot that shifts to a low probability state after the maximum number of rounds of 15 rounds and hits a short time during a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 100 fluctuations). is there.

  In addition, the “high probability state” means a state in which the jackpot probability thereafter increases as an added value after the jackpot ends, that is, when the probability change is in progress (probability change), in other words, a game that easily shifts to the special game state. It is a state of. The high probability state (during probability change) in the present embodiment includes a game state in which the hit probability of the second symbol, which will be described later, is increased and the ball is likely to win the second winning opening 640. The “low probability state” refers to a time when the probability of jackpot change is not occurring, and a state where the jackpot probability is normal, that is, a state where the jackpot probability is lower than that at the time of probability change. The short time state (short time medium) of the “low probability state” means that the jackpot probability is a normal state, and the jackpot probability remains as it is, and only the hit probability of the second symbol is increased, and the second prize opening 640 is obtained. It means the state of the game where the ball is easy to win. On the other hand, when the pachinko machine 10 is in a normal state is a game state (a state where neither the big hit probability nor the second symbol hit probability is increased) which is neither probabilistic nor short in time.

  During probability change and time reduction, not only does the probability of winning the second symbol increase, but also the time for opening the electric accessory 640a associated with the second prize opening 640 is changed, and the time is longer than normal. Is set. When the electric accessory 640a is in the opened state (open state), the ball wins the second winning opening 640 as compared to the case where the electric accessory 640a is in the closed state (closed state). Easy state. Therefore, during the probability change or the short time, it becomes easy for the ball to win the second winning opening 640, and the number of jackpot lotteries can be increased.

  In addition, during the probability change or during the short time, it is not necessary to change the opening time of the electric accessory 640a associated with the second prize opening 640, or in addition to changing the opening time, It is good also as what changes the frequency | count that the accessory 640a opens more than usual. In addition, the probability of winning the second symbol is not changed during the probability change or in the short time, and the electric accessory 640a is released at the time when the electric accessory 640a associated with the second winning opening 640 is opened and once. It is good also as what changes at least one of the frequency | counts. In addition, during the probability change or in the short time, the time of opening the electric accessory 640a associated with the second winning opening 640 or the number of times of opening the electric accessory 640a per time is not counted, and the second symbol hit Only the probability may be changed so as to increase compared to the normal rate.

  The game area is provided with a plurality of general winning ports 63 through which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as winning balls when the balls win. In addition, a variable display device unit 80 is disposed in the central portion of the game area. The variable display device unit 80 is synchronized with the variable display on the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B by using a winning (start winning) at the first winning port 64 and the second winning port 640 as a trigger. It is composed of a third symbol display device 81 composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply referred to as “display device”) that performs variable display, and an LED that displays the second symbol in a variable manner with the passage of a sphere of the through gate 67 as a trigger. A second symbol display device (not shown) is provided.

  The variable display device unit 80 is provided with a center frame 86 so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81. The third symbol display device 81 is visible through an opening opened in the center of the center frame 86. Further, when a projecting operation unit 400 or a composite operation unit 500, which will be described later, is operated, at least a part of the relative displacement member 450 and the driven member 560 protrudes into the opening of the center frame 86 and can be visually recognized through the opening. It is said. For example, when the projecting operation unit 400 is disposed at the rotational position by the first operation (see FIG. 14A), the distal end portion of the relative displacement member 450 is visible through the opening of the center frame 86, When arranged in the extended position by the second operation (see FIG. 15B), substantially the entire relative displacement member 450 is visible through the opening of the center frame 86.

  The third symbol display device 81 is composed of a large 15-inch liquid crystal display, and the display content is controlled by the display control device 114 (see FIG. 4). One symbol row is displayed. Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols (third symbol). These third symbols are horizontally scrolled for each symbol column, and the third symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. It is like that. In the third symbol display device 81 of the present embodiment, the game state is displayed on the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B in accordance with the control of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4). The decorative display according to the display of the symbol display devices 37A and 37B is performed. Instead of the display device, the third symbol display device 81 may be configured using, for example, a reel.

  Each time the sphere passes through the through gate 67, the second symbol display device alternately turns on the symbol “◯” and the symbol “X” as a display symbol (second symbol (not shown)) for a predetermined time. A variable display is performed. In the pachinko machine 10, when it is detected that the ball has passed through the through gate 67, a winning lottery is performed. As a result of the winning lottery, if the winning symbol is a winning symbol, the symbol “◯” is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the variation of the second symbol is displayed. Further, if the winning lottery results, the symbol of “x” is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the variation of the third symbol is displayed.

  In the pachinko machine 10, when the variable display on the second symbol display device stops at a predetermined symbol (in this embodiment, a symbol “◯”), the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is displayed for a predetermined time. It is configured to be in an activated state (opened) only.

  The time required for the variable display of the second symbol is set to be shorter during the probability change or during the shorter time than when the game state is normal. As a result, during the probability change and during the time reduction, since the variation display of the second symbol is performed in a short time, the winning lottery can be performed more than during normal. Therefore, since the chance of winning in the winning lottery increases, it is possible to give the player a lot of opportunities for the electric winning component 640a of the second winning opening 640 to be in an open state. Therefore, it is possible to make it easier for the ball to win the second winning opening 640 during the probability change and during the short time.

  It is to be noted that the probability of winning is increased during probability change or time reduction, and other methods such as increasing the opening time and the number of times of opening of the electric accessory 640a per hit are also used to reach the second prize opening 640 during probability change or time reduction. When the ball is in a state where it is easy to win, the time required for the variable display of the second symbol may be constant regardless of the gaming state. On the other hand, when the time required for displaying the variation of the second symbol is set shorter than normal during probability change or short time, the winning probability may be constant regardless of the gaming state, The opening time and the number of opening times of the electric accessory 640a may be constant regardless of the gaming state.

  The through gate 67 is assembled to the game board on the right side in the lower area of the variable display device unit 80, and a part of the ball flowing down to the right side of the game board can pass through the balls launched to the game board. It is configured. When the ball passes through the through gate 67, a winning lottery of the second symbol is performed. After winning the lottery, the 2nd symbol display device displays a variation, and if the winning lottery results, the symbol “○” is displayed as the variable display stop symbol, and the winning lottery result may be off For example, the symbol “x” is displayed as the stop symbol of the variable display.

  The total number of passes through the through-gate 67 of the sphere is held up to a maximum of 4 times, and the number of held balls is displayed by the above-described first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and at the second symbol hold lamp (not shown). Is also displayed. Four second symbol holding lamps are provided for the maximum number of holdings, and are arranged symmetrically below the third symbol display device 81.

  Note that the variable display of the second symbol is performed by switching between lighting and non-lighting of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device as in the present embodiment, as well as the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B and the third symbol. A part of the symbol display device 81 may be used. Similarly, the second symbol holding lamp may be turned on by a part of the third symbol display device 81. Further, the maximum number of balls held for passing through the ball of the through gate 67 is not limited to four times, and may be set to three times or less, or five times or more (for example, eight times). Further, the number of through gates 67 to be assembled is not limited to one, and may be plural (for example, two). Further, the assembly position of the through gate 67 is not limited to the right side of the variable display device unit 80, and may be the left side of the variable display device unit 80, for example. In addition, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the second symbol hold lamp may not perform lighting display.

  Below the variable display unit 80, a first winning port 64 through which a ball can win is disposed. When a ball wins the first winning port 64, a first winning port switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main controller 110 is caused by the first winning port switch being turned on. A jackpot lottery is made (see FIG. 4), and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37A.

  On the other hand, a second winning port 640 through which a ball can win is disposed on the right side of the first winning port 64 in front view. When a ball wins the second prize opening 640, a second prize opening switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main controller 110 is caused by the second prize opening switch being turned on. A jackpot lottery is performed (see FIG. 4), and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37B.

  Each of the first winning port 64 and the second winning port 640 is also one of winning ports from which five balls are paid out as winning balls when a ball is won. In the present embodiment, the number of prize balls to be paid out when a ball wins the first prize opening 64 and the number of prize balls to be paid out when a ball wins the second prize slot 640 are configured to be the same. The number of prize balls to be paid out when a ball wins the first prize opening 64 is different from the number of prize balls to be paid out when a ball wins to the second prize opening 640, for example, the ball to the first prize opening 64 The number of prize balls to be paid out when a prize is won may be three, and the number of prize balls to be paid out when a ball wins the second prize opening 640 may be five.

  The second winning opening 640 is accompanied by an electric accessory 640a. The electric accessory 640a is configured to be openable and closable. Normally, the electric accessory 640a is in a closed state (reduced state), and it is difficult for the ball to win the second winning opening 640. On the other hand, when the symbol “◯” is displayed on the second symbol display device as a result of the variation display of the second symbol that is triggered by the passage of the ball to the through gate 67, the electric accessory 640a is in an open state (enlarged) State), and the ball is likely to win the second winning opening 640.

  As described above, the probability of hitting the second symbol is higher than that during normal change during the probability change and the short time, and the time required for the variation display of the second symbol is short. "Is easily displayed, and the number of times that the electric accessory 640a is opened (enlarged) is increased. Further, during the probability change and the time reduction, the time for opening the electric accessory 640a also becomes longer than during the normal time. Therefore, it is possible to create a state where the ball is likely to win the second winning opening 640 during the probability change and during the short time compared to the normal time.

  Here, the probability of winning a big hit is the same in both the low probability state and the high probability state when the ball wins the first winning port 64 and when the ball wins the second winning port 640. However, the probability that a 15R probability variation jackpot is selected as the jackpot type selected when the jackpot is won is higher when the ball wins the second winning slot 640 than when the ball wins the first winning slot 64. Is set. On the other hand, the first winning port 64 does not have an electric accessory as in the second winning port 640, and is in a state where the ball can always win.

  Therefore, during normal times, the electric winnings associated with the second winning opening 640 are often in a closed state, and it is difficult to win the second winning opening 640. Then, the ball is fired so that the ball passes to the left of the variable display device unit 80 (so-called “left-handed”), and a lot of opportunities for lottery wins are obtained by winning at the first winning opening 64, resulting in a big hit It is advantageous for the player to aim for this.

  On the other hand, during the probability change or during the short time, passing the ball through the through gate 67 makes it easy for the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 to be in an open state and to easily win the second winning opening 640. Therefore, the ball is fired toward the second prize opening 640 so that the ball passes the right side of the variable display device 80 (so-called “right-handed”), and is passed through the through gate 67 to open the electric accessory. In addition, it is more advantageous for the player to aim for a 15R probability variation jackpot by winning the second winning opening 640.

  As described above, the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment launches a ball to the player in accordance with the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 (whether it is probable, short, or normal). Can be changed between “left-handed” and “right-handed”. Thus, the player can be changed in the way the ball is hit, so that the game can be enjoyed.

  A variable winning device 65 is disposed on the upper right side of the first winning port 64, and a horizontally-long rectangular specific winning port (large opening) 65a is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. In the pachinko machine 10, when the jackpot lottery performed due to the winning at the first winning port 64 or the second winning port 640 becomes a jackpot, after a predetermined time (variable time) has passed, The first symbol display device 37A or the first symbol display device 37B is turned on, and a stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 to indicate the occurrence of the jackpot. Thereafter, the gaming state transitions to a special gaming state (big hit) where the ball is easy to win. In this special gaming state, the special winning opening 65a that is normally closed is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds have elapsed or ten balls have been won).

  The specific winning opening 65a is closed when a predetermined time elapses, and after the closing, the specific winning opening 65a is opened again for a predetermined time. The opening / closing operation of the specific winning opening 65a can be repeated up to 15 times (15 rounds), for example. The state in which the opening / closing operation is performed is a form of a special gaming state advantageous to the player, and the player is given out a larger amount of prize balls than usual in order to give a gaming value (game value). Is done.

  Specifically, the variable winning device 65 is a horizontally long rectangular opening / closing plate covering the specific winning opening 65a, and a large opening opening solenoid (not shown) for driving to open / close forward with the lower side of the opening / closing plate as an axis. And. The special winning opening 65a is normally closed so that the ball cannot win or is difficult to win. In the case of a big hit, the large opening opening solenoid is driven to tilt the opening / closing plate to the lower front side to temporarily form an open state in which the ball is likely to win the specific winning opening 65a. It operates to repeat the state and the state alternately.

  Note that the special gaming state is not limited to the above-described form. When the game area is provided with a large opening that is opened and closed separately from the specific winning opening 65a, and the LED corresponding to the jackpot is turned on in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time, A special game in which a large opening provided separately from the specific winning port 65a is opened for a predetermined time and a predetermined number of times when the ball wins into the specific winning port 65a while the specific winning port 65a is opened. You may make it form as a state. Further, the number of the specific winning opening 65a is not limited to one, and one or more than two (for example, three) may be arranged, and the arrangement position is not limited to the upper right side of the first winning opening 64, For example, the left side of the variable display device unit 80 may be used.

  A sticking space K1 for sticking a certificate paper, an identification label or the like is provided at the lower right corner of the game board 13, and the certificate paper or the like attached to the sticking space K1 is a small window of the front frame 14. 35 (see FIG. 1).

  The game board 13 is provided with a first out port 71. Balls that flow down the game area and have not won any of the winning openings 63, 64, 65a, 640 are guided to a ball discharge path (not shown) through the first out opening 71. The first out port 71 is disposed below the first winning port 64.

  A number of nails are planted on the game board 13 in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the ball, and various members (acts) such as a windmill are arranged.

  As shown in FIG. 3, control board units 90 and 91 and a back pack unit 94 are mainly provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 10. The control board unit 90 is unitized by mounting a main board (main control apparatus 110), an audio lamp control board (audio lamp control apparatus 113), and a display control board (display control apparatus 114). The control board unit 91 is unitized by mounting a payout control board (payout control apparatus 111), a firing control board (launching control apparatus 112), a power supply board (power supply apparatus 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

  The back pack unit 94 includes a back pack 92 and a dispensing unit 93 that form a protective cover. In addition, each control board is used for MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each control, a port for communicating with various devices, a random number generator used for various lotteries, time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generation circuit or the like is mounted as necessary.

  The main control device 110, the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the payout control device 111 and the firing control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. . The board boxes 100 to 104 include a box base and a box cover that covers the opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are connected to each other, and each control device and each board are accommodated.

  Further, the substrate box 100 (main control device 110) and the substrate box 102 (dispensing control device 111 and launch control device 112) connect the box base and the box cover so that they cannot be opened by a sealing unit (not shown) (caulking structure). Consolidated). In addition, a seal (not shown) is attached to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover so as to cover the box base and the box cover. This seal seal is made of a brittle material. If the seal is to be peeled off in order to open the substrate boxes 100, 102, or if the substrate boxes 100, 102 are forcibly opened, the box base side and the box cover are removed. Cut to the side. Therefore, it is possible to know whether or not the substrate boxes 100 and 102 have been opened by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal.

  The payout unit 93 includes a tank 130 that is located at the top of the back pack unit 94 and opens upward, a tank rail 131 that is connected to the lower side of the tank 130 and is gently inclined toward the downstream side, and downstream of the tank rail 131. A case rail 132 that is vertically connected to the side, and a payout device 133 that is provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and that pays out a ball by a predetermined electrical configuration of the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 4). ing. The tank 130 is successively replenished with balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall, and a required number of balls are paid out by the payout device 133 as appropriate. A vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131.

  The payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the firing control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor operation knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erase switch 122. The state return switch 120 is operated, for example, to eliminate ball clogging (return to a normal state) when a payout error occurs, such as ball clogging in the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 4). The operation knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on to return the pachinko machine 10 to the initial state.

  Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

  The main controller 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer that is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 202 that stores various control programs executed by the MPU 201 and fixed value data, and a memory that temporarily stores various data when the control program stored in the ROM 202 is executed. A certain RAM 203 and various other circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are incorporated. In the main control device 110, the main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as jackpot lottery, display setting in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and the third symbol display device 81, and lottery of display results in the second symbol display device are performed by the MPU 201. Execute.

  Various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device by the data transmission / reception circuit in order to instruct the sub control device such as the payout control device 111 and the sound lamp control device 113 to operate. Such a command is transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sub controller only in one direction.

  The RAM 203 stores various areas, counters, flags, a stack area for storing the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 201 and a return address of a control program executed by the MPU 201, various flags, counters, I / O, and the like. And a work area (work area) in which values are stored. Note that the RAM 203 is configured so that the backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 and the data can be retained (backed up) even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut off, and all data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

  When the power is shut down due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer and the value of each register when the power is shut off (including when the power failure occurs, the same applies hereinafter) are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, at the time of power-on (including power-on due to power failure cancellation, the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before power-off based on information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed when the power is shut off by a main process (not shown), and restoration of each value written to the RAM 203 is executed in a start-up process (not shown) when the power is turned on. Note that the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 is input to the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 when the power is interrupted due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. Is input immediately, an NMI interrupt process (not shown) as a power failure process is immediately executed.

  An input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 via a bus line 204 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 205 has a payout control device 111, an audio lamp control device 113, first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, a second symbol display device, a second symbol holding lamp, and a lower side of the opening / closing plate of the specific winning opening 65a. A solenoid 209 made up of a large opening solenoid for opening and closing the front side and a solenoid for driving an electric accessory is connected to the MPU 201 via the input / output port 205. Send.

  The input / output port 205 includes a switch group (not shown), various switches 208 including a sensor group including a slide position detection sensor S and a rotation position detection sensor R, and a RAM erase switch circuit 253 described later provided in the power supply device 115. Are connected, and the MPU 201 executes various processes based on signals output from the various switches 208 and the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253.

  The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to perform payout control of prize balls and rental balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, includes a ROM 212 that stores a control program executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 213 that is used as a work memory or the like.

  The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area for storing the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211, the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211, and various flags and counters. And a work area (work area) in which values such as I / O are stored. The RAM 213 is configured to be able to retain (backup) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. As with the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, the power failure signal SG1 is also input to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is interrupted due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, an NMI interrupt process (not shown) as a power failure process is immediately executed.

  An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main control device 110, the payout motor 216, the firing control device 112, and the like are connected to the input / output port 215, respectively. Although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected to a prize ball detection switch for detecting a prize ball that has been paid out. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111 but is not connected to the main control device 110.

  The launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a so that the launch strength of the ball according to the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51 is obtained when the main control device 110 gives an instruction to launch a ball. . The ball launching unit 112a includes a launching solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the operation is performed on the condition that the launch stop switch 51b for stopping the launch of the ball is off (not operated). The firing solenoid is excited corresponding to the amount of rotation (rotation position) of the handle 51, and a ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51.

  The sound lamp control device 113 outputs sound in a sound output device (such as a speaker (not shown)) 226, outputs lighting and extinguishing in a lamp display device (lighting units 29 to 33, display lamp 34, etc.) 227, and fluctuating effects (fluctuation). Display) and setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 performed by the display control device 114 such as a notice effect. The MPU 221 that is an arithmetic unit includes a ROM 222 that stores a control program executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 223 that is used as a work memory or the like.

  An input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 including an address bus and a data bus. Main controller 110, display controller 114, audio output device 226, lamp display device 227, other device 228, frame button 22 and the like are connected to input / output port 225, respectively. Other devices 228 include drive motors 420, 530, and 630.

  The sound lamp control device 113 determines the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 based on various commands (variation pattern command, stop type command, etc.) received from the main control device 110, and uses the determined display mode as a command. The display control device 114 is notified by (display variation pattern command, display stop type command, etc.). The sound lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the player operates the frame button 22, the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed, or the super reach is performed. The display control device 114 is instructed to change the production contents at the time. When the stage is changed, a rear image change command including information about the changed stage is transmitted to the display control device 114 so that the rear image corresponding to the changed stage is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. . Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third symbol, which is a main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The display control device 114 displays various images on the third symbol display device 81 according to the command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113.

  Further, the sound lamp control device 113 receives a command (display command) representing the display content of the third symbol display device 81 from the display control device 114. The voice lamp control device 113 outputs the voice corresponding to the display content from the voice output device 226 in accordance with the display content of the third symbol display device 81 based on the display command received from the display control device 114, The lighting and extinguishing of the lamp display device 227 are controlled in accordance with the display contents.

  The display control device 114 is connected to the sound lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81, and based on a command received from the sound lamp control device 113, the third symbol display device 81 can produce a variation effect of the third symbol. The display is controlled. In addition, the display control device 114 appropriately transmits a display command for notifying the display content of the third symbol display device 81 to the sound lamp control device 113. The voice lamp control device 113 outputs the voice from the voice output device 226 in accordance with the display content indicated by the display command, thereby matching the display of the third symbol display device 81 with the voice output from the voice output device 226. be able to.

  The power supply device 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each unit of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to a power failure, and a RAM deletion switch 122 (see FIG. 3). And an erasing switch circuit 253. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies a necessary operating voltage to each of the control devices 110 to 114 through a power supply path (not shown). As its outline, the power supply unit 251 takes in the voltage of AC 24 volts supplied from the outside, and drives various switches such as various switches 208, solenoids such as the solenoid 209, motors, etc. A 5 volt voltage for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and the 12 volt voltage, the 5 volt voltage, and the backup voltage are supplied to the control devices 110 to 114 as necessary voltages.

  The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the DC stable voltage of 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power failure (power interruption, power interruption) occurs when this voltage falls below 22 volts. Then, the power failure signal SG1 is output to the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111. Based on the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute the NMI interrupt process. Note that the power supply unit 251 outputs a voltage of 5 volts, which is a drive voltage of the control system, for a time sufficient to execute the NMI interrupt processing even after the DC stable voltage of 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts. Is maintained at a normal value. Therefore, main controller 110 and payout controller 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (not shown).

  The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing backup data to the main controller 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. When the RAM erase signal SG2 is input when the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, the main control device 110 clears the backup data, and the payout control device 111 issues a payout initialization command for clearing the backup data. Transmit to device 111.

  Next, the unit storage member 300 will be described with reference to FIGS. 5 and 6. 5 and 6 are front views of the unit housing member 300. In FIG. 5, the operation units 400 to 800 are arranged at the retracted position, and in FIG. 6, the protruding operation unit 400 and the combined operation unit 500 are stretched. The state of being arranged in the extended position is illustrated respectively.

  As shown in FIGS. 5 and 6, the unit storage member 300 includes a rectangular bottom wall plate in front view and an outer wall plate erected from the outer edges of the four sides of the bottom wall portion (front side in FIG. 5). The side) is formed in an open box shape. The bottom plate of the unit storage member 300 is formed with an opening 301 having a rectangular shape in front view at the center thereof, whereby the unit storage member 300 is formed in a frame shape having a rectangular shape in front view. The opening 301 is formed in a size corresponding to the outer shape of the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) (that is, the third symbol display device 81 can be disposed).

  The unit accommodating member 300 accommodates the projecting operation unit 400, the composite operation unit 500, the rotation operation unit 600, the retracting operation unit 700, and the overhang operation unit 800 in the internal space, whereby one operation unit 200 is stored. Configured as

  The protruding operation unit 400 includes a base side displacement member 440 and a relative displacement member 450, and these displacement members 440 and 450 are operated (displaced) between the retracted position shown in FIG. 5 and the extended position shown in FIG. Let In the retracted position shown in FIG. 5, the space required for the retracted position is suppressed by forming a state in which the base side displacement member 440 and the relative displacement member 450 are overlapped in the front-rear direction (the vertical direction in FIG. 5). On the other hand, at the overhang position shown in FIG. 6, the relative displacement member 450 is slid relative to the base side displacement member 440 to increase the overall size, thereby ensuring visibility and enhancing the effect. The operation of the protruding operation unit 400 will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  The combined operation unit 500 includes a driven member 550 (see FIGS. 20 and 21) and a driven member 560, and these members 550 and 560 are disposed between the retracted position shown in FIG. 5 and the extended position shown in FIG. Operate (displace) with. In this case, the combined operation unit 500 causes the driven member 550 to perform only a rotational motion with the predetermined position as the rotation center, while the driven member 560 connected to the driven member 550 has a linear motion. By causing the motion combined with the rotational motion to be performed, a change is imparted to the trajectory of the driven member 560 to enhance the effect. The operation of the combined operation unit 500 will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  The rotating operation unit 600 includes a first rotating body 650 and a second rotating body 660 that are arranged concentrically, and by rotating both the rotating bodies 650 and 660, it is easy to associate both rotations with the player. Thus, the effect of rendering the plurality of rotating bodies (the first rotating body 650 and the second rotating body 660) is exhibited. The operation of the rotary operation unit 600 will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  In addition, the projecting operation unit 700 includes a projecting member 710 formed so as to be slidable, and the projecting operation unit 800 includes a projecting member 810 formed so as to be rotatable, and the projecting member 710 and the projecting member 810 are provided. Is displaced or rotated between a retracted position shown in FIG. 5 and an overhanging position (not shown) that projects to the front (front side) of the opening 301 (see the third symbol display device 81, see FIG. 2). To move (displace).

  Next, the protruding operation unit 400 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 7 is a front perspective view of the protruding operation unit 400 in a state where the base side displacement member 440 and the relative displacement member 450 are disposed at the retracted position. FIG. 8A is an exploded front perspective view of the protruding operation unit 400, and FIG. 8B is a rear perspective view of the connecting rod 460.

  7 and 8 show a state in which the projecting operation unit 700 sharing the case body 410 with the projecting operation unit 400 is provided side by side with the projecting operation unit 400. In addition, a pair of protruding operation units 400 are disposed on the left and right sides of the intrusion operation unit 700 below the opening 301 (see FIGS. 5 and 6), and the pair of protruding operation units 400 are formed symmetrically. Since the structure is substantially the same, only one (the one disposed on the right side of the front view) will be described, and the description of the other (the one disposed on the left side of the front view) will be omitted.

  As shown in FIGS. 7 and 8, the projecting operation unit 400 includes a case body 410 having a skeleton on the back side, a drive motor 420 disposed on the front side of the case body 410, and the drive motor 420. A plurality of gears (pinion gear 431, intermediate gear 432, and crank gear 433) that transmit the rotational driving force, a base side displacement member 440 that is rotatably supported by case body 410, and a slide displacement to base side displacement member 440 A relative displacement member 450 that can be disposed, and a connection rod 460 that connects the relative displacement member 450 and the crank gear 433 and is rotatably supported by the case body 410 are mainly configured. The

  The case body 410 is made of a resin material, and a housing recess 411 having an outer shape corresponding to a plurality of gears (respective gears 431, 432, and 433) is provided on the front surface (front surface) of the case body 410. A rod support shaft 412 protrudes from the side of the storage recess 411 (right side of FIG. 8A), and a base support shaft 413 protrudes below the storage recess 411 (lower side of FIG. 8A). Each of the support shafts 412 and 413 is made of a brass material, and is disposed in a posture parallel to the rotation shaft of each of the gears 431 to 433.

  In this embodiment, when the base side displacement member 440 and the relative displacement member 450 are disposed at the retracted position, as will be described later, the displacement members 440 and 450, the connecting rod 460, the gears 431, 432, and 433, Are stacked in the front-rear direction (see FIG. 13), a storage recess 411 is provided in front of the case body 410, and the gears 431, 432, and 433 are stored in the storage recess 411, respectively. Thus, the protrusion operation unit 400 can be reduced in size in the front-rear direction.

  A pinion gear 431 is attached to the drive shaft of the drive motor 420, and an intermediate gear 432 is engaged with the pinion gear 431, and a crank gear 433 is engaged with the intermediate gear 432. Therefore, when the drive shaft of the drive motor 420 is rotationally driven and the pinion gear 431 is rotated, the rotation is transmitted to the crank gear 433 via the intermediate gear 432, and the crank gear 433 is rotated.

  The intermediate gear 432 and the crank gear 433 are pivotally supported on the case body 410. Each of the gears 431 to 433 is formed as a spur gear whose teeth are engraved on the outer peripheral surface in parallel with the rotation axis. In this case, the crank gear 433 is formed with a radial decoration on the front surface (axial end surface), and the diameter of the front portion (axial end surface) is larger than the tooth tip circle engraved on the outer peripheral surface. It is made large so that the teeth can be shielded from the player in front view.

  A crank pin 433a projects from a front surface (end surface in the axial direction) of the crank gear 433 at a position eccentric from the rotation shaft of the crank gear 433. The crank pin 433a is a portion connected to the connecting rod 460, is formed as a cylindrical body parallel to the rotation shaft of the crank gear 433, and is slidably inserted into the rod groove 463 of the connecting rod 460. (See FIGS. 9 and 10). Thus, when the crank gear 433 is rotated, the rotation is transmitted to the connecting rod 460 via the crank pin 433a.

  The base side displacement member 440 and the relative displacement member 450 are effect members for performing an effect by being displaced from the retracted position to the extended position (see FIGS. 5 and 6), and the base side displacement member 440 (shaft support). The hole 442) is rotatably supported by the base side support shaft 413 of the case body 410, and a relative displacement member 450 is slidably disposed on the front side of the base side displacement member 440.

  Here, the relative displacement member 450 is formed with a decorative portion 454 on the front side thereof. The decoration part 454 is a part for decorating the front side of the relative displacement member 450, and is from the base end side (the rotation center side when the base displacement member 440 is rotated, the lower side of FIGS. 7 and 8). The whole is formed into a tapered shape in front view that becomes narrower toward the distal end side (the rotational distal end side when the proximal end displacement member 440 is rotated, the upper side in FIGS. 7 and 8), and the front surface of the decorative portion 454. The first portion 454a, the second portion 454b, and the third portion 454c are arranged along the longitudinal direction.

  The first portion 454a, the second portion 454b, and the third portion 454c of the decorative portion 454 are formed in a size corresponding to the tapered shape of the entire decorative portion 454. In other words, the second portion 454b positioned in the middle of the first portion 454a positioned on the distal end side and the third portion 454c positioned on the proximal end side of the second portion 454b positioned in the middle have six large outer shapes, respectively. It is formed in a square shape.

  In this case, the first portion 454a, the second portion 454b, and the third portion 454c are arranged at different positions in the front-rear direction (positions in the vertical direction in FIG. 5). Specifically, the second portion 454b positioned in the middle of the first portion 454a positioned on the distal end side and the third portion 454c positioned on the proximal end side of the second portion 454b positioned in the middle are respectively in front. It is arranged on the (front) side (the front side in FIG. 5).

  Accordingly, the decorative portion 454 of the relative displacement member 450 (that is, the front surface of the relative displacement member 450) is moved from the proximal end side (the rotation center side of the proximal displacement member 440, the lower side of FIGS. 7 and 8) to the distal end side ( The base end displacement member 440 is inclined downwardly in a stepped manner (three steps in the present embodiment) in a direction approaching the case body 410 as it goes toward the rotational distal end side of FIG. 7 and FIG.

  Thus, as will be described later, when the base-side displacement member 440 is rotated (see FIGS. 13 and 14), the decoration member 480 is prevented from contacting the decoration member 480 (see FIGS. 16 and 17). When both the displacement members 440 and 450 pass through the back side of the lens, the effect of the production is improved and the relative displacement member 450 is projected (see FIG. 15). ) To improve the force.

  The detailed configuration of the base side displacement member 440 and the relative displacement member 450 will be described later (see FIGS. 11 and 12).

  The connecting rod 460 is a long plate-shaped member for transmitting the rotation of the crank gear 433 to the relative displacement member 450, and includes a shaft support hole 461 formed as a circular hole at one end in the longitudinal direction, and a shaft thereof. A connection hole 462 formed as a long hole extending along the longitudinal direction on the other end side in the longitudinal direction opposite to the support hole 461, and between the shaft support hole 461 and the connection hole 462 in the longitudinal direction. And a rod groove 463 that is recessed on the back surface side as a recessed groove extending along.

  The connecting rod 460 is attached to the case body 410 in a state where the rod support shaft 412 of the case body 410 is inserted into the shaft support hole 461 and the crank pin 433a of the crank gear 433 is inserted into the rod groove 463. Further, the connection pin 452 of the relative displacement member 450 is inserted into the connection hole 462 of the connecting rod 460 (see FIGS. 11 and 12). Thereby, as will be described later, the connecting rod 460 is rotated about the rod support shaft 412 as the center of rotation with the rotation of the crank gear 433 (see FIGS. 9 and 10), and with the rotation of the connecting rod 460, The base-side displacement member 440 and the relative displacement member 450 are rotated (first operation) and slide-displaced (second operation) (see FIG. 12), and are operated (displaced) between the retracted position and the extended position.

  In this case, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 7, the drive motor 420, the base side displacement member 440, and the relative displacement member 450 are respectively disposed on the front surface (one surface) side of the case body 410. Compared with the case where the base body displacement member 440 and the relative displacement member 450 are disposed on the front surface (one surface) side, and the drive motor 420 is disposed on the back surface (other surface) side, respectively, with the case body 410 interposed therebetween. The size of the unit 400 in the front-rear direction can be reduced.

  Furthermore, since the base side displacement member 440 and the relative displacement member 450 are disposed at the retracted position in a posture in which the drive motor 420 is positioned on the longitudinal extension line (see FIG. 13A), these drive motors. 420, the base side displacement member 440, and the relative displacement member 450 can be linearly arranged. Therefore, the space required as the retracted position on the front side of the case body 410 can be efficiently suppressed.

  In the present embodiment, the transmission means for transmitting the rotational driving force of the drive motor 420 to the base side displacement member 440 and the relative displacement member 450 is cranked together with a plurality of gears (each gear 431 to 433) and the crank gear 433. The connecting rod 460 constituting the mechanism is connected to the connecting rod 460 (the connection hole 462 and the rod groove 463), the crank pin 433a of the crank gear 433, and the connection pin 452 of the relative displacement member 450, as will be described later. Are disposed in a region between the rod support shaft 412 and the base support shaft 413 of the case body 410, and the transmission means (the gears 431 to 433 and the connecting rod 460) and the support shafts 411 and 412 are arranged. Set the placement.

  Thereby, in a state where the base side displacement member 440 and the relative displacement member 450 are disposed at the retracted position, the transmission means is disposed in a region overlapping the base side displacement member 440 and the relative displacement member 450 in front view. can do. That is, the dead space formed on the back side of the base side displacement member 440 and the relative displacement member 450 disposed at the retracted position can be effectively utilized as the space for disposing the transmission means. As a result, in addition to the effect of the positional relationship between the drive motor 420, the base displacement member 440, and the relative displacement member 450 described above, it is possible to synergistically reduce the size of the protrusion operation unit 400 in the front-rear direction and the front view. it can.

  Next, the operation of the transmission means (pinion gear 431, intermediate gear 432, crank gear 433, and connecting rod 460) will be described with reference to FIGS. 9 and 10 are schematic front views schematically showing the transmission means in the front view. FIG. 9A shows a state where the crank gear 433 is arranged at the first rotation position in FIG. 9B. FIG. 10 shows a state in which the crank gear 433 is arranged at the intermediate rotational position, and FIG. 10 shows a state in which the crank gear 433 is arranged at the second rotational position.

  9 and 10 schematically illustrate the shapes of the gears 431 to 433 and the connecting rod 460 in order to simplify the drawings and facilitate understanding. 9 and 10, the positions of the center lines of the connecting rod 460 when the crank gear 433 is disposed at the first rotation position, the intermediate rotation position, and the second rotation position are two positions P1, Pm, and P2. It is schematically illustrated using a dotted line.

  In the description of FIGS. 9 and 10, FIGS. 13 to 15 are referred to as appropriate. 9A corresponds to the state shown in FIGS. 13A and 13B, and FIG. 9B corresponds to the state shown in FIGS. 14A and 14B. FIG. 10 corresponds to the state shown in FIGS. 15 (a) and 15 (b).

  As shown in FIG. 9A, in a state where the crank gear 433 is disposed at the first rotational position and the connecting rod 460 is located at the position P1, the base side displacement member 440 is at the retracted position and the relative displacement member 450 is at the retracted position. They are respectively arranged at the reference positions (see FIGS. 12A and 13). In this state, the crank pin 433a of the crank gear 433 is positioned at the upper end (the end portion on the rod support shaft 412 side) of the rod groove 463 of the connecting rod 460.

  Therefore, when the crank gear 433 is disposed at the first rotation position, the crank gear 433 rotates counterclockwise (counterclockwise) in FIG. 9A (that is, the base displacement member 440 and the relative displacement member 450 are stretched). Rotation in the direction of retracting from the extended position to the retracted position) can be regulated by bringing the crank pin 433a into contact with the upper end of the rod groove 463. Accordingly, when the base side displacement member 440 and the relative displacement member 450 are arranged from the extended position to the retracted position, even if a control failure of the drive motor 420 occurs due to an electrical factor, for example, The base-side displacement member 440 and the relative displacement member 450 are displaced beyond the retracted position by a simple mechanism (a stopper mechanism that regulates the crankpin 433a by the rod groove 463), and both the displacement members 440, 450 and the connecting rod 460 are the other. It is possible to avoid a collision with the member.

  When the crank gear 433 is rotated clockwise (clockwise) in FIG. 9A from the state shown in FIG. 9A, the crank pin 433a of the crank gear 433 lowers the rod groove 463 of the connecting rod 460 at the lower end (rod The connecting rod 460 is rotated clockwise (clockwise) in FIG. 9A around the rod support shaft 412 as the center of rotation. When the crank gear 433 is further rotated and reaches the intermediate rotation position as shown in FIG. 9B, the connecting rod 460 is positioned at the position Pm. In this state, the base displacement member 440 is disposed at the rotational position and the relative displacement member 450 is disposed at the reference position (see FIGS. 12B and 14).

  When the crank gear 433 is rotated clockwise (clockwise) in FIG. 9A from the state shown in FIG. 9B, the crank pin 433a of the crank gear 433 lowers the rod groove 463 of the connecting rod 460 at the lower end (rod After sliding toward the support shaft 412 (the end opposite to the support shaft 412), it is slid toward the upper end (the end on the rod support shaft 412 side), and the connecting rod 460 has the rod support shaft 412 as the center of rotation in FIG. a) It is rotated clockwise (clockwise). As a result, when the crank gear 433 reaches the second rotational position as shown in FIG. 10, the connecting rod 460 is positioned at the position P2. In this state, the base-side displacement member 440 is disposed at the rotational position, and the relative displacement member 450 is disposed at the overhanging position (see FIGS. 12C and 15).

  Even when the crank gear 433 is disposed at the second rotational position, the crank pin 433a of the crank gear 433 is connected to the connecting rod as in the case where the crank gear 433 is disposed at the first rotational position shown in FIG. It is located at the upper end (end on the rod support shaft 412 side) of the rod groove 463 of 460.

  Therefore, when the crank gear 433 is disposed at the second rotational position, the crank gear 433 rotates clockwise (clockwise) in FIG. 10 (that is, the base side displacement member 440 and the relative displacement member 450 are extended from the retracted position). Rotation in the direction of projecting to the position) can be regulated by bringing the crank pin 433a into contact with the upper end of the rod groove 463. Accordingly, when the base side displacement member 440 and the relative displacement member 450 are arranged from the retracted position to the extended position, even if a control failure of the drive motor 420 occurs due to electrical factors, for example, The base-side displacement member 440 and the relative displacement member 450 are displaced beyond the overhanging position by a special mechanism (a stopper mechanism that regulates the crank pin 433a by the rod groove 463), and the displacement members 440 and 450 and the connecting rod 460 are moved. Collision with other members can be avoided in advance.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 11 and 12, the configuration and operation of the base displacement member 440 and the relative displacement member 450 will be described. FIG. 11 is an exploded rear perspective view of the base displacement member 440 and the relative displacement member 450.

  As shown in FIG. 11, the base-side displacement member 440 includes a main body portion 441 formed in a long plate shape, a shaft support hole 442 that is opened as a circular hole on the back surface of the main body portion 411, and a main body portion 441. The first slide hole 443 and the second slide hole 444 formed as long holes extending along the longitudinal direction (vertical direction in FIG. 11) are mainly provided.

  The shaft support hole 442 is a hole through which the base side support shaft 413 of the case body 410 is inserted, and by this insertion, the base side displacement member 440 can rotate to the case body 410 around the base side support shaft 413 as a rotation center. Is pivotally supported. That is, as will be described later, the base side displacement member 440 has a retracted position (see FIGS. 12A and 13) and a rotational position (see FIGS. 12B, 12C, 14 and 15). And is supported rotatably.

  In this case, the shaft support hole 442 is formed at a position below the center in the longitudinal direction of the main body portion 441 and biased to one side (the projecting position side) from the center in the width direction of the main body portion 441. As a result, the base side displacement member 440 and the relative displacement member 450 can reduce the rotation angle required for the base side displacement member 440 in order to extend a predetermined amount (predetermined area) from the outer edge of the case body 410. The time required to rotate the displacement member 440 between the retracted position and the rotation position can be shortened, and as a result, the effect of the presentation due to the displacement of the base side displacement member 440 and the relative displacement member 450 can be enhanced.

  The relative displacement member 450 includes a main body portion 451 formed in a long plate shape, a connection pin 452 protruding from the back surface of the main body portion, and a predetermined interval along the longitudinal direction of the main body portion 451 (the vertical direction in FIG. 11). A pair of slide pins 453 arranged with a space therebetween, and a decorative portion 454 disposed on the front surface of the main body portion 451 are mainly provided.

  The connection pin 452 and the slide pin 453 are cylindrical portions that are slidably inserted into the first slide hole 443 and the second slide hole 444 of the base-side displacement member 440, respectively. By the insertion, the relative displacement member 450 is inserted. Is arranged to be slidable along the longitudinal direction with respect to the base side displacement member 440. That is, as will be described later, the relative displacement member 450 has a reference position (see FIGS. 12A, 12B, 13 and 14) and an overhang position (see FIGS. 12C and 15). The base-side displacement member 440 is slidably displaceable between the two.

  In this case, the connection pin 452 is slidably inserted into the connection hole 462 of the connecting rod 460 at the distal end side protruding from the first slide hole 443 of the base side displacement member 440, and the relative displacement member 450 is thereby inserted. It is connected to a crank gear 433 (see FIG. 8) via a connecting rod 460.

  Thus, as will be described later, by rotating the crank gear 433, the connecting rod 460 is rotated about the rod support shaft 412 (see FIG. 9), so that the base side relative to the base side support shaft 413 is the center of rotation. The rotation (first operation) of the displacement member 450 can be executed, and the slide displacement (second operation) of the relative displacement member 450 with respect to the base-side displacement member 440 can be executed (see FIG. 12).

  Here, the connection pin 452 and the slide pin 453 are disposed at different positions (with a gap) along the longitudinal direction (vertical direction in FIG. 11) of the relative displacement member 450. Therefore, since the location where the relative displacement member 450 is connected to the base side displacement member 440 can be dispersed in the longitudinal direction, the front and rear direction of the relative displacement member 450 relative to the base side displacement member 440 (the direction of approaching and separating from the case body 410). ) Can be suppressed and the slide displacement can be stabilized.

  Further, the connection pin 452 is arranged on the distal end side in the longitudinal direction of the relative displacement member 450 (upper side in FIG. 11) than the slide pin 453. Thereby, the location where the relative displacement member 450 is supported by the case body 410 via the connecting rod 460 can be brought closer to the distal end side in the longitudinal direction of the relative displacement member 450. In other words, the location where the relative displacement member 450 is supported by the case body 410 via the connecting rod 460 can be moved away from the shaft support hole 442 of the base side displacement member 440 to the distal end side in the longitudinal direction (upper side in FIG. 11). As a result, it is possible to easily suppress the front end side of the relative displacement member 450 from swinging in the front-rear direction (direction approaching and separating from the case body 410).

  That is, only the longitudinal direction base side (the shaft support hole 442) of the base side displacement member 440 is supported by the base side support shaft 413 of the case body 410, and the relative displacement member 450 is disposed on the base side displacement member 440. Because of the structure, the distal ends in the longitudinal direction of both displacement members 440 and 450 are free ends, and the distal ends are likely to swing in the front-rear direction during the first operation. This shaking may cause the tip side to come into contact with the decorative member 480. Therefore, a structure in which the position supported by the case body 410 via the connecting rod 460 is the front end side in the longitudinal direction is effective.

  A collar C is rotatably fitted on the connection pin 452 and the slide pin 453. Since the collar C is interposed between the outer peripheral surfaces of the connection pin 452 and the slide pin 453 and the inner peripheral surfaces of the first slide hole 443 and the second slide hole 444, the collar C is provided along the slide holes 443 and 444. The pins 452 and 453 can be slid smoothly. Further, the collar C (specifically, the large-diameter flange portion of the collar C) is interposed between the main body 441 of the base-side displacement member 440, the main body 451 of the relative displacement member 450, and the connecting rod 460. The opposing distances between the base displacement member 440, the relative displacement member 450, and the connecting rod 460 can be kept constant.

  The connection pin 452 is secured to the end surface on the tip side by a disk-like disk S with screws, so that the connection pin 452 is prevented from coming off from the connecting rod 460, and the slide pin 453 is an end surface on the tip side. A long flat slide guide 470 is fastened and fixed by a screw to prevent the base side displacement member 440 from coming off.

  FIG. 12 is a rear perspective view of the base displacement member 440 and the relative displacement member 450. 12A corresponds to the state shown in FIGS. 9A and 13 (that is, the state where the crank gear 433 is disposed at the first rotational position and the connecting rod 460 is disposed at the position P1). FIG. 12B corresponds to the state shown in FIG. 9B and FIG. 14 (that is, the state where the crank gear 433 is disposed at the intermediate rotational position and the connecting rod 460 is disposed at the position Pm). . FIG. 12C corresponds to the state illustrated in FIGS. 10 and 15 (that is, the state where the crank gear 433 is disposed at the second rotational position and the connecting rod 460 is disposed at the position P2).

  As shown in FIG. 12A, in the state where the connecting rod 460 is located at the position P1 (see FIGS. 9A and 13), the rotation is performed with the base side support shaft 413 of the base side displacement member 440 as the rotation center. The reference position where the sliding position of the relative displacement member 450 with respect to the base side displacement member 440 is the position where the amount of protrusion from the base side displacement member 440 is the minimum is the retracted position where the position is closest to the rod support shaft 412. It is arranged at each position. In this state, the connection pin 452 of the relative displacement member 450 is positioned at the upper end (end on the rod support shaft 412 side) of the connection hole 462 of the connecting rod 460.

  From the state shown in FIG. 12A, the connecting rod 460 rotates counterclockwise (counterclockwise) in FIG. 12A around the rod support shaft 412 as the crank gear 433 (see FIG. 9A) rotates. When rotated, the connection pin 452 of the relative displacement member 450 is slid toward the lower end (end opposite to the rod support shaft 412) of the connection hole 462 of the connecting rod 460, and the relative displacement member 440 and the relative displacement member 450 are relative to each other. The displacement member 450 is rotated clockwise (clockwise) in FIG. 12A together with the relative displacement member 450 with the proximal support shaft 413 as the rotation center (first operation). When the connecting rod 460 is further rotated and reaches the intermediate position Pm as shown in FIG. 12B (see FIGS. 9B and 14), the rotational position of the base side displacement member 440 is changed to the rod support shaft 412. It is arranged at a rotational position that is the most distant from the position.

  In this case, the sliding position of the relative displacement member 450 with respect to the proximal displacement member 440 can be maintained at the reference position. That is, when the connecting rod 460 is rotated counterclockwise (counterclockwise) in FIG. 12A around the rod support shaft 412 as the center of rotation, the connecting pin 452 of the relative displacement member 450 and the connecting hole 462 of the connecting rod 460 are moved downward. Since the sliding direction is a direction substantially along the sliding displacement direction of the relative displacement member 450 relative to the base displacement member 440, the relative displacement member 450 is moved relative to the base displacement member 440. Does not generate force component in the direction of sliding displacement. Therefore, while maintaining the slide position of the relative displacement member 450 with respect to the base side displacement member 440 (while restricting the occurrence of slide displacement from the reference position), the base side displacement member 440 with the base side support shaft 413 as the center of rotation is used. Only rotation can be generated.

  As a result, both the displacement members 440 and 450 can be rotated about the base support shaft 413 in a state in which the amount of protrusion of the relative displacement member 450 from the base side displacement member 440 is kept to a minimum. The separation distance between the rotation tip of the relative displacement member 450 and the drive motor 420 (see FIG. 7) and the decorative member 480 (see FIGS. 16 and 17) can be reduced. As a result, it is possible to reduce the size of the projecting operation unit 400 and to increase the degree of design freedom when defining the shape of the decorative member 480.

  From the state shown in FIG. 12B, the rotation of the crank gear 433 (see FIG. 9B) causes the connecting rod 460 to turn counterclockwise (counterclockwise) in FIG. When rotated, the connection pin 452 of the relative displacement member 450 is slid toward the upper end (end on the rod support shaft 412 side) of the connection hole 462 of the connecting rod 460 and then the lower end (opposite to the rod support shaft 412). And the relative displacement member 450 is slid and displaced with respect to the proximal displacement member 440 in a direction extending along the longitudinal direction (first and second slide holes 443 and 444). (Second operation). As a result, when the connecting rod 460 reaches the second position P2 as shown in FIG. 12C (see FIGS. 10 and 15), the sliding position of the relative displacement member 450 with respect to the base side displacement member 440 becomes the base position. It is arranged at the overhang position where the overhang amount from the side displacement member 440 is the maximum.

  In this case, the rotational position of the base-side displacement member 440 can be maintained at the rotational position that is the most distant from the rod support shaft 412. That is, the rotation of the connecting rod 460 counterclockwise (counterclockwise) in FIG. 12B about the rod support shaft 412 as the rotation center moves the connecting pin 452 of the relative displacement member 450 along the connecting hole 462 of the connecting rod 460. Since the sliding direction is substantially perpendicular to the sliding displacement direction of the relative displacement member 450 relative to the base displacement member 440, the relative displacement member 450 is slid relative to the base displacement member 440. Only the force component in the direction of displacement is generated, and the force component in the direction of rotating the base side displacement member 440 around the base side support shaft 413 is not generated. Therefore, it is possible to generate only the slide displacement of the relative displacement member 450 relative to the base side displacement member 440 while restricting the rotation of the base side displacement member 440 with the base side support shaft 413 as the rotation center.

  Thereby, the base displacement member 440 is rotated from the retracted position in a state where the amount of protrusion of the relative displacement member 450 from the base side displacement member 440 is kept to a minimum (the state where the relative displacement member 450 is maintained at the reference position). Rotation to a position (first operation), and after the first operation is completed, the relative displacement member is in a state where the rotation of the base displacement member 440 is restricted (the base displacement member 440 is maintained at the rotation position). A slide displacement (second operation) for extending 450 along the longitudinal direction with respect to the base-side displacement member 440 can be performed. In other words, since the rotation operation and the slide operation can be separated and each can be performed in two stages as separate operations, different operations can be performed in the game compared to the case where the rotation operation and the slide operation are performed simultaneously. Can be clearly recognized, and the effect of rendering by displacing the displacement members 440 and 450 can be enhanced.

  The operation of the protruding operation unit 400 configured as described above will be described with reference to FIGS.

  13 to 15 are front views of the protruding operation unit 400. FIG. As described above, FIGS. 13 (a) and 13 (b) correspond to the states shown in FIGS. 9 (a) and 12 (a), and FIGS. 14 (a) and 14 (b) 9 (b) and FIG. 12 (b), and FIGS. 15 (a) and 15 (b) correspond to the states shown in FIGS. 10 and 12 (c). FIGS. 13B, 14B, and 15B show a state in which the base side displacement member 440 and the relative displacement member 450 are removed.

  As shown in FIGS. 13 to 15, according to the protruding operation unit 400, as described above, the base side displacement member 440 is moved to the retracted position shown in FIG. 13A and FIGS. 14A and 15A. ) And a relative displacement member 450 disposed on the base-side displacement member 440 is formed between the reference position shown in FIGS. 13 (a) and 14 (a). A first operation that is formed so as to be slidable between the overhanging position shown in FIG. 15A and rotates the base side displacement member 440 between the retracted position and the rotation position, and the relative displacement member 450 is base side displaced. The second operation of displacing the member 440 between the reference position and the overhang position can be performed.

  As a result, as shown in FIGS. 13A and 14A, the base side displacement member 440 in the retracted position is arranged at the rotational position by the first operation, and the relative displacement member 450 in the reference position is set in the second position. By slidably moving (extending) to the extended position by the operation, the relative displacement member 450 can be extended outward from the base side displacement member 440 as shown in FIG. Therefore, since the base side displacement member 440 and the relative displacement member 450 can be enlarged as a whole, both the displacement members 440 and 450 can be sufficiently visually recognized by the player, and the effect can be sufficiently exhibited.

  In particular, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 14A, the base side displacement member 440 is arranged at the rotational position by the first operation, so that the distal end portion of the relative displacement member 450 (in this embodiment, the decorative portion). The entire first portion 454a of 454) can be visually recognized by the player through the opening of the center frame 86, and as shown in FIG. By disposing, the player can visually recognize substantially the entire relative displacement member 450 (in this embodiment, the entire third portion 454a of the striking decoration portion 454) through the opening of the center frame 86.

  That is, the relative displacement member 450 that has been retracted to the retracted position and cannot be visually recognized from the opening of the center frame 86 is first caused to appear from the side to the opening of the center frame 86 by a rotational motion (first operation). In addition, the player can visually recognize only a part of the relative displacement member 450, and is then projected toward the center of the opening of the center frame 86 by a linear motion (second motion). An effect of allowing the player to visually recognize the whole can be performed. Therefore, the visual recognition area of the relative displacement member 450 can be enlarged by a motion form (linear motion) different from the motion form at the time of appearance (rotational motion). It is possible to make the player feel a sense of speed due to the enlargement and a sense of unity of the combined actions that are performed continuously while being combined. As a result, it is possible to obtain an effect that cannot be achieved with a configuration in which the relative displacement member 450 is projected and retracted with respect to the opening of the center frame 86 only by linear motion (a configuration in which the retraction position and the overhang position are reciprocated).

  On the other hand, when the base-side displacement member at the rotational position is disposed at the retracted position shown in FIG. 13A by the first operation, as shown in FIGS. When the relative displacement member 450 is slid (displaced) to the reference position by the second operation, the outward protrusion of the relative displacement member 450 from the proximal displacement member 440 can be suppressed. Therefore, since both displacement members 440 and 450 can be reduced as a whole, the space required to accommodate both displacement members 440 and 450 in the retracted position can be suppressed. As a result, it is possible to secure a space for disposing other parts and devices.

  In this case, as described above, the relative displacement member 450 is disposed on the base side displacement member 440 in a slidable state, and the second operation is performed as shown in FIGS. 14 (a) and 15 (a). Since the relative displacement member 440 is slidably displaced between the reference position and the overhang position with respect to the base side displacement member 450, for example, the second operation moves the relative displacement member 440 with respect to the base side displacement member 450. Compared to the case of rotating, the space required to displace the relative displacement member 440 from the reference position to the extended position can be reduced, and other parts and devices are arranged accordingly. Space can be secured. Further, since the displacement mode (slide displacement) of the relative displacement member 450 by the second operation can be different from the displacement mode (rotation) of the base side displacement member 450 by the first operation, The effect of performing the first operation and the second operation continuously can be enhanced.

  Particularly, in the second operation, the direction of the slide displacement is a direction along the longitudinal direction of the both displacement members 440 and 450. That is, the relative displacement member 450 is arranged in a posture along the longitudinal direction of the base side displacement member 440, and is slid and displaced in the direction along the longitudinal direction of each of the displacement members 440, 450 can be efficiently extended and shortened as a whole. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 15A, in the state where the base side displacement member 440 is disposed at the rotation position, the displacement member 440 is enlarged as a whole by sliding displacement (extension) of the relative displacement member 450. , 450 can be made sufficiently visible to the player, and the effects can be fully exhibited. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 13A, in the state in which the base side displacement member 440 is disposed at the retracted position, both the displacement members 440 are reduced by reducing the overall displacement by the sliding displacement (shortening) of the relative displacement member 450. , 450 can be reduced, and a space for arranging other parts and devices can be secured.

  Moreover, according to the protrusion operation unit 400, as described above, the transmission means for transmitting the rotational driving force of the drive motor 420 to the base side displacement member 440 and the relative displacement member 450 is the same as that shown in FIGS. 15 (b) and FIG. 15 (b), it is composed of a plurality of gears (pinion gear 431, intermediate gear 432 and crank gear 433) and a connecting rod 460, and together with the crank gear 433, a connecting hole 462 of the connecting rod 460 constituting the crank mechanism. Is connected to the connection pin 452 of the relative displacement member 450 in a region between the rod support shaft 412 that is the rotation center of the connecting rod 460 and the base support shaft 413 that is the rotation center of the proximal displacement member 440. Therefore, by rotating the crank gear 433, the first operation and the second operation by the base side displacement member 440 and the relative displacement member 450 are performed. , It can be executed in the order. That is, since two different operations, the first operation and the second operation, can be performed by only one drive motor 420, the component cost can be reduced, and the product cost can be reduced accordingly.

  In this case, as the transmission means, a structure in which a gear is provided on the rod support shaft 412 side of the connecting rod 460 and the teeth of the crank gear 433 are meshed with the gear to rotate the connecting rod 460 can be considered. Then, since the crank gear 433 and the connecting rod 460 are provided side by side in a plane and an overlap margin is not formed in a front view, a space necessary for the arrangement increases. On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, the crank pin 433a of the crank gear 433 is inserted into the rod groove 463 of the connecting rod 460, which is shown in FIGS. 13 (a), 14 (b) and 15 (b). As described above, the crank gear 433 and the connection link 460 can be arranged in a state where the overlap margin is always present in a front view, and the space necessary for the arrangement of the crank gear 433 and the connection link 460 can be suppressed by the overlap.

  Next, the relationship between the relative displacement member 450 and the decorative member 470 when the base side displacement member 440 is rotated (first operation) will be described with reference to FIGS. 16 and 17.

  FIG. 16 is a front perspective view of the protruding operation unit 400. 17A is a side view of the protruding operation unit 400 as viewed in the direction of the arrow XVIIa in FIG. 16, and FIG. 17B is a partially enlarged side view of the protruding operation unit 400 in the portion XVIIb in FIG. It is. 16 and 17 show a state where the decorative member 480 is attached to the protruding operation unit 400. However, in order to simplify the drawing and facilitate understanding, only the decorative member 480 necessary for explaining the relationship with the relative displacement member 400 is shown.

  As shown in FIGS. 16 and 17, the projecting operation unit 400 is provided with a decorative member 480 on the upper side (upper side in FIG. 16) (see FIGS. 5 and 6). The decorative member 480 is a decorative resin member and is formed from a light-transmitting resin material. Therefore, the player can visually recognize other members positioned on the back side of the decorative member 480 through the decorative member 480.

  In the present embodiment, the decorative member 480 is formed so that a part thereof projects downward (lower side in FIG. 17B), and as shown in FIG. 440 and the relative displacement member 450 are formed to have an overlap margin of dimension L. Thereby, when the base side displacement member 440 is rotated from the retracted position to the rotation position (first operation) (see FIGS. 13 and 14), the rotation trajectories of the base side displacement member 440 and the relative displacement member 450 are It can overlap with a part of the decorative member 480 in a front view.

  That is, since the base side displacement member 440 and the relative displacement member 450 can be displaced in a state where the back side of the decoration member 480 is passed, an operation of crossing the decoration member 480 and the both displacement members 440 and 450 can be performed. At the time of the intersection, the decorative member 480 is allowed to pass through so that both the displacement members 440 and 450 can be visually recognized. As a result, it is possible to enhance the rendering effect by displacing both the displacement members 440 and 450. In particular, in the present embodiment, the front end side of the substrate displacement member 440 that is separated from the decoration member 480 protrudes from the front end side of the relative displacement member 450 that is close to the decoration member 480, so that it is difficult to contact the decoration member 480. As a result, the dimension L which is the overlap allowance can be made larger. Therefore, the production effect by the intersection can be enhanced.

  In this case, as described above, the decorative portion 454 that forms the front side (the right side in FIG. 17B) of the relative displacement member 450 is the base end side (the rotation center side of the base side displacement member 440, FIG. b) is inclined stepwise in a direction approaching the case body 410 (left side in FIG. 17B) from the lower side toward the distal end side (rotating distal end side of the base end displacement member 440, upper side in FIG. 17B). The Further, the distal end side of the base side displacement member 440 arranged on the back side (left side in FIG. 17B) of the relative displacement member 450 is protruded from the distal end side of the relative displacement member 450. Therefore, in the whole base side displacement member 440 and the relative displacement member 450, it can be set as the shape arrange | positioned in the position deepened to the case body 410 side (back side, FIG.17 (b) left side) toward the front end side.

  Thereby, when the base side displacement member 440 is rotated from the retracted position to the rotation position (first operation) (see FIGS. 13 and 14), the rotation locus is overlapped with the decoration member 480 in front view. In addition, it is possible to suppress the contact between the base side displacement member 440 and the relative displacement member 450 and the decorative member 480 while ensuring the improvement of the effect.

  In this case, the base-side displacement member 440 has a structure in which only one side in the longitudinal direction is pivotally supported by the base-side support shaft 413 and the tip side is a free end (see FIGS. 12A and 12B). ), During the first operation, the tip end side tends to swing in the front-rear direction (the direction approaching and separating from the case body 410 side, the vertical direction in FIG. 5), and the contact with the decorative member 480 is likely to occur. Therefore, the configuration according to the present embodiment (a shape that is inclined so that the distal end side is closer to the case body 410) is particularly effective.

  On the other hand, the relative displacement member 450 does not have the entire decorative portion 454 close to the case body 410 side, but, as described above, the distal end side (the rotational distal end side of the proximal end displacement member 440, FIG. 17B). The shape is located closer to the front side (front side) (right side in FIG. 17B) toward the base end side (upper rotation side of the base side displacement member 440, lower side in FIG. 17B) than the upper side. That is, the decorative portion 454 is inclined upward in a stepped manner in a direction away from the case body 410 (right side in FIG. 17B) as it goes from the distal end side to the proximal end side.

  As a result, when the relative displacement member 450 is slidably displaced (second operation) from the reference position to the extended position (see FIGS. 14 and 15), the relative displacement member 440 is moved further forward (ie, forward) (that is, forward). It can be placed on the side close to the player) to increase the force. In particular, in this embodiment, since the outer shape is enlarged toward the portion (the second portion 454b than the first portion 454a and the third portion 454c than the second portion 454b) arranged on the front (front) side, The effect of enhancing the effect can be further exhibited.

  Next, the combined operation unit 500 will be described with reference to FIGS. 18 and 19 are front perspective views of the combined operation unit 500. FIG. 18 illustrates a state in which the driven member 560 is disposed at the retracted position (see FIG. 5), and FIG. 19 illustrates a state in which the driven member 560 is disposed at the extended position (see FIG. 5). The

  Here, in the composite operation unit 500, a pair of left and right is disposed above the opening 301 with the rotary operation unit 600 interposed therebetween (see FIGS. 5 and 6), and the pair of composite operation units 500 are symmetrical. Since the structure is substantially the same, only one (the one disposed on the right side of the front view) will be described, and the description of the other (the one disposed on the left side of the front view) will be omitted.

  As shown in FIGS. 18 and 19, the composite operation unit 500 displaces the driven member 550 by the driving force of the driving motor 530 and also drives the driven member 560 in accordance with the displacement of the driven member 550. Then, the driven member 560 is displaced between the retracted position shown in FIG. 18 and the extended position shown in FIG. In this case, the driven member 560 is driven by the driven member 550 while changing the relative position with respect to the driven member 550 by rotation and slide displacement, as will be described later (see FIGS. 27 to 29).

  As a result, even when the driven member 550 is rotated at a constant speed around a predetermined position (shaft portions 553 and 554) as a rotation center, the driven member 550 is driven by a different path from the driven member 550. The member 560 can be displaced, and a change can be given to the displacement mode of the driven member 560. That is, according to the combined operation unit 500, it is possible to change the displacement mode of the driven member 560 while maintaining the output of the drive motor 530 constant. The detailed configuration of the composite operation unit 500 will be described below.

  20 and 21 are exploded front perspective views of the combined operation unit 500. FIG. 22A is a front view of the driven member 550 and the driven member 560, and FIG. 22B is a front view of the driven member 550 and the driven member 560 as viewed in the direction of the arrow XXIIb in FIG. It is a side view.

  20 corresponds to a state where the combined operation unit 500 illustrated in FIG. 18 is disassembled, and FIG. 21 corresponds to a state where the combined operation unit 500 illustrated in FIG. 19 is disassembled. FIGS. 22A and 22B correspond to the driven member 550 and the driven member 560 in the state illustrated in FIGS. 18 and 20.

  As shown in FIGS. 20 to 22, the composite operation unit 500 includes a front case body 510 and a back case body 520 that form the skeleton, a drive motor 530 disposed on the back side of the back case body 520, and driving thereof. The crank member 540 attached to the drive shaft 531 of the motor 530, the driven member 550 driven by the driving force of the drive motor 530 transmitted through the crank member 540, and the relative displacement to the driven member 550 A driven member 560 that can be connected is mainly provided.

  The front case body 510 and the rear case body 520 are formed in a flat plate shape from a resin material, and are disposed to face each other with a predetermined interval therebetween, and are fastened and fixed to each other by screws (not shown). It is comprised as an accommodating member in which an internal space is formed between the opposing surfaces. A driven member 550 (interposed plate portion 552), a driven member 560 (interposed plate portion 561), and a crank member 540 are respectively provided in the internal spaces (between opposing surfaces) of the front case body 510 and the back case body 520. Housed in a displaceable state.

  The front case body 510 includes a shaft support hole 511, an insertion hole 512, and a first guide groove 513. The shaft support hole 511 is a circular hole in front view for rotatably supporting the shaft portion 553 of the driven member 540. The insertion hole 512 is an opening through which the crank pin 541 of the crank member 540 is inserted, and is formed in a size that allows the reciprocating movement of the crank pin 541. The crank pin 541 can be connected to the driven member 560 (drive shaft 561a) through the insertion hole 512.

  The first guide groove 513 is an opening through which the first pin 561a in the interposed plate portion 561 of the driven member 560 is inserted, and a shape obtained by extracting a part of the annular shape (that is, a groove shape curved in an arc shape, 27A to 29A). The groove width of the first guide groove 513 is set to a size that is equal to or slightly larger than the diameter of the first pin 561a. As will be described later, the first pin 561a is slid along the extending direction of the first guide groove 513. By moving (guiding), the posture of the interposed plate portion 561 (the driven member 560) (in particular, the relative rotational position with respect to the driven member 550) can be defined (see FIGS. 27 (a) to 29 (a)). .

  The back case body 520 includes a shaft support hole 521, an insertion hole 522, and a second guide groove 523. The shaft support hole 521 is a circular hole in a front view for rotatably supporting the shaft portion 554 of the driven member 540, and is disposed concentrically with the shaft support hole 511 of the front case body 510 described above. In other words, the front case body 510 and the back case body 520 have their shaft support holes 511 and 521 that respectively support the shaft portions 553 and 554 of the driven member 550 so that the driven member 550 can be rotated. I can support it. The insertion hole 522 is an opening through which the drive shaft 531 of the drive motor 530 is inserted, and the drive shaft 531 of the drive motor 530 can be connected to the crank member 540 through the insertion hole 522.

  The second guide groove 513 is an opening through which the connection shaft 561b in the interposed plate portion 561 of the driven member 560 is inserted, and a shape obtained by extracting a part of the annular shape (that is, a groove shape curved in an arc shape, FIG. 27 (b) to FIG. 29 (b)). The groove width of the second guide groove 523 is set to a dimension that is equal to or slightly larger than the diameter of the connection shaft 561b, and the connection shaft 561b is slid along the extending direction of the second guide groove 523, as will be described later. By (guidance), it is possible to define the posture of the interposition plate portion 561 (the driven member 560) (in particular, the relative slide position with respect to the driven member 550) (see FIGS. 27 (b) to 29 (b)).

  As described above, the crank member 540 is attached to the drive shaft 531 of the drive motor 530, and the crank member 540 is eccentric from the rotation shaft (drive shaft 531) when being rotated by the drive motor 530. A crankpin 541 is disposed at the position. The crank pin 541 is inserted into the drive groove 551a of the driven member 550. Therefore, by rotating the crank member 540 by the rotational driving force of the drive motor 530, the crank pin 541 of the crank member 540 is slid along the drive groove 551a of the driven member 550, and the driven member 550 is rotated. (See FIGS. 30 to 32).

  As described above, the driven member 550 is a member that is rotated by the rotational driving force of the drive motor 530 and that displaces the driven member 560 along with the rotation, and supports the shaft portions 553 and 554 as a shaft. By pivotally supporting the holes 511 and 521, the front case body 510 and the back case body 520 are rotatably held. Here, the detailed configuration of the driven member 550 will be described with reference to FIGS.

  FIG. 23A is a front view of the driven member 550, and FIG. 23B is a back surface portion of the driven member 550. FIG. 24 is a side view of the driven member 550 as viewed in the direction of arrow XXIV in FIG.

  As shown in FIGS. 23 and 24, the driven member 550 includes a long plate-like front plate portion 551 and a long plate-like intervention that intersects the front plate portion 551 at a substantially right angle in front view. A plate portion 552, a columnar shaft portion 553 connecting the front plate portion 551 and the interposed plate portion 552, and a circle protruding from the back surface of the interposed plate portion 552 at a position concentric with the shaft portion 553. A columnar shaft portion 554 is mainly provided.

  The front plate portion 551 is a member disposed on the front surface of the front case body 510 (see FIGS. 20 and 21), and has an ellipse in front view on one end side (the side opposite to the side to which the shaft portion 553 is connected). A drive groove 551a is formed. The drive groove 551 a is an opening through which the crank pin 541 (see FIGS. 20 and 21) of the crank member 540 is inserted, and extends along the longitudinal direction of the front plate portion 551. The groove width of the drive groove 551a is set to a dimension that is equal to or slightly larger than the diameter of the crank pin 541. Therefore, by rotating the crank member 540 by the rotational driving force of the drive motor 530, the crank pin 541 can be slid along the drive groove 551a, and as a result, the shaft portion 553, 554 is rotated as a center of rotation. The drive member 550 can be rotated (see FIGS. 30 to 32).

  The interposed plate portion 552 is a member disposed in the internal space (between the opposing surfaces) of the front case body 510 and the back case body 520 (see FIGS. 20 and 21), and one end thereof (the front stomach body portion 551). A connecting groove 552a having an oval shape in front view is formed on the side opposite to the side to which the is connected. The connection groove 552 a is an opening through which the connection shaft 561 b (see FIGS. 20 and 21) of the driven member 560 is inserted, and extends along the longitudinal direction of the interposed plate portion 552. The groove width of the connection groove 552a is set to a dimension that is equal to or slightly larger than the diameter of the connection shaft 561b. Therefore, the connection groove 552a can hold the connection shaft 561b so as to be rotatable and slidable. That is, the driven member 560 is connected to the driven member 550 so as to be rotatable and slidable (see FIGS. 27 to 29).

  Here, the connection groove 552a has a region that overlaps with the second guide groove 523 of the back case body 520 in a front view when the driven member 550 is rotated about the shaft portions 553 and 554, and The connection shaft 561b is configured to be disposed within the region (see FIGS. 27A to 27C). Thereby, as will be described later, the sliding displacement of the driven member 560 relative to the driven member 550 can be defined based on the shape (contour) of the second guide groove 523.

  In the driven member 550, the interposed plate portion 552 and the shaft portions 553, 554 are integrally formed from a resin material, while the front plate portion 551 is formed from a resin material as a separate member from these portions 552-554, The axial direction end surface of the shaft portion 553 (the end surface opposite to the interposed plate portion 552) is brought into contact with the back surface of the base plate side of the front plate portion 551 (the side opposite to the side where the driving groove 551a is drilled), They are assembled by fastening them together with screws.

  In this case, four pins 553a project from the axial end surface of the shaft portion 553, and holes 551b for receiving the four pins 553a are provided at four locations on the base end side of the front plate portion 551. The pins 553a are assembled in a state of being received in the holes 551b. Thereby, the number of screws can be suppressed to reduce the component cost, and the flat plate portion 551 and the interposed plate portion 552 can be reliably made non-rotatable.

  Returning to FIG. 20 to FIG. As described above, the connecting shaft 561b of the interposed plate portion 561 in the driven member 560 is inserted into the connecting groove 552a of the interposed plate portion 552 in the driven member 550, whereby the driven member is connected to the driving member 550. 560 is connected so that relative displacement (rotational and sliding displacement) is possible. As described above, the driven member 560 is a member that is driven in accordance with the displacement of the driving member 550, and the connecting shaft 561 b of the interposed plate portion 561 is connected to the connecting groove 552 a of the interposed plate portion 552 of the driven member 550. In addition, by being inserted through the second guide groove 523 of the back case body 520, the front case body 510 and the back case body 520 are held in a rotatable and slidable state. Here, the detailed configuration of the driven member 560 will be described with reference to FIGS. 25 and 26.

  FIG. 25A is a front view of the driven member 560, and FIG. 25B is a back surface portion of the driven member 560. FIG. 26 is a side view of the driven member 560 in the direction of arrow XXVI in FIG.

  As shown in FIGS. 25 and 26, the driven member 560 includes a plate-shaped interposed plate portion 561, a decorative portion 562 having a pair of elongated portions with a decorative shape formed on the front surface, A back plate portion 563 that is connected to the back side of the interposed plate portion 561 and that is connected to the side of the decorative portion 562 is mainly configured.

  The interposed plate portion 561 is a member disposed in the internal space (between the opposing surfaces) of the front case body 510 and the back case body 520 (see FIGS. 20 and 21), and the front case body 510 is located in front of the interposed plate portion 561. The first pin 561a inserted through the first guide groove 513 (see FIGS. 20 and 21) protrudes, and the connection shaft 561b protrudes from the back surface at a position eccentric to the first pin 561a. Is done. As described above, the connection shaft 561b is inserted into the connection groove 552a of the driven member 550 (the interposed plate portion 552) and the second guide groove 523 of the back case body 520 (see FIGS. 20 and 21). .

  Therefore, when the driven member 550 is rotated about the shaft portions 553 and 5554, the first pin 561a is slid (guided) along the first guide groove 513, whereby the interposed plate portion 561 ( That is, the driven member 560 is rotated relative to the driven member 550 and the back case body 520 around the connection shaft 561b (see FIGS. 27A to 29A), and the connection shaft 561b. Is slid (guided) along the second guide groove 523, so that the driven plate 561 (that is, the driven member 560) has a direction along the connection groove 552a of the driven member 550 as a sliding direction. It is slid relative to 550 (see FIGS. 27 (b) to 29 (b)).

  Here, the connecting shaft 561b of the driven member 560 is inserted only into the connecting groove 552a of the driven member 550 (interposed plate portion 552), and a pin separately provided on the interposed plate portion 561 is inserted into the first pin of the rear case body 520. By inserting the two guide grooves 523, the same action as described above can be obtained.

  On the other hand, in this embodiment, the connection shaft 561b of the driven member 560 is provided in both the second guide groove 523 of the back case body 520 and the connection groove 552a of the driven member 550 (interposition plate portion 552). The displacement of the driven member 560 relative to the back case body 520 is regulated by being inserted into the connecting shaft 561b and guided by the second guide groove 523 (that is, the driven member 560 is slid relative to the driven member 550). ) And the role of connecting the driven member 560 to the driven member 550 so as to be capable of relative displacement (rotation and sliding displacement) by being inserted through the connection groove 561b. As a result, the number of parts can be reduced to reduce the product cost, and the structure can be simplified to improve the reliability and durability of the movable member.

  The back plate portion 563 is a circular member in a front view disposed on the back surface of the back case body 520 (see FIGS. 20 and 21), and a contact portion on the front surface (FIG. 25 (a), the front side surface of the paper). 563a is projected. The contact portion 563a is a portion that is in contact with the back surface of the back case body 520, and is formed in an annular shape in front view concentric with the connection shaft 561b. That is, only the peripheral portion of the back plate portion 563 (the protruding front end surface of the contact portion 562a) is in contact with the back surface of the back case body 520.

  As described above, by providing the back plate 563 with the concentric contact portion 563 on the connection shaft 561b, when the connection shaft 561b slides (guides) along the second guide groove 523, the first pin 561a is provided. Even when the driven member 560 is rotated relative to the back case body 520 around the connection shaft 561b by the rotational action of the first guide groove 523 (see FIGS. 27 to 29), the back case body. It is possible to suppress a change in the support reaction force by keeping the contact state of the back surface of 520 constant. As a result, the driven member 560 can be displaced in a stable state.

  In the driven member 560, the decorative portion 562 and the back plate portion 563 are integrally formed from a resin material, while the interposing plate portion 561 is formed from a resin material as a separate member from these portions 562 and 563, and the back plate portion. Assembling is performed by bringing the end face in the axial direction of the connecting shaft 561b of the interposition plate portion 561 into contact with the front face of 563 and fastening and fixing them together with screws. The structure in which the plurality of pins 561c protruding from the axial end surface of the connecting shaft 561b are received in the plurality of holes 563b of the back plate portion 563, respectively, so that they are coupled so as not to rotate relative to each other is the above-described driven structure. Since it is the same as that of the member 550, the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  Returning to FIG. The combined operation unit 500 can be assembled as follows. First, the shaft portion 553 of the driven member 550 is inserted into the shaft support hole 511 of the front case body 510, and the interposed plate portion 561 and the front plate portion 551 of the driven member 550 are fastened and fixed. Thereby, the driven member 550 can be assembled to the front case body 510 in a rotatable state. At the time of this assembly, the connection shaft 561b of the interposed plate portion 561 in the driven member 560 is inserted in advance into the connection groove 552 of the driven member 550 (interposed plate portion 552).

  Next, the crank member 540 is mounted on the drive shaft 531 of the drive motor 530 through the insertion hole 522 of the back case body 520, and the driven member 550 is connected to the crank pin 541 through the insertion hole 512 of the front case body 510. The drive groove 551a of the (front plate portion 551) is inserted. In addition, the connecting shaft 561b of the driven member 560 (interposed plate portion 561) is inserted through the second guide groove 523 of the back case body 520, and the interposed plate portion 561 and the back plate portion 563 of the driven member 560 are fastened and fixed. To do. Thus, the driven member 560 can be assembled to the back case body 520 in a rotatable state, and can be connected to the driven member 550 in a rotatable and slidable state, and driven via the crank member 540. A state in which the rotational driving force of the motor 530 can be transmitted to the driven member 550 can be formed.

  Thereafter, the front case body 510 and the back case body 520 are fastened and fixed by screws (not shown). Accordingly, the driven member 550 is displaced by the rotational driving force of the drive motor 530, and the driven member 560 can be displaced (driven) in accordance with the displacement of the driven member 550. It can be unitized as one device. As described above, according to the combined operation unit 500, the components can be assembled by sequentially assembling the front case body 510 and the back case body 520, so that the assembly cost can be reduced and the unit can be unitized. Thus, the assembly to the unit storage member 300 (the gaming machine main body, see FIGS. 5 and 6) can be facilitated, and the manufacturing cost of the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced.

  Next, the operation of the combined operation unit 500 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIGS. 27A, 28A, and 29A are schematic front views of the driven member 550 and the driven member 560 showing the relationship with the first guide groove 513. FIG. FIG. 28B and FIG. 29B are schematic front views of the driven member 550 and the driven member 560 showing the relationship with the second guide groove 523.

  Similarly, FIG. 30A, FIG. 31A and FIG. 32A are schematic front views of the driven member 550 and the driven member 560 showing the relationship with the first guide groove 513, and FIG. 30B and 30B are schematic front views of the driven member 550 and the driven member 560 showing the relationship with the second guide groove 523. FIG.

  27 and 30 correspond to the state in which the driven member 560 is disposed at the retracted position (the state illustrated in FIGS. 18 and 20), and FIGS. 29 and 32 illustrate the state in which the driven member 560 is disposed at the extended position. This corresponds to the state (the state shown in FIGS. 19 and 20). The state shown in FIGS. 28 and 31 corresponds to the state where the driven member 560 is disposed between the retracted position and the extended position.

  As shown in FIGS. 27 and 30, when the driven member 560 is disposed at the retracted position, the crank pin 541 of the crank member 540 is on the right side when viewed from the front with respect to the drive shaft 531 of the drive motor 530 (FIG. 30A). As a result, the driven member 550 tilts the front end side (formation portion of the drive groove 551a) of the front plate portion 551 to the right side (right side in FIG. 30 (b)) and the interposed plate. The front end side of the portion 552 (the portion where the connection groove 552a is formed) is lifted upward (upper side in FIG. 30B). That is, the driven member 550 is disposed at a rotational position that is a rotation end point in the clockwise direction (clockwise) when viewed from the front centered on the shaft portions 553 and 554 (see FIGS. 20 and 21).

  On the other hand, as described above, the driven member 560 is in a posture in which the driven member 550 lifts the distal end side of the interposed plate portion 552 upward, so that the connection shaft 561b is connected to the upper end side of the second guide groove 523 ( The posture is pushed up to the upper side of FIG. That is, the driven member 560 is disposed at the uppermost position in the vertical direction (FIG. 30 (b) vertical direction) and at the leftmost position in the horizontal direction (FIG. 30 (b) horizontal direction). Is done. In addition, the driven member 560 has the first pin 561a of the interposed plate portion 561 positioned on the upper end side (the upper left side in FIG. 27A) of the first guide groove 513, so that the distal end side ( The first pin 561a is disposed in a horizontal posture with the left side of the first pin 561a facing leftward (left side in FIG. 27A). That is, the driven member 560 is disposed at a rotational position that is the end of rotation in a counterclockwise (front-turning) direction when viewed from the front centered on the connection shaft 561b.

  From the state where the driven member 560 shown in FIG. 27 and FIG. 30 is disposed at the retracted position, the crank member 540 rotates counterclockwise (counterclockwise) when the drive shaft 531 is rotating by the rotational driving force of the drive motor 530. When rotated, the crank pin 541 of the crank member 540 is slid along the drive groove 551a in the front plate portion 551 of the driven member 550, so that the driven member 550 has the shaft portions 553, 554 (FIG. 20 and FIG. 20). As shown in FIGS. 28 and 31, the driven member 560 is rotated to a position approximately in the middle between the retracted position and the extended position. Be placed.

  As shown in FIGS. 28 and 31, when the driven member 560 is disposed at a position approximately in the middle between the retracted position and the extended position, the driven member 550 causes the front plate portion 551 to be substantially upright, and to be interposed. The installation plate portion 552 is set to a substantially horizontal posture. That is, the driven member 550 is disposed at a rotational position that is substantially in the middle of the rotatable range with the shaft portions 553 and 554 (see FIGS. 20 and 21) as the rotational center.

  On the other hand, in the driven member 560, the driven member 550 is positioned so that the interposed plate portion 552 is substantially horizontal, so that the connecting shaft 561b pushed down by the connecting groove 552a of the interposed plate portion 552 has the second The posture is set at an intermediate position of the guide groove 523. In other words, the driven member 560 is disposed at a substantially middle position in the displaceable range in the vertical direction (FIG. 31 (b) vertical direction), and the rightmost in the left / right direction (FIG. 30 (b) horizontal direction). It is arranged at the position. Further, the driven member 560 is disposed at a position where the first pin 561a of the interposed plate portion 561 is substantially in the middle of the first guide groove 513, so that the distal end side of the interposed plate portion 561 (of the first pin 561a). The inclined portion is disposed in an upper left direction (upper left side in FIG. 28A) in the front view. That is, the driven member 560 is disposed at a rotational position that is substantially in the middle of the rotatable range around the connection shaft 561b.

  When the crank member 540 is further rotated counterclockwise (counterclockwise) when viewed from the front while the drive shaft 531 is rotating from the state shown in FIGS. 28 and 31 by the rotational driving force of the drive motor 530, the crank member 540 The crank pin 541 is slid along the driving groove 551a in the front plate portion 551 of the driven member 550, so that the driven member 550 has a front surface with the shaft portions 553 and 554 (see FIGS. 20 and 21) as the center of rotation. As shown in FIGS. 29 and 32, the driven member 560 is arranged at the overhanging position by being rotated counterclockwise (counterclockwise).

  As shown in FIGS. 29 and 32, in a state where the driven member 560 is disposed at the extended position, the crank pin 541 of the crank member 540 is the left side as viewed from the front with respect to the drive shaft 531 of the drive motor 530 (FIG. ), The driven member 550 is tilted from the front end side of the front plate portion 551 (the portion where the driving groove 551a is formed) to the left side of the front view (left side in FIG. 32 (b)). It is set as the attitude | position which dropped the front end side (formation part of the connection groove | channel 552a) of the board part 552 below (FIG.32 (b) lower side). In other words, the driven member 550 is disposed at a rotational position that is the end of rotation in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front centering on the shaft portions 553 and 554 (see FIGS. 20 and 21).

  On the other hand, as described above, the driven member 560 is in a posture in which the driven member 550 drops the distal end side of the interposed plate portion 552 downward, so that the connecting shaft 561b is connected to the lower end side of the second guide groove 523 ( The posture is pushed down to the lower side of FIG. That is, the driven member 560 is disposed at the lowest position in the vertical direction (FIG. 32 (b) vertical direction) and at the leftmost position in the horizontal direction (FIG. 32 (b) horizontal direction). Is done. Further, the driven member 560 has the first pin 561a of the interposed plate portion 561 located on the lower end side (the lower right side in FIG. 29A) of the first guide groove 513, so that the distal end side of the interposed plate portion 561 is provided. The upright posture is such that (the portion where the first pin 561a is disposed) is directed upward (upper side in FIG. 29 (a)). In other words, the driven member 560 is disposed at a rotational position that is the end of rotation in the clockwise direction (clockwise) when viewed from the front centering on the connection shaft 561b.

  As described above, according to the combined operation unit 500, when the driven member 550 is displaced (rotated) by the rotational driving force of the drive motor 530, the driven member 560 is moved along with the displacement of the driven member 550. The drive member 550 can be driven while being relatively displaced. That is, the mode of displacement of the driven member 550 is rotation about the shafts 533 and 554, and even when the driven member 550 is displaced along a constant path, the path (displacement) is different from that of the driven member 550. The driven member 560 can be displaced in the above-described manner. Moreover, since the change of the displacement mode is formed by the relative displacement of the driven member 560 with respect to the driven member 550, even if the driven member 550 is displaced (rotated) at a constant speed, The driven member 560 can be displaced by a different path (displacement mode) from the driven member 550. As a result, it is possible to change the displacement mode of the driven member 560 while keeping the output of the drive motor 530 constant.

  In this case, in the present embodiment, the means for displacing the driven member 560 relative to the driven member 550 (displacement defining means) is the first guide groove 513 and the second guide groove of the front case body 510 and the back case body 520. 523, the first pin 561a of the driven member 560, and the connection shaft 561b. In other words, the first pin 561a and the connecting shaft 561b are guided along the guide grooves 513 and 523, whereby the displacement of the driven member 560 with respect to the case bodies 510 and 520 can be defined. Thereby, the relative displacement of the driven member 560 with respect to the driven member 550 can be formed in accordance with the outline (shape) of each guide groove 513, 523. As a result, the displacement defining means can be formed by a mechanical element such as a guide groove and a shaft-like body guided by the guide groove, and the structure thereof is simplified, so that the product cost can be reduced. In addition, since simple mechanical elements can be employed, the reliability and durability of the movable part can be improved.

  Further, by setting the contours (shapes) of the first guide groove 513 and the second guide groove 523, the mode of relative displacement of the driven member 560 with respect to the driven member 550 can be arbitrarily set, so that the displacement of the driven member 560 is reduced. It is possible to increase the degree of design freedom when setting the mode. As a result, it is possible to easily ensure variations in the displacement modes that can be applied to the driven member 560.

  In particular, in the present embodiment, when the driven member 560 is connected to the driven member 550 so as to be rotatable and slidable, a first guide groove 513 and a first pin 561a are used to mainly define the rotation. A guide structure and a second guide structure that is configured by the second guide groove 523 and the connecting shaft 561b and mainly defines the slide displacement are provided. Thereby, not only the variation of the change that can be given to the displacement mode can be increased, but even when the displacement of the driven member 560 with respect to the driven member 550 is a plurality of types (rotation and slide displacement), each of these displacements is changed to the first. And it can guide appropriately by the 2nd guidance structure, respectively. As a result, the displacement of the driven member 560 can be stabilized, and the reliability as the movable member can be improved.

  Here, in the first guide structure described above, for example, the first guide groove 513 is formed in the interposed plate portion 561 or the back plate portion 563, and the first pin 561a is formed in the front case body 510 or the back case body 520, respectively. This is true even in a configuration where On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the first guide groove 513 is formed in the front case body 510, and the first pin 561a is formed in the interposed plate portion 561. Thereby, it is possible to easily secure a space for forming the first guide groove 513.

  That is, the front case body 510 and the back case body 520 need to hold both the members 550 and 560 while securing the displacement space of the driven member 550 and the driven member 560, and therefore, they need not be formed in a relatively large outer shape. There is a tendency that a dead space is formed on the plate surface. Therefore, by forming the first guide groove portion 513 as the front case body 510, a space for forming the first guide groove 513 can be sufficiently secured by effectively using the dead space. As a result, it becomes possible to increase the degree of freedom of the contour (shape) and the extension length of the first guide groove 513, and accordingly, it is possible to increase variations of changes that can be imparted to the displacement mode. In addition, since it is the same as that of the case of the 1st guide structure also about the 2nd guide structure, the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  Further, the first guide structure and the second guide structure are also realized by a configuration in which both the first guide groove 513 and the second guide groove 523 are formed in the back case body 520. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the first guide groove 513 is formed in the front case body 510 and the second guide groove 523 is formed in the back case body 520, respectively. Therefore, the first guide groove 513 and the second guide groove 523 are formed. Can be formed without considering each other's formation position.

  That is, when both the first guide groove 513 and the second guide groove 523 are formed in the back case body 520, it is necessary to form the first guide groove 513 and the second guide groove 523 so as not to intersect with each other. The degree of freedom in designing the contour (shape) and extension length is limited. On the other hand, according to this embodiment, in both the first guide groove 513 and the second guide groove 523, the contour (shape) and the extended length are arbitrarily set without considering the positional relationship with the other party. Therefore, the degree of freedom of the design can be increased, and the variation of the change that can be given to the displacement mode can be increased accordingly.

  Next, the rotation operation unit 600 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 33 is a front perspective view of the rotary operation unit 600.

  As shown in FIG. 33, the rotational operation unit 600 includes a spherical liquid crystal device 670 in which a first rotator 650 having an annular shape in front view is disposed so as to surround the periphery thereof, and the back surface of the first rotator 650. A second rotating body 660 having an annular shape in front view is concentrically disposed on the side, and in the present embodiment, the first rotating body 650 and the second rotating body 660 are rotated at different rotational speeds and in opposite directions.

  Here, in the conventional product in which a plurality of rotating bodies are arranged at positions separated from each other, it is difficult to make the player recognize the rotations of the plurality of rotating bodies in association with each other. That is, the conventional product is a form in which each rotating body is rotated independently without being associated with other rotating bodies, and therefore, the effect of rendering by rotating a plurality of rotating bodies is sufficiently exhibited. I couldn't let you.

  On the other hand, according to the rotation operation unit 600 in the present embodiment, the first rotating body 650 and the second rotating body 660 are arranged concentrically around the spherical liquid crystal device 670, and the two rotating bodies rotate differently. Since it is rotated in a mode (a mode in which the rotation speed and the rotation direction are different from each other), these rotations can be associated with each other so that the player can easily recognize them, and the effect of rendering can be achieved by rotating a plurality of rotating bodies. it can. The detailed configuration of the rotational operation unit 600 will be described below.

  FIG. 34 is an exploded front perspective view of the rotational operation unit 600, and FIG. 35 is an exploded rear perspective view of the rotational operation unit 600. FIG. 36 is a longitudinal sectional view of the rotary operation unit 600. 35 and 36, the spherical liquid crystal device 670 is not shown. 36 corresponds to the cross section of the rotary operation unit 600 cut by a plane including the rotation centers of the first rotating body 650 and the second rotating body 660.

  As shown in FIGS. 34 to 36, the rotary operation unit 600 includes a front case body 610 and a back case body 620 that form the skeleton, a drive motor 630 disposed on the back side of the back case body 620, and driving thereof. A plurality of gears (first to fifth storage gears 641 to 645 and a front gear 646) as transmission means for transmitting the rotational driving force of the motor 630 and the rotational driving force of the driving motor 630 are transmitted via the plurality of gears. Of the first rotating body 650 and the second rotating body 660 which are rotated by being rotated, the spherical liquid crystal device 670 disposed on the inner peripheral side of the first rotating body 650 and the second rotating body 660, and the front case body 610. The light emitting device 680 disposed on the front is mainly provided.

  The front case body 610 and the back case body 620 are formed in a flat plate shape from a resin material, and are opposed to each other with a predetermined interval therebetween, and are fastened and fixed to each other by screws (not shown). It is comprised as an accommodating member in which an internal space is formed between the opposing surfaces. The first to fifth storage gears 641 to 645 and the storage flange portion 653 of the first rotating body 650 are stored in the internal spaces (between the opposing surfaces) of the front case body 610 and the back case body 620, respectively.

  The front case body 610 and the back case body 620 are respectively formed with openings 611 and 621 that are circular in front view, and these openings 611 and 621 are arranged concentrically in the assembled state. On the front side of the front case body 610, a cylindrical tubular portion 612 is provided projecting toward the front (front) at a position concentric with the openings 611 and 621. In the front case body 610, the inner diameter of the opening 611 and the cylindrical portion 612 is set to the same size, and the main body portion 651 of the first rotating body 610 rotates on the inner peripheral side of the opening 611 and the cylindrical portion 612. Supported as possible. In addition, the second rotating body 620 is rotatably supported on the outer peripheral side of the cylindrical portion 612.

  As described above, the first rotating body 650 (main body 651) and the second rotating body 660 are rotatably supported by the inner peripheral surface and the outer peripheral surface of the cylindrical portion 611 of the front case body 610. The arrangement positions of the rotating body 650 and the second rotating body 660 can be defined with respect to the front case body 610, respectively. Therefore, as will be described later, gears (first and second outer peripheral gears 653a and 661a) engraved on the outer peripheral surfaces of the first rotating body 650 (housing flange portion 653) and the second rotating body 660, and the front surface The positional relationship between the second housing gear 642 and the front gear 646 disposed on the case body 610 can be defined with the front case body 610 as a reference. As a result, the meshing state between the outer peripheral gears 653a and 661a of the rotating bodies 650 and 660 and the second housing gear 642 and the front gear 646 can be stabilized, so that uneven wear of the gears can be suppressed and driving resistance can be suppressed. Can be suppressed.

  The drive motor 630 has a pinion gear 631 attached to its drive shaft, and is attached to the back surface of the back case body 620, whereby the pinion gear 631 is attached to the first storage gear 641 among the plurality of gears constituting the transmission means. Engage the teeth. Therefore, the rotational driving force of the drive motor 420 can be transmitted to the transmission means (a plurality of gears) via the pinion gear 431. As a result, as described later, the first rotating body 650 and the second rotating body 660 are used. Can be rotated respectively.

  As described above, the first to fifth storage gears 641 to 645 and the front gear 646 are a gear group for transmitting the rotational driving force of the drive motor 630 to the first rotating body 650 and the second rotating body 660. The teeth are formed as spur gears that are engraved on the outer peripheral surface in parallel with the rotation axis. The first to fifth storage gears 641 to 645 are rotatably supported on the back side of the front case body 610, and are connected (engaged) in series so that the first storage gear 641 is the top and the fifth storage is performed. One gear train (gear train) with the gear 645 as the tail is formed.

  The front gear 646 is pivotally supported on the front side of the front case body 610 so as to be able to rotate synchronously with the fifth storage gear 645. That is, the front gear 646 and the fifth storage gear 645 are respectively fixed to one end and the other end of the rotating shaft disposed through the front case body 610, and the gears 645, 646 and the rotating shaft are integrated. Turned and turned.

  According to the gear group configured as described above, when the drive motor 630 is rotationally driven, the rotational driving force is transmitted to the first housing gear 641 via the pinion gear 631, and the first housing gear 641 is rotated. . The rotation of the first housing gear 641 is transmitted to the fifth housing gear 645 by the action of a gear train (gear train), and the front gear 646 is rotated by rotating the fifth housing gear 645.

  Here, as will be described later, the first outer peripheral gear 653a of the first rotating body 650 (the storing flange portion 653) is provided in the second receiving gear 642, and the second outer periphery of the second rotating body 660 is provided in the front gear 646. Since the gears 661a are engaged with each other, the first rotating body 650 and the second rotating body 660 can be rotated with the rotation of the drive motor 630, respectively. That is, the two rotating bodies (the first rotating body 650 and the second rotating body 660) can be simultaneously rotated by the rotational drive of the one drive motor 630.

  In this case, in the present embodiment, an even number of gears (third and fourth housing gears 643 and 644) are interposed between the second housing gear 642 and the fifth housing gear 645. Therefore, not only can the rotation speed between the front gear 646 and the second storage gear 642 rotated synchronously with the fifth storage gear 645 be different, but also the rotation between the second storage gear 642 and the front gear 646. You can also change the direction. As a result, as will be described later, the rotation speed and the rotation direction between the first rotating body 650 and the second rotating body 660 can be varied.

  In the present embodiment, a gear train including the second storage gear 642 is provided on the back side of the front case body 610, and a front gear is provided on the front side of the front case cheer 610. On the back side, the second storage gear 642 and the front gear 646 are engaged with the first outer peripheral gear 653a of the first rotating body 650 and the second outer peripheral gear 651a of the second rotating body 660, respectively. Therefore, for example, both the second storage gear 642 and the front gear 646 are arranged on the front side of the front case body 610, and both the gears 642 and 646 are engaged with the first rotating body 650 and the second rotating body 660, respectively. Compared to the structure to be driven, not only the transmission structure for transmitting the rotational driving force of the drive motor 630 to the first rotating body 650 and the second rotating body 660 but also the structure of the first rotating body 650 and the second rotating body 660 itself. It can be simplified.

  Further, the gear train and the housing flange portion 653 of the first rotating body 650 with which the second housing gear 642 of the gear train is engaged are arranged on the back side of the front case body 610, so that the rotation is performed. The gear case and the storage flange portion 653 can be shielded by the front case body 610 from the player who views the operation unit 600 from the front. That is, the shielding structure for shielding the gear train and the storage flange portion 653 in an invisible manner can be simply formed using the back case body 610 without the need to provide another member.

  The first rotator 650 is an effect member for performing effects by rotating around the spherical liquid crystal device 670 (see FIG. 33), and is integrated with the main body 651 and one side in the axial direction of the main body 651. It mainly includes a front effect portion 652 to be formed and a storage flange portion 653 that is fastened and fixed to the other axial side (axial end surface) of the main body 651 with a screw.

  The main body portion 651 is a portion formed in a cylindrical shape from a resin material, and is inserted into the opening 611 in the front case body 610 and the inner peripheral side of the cylindrical portion 612. That is, the first rotating body 650 is rotatably held by the front case body 610 (the opening 611 and the cylindrical portion 612) with the main body 651 as a rotation axis. Here, a detailed configuration of the main body 651 will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 37 (a) is a rear view of the main body 651, and FIG. 37 (b) is a partially enlarged rear view of the main body 651 showing the XXXVII portion of FIG. 37 (a) in an enlarged manner. In FIG. 37 (b), for easy understanding, the diameters of the first projecting portion 651a and the second projecting portion 651b are schematically enlarged to be larger than actual and the first projecting portion 651a. A virtual circle IS, which is a virtual circle inscribed at each top of the second protrusion 651b, is illustrated using a two-dot chain line.

  As shown in FIGS. 37 (a) and 37 (b), the main body 651 is formed with a first protrusion 651a and a second protrusion 651b, and at a position corresponding to the second protrusion 651b. An offset portion 651c is formed.

  The first projecting portion 651a and the second projecting portion 651b are formed so as to project from the outer peripheral surface and the inner peripheral surface of the main body portion 651, and along the axial direction of the main body portion 651 (FIG. 37 (a) perpendicular to the paper surface). However, it is a part extended over the entire length of the main body part 651 (see FIG. 35), and is a plurality of places (a total of eight places in the present embodiment) that are equally spaced in the circumferential direction. The portions 651b are alternately arranged in the circumferential direction.

  That is, the first projecting portion 651a embeds a cylindrical body having a circular cross section having a diameter larger than the plate thickness of the main body 561 in the main body 651 in a posture in which the main body 651 and the axial direction coincide with each other. Of the embedded columnar body, the main body portion 651 is formed by a portion protruding from the outer peripheral surface and the inner peripheral surface (a part of the columnar body). The second protrusion 651b is the same as the first protrusion 651a except that the diameter of the columnar body embedded in the main body 651 is larger than that of the first protrusion 651a.

  As described above, the first projecting portion 651a and the second projecting portion 651b projecting from the outer peripheral surface and the inner peripheral surface of the main body portion 651 extend over the entire length of the main body portion 651 along the axial direction. The rigidity of 651 can be increased.

  The second projecting portion 651b is further extended along the axial direction from the axial end surface of the main body portion 651 (the front side surface in FIG. 37 (b)). Therefore, as will be described later, when the storage flange portion 653 is fastened and fixed to the main body portion 651 with a screw, the axially extending portion of the second projecting portion 651b is recessed in the front surface of the storage flange portion 653. The main body 651 and the storage flange 653 can be firmly coupled so as not to be relatively rotatable by being fitted in the recessed portion (see FIG. 36).

  The offset portion 651c is a portion in which the vicinity of the second protruding portion 651b formation portion in the main body portion 651 is offset to the inner peripheral side while maintaining the plate thickness dimension, and is approximately three times the diameter of the second protruding portion 651b. It is formed over a range (circumferential direction). That is, the offset portion 651c is curved in an arc shape concentric with the main body portion 651 in the axial direction view of the main body portion 651 shown in FIG. By forming the offset portion 651c in the main body portion 651 as described above, the axial center of the second projecting portion 651b can be offset to the axial center side as described later, and the main body portion 651 as a whole can be positioned. Stiffness can be increased.

  The plurality of (four in this embodiment) first protrusions 651a are set to have the same amount of protrusion from the outer peripheral surface of the main body 651, and the plurality of (four in this embodiment) second protrusions 652b are The amount of protrusion from the outer peripheral surface of the main body 651 is set to be the same, and the amount of protrusion of the first protrusion 651a is the same due to the offset by the offset portion 651c. The plurality of (eight in this embodiment) first protrusions 651a and second protrusions 652b are set to have the same amount of protrusion from the outer peripheral surface of the main body 651. As a result, as shown in FIG. 37 (b), the virtual circle IS inscribed by the tops of the first protrusion 651a and the second protrusion 652b can be set concentrically on the outer peripheral side of the main body 651. In this case, the diameter dimension of the virtual circle IS is set to a dimension equivalent to or slightly larger than the inner diameter dimension of the opening 611 and the cylindrical portion 612 in the front case body 610.

  Therefore, in a state where the main body 651 of the first rotating body 650 is inserted into the opening 611 of the front case body 610 and the inner peripheral side of the cylindrical portion 612, the contact areas thereof are defined as the first protrusion 651a and the second protrusion. Since it can limit to each top part of 651b, a contact resistance can be suppressed and the main-body part 651 can be smoothly rotated on the inner peripheral side of the opening 611 and the cylindrical part 612.

  In particular, the first projecting portion 651a and the second projecting portion 651b have an arc shape as viewed in the axial direction (specifically, an arc shape in which a cross-sectional shape cut by a plane orthogonal to the axial direction of the main body portion 651 is convex outward). ), The contact area can be suppressed, and the tops of the first and second projecting portions 651a and 651b are smoothly in contact with the opening 611 of the front case body 610 and the inner peripheral surface of the cylindrical portion 612. Therefore, the main body 651 can be rotated more smoothly on the inner peripheral side of the opening 611 and the cylindrical portion 612 even when there is shakiness due to dimensional tolerance.

  As described above, the first projecting portion 651a and the second projecting portion 651b project not only from the outer peripheral surface of the main body portion 651 but also from the inner peripheral surface of the main body portion 651. Thereby, when the main body 651 is molded by the resin mold, the shape of the main body 651 is made uniform (symmetrical shape) on the outer peripheral surface side and the inner peripheral surface side, and the moldability can be ensured.

  In particular, in the present embodiment, the first projecting portion 651a has a projecting dimension of the portion formed by projecting from the outer peripheral surface of the main body portion 651 and the main body portion 651 in the axial view of the main body portion 651 shown in FIG. The projecting dimension of the portion formed by projecting from the inner peripheral surface is the same. Similarly, in the second projecting portion 651a, the projecting dimension of the portion that projects from the outer peripheral surface of the offset portion 651c and the projecting dimension of the portion that projects from the inner peripheral surface of the offset portion 651c are the same. . Therefore, the shape on the outer peripheral surface side and the inner peripheral surface side of the main body 651 can be made more uniform (symmetrical shape), and the moldability can be further ensured.

  Further, the second protrusion 651b is provided with a circular hole having a circular cross section that is formed along the axial direction thereof (see FIG. 36). Thereby, the thickness of the second protrusion 651b having a larger diameter than that of the first protrusion 651a can be made uniform with other parts (the main body 651, the offset part 651c, the first protrusion 651a, etc.). As a result, the formability of the main body 651 can be ensured.

  In this case, a female screw is engraved on the inner peripheral surface of the hole drilled in the second projecting portion 651b, and a screw for fastening and fixing the storage flange portion 653 can be screwed (see FIG. 36). As described above, the second projecting portion 651b formed with a relatively large diameter serves as a screw fastening portion for fastening the screw, thereby ensuring the strength of the screw fastening portion. In particular, the second protruding portion 651b is a portion formed in the offset portion 651c, and the rigidity of the main body portion 651 is reinforced, so that the connecting portion between the main body portion 651 and the storage flange portion 653 is connected to the second protruding portion 651b. By carrying it, both can be firmly connected and durability can be improved.

  Returning to FIG. 34 to FIG. The front effect part 652 is a part that is visually recognized by the player as an effect part, and is formed so as to protrude radially outward from the outer peripheral surface of the main body part 651 in a flange shape. The front surface (front surface, appearance forming surface) of the front effect portion 652 is plated, and an appearance imitating a glossy metal is imparted to the front effect portion 652. The front effect portion 652 is made of a light-transmitting resin material, but is plated so that the player can visually recognize the light emitting device 680 (light emitting element 681) through the front effect portion 652. Can be avoided.

  The front view portion 652 is formed in a saw blade shape in which a mountain (second portion) and a valley (first portion) having an indefinite shape are repeated along the circumferential direction. Mountains (valleys) are arranged at unequal intervals in the circumferential direction (unequal pitches). As will be described later, when the first rotating body 650 is rotated, the peaks and valleys of the front effect portion 652 pass through the front side (front side) of the light emitting element 681 of the light emitting device 680 in order, thereby emitting light to the player. The element 681 can be viewed intermittently and selectively (see FIG. 39).

  The storage flange portion 653 is a portion that is stored in the internal space (between the opposing surfaces) of the front case body 610 and the back case body 620, and is formed in a circular shape when viewed from the front, and the cylindrical portion of the front case body 610 It is fastened and fixed to the end surface in the axial direction of the main body 651 inserted through 612 through the opening 611. Specifically, the storage flange portion 653 is fastened and fixed to the main body portion 651 by screwing the screw inserted through the storage flange portion 653 into the second projecting portion 651b of the main body portion 651 as described above.

  The storage flange portion 653 is set to have a thickness dimension that is equal to or slightly smaller than the distance between the opposing surfaces of the front case body 610 and the back case body 620, and has an outer diameter dimension that corresponds to the front case body 610 and the back case. The size is set to be larger than the inner diameter of the openings 611 and 621 in the body 620. Accordingly, the first rotating body 650 defines the axial position of the first rotating body 650 by bringing the front or back surface of the storage flange portion 653 into contact with the back surface of the front case body 610 or the front surface of the back case body 620. it can.

  A first outer peripheral gear 653a is engraved on the outer peripheral surface of the storage flange portion 653. The first outer peripheral gear 653a has a second storage in the above-described gear train disposed on the back surface of the front case body 610. The gear 642 is meshed. Therefore, when the gear train is rotated by the rotational driving force of the drive motor 630, the rotation is transmitted to the storage flange portion 653 via the second storage gear 642 and the first outer peripheral gear 653a, and the first rotating body 650 is moved. It is rotated.

  As described above, the first rotating body 650 has the first outer peripheral gear 653a engraved on the outer peripheral surface of the storage flange portion 653, and the first rotating body 650 includes a gear train disposed along the periphery of the opening 511 of the front case body 610. Since the second storage gear 642 is engaged with the first outer peripheral gear 653a, the transmission structure for transmitting the rotational driving force of the drive motor 630 to the first rotating body 650 can be simplified. In particular, the first rotating body 650 is formed in a cylindrical shape, and a projected surface portion 671 of a spherical liquid crystal device 670 described later is disposed on the inner peripheral side thereof, so it is difficult to secure a space on the inner peripheral surface side. It becomes. Therefore, it is effective that the transmission structure described above can be disposed on the outer peripheral side of the first rotating body 650.

  Further, as described above, the first rotating body 650 (main body portion 651) is rotatably supported on the inner peripheral surface of the cylindrical portion 611 of the front case body 610. Therefore, the first rotating body 650 is disposed. The position can be defined with reference to the front case body 610. Therefore, a position between the gear (first outer gear 653a) engraved on the outer peripheral surface of the first rotating body 650 (housing flange portion 653) and the second housing gear 642 disposed in the front case body 610. The relationship can be defined with the front case body 610 as a reference. As a result, the meshing state of the first outer peripheral gear 653a and the second housing gear 642 of the first rotating body 650 can be stabilized, so that uneven wear of the gear can be suppressed and driving resistance can be suppressed. it can.

  The second rotator 660 is an effect member for performing effects by rotating on the back side of the first rotator 650 (see FIG. 33), and is a main body formed in a cylindrical shape from a light-transmitting resin material. 661 and a front effect portion 662 formed integrally with the axial end surface of the main body portion 661.

  The main body portion 661 is set to have an inner diameter dimension that is equal to or slightly larger than the outer diameter dimension of the cylindrical portion 612 in the front case body 610 and is fitted on the outer peripheral side of the cylindrical portion 612 (that is, The cylindrical case 612 is inserted through the inner peripheral side of the main body 661) and is rotatably held by the front case body 610 (cylindrical portion 612).

  A second outer peripheral gear 661a is formed on the outer peripheral surface of the main body 661, and the above-described front gear 646 disposed on the front surface of the front case body 610 is meshed with the second outer peripheral gear 661a. Therefore, when the gear train and the front gear 646 described above are rotated by the rotational driving force of the drive motor 630, the rotation is transmitted to the main body 661 via the front gear 646 and the second outer peripheral gear 661a, and the second rotation. The body 660 is rotated.

  Thus, the second rotating body 660 has the second outer peripheral gear 661a engraved on the outer peripheral surface thereof, and the front gear 646 disposed on the front surface of the front case body 610 meshes with the second outer peripheral gear 661a. The transmission structure for transmitting the rotational driving force of the drive motor 630 to the second rotating body 660 can be simplified. In particular, since the second rotating body 650 is formed in a cylindrical shape and is rotatably held by being fitted around the cylindrical portion 612 of the front case body 610, a space is secured on the inner peripheral surface side. Difficult to do. Therefore, it is effective that the transmission structure described above can be disposed on the outer peripheral side of the second rotating body 660.

  Further, as described above, since the second rotating body 660 is rotatably supported on the outer peripheral surface of the cylindrical portion 611 of the front case body 610, the arrangement position of the second rotating body 660 is set to the front case body. 610 can be defined as a standard. Therefore, the positional relationship between the gear (second outer peripheral gear 661 a) engraved on the outer peripheral surface of the second rotating body 660 and the front gear 646 disposed in the front case body 610 is expressed as the front case body 610. Can be defined as a standard. As a result, the meshing state of the second outer peripheral gear 661a of the second rotating body 660 and the front gear 646 can be stabilized, so that uneven wear of the gears can be suppressed and driving resistance can be suppressed.

  The main body portion 661 has an axial dimension that is set to a size that is equal to or slightly smaller than the facing distance between the front surface of the front case body 610 and the back surface of the front effect portion 652 of the first rotating body 650. Therefore, the second rotating body 660 causes the end face on one side in the axial direction or the end face on the other side in the axial direction of the main body 661 to abut on the back of the front rendering unit 652 of the first rotating body 650 or the front of the front case body 610. Thus, the axial position of the second rotating body 650 can be defined.

  The main body 661 has a front ridge 661b and a back ridge 661c projecting from the end surface on one side in the axial direction and the end surface on the other side in the axial direction. The front ridge 661b is formed in an annular shape in front view, and the back ridge 661c is formed in a shape obtained by dividing the annular shape in front view at a plurality of locations. Thereby, when rotating the 1st rotary body 660, the frictional resistance between the main-body part 661, the front case 610, and the 2nd rotary body 650 (front effect part 652) is reduced, and the load of the drive motor 630 is reduced. Can be suppressed.

  The front effect part 662 is located on the back side of the front effect part 652 in the first rotating body 650 and is a part that is visually recognized by the player as an effect part together with the effect part 652, and is radial from the outer peripheral surface of the main body part 661. It is formed to project outward in a flange shape. The front effect portion 662 has an outer peripheral side portion 662a formed in a saw blade shape in which irregularly shaped peaks and valleys are repeated along the circumferential direction, and an annular shape in front view on the inner peripheral side of the outer peripheral side portion 662a. And an inner peripheral side portion 662b which is a portion.

  The front surface (front surface, appearance forming surface) of the front effect portion 662 is plated in the same manner as the front effect portion 652 of the first rotating body 650. However, in the first rotating body 650 described above, the entire surface (entire range) of the front effect portion 652 is plated, but in the second rotating body 650, only the outer peripheral side portion 662a of the front effect portion 662 is plated. The inner peripheral portion 662b is not plated.

  Therefore, as will be described later, a mountain (second portion) and a valley (first portion) of the front effect portion 652 in the first rotating body 650 are sequentially passed on the front side (front) of the light emitting element 681 in the light emitting device 680. Thus, when the light-emitting element 681 is viewed intermittently and selectively by the player, the light-emitting element 681 is watermarked on the inner peripheral side portion 662b (that is, the portion not plated) of the front effect portion 662. Thus, it is possible to make the player visually recognize (see FIG. 39).

  The spherical liquid crystal device 670 includes a projection surface portion 671 formed as a spherical shell from a light transmissive material, and a case body 672 in which a projection device that projects an image on the inner surface of the spherical shell of the projection surface portion 671 is housed. The video image projected from the projection device and transmitted through the outer surface of the projection surface portion 671 is visually recognized by the player. In the assembled state, the case body 672 is fastened and fixed to the back surface of the back case body 620, and the projected surface portion 671 causes approximately half of the spherical shell to protrude forward from the front surface of the front effect portion 652 of the first rotating body 650. In this posture, it is disposed on the inner peripheral side of the first rotating body 650 (see FIG. 33).

  The light-emitting device 680 includes a case body 681 having an annular shape in front view that is fitted around the cylindrical portion 612 of the front case 610, a circuit board accommodated in the case body 681, and a front surface (front surface) of the circuit board. A plurality of (twelve in the present embodiment) light emitting elements 682 disposed (mounted) on the side, and in the assembled state, the front effect portion 652 of the first rotating body 650 and the second rotating body 660. It is disposed on the back side of 662.

  On the front surface (front surface) of the case body 681, openings having an outer shape larger than that of the light emitting element 682 are formed at 12 positions that are equally spaced in the circumferential direction, and each light emitting element corresponds to the opening position of each opening. 682 is mounted on the circuit board. That is, in the front view, the light emitting device 680 has the light emitting element 682 exposed from the opening of the case body 681, and transmits light emitted from the light emitting element 682 through the opening of the case body 681 (first rotation). It is possible to irradiate the front direction portions 652 and 662) of the body 650 and the second rotating body 660.

  As described above, the front effect portions 652 and 662 of the first rotator 650 and the second rotator 660 are disposed on the front (front) side of the light emitting device 680, and the front effect portion 652 of the first rotator 650 is provided. Is rotated, it is possible to make the player visually recognize light emitted by the light emitting element 682 intermittently and selectively. Here, a structure for allowing a player to visually recognize light emitted from the light emitting element 682 intermittently and selectively will be described with reference to FIGS. 38 and 39. FIG.

  FIG. 38 is a front view of the rotary operation unit 600, and FIGS. 38A and 38B show a state in which the first rotary bodies 650 are arranged at different rotational positions. 39A is a cross-sectional view of the rotation operation unit 600 taken along the line XXXIXa-XXXIXa in FIG. 38A, and FIG. 39B is a rotation operation unit 600 taken along the line XXXIXb-XXXIXb in FIG. FIG.

  38, in order to clarify the phase relationship between the front rendering unit 652 of the first rotating body 650 and the light emitting element 682 of the light emitting device 680, the first rotating body 650 and the rotating operation unit 600 Only the light emitting device 680 is illustrated, and in FIG. 39, in order to clarify the radial position relationship between the front effect portions 652 and 662 of the first rotating body 650 and the second rotating body 660 and the light emitting element 682 of the light emitting device 680. FIG. 38 schematically illustrates a disassembled state in which the second rotating body 660 is added to the first rotating body 650 and the light emitting device 680 illustrated in FIG. 38.

  As shown in FIGS. 38 and 39, the front view shape of the front effect portion 652 in the first rotator 650 is an irregularly shaped mountain (second portion) and valley (first portion) that are repeated along the circumferential direction. In the light emitting device 680, the light emitting element 682 is disposed at a radially outer side (upper side in FIG. 39 (a)) than the valley bottom in the front effect portion 652, and in the front effect portion 652. It is set at a radial position (FIG. 39 (a) vertical position) that is radially inward (downward in FIG. 39 (a)) from the summit.

  In this case, as described above, the inner peripheral side portion 662b of the front effect portion 662 of the second rotating body 660 is not plated on the front surface (front surface) and is formed so as to transmit light. The formation range of the peripheral portion 662b (the range indicated by the two-dot chain line in FIG. 39) is set to a range including the valley bottom in the front effect portion 652 of the first rotating body 650 and the light emitting element 682 of the light emitting device 680. That is, in front view, light is emitted from the valley portion of the front effect portion 652 of the first rotator 650 via the inner peripheral side portion 662b of the front effect portion 662 of the second rotator 660 (that is, transmitted). The player can visually recognize the light emitting element 682 of the device 680.

  In addition, as described above, the outer peripheral side portion 662a of the front effect portion 662 of the second rotating body 660 is plated on the front surface (front surface) to give an appearance imitating a glossy metal. The outer peripheral side portion 662a is disposed to face the back side of the front rendering portion 652 of the first rotating body 650. That is, in the front view, the player can visually recognize the outer peripheral side portion 662a of the front effect portion 662 of the second rotator 660 from the valley portion of the front effect portion 652 of the first rotator 650.

  As described above, according to the rotational operation unit 600, the front effect portion 652 of the first rotating body 650 is formed with alternately crests and valleys in the circumferential direction in the region overlapping the light emitting element 682 of the light emitting device 680 when viewed from the front. Therefore, as the first rotating body 650 rotates, the peaks and valleys of the front effect portion 652 alternately pass in front of the light emitting element 682, so that the light emitting element 682 emits light and the second rotating body 660. The player can make the player intermittently view through the inner peripheral side portion 662b of the front effect portion 682. Accordingly, it is possible to effectively perform an effect of rotating the plurality of rotating bodies (the first rotating body 650 and the second rotating body 660) around the spherical liquid crystal device 670 as a center.

  Further, the outer peripheral side portion 662a in the front effect portion 662 of the second rotating body 660 is plated to give an appearance imitating a glossy metal, and the front (front side) side of the outer peripheral side portion 662a. Is provided with a front effect portion 652 of the first rotating body 650. Therefore, as described above, when the first rotator 650 and the second rotator 660 are rotated in opposite directions, the first rotary body 650 has a valley portion in the front effect portion 652 of the first rotary body 650. The player can visually recognize the aspect in which the outer peripheral side portion 662a of the front effect portion 652 of the two-rotor 660 is rotated in the opposite direction to the front effect portion 652 of the first rotator 650.

  That is, according to the rotational operation unit 600, the player who views the first rotating body 650 from the front side intermittently visually recognizes the light emitting element 682 of the light emitting device 680 on the valley bottom side in the mountain valley shape of the front rendering unit 652. On the summit side in the mountain valley shape of the front effect portion 652, the front effect portion 662 (outer peripheral portion 662a) of the second rotating body 660 is rotated in the opposite direction to the front effect portion 652 (mountain valley shape) of the first rotating body 650. Can be visually recognized. Accordingly, the rotation of the first rotating body 650 and the rotation of the second rotating body 660 can be associated with each other so that the player can easily recognize them. As a result, a plurality of rotating bodies (the first rotating body 650 and the second rotating body 660). It is possible to effectively perform the effects of rotating each of them.

  Further, according to the rotation effect unit 600, as described above, valleys in the front effect portion 652 of the first rotating body 650 are formed in 16 places in the circumferential direction, while the light emitting elements 682 of the light emitting device 680 are in the circumferential direction 12. Since the light emitting elements 682 are disposed at the twelve places, the player can selectively make only a specific light emitting element 682 visible.

  That is, the circumferential spacing of the valleys in the front effect portion 652 is different from the circumferential spacing of the light emitting elements 682. For example, in the state shown in FIG. While the provided light emitting element 682 is visible, when the first rotating body 650 (front effect unit 652) is rotated by a predetermined rotation angle from the state shown in FIG. 38A, FIG. ), Different light emitting elements 682 are selected, and the light emitting elements 682 arranged at the four locations in the upper right, lower right, lower left and upper left are made visible.

  Thereby, not only can the light emitting element 682 of the light emitting device 680 be visually recognized intermittently, but also the position of the visually recognized light emitting element 682 can be changed in the circumferential direction, so that a plurality of rotating bodies (first rotating body 650 and The effect of rotating the second rotating body 660) can be more effectively performed.

  Returning to FIG. 34 to FIG. 36, the overall structure of the rotary operation unit 600 will be described. As described above, the opening 611 and the cylindrical portion 612 are formed in the front case body 610, and the storage flange portion 653 is formed separately from the main body portion 651 and the front effect portion 652 in the first rotating body 650. Therefore, the second rotating body 660 is mounted on the outer peripheral side of the cylindrical portion 612 of the front case body 610, and the main body portion 651 of the first rotating body 650 is inserted on the inner peripheral side of the cylindrical portion 612 of the front case body 610. At the same time, after the housing flange portion 653 is fastened and fixed to the inserted main body portion 651, the back case body 620 is fastened and fixed to the front case body 610, whereby the first rotating body 650 is attached to the front case body 610 and the back case body 620. The second rotating body 660 can be held in a rotatable state.

  That is, the first rotating body 650 is rotatably supported by the front case body 610 by inserting the main body 651 through the opening 611 and the cylindrical portion 612 of the front case body 610. In this case, the storage flange portion 653 of the first rotating body 650 can be brought into contact with the back surface of the front case body 610 and the front surface of the back case body 620, whereby the first rotating body 650 with respect to both case bodies 610 and 620 is obtained. Displacement to the front side (front) and back side (rear) can be regulated.

  At the same time, the second rotating body 660 is pivotally supported by the front case body 610 by being externally fitted to the cylindrical portion 612 of the front case body 610. In this case, the second rotator 660 (the front ridge 661b and the back ridge 662c) is brought into contact with the back of the front effect portion 652 of the first rotator 650 and the front of the case body 681 of the light emitting device 680, respectively. Thereby, the displacement to the front side (front) and back side (rear) of the 2nd rotary body 660 with respect to both case bodies 610 and 620 can be controlled.

  Thus, according to the rotation operation unit 600, the plurality of rotating bodies (the first rotating body 650 and the second rotating body 660) can be held in a rotatable state, and the rotating body (the first rotating body 650) itself. Since this also serves as a part that regulates the displacement of the second rotating body 660, the structure can be simplified correspondingly. In addition, the holding flange portion 653 is fastened and fixed to the main body portion 651 of the first rotating body 650 with a holding structure that can hold the plurality of rotating bodies (the first rotating body 650 and the second rotating body 660) in a rotatable state. Since it can form only by doing, an assembly process can be simplified. As a result, the product cost can be reduced.

  Further, according to the rotation operation unit 600, the first rotating body 650 is formed in a cylindrical shape, and the opening 621 is formed in the back case body 620. Therefore, the front case body 610 and the back case body 620 are rotated a plurality of times. After the bodies (the first rotating body 650 and the second rotating body 660) are held in a rotatable state, the spherical liquid crystal device 670 is mounted from the back side of the back case body 620 and fastened and fixed. The assembly of the unit 600 can be completed (see FIG. 33). That is, the spherical liquid crystal device 670 can be retrofitted in a separate process with respect to the assembly of the case bodies 5610 and 620 and the rotary bodies 650 and 660. Therefore, this point can also contribute to simplifying the assembly process and reducing the product cost.

  The present invention has been described based on the above embodiment, but the present invention is not limited to the above embodiment, and various modifications can be easily made without departing from the spirit of the present invention. It can be guessed.

  In the protrusion operation unit 400 in the above embodiment, the case where the relative displacement member 450 is disposed so as to be slidable with respect to the base side displacement member 440 has been described. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. The relative displacement member 450 may be rotatably arranged with respect to 440. That is, as in the case of the above-described embodiment, the first operation is to rotate the base side displacement member 440 between the retracted position (see FIG. 13) and the rotation position (see FIG. 14), and the second operation is A configuration in which the relative displacement member 450 is rotated with respect to the base-side displacement member 440 between a reference position (see FIG. 14) and an extended position (see FIG. 15) may be employed.

  Even with this configuration, the base side displacement member 450 in the retracted position is disposed at the rotation position by the first operation, and the relative displacement member 450 at the reference position is disposed at the extended position by the second operation. While both the displacement members 440 and 450 can be sufficiently visually recognized by the player and the effect of the performance can be sufficiently exhibited, the relative displacement member 450 in the extended position is rotated to the reference position by the second operation. Since the base side displacement member 440 in the rotation position is arranged at the retracted position by the first operation, both the displacement members 440 and 450 are reduced in size, and the space required to accommodate the displacement member is suppressed. it can.

  In the protruding operation unit 400 in the above embodiment, in the state where the base side displacement member 440 is disposed at the retracted position (see FIG. 17B), the front end side of the base side displacement member 450 is more than the front end side of the relative displacement member 450. Although the case of projecting to the decorative member 480 side (the upper side in FIG. 17B) has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and conversely, the distal end side of the relative displacement member 450 is the base displacement member 450. You may employ | adopt the structure protruded to the decoration member 480 side (FIG.17 (b) upper side) rather than the front end side.

  Also with this configuration, the rotational trajectories of both displacement members 440 and 450 can intersect with the decoration member 480, and at the time of the intersection, the decoration member 480 can be transmitted and the both displacement members 440 and 450 can be visually recognized. The production effect by displacing the members 440 and 450 can be enhanced. Furthermore, according to this configuration, when the relative displacement member 450 is extended (see FIG. 15), the area of the decorative portion 454 located in the front (front) can be further increased, and the force can be further increased. Improvements can be made.

  In the combined operation unit 500 in the above embodiment, the driven member 550 (connection shaft 561b) can be rotated by forming the connection groove 552a of the driven member 550 in a long hole shape. In addition, the case of being connected in a slidable state has been described. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and a driven member for the driven member 550 (connection groove 552a) is formed by forming the connection groove 552a in a circular shape. A configuration in which the slide displacement of 560 (connection shaft 561b) is disabled (that is, a configuration in which only rotation is allowed) may be employed. Even in this configuration, when the driven member 560 is relatively displaced in accordance with the displacement of the driven member 550, the relative angle of the driven member 560 with respect to the driven member 550 can be changed. It is possible to enhance the production effect by adding a change to.

  In this case, the displacement defining means constituted by the first guide groove 513 and the first pin 561a is engaged with the gear disposed on the driven member 560 concentrically with the connection shaft 561b and the gear. You may comprise by the curved rack gear formed along the circular arc centering on the drive shaft 551a of the to-be-driven member 550, and arrange | positioned at the front case body 510 or the back case body 520. Accordingly, when the driven member 560 is relatively displaced in accordance with the displacement of the driven member 550, the relative angle of the driven member 560 with respect to the driven member 550 can be changed by the gear rolling the rack gear. it can.

  In the combined operation unit 500 in the above embodiment, the first guide groove 513 and the second guide groove 523 are formed in the front case body 510 and the back case body 520, and are inserted through the both guide grooves 513 and 523, respectively. Although the case where the 1 pin 561a and the connecting shaft 561b are formed on the driven member 560 has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto, and conversely, the first guide groove 513 and the second guide groove 523 are connected to the driven member. 560 and a configuration in which a portion (a member corresponding to the first pin 561a and the connection shaft 561b) inserted into both the guide grooves 513 and 523 is provided in the front case body 510 and / or the back case body 520 is employed. May be. This configuration also allows the driven member 560 to perform a combination of linear motion and rotational motion in accordance with the displacement of the driven member 550, so that the trajectory of the driven member 560 is changed, The production effect can be enhanced.

  In the combined operation unit 500 in the above embodiment, the case where the first guide groove 513 is drilled (opened) in the front case body 510 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto, and the first guide groove 513 is not necessarily limited thereto. However, it may be formed as a concave groove having a U-shaped cross section, for example. That is, the first guide groove 513 has only a shape that can guide the first pin 561a along the extending direction.

  In the combined operation unit 500 in the above embodiment, the first guide groove 513 and the second guide groove 523 are curved and extended, while the connection groove 551a is linearly extended. On the contrary, the first guide groove 513 and the second guide groove 523 are linearly extended while the connection groove 551a is curved and extended. Also good. In particular, for the first guide groove 513 and the second guide groove 523, the case where the radius of curvature is set to a constant arc shape has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the arc shapes of a plurality of curvature radii are combined. It is naturally possible to adopt a different shape (for example, an S shape). As a result, the trajectory of the driven member 560 can be changed in a more complicated manner, so that the production effect can be enhanced.

  Specifically, for example, when the first guide groove 513 or the second guide groove 523 is set to an arc shape, the arc shape is defined as the rotation start end of the rotation direction of the driven member 550 about the shaft portions 553 and 554. Or in the state arrange | positioned in the terminal end and its vicinity, it is preferable to make a radius larger than a reference value (a curvature is made small). That is, the radius of the first guide groove 513 or the second guide groove 523 in the first range in the vicinity and the first range or the end in the vicinity thereof and the second range in the vicinity thereof is larger than the reference value, or the first range and the second It is preferable to make it larger than the radius in the third range located between the ranges. As a result, in the initial stage of starting the driving of the driven member 550 in the stopped state by the driving motor 530, the load can be reduced and the driving can be started smoothly.

  Alternatively, while the driven member 560 is invisible by the front case body 510, the radius of the first guide groove 513 or the second guide groove 523 is set to a value larger than the reference value, and a part of the driven member 560 is set. Until the entirety of the driven member 560 is exposed outside the area of the front case body 510 (becomes visible) from the beginning of being exposed outside the area of the front case body 510 (becomes visible). The radius of the guide groove 513 or the second guide groove 523 may be set to a value smaller than the reference value. According to this, in the former case, since the operation of the driven member 560 is not visually recognized by the player, it is possible to reduce the load of the drive motor 530 without affecting the effect, and in the latter case, Since the movement of the driven member 560 can be accelerated in a range where a part of the driven member 560 is shielded, the effect that the driven member 560 appears suddenly from the front case body 510 or the driven member 560 is the front case body 510. It is possible to perform an effect that hides quickly on the back of the camera.

  Alternatively, the driven member 560 is decorated within a range defined by a pair of virtual lines inclined up and down by 45 degrees with respect to a horizontal line passing through the connection shaft 561b in a horizontal posture (viewed in the direction of the connection shaft 561b (see FIG. 30)). While the radius of the first guide groove 513 or the second guide groove 523 is set to a value larger than the reference value while the driven member 560 exceeds the horizontal posture, The radius of the first guide groove 513 or the second guide groove 523 may be set to a value smaller than the reference value. According to this, in a region where the weight of the driven member 560 (gravity action) needs to be supported by the driving force of the driving motor 530 is relatively large, the radius is increased, and the n-type friction resistance and the driven in each guide groove 513,514. An area where the influence of the inertia force due to the posture change of the member 560 can be reduced and the load of the drive motor 530 can be reduced, while the weight of the driven member 560 (the action of gravity) needs to be supported by the drive force of the drive motor 530 is relatively small Then, by reducing the radius, it is possible to increase the change in the operation of the driven member 560 and enhance the effect.

  In the rotational operation unit 600 in the above embodiment, the case where the main body portion 651 and the front effect portion 652 are integrated in the first rotating body 650 and the storage flange portion 653 is separate is described. Instead, the main body portion 651 and the storage flange portion 653 may be integrated, and the front effect portion 652 may be a separate body so that the first rotating body 650 is formed. Also with this configuration, as in the case of the above-described embodiment, the structure and assembly process for rotatably holding a plurality of rotating bodies can be simplified, and the product cost can be reduced.

  In the rotation operation unit 600 in the above embodiment, the case where the inner peripheral side portion 662b of the front rendering unit 662 of the second rotator 660 is formed with the front surface (front surface) as a flat surface has been described. Instead, a part or all of the front surface may be replaced with a flat surface to have another shape. Examples of other shapes include a surface having a plurality of irregularities, a surface formed in a corrugated cross section, an inclined surface, a curved surface, or a surface combining these. When these other shapes are adopted, not only can the light emitted from the light emitting element 682 and transmitted through the inner peripheral side portion 662b be irregularly reflected or refracted, the diffused reflection or Since the movement in the direction of refraction can be given, the effect of the production can be enhanced (see FIG. 39).

  In the rotation operation unit 600 in the above embodiment, the case has been described in which the outer diameter size of the front rendering portion 662 of the second rotator 660 is set to a size that overlaps only a part of the front gear 646 in front view ( However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and the outer diameter dimension of the front effect portion 662 of the second rotating body 660 may be set to a size that overlaps the entire front gear 646 when viewed from the front. Thereby, since the front gear 646 can be shielded by the front effect part 662, it is not necessary to separately provide a member for making the front gear 646 invisible to the player. Note that if the front gear 646 can be made invisible to the player, the front gear 646 can be a larger-diameter gear, so that the degree of freedom in setting the gear ratio can be increased. Therefore, the change in rotation of the second rotator 660 relative to the first rotator 650 can be increased.

  In the rotation operation unit 600 in the above embodiment, the description of the stop positions of the first rotator 650 and the second rotator 660 is omitted, but it may be configured as follows. That is, the mountain shape of at least one or both of the front effect portions 652 and 662 of the first rotator 650 or the second rotator 660 is formed to a size that can shield the front gear 646 when viewed from the front. You may make it stop rotation of the 1st rotary body 650 or the 2nd rotary body 660 in the phase position where a shape part is arrange | positioned in front of the front gear 646. FIG. Thereby, the front gear 646 can be made invisible to the player when the rotation of the first rotating body 650 or the second rotating body 660 is stopped.

  You may implement this invention in the pachinko machine etc. of a different type from said each embodiment. For example, once a big hit, a pachinko machine that raises the expected value of the big hit until a big hit state occurs (for example, two times or three times) including that (for example, a two-time right item, a three-time right item) May also be implemented. Further, after the jackpot symbol is displayed, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value on the condition that a ball is won in a predetermined area. Further, the present invention may be implemented in a pachinko machine that has a special area such as a V-zone and has a special gaming state as a necessary condition for winning a ball in the special area. Further, in addition to the pachinko machine, the game machine may be implemented as various game machines such as an alepatchi, a sparrow ball, a slot machine, a game machine in which a so-called pachinko machine and a slot machine are integrated.

  In the slot machine, for example, a symbol is changed by operating a control lever in a state where a symbol effective line is determined by inserting coins, and a symbol is stopped and confirmed by operating a stop button. Is. Accordingly, the basic concept of the slot machine is that it is provided with a display device for confirming and displaying the identification information after variably displaying the identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information, and resulting from the operation of the starting operation means (for example, the operation lever). The variation display of the identification information is started, and the variation display of the identification information is stopped and fixedly displayed due to the operation of the operation means for stop (for example, the stop button) or when a predetermined time elapses. It is a slot machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value on the condition that the combination of identification information at the time is a specific condition. In this case, the game medium is typically a coin, medal, etc. Take as an example.

  In addition, as a specific example of a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused, a display device is provided that displays a symbol after a symbol string composed of a plurality of symbols is variably displayed, and has a handle for launching a ball. What is not. In this case, after throwing a predetermined amount of spheres based on a predetermined operation (button operation), for example, the change of the symbol is started due to the operation of the operation lever, for example, due to the operation of the stop button, or With the passage of time, the variation of the symbol is stopped, and a special game that gives a predetermined game value to the player is generated on the condition that the determined symbol at the time of stoppage is a so-called jackpot symbol. In this case, a large amount of balls are paid out to the lower tray. If such a gaming machine is used in place of a slot machine, only a ball can be handled as a gaming value in the gaming hall. Therefore, the gaming value seen in the current gaming hall in which pachinko machines and slot machines are mixed is used. Problems such as the burden on equipment due to the separate handling of medals and balls and restrictions on the location of the gaming machine can be solved.

Second Embodiment
Hereinafter, a second embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIGS. In the second embodiment, a control process (a process related to game control such as display effects) executed by the pachinko machine 10 described in the first embodiment will be described.

<Mechanical configuration in the second embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 1-3, the structure of the pachinko machine 10 in 2nd Embodiment is demonstrated. 1 is a front view, FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10. As shown in FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 includes an outer frame 11 having an outer shell formed of a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer frame 11 having substantially the same outer shape as the outer frame 11. And an inner frame 12 supported to be openable and closable. In order to support the inner frame 12, metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 11 at two upper and lower portions on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the side on which the hinge 18 is provided is used as an opening / closing axis. The frame 12 is supported so as to be openable and closable to the front front side.

  A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails, winning holes 63, 64, and the like is detachably mounted on the inner frame 12 from the back side. A ball ball game is performed when the ball flows down the front surface of the game board 13. The inner frame 12 has a ball launch unit 112a (see FIG. 49) that launches a ball to the front area of the game board 13 and a shot that guides the ball launched from the ball launch unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13. A rail (not shown) or the like is attached.

  On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 that covers the upper side of the front surface and a lower dish unit 15 that covers the lower side of the front frame 14 are provided. In order to support the front frame 14 and the lower dish unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached to two upper and lower portions on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the side on which the hinges 19 are provided is used as an opening / closing axis. 14 and the lower pan unit 15 are supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front front side. The locking of the inner frame 12 and the locking of the front frame 14 are respectively released by inserting a dedicated key into the key hole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

  The front frame 14 is assembled with decorative resin parts, electrical parts, and the like, and a window part 14c that is formed in an approximately elliptical shape is provided at a substantially central part thereof. A glass unit 16 having two plate glasses is disposed on the back side of the front frame 14, and the front surface of the game board 13 can be seen on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 16.

  On the front frame 14, an upper plate 17 that stores balls is formed in a substantially box shape that protrudes forward and the upper surface is opened, and prize balls and rental balls are discharged to the upper plate 17. The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed to be inclined downward to the right when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the sphere thrown into the upper plate 17 is guided to the ball launch unit 112a by the inclination. A frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17.

  The frame button 22 is operated by the player when, for example, the background mode of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) described later is changed or the content of the notice effect is changed. The Further, the frame button 22 may be configured to be used as a switch for driving a driving tool or the like provided in the gaming machine, for example.

  The front frame 14 is provided with light emitting means such as various lamps around it (for example, a corner portion). These light emitting means play a role of enhancing the effect of the game during the game by changing or controlling the light emission mode by turning on or blinking according to the change of the gaming state at the time of big hit or predetermined reach. On the peripheral edge of the window portion 14c, there are provided electric decoration portions 29 to 33 incorporating light emitting means such as LEDs. In the pachinko machine 10, these lighting parts 29 to 33 function as effect lamps such as jackpot lamps, and the lighting parts 29 to 33 are turned on by lighting or blinking of the built-in LEDs at the time of jackpot or reach effects. Alternatively, it blinks to notify that the jackpot is being hit or that the reach is one step before the jackpot. Further, in the upper left part of the front frame 14 as viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), there is provided a display lamp 34 which has built-in light emitting means such as LEDs and can display the payout of a prize ball and when an error occurs.

  In addition, a small window 35 is formed by attaching a transparent resin from the back side so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be visually recognized, on the lower side of the right illumination part 32, and a sticking space K1 on the front side of the game board 13 (FIG. 2) is visible from the front surface of the pachinko machine 10. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10, a plated member 36 made of ABS resin that is chrome-plated is attached to an area around the electric decoration parts 29 to 33 in order to bring out more gorgeousness.

  A ball rental operation unit 40 is disposed below the window 14c. The ball lending operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41, a ball lending button 42, and a return button 43. When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated in a state where a bill or a card is inserted into a card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, Loans are made. Specifically, the frequency display unit 41 is an area in which the remaining amount information such as a card is displayed, and the built-in LED is lit to display the remaining amount as the remaining amount information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain a lending ball based on information recorded on a card or the like (recording medium), and the lending ball is supplied to the upper plate 17 as long as there is a remaining amount on the card or the like. Is done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of a card or the like inserted into the card unit. In addition, in a pachinko machine in which a ball is lent directly to the upper plate 17 from a ball lending device or the like without using a card unit, a so-called cash machine does not require the ball lending operation unit 40. In this case, the ball lending operation unit 40 It is also possible to add a decorative seal or the like to the installation portion of the parts so that the component configuration is common. A pachinko machine using a card unit and a cash machine can be shared.

  In the lower plate unit 15 located on the lower side of the upper plate 17, a lower plate 50 for storing a ball that could not be stored in the upper plate 17 is formed in a substantially box shape having an open upper surface. Yes. On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 that is operated by a player to drive a ball into the front surface of the game board 13 is disposed, and the operation of the ball launching unit 112a is permitted inside the operation handle 51. Touch sensor 51a, a push button-type stop switch 51b for stopping the launch of the ball during the pressing operation, and a variable resistor for detecting the amount of rotation of the operating handle 51 by a change in electric resistance (Not shown). When the operation handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on, and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes corresponding to the operation amount, and according to the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51. Thus, the ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor, and the ball is driven into the front surface of the game board 13 with a jump amount corresponding to the player's operation. Further, when the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the stop switch 51b are off.

  In the lower part of the front of the lower plate 50, a ball removal lever 52 is provided for operating when the balls stored in the lower plate 50 are discharged downward. The ball removal lever 52 is always urged in the right direction. By sliding the ball release lever 52 in the left direction against the urge, the bottom opening formed in the bottom surface of the lower plate 50 is opened. A ball naturally falls from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball removal lever 52 is usually performed in a state where a box (generally referred to as “a thousand box”) for receiving the balls discharged from the lower plate 50 is placed below the lower plate 50. As described above, the operation handle 51 is disposed on the right side of the lower plate 50, and the ashtray 53 is attached on the left side of the lower plate 50.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 includes a wooden base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape when viewed from the front, a large number of ball nails, windmills and rails 61 and 62, a general winning opening 63, The winning opening 64, the second winning opening 640, the electric accessory 640 a, the variable winning device 65, the variable display device unit 80, and the like are assembled, and the peripheral portion thereof is attached to the back side of the inner frame 12. The general winning port 63, the first winning port 64, the second winning port 640, the variable winning device 65, and the variable display device unit 80 are disposed in a through hole formed in the base plate 60 by router processing. It is fixed from the front side with wood screws. Further, the front center portion of the game board 13 can be viewed from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c of the front frame 14 (see FIG. 1). The configuration of the game board 13 will be described below mainly with reference to FIG.

  An outer rail 62 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted on the front surface of the game board 13, and the strip-shaped metal plate is located on the inner side of the outer rail 62 in the same manner as the outer rail 62. The arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed by the above is planted. The inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62 surround the outer periphery of the front surface of the game board 13, and the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1) surround the front and rear. A game area in which a game is played is formed by the behavior of. The game area is a front surface of the game board 13 and is a substantially circular area formed by dividing the two rails 61 and 62 and the arc member 70 (a winning hole or the like is provided, Area).

  The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball fired from the ball launch unit 112a (see FIG. 49) to the upper part of the game board 13. A return ball preventing member 68 is attached to the front end portion of the inner rail 61 (upper left portion in FIG. 2) to prevent the ball once guided to the upper portion of the game board 13 from returning to the ball guide path again. Is done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right part in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flying portion of the sphere, and the ball launched at a predetermined momentum or more hits the return rubber 69 and gains momentum. Is bounced back to the center while being attenuated. A resin arc member 70 formed by providing an arc connecting the rails on the inner surface side between the lower right end of the inner rail 61 and the upper right end of the outer rail 62 is a base. The plate 60 is driven and fixed.

  In the present pachinko machine 10, when the ball enters the first winning port 64, the special symbol 1 (first symbol) is drawn, and when the ball enters the second winning port 640, the special symbol 2 ( The first symbol) is drawn, and when the ball passes through the through gate 67, the normal symbol (second symbol) is drawn. A special symbol 1 or special symbol 2 (hereinafter referred to as special symbol 1 or special symbol 2 will be referred to as a special symbol) for the first winning port 64 or the second winning port 640. Whether the symbol is a big hit or not is determined, and if it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit, the type of jackpot is also determined. When a special symbol wins, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to a special game state, and the special winning opening 65a that is normally closed is until a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds elapses or 10 balls are won). ) Is released, and the opening is repeated 16 times (16 rounds). As a result, a large amount of balls are awarded to the specific winning opening 65a, so that a larger amount of prize balls are paid out than usual. There are two types of special symbol jackpot types: “Big Jack A” and “Big Jack B”. After the special gaming state is over, the added value after the jackpot is over, according to these jackpot types Value (game value) is given to the player.

  Further, when the special symbol 1 (first symbol) or the special symbol 2 (first symbol) is drawn, the special symbol variable display is started on the first symbol display device 37 and a predetermined time (for example, 8 seconds). After 30 seconds), a special symbol indicating the lottery result is stopped and displayed. When a ball enters the first winning port 64 while the special symbol is displayed on the first symbol display device 37, the number of balls entered is held up to four times, and the number of balls held is the first. It is shown by the symbol display device 37 and also by the third symbol display device 81. Similarly, when a ball enters the second winning opening 640 while the special symbol is changing, the number of balls entered is held up to a maximum of 4 times, and the number of held balls is indicated on the first symbol display device 37. Both are also shown for the third symbol display device 81. Note that the number of reserved balls of the special symbol 1 and the special symbol 2 is shown in the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 in an identifiable display mode. As will be described in detail later, the 3rd symbol display device 81 is configured to make it easier for the player to identify the number of reserved balls, the variation display mode of special symbols, the determination result, etc. than the 1st symbol display device 37. The normal player is configured to play a game while viewing the display mode of the third symbol display device 81.

  When the variable display is finished in the first symbol display device 37, if the number of reserved balls for the first winning port 64 or the second winning port 640 remains, the lottery of the next special symbol is performed and the lottery The variable display according to is started. Although details will be described later, in the present embodiment, the number of reserved balls in the second winning port 640 has priority over the number of held balls in the first winning port 64, and the special symbol 2 is drawn. The variable display corresponding to the lottery is started. Therefore, the lottery with respect to the reserved ball of the first winning port 64 is configured to be executed when there is no reserved ball at the second winning port 640. While the change of the special symbol 2 is being executed, the change of the special symbol 1 is not executed. That is, the special symbol 1 and the special symbol 2 are configured such that there is no period that varies at the same time.

  In the present embodiment, the special symbol 1 and the special symbol 2 are configured not to vary at the same time. However, the present invention is not limited thereto, and the special symbol 1 and the special symbol 2 may be configured to vary simultaneously. By configuring in this way, more games can be drawn in a short time and the determination result can be displayed, so that the game can be played more time-efficiently.

  Here, as shown in FIG. 2, the second winning opening 640 restricts the entrance to the entrance and the open state where the game ball can be guided to the entrance to the entrance where the game ball enters. It has the electrically-driven accessory 640a provided with the blade | wing member which can be rotated in the closed state to perform. The electric accessory 640a is operated for a predetermined time from the closed state to the open state based on the winning (winning) of a normal symbol (second symbol) described later. In addition, normally, it is held in an upright state so as to prevent the entry of game balls from both sides of the entrance, so that the game balls are prevented from entering between the blade members. A first winning opening 64 is arranged. Therefore, the second winning opening 640 is normally configured so as to be able to enter the ball only when the electric accessory 640a is activated. Therefore, normally, the game ball is configured to easily enter the first winning port 64, and the player plays the game by firing the game ball so as to enter the first winning port 64. It will be a thing.

  Note that the special prize opening 65a that is opened and closed when the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the special game state is provided immediately below the second prize opening 640. Therefore, during the special gaming state, the player hits a ball in an attempt to win the special winning opening 65a, so that many balls enter the first winning opening 64. Therefore, in most cases, while the pachinko machine 10 is transitioning to the special game state, the number of reserved balls for the first winning opening 64 becomes maximum (four times).

  On the other hand, in the normal symbol lottery performed for the passage of the ball in the through gate 67, whether or not the normal symbol is hit is determined. There are two types of normal symbol hits: a normal hit and a normal hit, and a long time in which the opening time and the number of releases increase. When the normal symbol is hit normally or for a long time, the electric accessory attached to the second prize opening 640 is opened a predetermined number of times for a predetermined time (for example, 0.2 seconds or 2 seconds), and the second prize opening 640 is obtained. The ball is easy to enter. That is, when a normal symbol is hit, it becomes easy for the ball to enter the second winning opening 640, and as a result, it becomes easy to draw a special symbol.

  In addition, when the normal symbol (the second symbol) is drawn, the normal symbol variation display is started on the second symbol display device 83, and after a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds or 30 seconds) has elapsed, A normal symbol indicating the lottery result is stopped and displayed. If the ball passes through the through gate 67 while the variable symbol display is being performed on the second symbol display device 83, the number of passages is retained up to four times, and the number of retained balls is displayed by the first symbol display device 37. In addition, the second symbol holding lamp 84 is also shown. When the variable display is completed in the second symbol display device 83, if the number of reserved balls for the through gate 67 remains, the next normal symbol lottery is performed and the variable display corresponding to the lottery is started. The

  As described above, there are two types of special jackpot types, “Big Jack A” and “Big Jack B”. In both cases of “big hit A” and “big hit B”, a special gaming state (16R big hit) with 16 rounds is set. Thereafter, when the jackpot is A, as a value added after the jackpot, the pachinko machine 10 is in a high probability state of the special symbol from the end of the jackpot until the start of the jackpot game of the next special symbol ( Move on to the special symbol). On the other hand, “hit B” has a higher probability of winning a normal symbol from the end of the jackpot until the special symbol lottery ends 100 times. Even in the high probability state, the probability of hitting the normal symbol is similarly set up.

  Here, the “high probability state of the special symbol” means a state where the special symbol jackpot probability is increased, that is, a so-called special symbol probability state (during special symbol change), in other words, the special gaming state (16R jackpot) ) Is a game state that is easy to shift to. On the other hand, a case that is not a “high probability state of a special symbol” is called a “low probability state of a special symbol”, which is a state in which the jackpot probability of the special symbol is lower than the probability variation state of the special symbol, that is, the normal symbol has a big hit probability (Special symbol normal state or low probability gaming state). In addition, “normal symbol time-short state” (ordinary symbol time short-time or short-time game state) is a game state in which the probability of hitting a normal symbol increases and the ball easily enters the second winning opening 640. Say. On the other hand, when it is not “normal symbol time-short state”, it is called “normal symbol normal state” (normal game state), and this is a normal symbol hit probability in a normal state, that is, a state in which the hit probability is lower than in short-time It shows that. Hereinafter, a period in which the pachinko machine 10 is in a high probability state of the special symbol after the special symbol jackpot ends is referred to as a special symbol probability change period.

  Further, in this embodiment, when the jackpot type is “big jackpot A”, the period from the end of the “big jackpot A” to the start of the next jackpot is set as the probability variation period. The period during which the special symbol lottery (such as 100 times or 100 times) is executed may be set as the probability variation period. Further, both “big hit A” and “big hit B” may be set to have a predetermined number of periods and a probability variation period. The probability variation period may naturally be a certain variation period for a predetermined time (2 minutes, 5 minutes, etc.).

  In the pachinko machine 10, when the initial setting is performed by turning on the power supply or the like, the pachinko machine 10 is always set to the “special symbol low probability state”. After that, when the special symbol is a big hit, the state shifts to the “high probability state of the special symbol” and also shifts to the “short time state of the normal symbol”.

  In addition, while the “high probability state of the special symbol” continues, if the jackpot of the special symbol becomes a new and the jackpot type is “jackpot A”, the “high probability state of the special symbol” It continues from the end of the jackpot of the new special symbol until the start of the next jackpot game.

  A first pattern provided with a plurality of light emitting diodes (hereinafter abbreviated as “LEDs”) 37a and a 7-segment display 37b as light emitting means on the upper right portion (right upper portion in FIG. 2) of the game area when viewed from the front. A display device 37 is provided. The first symbol display device 37 displays information corresponding to each control performed by the main control device 110 described later, and mainly displays the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. The plurality of LEDs 37a indicate whether or not the lottery of the special symbol 1 or the special symbol 2 performed in association with the ball entering the first winning port 64 or the second winning port 640 (starting winning) is being executed depending on the lighting state. By displaying the variation, the special symbol 1 (first symbol) or the special symbol 2 (first symbol) corresponding to the lottery result of the special symbol is displayed as a stop symbol after the variation is ended, The number of held balls, which is the number of balls that have not been changed (reserved balls) among the balls that have entered the first winning port 64 or the second winning port 640, is indicated by the lighting state.

  The ball enters the first winning port 64 or the second winning port 640 while the variation of the special symbol 1 (first symbol) or the special symbol 2 (first symbol) is being displayed on the first symbol display device 37. In the case of a ball, the number of entered balls is held up to a maximum of four times, and the number of held balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37 and also indicated by the third symbol display device 81. In the present embodiment, the ball entering the first winning port 64 and the second winning port 640 is configured to be held up to four times each, but the maximum number of holding times is limited to four times. Instead, it may be set to 3 times or less, or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times).

  The 7-segment display 37b displays the number of rounds that are a big hit and an error display. Note that the LEDs 37a are configured so that the emission colors (for example, red, green, and blue) of the respective LEDs are different, and depending on the combination of the emission colors, various gaming states of the pachinko machine 10 (high probability states of special symbols) And normal symbols, etc.). In addition, the LED 37a not only indicates whether the lottery result of the special symbol 1 or the special symbol 2 is a big hit as a stop symbol after the end of the fluctuation, but if it is a big hit, the jackpot type (big hit A, jackpot) A special symbol (first symbol) corresponding to B) is shown.

  Note that, for the special symbol 1 and the special symbol 2, separate dedicated LEDs 37a are respectively assigned for displaying the symbol and displaying the number of reserved balls. By comprising in this way, it can comprise so that a player can distinguish the special symbol 1 and the special symbol 2 more easily.

  The game area is provided with a plurality of general winning openings 63 through which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as winning balls when the balls win. In addition, a variable display device unit 80 is disposed in the central portion of the game area. The variable display device unit 80 is provided with a third symbol display device 81 composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply referred to as “display device”) and a second symbol display device 83 composed of LEDs. . The variable display device unit 80 is provided with a center frame 86 so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81.

  The third symbol display device 81 performs a decorative display according to the display of the first symbol display device 37. For example, when a ball enters the first winning port 64 or the second winning port 640 (start winning), a special symbol (first first) corresponding to the starting port entered in the first symbol display device 37 is triggered by the ball. Variation display of symbols is executed. Further, in the third symbol display device 81, the variation display of the third symbol corresponding to the variation display of the special symbol is performed in synchronization with the variation display of the special symbol.

  The third symbol display device 81 is composed of a large liquid crystal display of 8 inch size, and the display contents are controlled by a display control device 114 described later, for example, three symbols of left, middle and right A column is displayed. Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols, and these symbols are vertically scrolled for each symbol row so that the third symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. In the present embodiment, the display of the gaming state accompanying the control of the main control device 110 is performed on the first symbol display device 37, whereas the third symbol display device 81 displays on the first symbol display device 37. Corresponding decorative display is performed. Instead of the display device, for example, the third symbol display device 81 may be configured using a reel or the like.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 40, the display content of the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81 is demonstrated. FIG. 40 is a diagram for explaining the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, and FIG. 40 (a) is a diagram schematically showing the area division setting and the effective line setting of the display screen, FIG. 40B is a diagram illustrating an actual display screen.

  The third symbol is composed of the main symbols of the numbers “0” to “9”. Moreover, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the special symbol lottery result performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 49) described later is a big hit, the variable display in which the same main symbols are aligned is performed. The jackpot is configured to occur after the change display is finished. On the other hand, when the lottery result of the special symbol is out of place, the variable display in which the same main symbols are not arranged is performed.

  For example, if the lottery result of the special symbol is “big hit A”, a variable display is performed in which the main symbols of “1, 3, 5, 7, 9”, which are odd numbers, are stopped and displayed together. Further, if “big hit B”, the variable display in which the main symbols of “0, 2, 4, 6, 8” which are even numbers are aligned is performed.

  As shown in FIG. 40 (a), the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is roughly divided into two parts vertically, and the upper 2/3 is the main display area Dm in which the third symbol is variably displayed, and the others. The lower third is a sub display area Ds for displaying a notice effect, a character, the number of reserved balls, and the like.

  The main display area Dm is divided into three display areas Dm1 to Dm3 of left, middle, and right, and three symbol rows Z1, Z2, and Z3 are displayed in the three display areas Dm1 to Dm3, respectively. In each symbol row Z1 to Z3, the above-described third symbols are displayed in a prescribed order. That is, the main symbols are arranged in ascending numerical order in the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, and the symbols are scrolled from top to bottom with periodicity for each symbol row Z1 to Z3. The approximate center of the main display area Dm is set as the active line L1, and in each game, the third symbol is stopped on the active line L1 in the order of the left symbol row Z1, the right symbol row Z3, and the middle symbol row Z2. Is displayed. If the combination of jackpot symbols (the same main symbol combination in this embodiment) is arranged on the effective line L1 when the third symbol is stopped, a jackpot moving image is displayed as a jackpot.

  On the other hand, the sub display area Ds is horizontally long below the main display area Dm, and is further equally divided into three small areas Ds1 to Ds3 in the left-right direction. Among these, the small area Ds1 is an area for displaying the number of reserved balls, which is the number of balls that have not been changed among the balls that have entered the first winning opening 64 (reserved balls), and the small area Ds2 is The area for displaying the notice effect image, and the small area Ds3 is the area for displaying the number of reserved balls, which is the number of balls (reserved balls) that have not been changed among the balls that have entered the second winning opening 640. It is.

  On the actual display screen, as shown in FIG. 40B, a total of three main symbols of the third symbol are stopped and displayed in the main display area Dm. In the case of variable display, in addition to the main symbols displayed at the center, the main symbols arranged before and after the main symbol are displayed so as to be visible, so a total of nine main symbols are displayed at the maximum. In some cases. In the sub display area Ds, one “●” symbol is displayed for one reserved ball, and the reserved symbols corresponding to up to four reserved balls for each of the special symbol 1 and the special symbol 2 are displayed. Is displayed. That is, a maximum of eight reserved symbols are displayed in the sub display area Ds.

  In the present embodiment, the same reserved symbol (design) is used for the special symbol 1 and the special symbol 2, but this is not restrictive. For symbol 2, the symbol “□” may be displayed.

  Thereby, the reserved balls of the first winning port 64 and the second winning port 640, that is, the reserved balls of the special symbol 1 and the special symbol 2 can be displayed easily. In addition, since the display mode of the holding ball that has entered the second winning opening 640 is displayed differently depending on the type of the normal symbol, the player can easily determine that the holding ball has been generated for a long time. be able to.

  In the present embodiment, the main display area Dm and the sub display area Ds of the third symbol display device 81 include not only the above-described main symbols, reserved symbols, etc., but also a notice display such as a character display or a character, A display of the number of fluctuations is displayed as appropriate. In addition, when the reserved symbol is not displayed, the number of reserved balls is 0, that is, there is no reserved ball.

  In the present embodiment, the ball entering the first winning opening 64 is configured to be held up to 4 times, but the maximum number of balls to be held is not limited to 4 times, but 3 times or less. Alternatively, the number may be set to 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). Further, instead of displaying the reserved ball number symbol in the small area Ds1 or the small area Ds3, the reserved ball number is a number in a part of the third symbol display device 81, or the area divided into four is the reserved ball number. You may make it display in the aspect (for example, a color and a lighting pattern) which changes only by the part. Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37, the number of reserved balls may not be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Furthermore, the variable display device unit 80 may be provided with four hold lamps indicating the number of held balls, corresponding to the maximum number of held balls, and the number of held balls may be displayed according to the number of held lamps that are lit.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 41 to FIG. 44, a display mode of the hold effect performed in the third symbol display device 81 will be described. The second embodiment is configured to notify the game success / failure determination result and the selected variation pattern type by variably displaying the display mode of the special symbol 1 or the special symbol 2 on hold. . In the present embodiment, a normal holding effect as shown in FIG. 41 and eight effects as shown in FIG. 42 are set. As for the normal holding effect, as shown in FIGS. 41A to 41B, when the holding number is less than 8, one of the holding symbols is changed to a symbol displayed as “push”. It is displayed (FIG. 41 (a)). When the player presses the frame button 22 after being variably displayed on the symbol displayed as “push”, the symbol is variably displayed as a “Δ” symbol (see FIG. 41B).

  In this embodiment, when a reserved symbol for which super reach is selected is stored in the stored reserved symbol, or when a reserved symbol for which the determination result is true is stored, the normal reserved symbol is executed by lottery. When a lottery is selected, the reserved symbol is variably displayed as a “push” symbol as shown in FIG. The “push” symbol is a notification hold symbol that informs the player to press (operate) the frame button 22. As long as the frame button 22 is not pressed, the notification hold symbol is displayed while the display state of the notification hold symbol is maintained until the change of the hold symbol starts.

  In the present embodiment, the notification hold symbol is displayed until the fluctuation starts. However, the notification hold symbol may be displayed only for a certain period of time. In addition, the normal holding effect is configured to be executed by lottery when the holding symbol that is a super reach is stored and when the holding symbol that is a big hit is stored, but not limited to that, other than that Even in the case of (for example, normal reach, losing, etc.), it may be configured to be executed by lottery. Various symbols may be set that are displayed variably from the notification pending symbol, and the determination result or reach type may be notified based on the symbol type or color. Further, by configuring the normal holding effect so that it is easy to be drawn when the determination result is a big hit, it is possible to expect a big hit when the normal holding effect is displayed.

  Next, eight effects will be described with reference to FIG. In the present embodiment, when the number of holdings reaches the maximum of eight, whether or not to perform eight effects (see FIGS. 42A to 42B) using all eight holding symbols is drawn, When it is determined that eight effects are to be executed, as shown in FIG. 42 (a), all the reserved symbols are variably displayed as the “push” symbols. Then, on the right end, a notification mode (notification mode that is not a reserved symbol) in which the characters “Please press!” Are displayed, and it is configured to prompt the user to press the frame button 22.

  When the player presses the frame button 22 during the period in which these eight effects are being executed, the notification suspension symbol is changed into characters and displayed one by one as shown in FIG. Here, each time the frame button 22 is pressed once, one notification hold symbol is variably displayed. The variable order is configured so as to be changed in order from the notification suspension symbol displayed on the left.

  It is determined whether or not the eight effects are to be executed by lottery when the stored memory for super-reach and the stored memory for which the determination result is a big hit is stored in the stored eight stored symbols. Is done.

  In the eight-holding effect, a notification is executed to the player by characters using eight holding symbols. Specifically, when the word “big hit !!!!!” is displayed, it is informed that there is a hold memory in which the determination result is a big hit in the eight hold memories (it is determined that a big hit will be confirmed). doing. On the other hand, if the word “big hit !!!!!” is displayed, there is a possibility that the reserved memory that is a big hit is stored in the eight reserved memories (the big hit is in the eight reserved memories). That it is unconfirmed that the hold storage is stored).

  With this configuration, when the player presses the frame button 22 once after the eight effect notification hold symbols are displayed, the leftmost notification hold symbol is changed to “large” and displayed. Is done. By displaying this character, the player first expects the “big hit” character, and then presses the frame button 22. Here, when “NO” is displayed, it is expected that the character “RI” will be displayed by pressing the frame button 22 next. In this way, seven notification hold symbols are variably displayed, and when the word “big hit !!!!” is displayed, the last remaining notification hold symbol (the rightmost hold symbol) is “!”. The expectation to the jackpot will be high that it will be variable. Thereafter, when the player operates the frame button 22, the player can determine the notification result. As described above, in the eight-holding effect, each time the frame button 22 is pressed, the game can be performed while expecting the next displayed character, and the player can be entertained.

  Furthermore, in this embodiment, even if the holding ball is digested and starts to change, the remaining notification hold symbols that are changed by the eight effects are maintained and displayed, so that the player can display the remaining notification hold symbols. It is possible to predict what character (informing mode) has been set from the character.

  In the present embodiment, since it is configured so that an effect that is advantageous to the player is executed by storing eight holds, it is possible to cause the player to play a game so that more reserved balls are stored. Can do. Specifically, when a variation pattern with a long variation time such as super reach (a high expectation for jackpots) is selected, the player may stop playing the game ball and play a game. However, since it is also a period during which the reserved balls are easy to accumulate, it is possible for the player to play the game without stopping the launch of the game ball so that the eight effects are executed even if it is off. it can.

  Moreover, you may comprise so that eight presentation may be performed for the fixed time after eight presentations are performed, if eight reservation balls are memorize | stored. By configuring in this way, it is possible to allow the player to continue playing the game ball and to play the game so as to generate more reserved balls.

  Moreover, you may comprise so that the alerting | reporting aspect (character to be displayed) determined at the timing when eight production | presentation was performed may be changed with the determination result, when a new holding ball generate | occur | produces. By configuring in this way, it is possible to provide pleasure for the player to determine the timing for changing the notification suspension symbol.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 43 to 44, the composite display effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the second embodiment will be described. Synthetic display effect means that when the reach display mode is selected, the secondary symbol (blank symbol “△”) is changed to the “push” symbol after the main symbol that is out of the middle symbol is temporarily stopped. After that, the “push” symbol moves to the center of the third symbol display device 81 and is variably displayed as a “push” symbol having a larger size. Thereafter, when the player presses the frame button 22, the combination of the main symbols indicating the determination result is displayed again. Specifically, if the determination result is a win, it is displayed in a combination indicating a big hit such as “777”. On the other hand, if it is off, it is displayed with a symbol indicating the off, such as “717”.

  FIG. 43A shows a state in which the variation pattern of the composite display mode is displayed, the reach display mode is “7” symbol, and the middle symbol is variably displayed. Except for the variation pattern of the composite display mode, when reaching reach, the middle symbol is displayed in a variable manner (dynamic display) beyond the reach symbol. That is, the reach symbol is scrolled once through the reach effective line. However, the variation pattern of the composite display mode is set so that the reach symbol is temporarily stopped before passing through the reach effective line. That is, the reach period is set shorter than the normal reach display mode.

  As shown in FIG. 43 (b), after the “5” symbol before the reach symbol stops at the reach effective line, the sub-arrangement placed between the left symbol row and the main symbol in the right symbol row three seconds later. The symbol (blank symbol “Δ”) is variably displayed as a notification symbol of “push” symbol. Among the variation patterns of the composite display mode, the variation pattern of the pseudo composite display mode is configured not to be changed to the composite display mode from the case of being changed to the notification symbol. In this case, when the frame button 22 is pressed, an effect of changing the “5” symbol of the stopped middle symbol again is executed.

  On the other hand, in the variation pattern changed to the composite display mode, as shown in FIG. 44A, the “push” symbol is “5” symbol of the middle symbol string displayed in the central portion of the third symbol display device 81. It moves and is displayed. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 44B, the “5” symbol is covered and a large “push” symbol is displayed. The variation pattern of the composite display mode in which the large “push” symbol is displayed is configured to be very easily selected when the result of the determination is a big hit, so that the player can display the composite display mode. , Have high expectations for jackpots.

  Next, the time effect in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. The time effect is changed to a dedicated background image set in advance for a predetermined time (in this embodiment, 5 minutes) every predetermined time (fixed period) after the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 10. This is an effect mode to be executed. In the present embodiment, the timer unit 292 configured by an RTC (real time clock) is provided, and the internal power source (battery in the present embodiment) dedicated to the timer unit 292 is provided. Timekeeping can be continued even in a state where no supply is made. Here, when the pachinko machine 10 is manufactured, by setting the same time (for example, the current time) in the time measuring means and manufacturing the pachinko machine 10, it is configured to supply power to the plurality of pachinko machines 10 at the same time. The same input time information can be acquired between the pachinko machines 10. With this configuration, the time effect can be executed in synchronization between the plurality of pachinko machines 10.

  FIG. 45 is a timing chart showing the timing for executing the time effect period. When the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, the current time information is measured by the time measuring means 292 by the time setting process (FIG. 69, S1214) in the start-up process (see FIG. 68) executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 described later. Obtained from. Based on the acquired time information, a time effect period (effect mode B) is set after 55 minutes have elapsed. It should be noted that the normal gaming machine period (effect mode A) is set as the period until the time effect period is set. The time effect period is normally set to 5 minutes, and when the 5 minutes have elapsed, the normal game period is set.

  Here, when the time production period of 5 minutes elapses, it is determined whether a holding memory stored at that time or a special symbol that is fluctuating is set so that the determination result is a big hit, and a big hit is obtained. If a thing is set, the time effect extension period (effect mode C) is set by the time until the change ends.

  FIG. 46A is a diagram showing an example of the display form of the time effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the remaining time in the time effect period is 180 seconds. During the time effect period, the background image is a display mode in which a dedicated school of fish is displayed.

  FIG. 46B is a diagram showing an example of a display mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the remaining time in the time effect period is 3 seconds. In the example of FIG. 46 (b), the actual third symbol is reduced and variably displayed at the lower right of the display area of the third symbol display device 81. And the effect design similar to the 3rd design is stopped and displayed in the display mode which showed the detachment. In this case, the effect symbol is displayed in a slightly shaken manner to notify that it is not completely stopped and displayed. In this way, the end timing of the time effect period and the change stop timing of the third symbol are rarely matched, but by switching to the effect symbol and displaying it as if the third symbol was stopped and displayed. It is possible to make it seem as if the third symbol is stopped and displayed at the same timing as other pachinko machines 10. The effect symbol is also displayed when the stop timing of the third symbol coincides with the time effect period. By comprising in this way, the display mode at the time of completion | finish of a time production period becomes constant, and it can suppress making a player feel uncomfortable.

  When the effect symbol is stopped and displayed 3 seconds before the remaining period, as shown in FIG. 47A, a sign display mode is displayed in which the effect symbol is displayed with slight shaking for the remaining 3 seconds. Then, after the word “super fish school time” indicating that it is a time effect period, a notification mode, which is a timing of whether or not to be extended, “end?” Is displayed. After that, when the time effect extension period is set, as shown in FIG. 47 (b), the text “Super fish time extension!” Notifying that the time effect period has been extended is displayed, and the background image of the fish school. Is displayed again. In this case, the effect symbol starts to be displayed simultaneously with the start of the extension, and the player is notified that the variation of the new special symbol has started. Further, since the extended period is a period until the fluctuation display that is a big hit is completed, the remaining time is displayed (115 seconds in the example of FIG. 47B).

  In this embodiment, when the time effect period is extended, the hold effect that is a big hit is set or when the change has already started (being changed), the time effect is extended. This means that the player 4a is notified of the jackpot. Here, in the time effect period, the same effect is executed in synchronism between the same pachinko machines 10, and an effect indicating whether the extension period is set at the same timing (see FIG. 47A) is displayed. Is done. Thereby, it can be determined that the pachinko machine 10 for which the extension period is set is a big hit from other players, and the gambling feelings of other players can be obtained.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 48, when the extension effect is not set, the characters “Super fish school time end !!” are displayed to notify that the time effect period has ended. Thereafter, when the third symbol is changing, the effect symbol is displayed in a stopped state after being displayed for the same time variation as the remaining variation time of the third symbol. From the next change, the reduced display of the third symbol is canceled, and the third symbol is changed and displayed in the normal size. By comprising in this way, even when a time production period is complete | finished, it can suppress giving discomfort to a player. On the other hand, when the timing at which the third symbol is stopped and displayed coincides with the end timing of the time effect period, the reduced display of the third symbol is canceled and displayed from the start of the next fluctuation.

  Note that if the change has already ended at the end timing of the time effect period and no hold memory is stored, the precursor effect is not executed.

  In the present embodiment, the condition for setting the extension is a jackpot. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and there may be a case where a holding storage for selecting a variation pattern to be a super reach is set. You may comprise so that it may be set when winning by lottery.

  Returning to FIG. 2, the description will be continued. The second symbol display device 83 variably displays by indicating whether or not the normal symbol lottery performed as the ball passes through the through gate 67 is being executed, and stops after the variation ends. As a symbol, a normal symbol (second symbol) corresponding to the lottery result of the normal symbol is indicated by a lighting state.

  More specifically, in the second symbol display device 83, every time the sphere passes through the through gate 67, a variable display that alternately turns on the symbol “◯” and the symbol “x” as the second symbol is displayed. Done. In the pachinko machine 10, when the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 stops at a predetermined symbol (in this embodiment, a symbol “◯”), the electric accessory 640a associated with the second winning opening 640 is activated for a predetermined time. As a result, the second winning opening 640 is easily put into a ball. The number of passes through which the ball has passed through the through gate 67 is held up to 4 times, and the number of held balls is displayed on the first symbol display device 37 and also lit on the second symbol hold lamp 84. Four second symbol holding lamps 84 are provided corresponding to the maximum number of holdings, and are arranged symmetrically below the third symbol display device 81.

  The normal symbol (second symbol) variable display is performed by switching on and off of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device 83 as in the present embodiment, as well as the first symbol display device 37. Alternatively, a part of the third symbol display device 81 may be used. Similarly, the second symbol holding lamp 84 may be turned on by a part of the third symbol display device 81. In addition, the passage of the ball in the through gate 67 is not limited to four times, like the first winning port 64 and the second winning port 640, and is not limited to four times, or three times or less. The number of times (for example, 8 times) may be set. Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37, the second symbol reservation lamp 84 may not perform lighting display.

  Below the variable display unit 80, a first winning port 64 and a second winning port 640 through which a ball can enter are disposed. When a ball enters the first winning port 64 and the second winning port 640, a first entrance switch and a second entrance switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 are turned on. When the first entrance switch and the second entrance switch are turned on, the main controller 110 draws the special symbol 1 and the special symbol 2 and displays the first symbol display device 37 according to the lottery result. LED 37a. Further, the first winning port 64 and the second winning port 640 are also one of the winning ports through which five balls are paid out as winning balls when a ball enters.

  In this embodiment, the number of winning balls when entering the first winning port 64 and the second winning port 640 is the same. However, the number is not limited to this, and the number of different winning balls may be used. For example, when entering the first prize opening 64, the number of prize balls for the second prize opening 640 is given as three prize balls, and when entering the second prize slot 640, four prize balls It is also possible to set more than the number of prize balls for one winning opening 64.

  On the other hand, when the number of winning balls in the second winning port 640 is set to be smaller than that of the first winning port 64, it is possible to design so that more game balls are won in the second winning port 640 during the probability change period or in a shorter time. Thus, the number of reserved balls of the special symbol 2 can be maintained at a higher number, and an efficient game can be performed. Therefore, it is possible to shorten the game time of the probability variation period during the time saving, and to increase the sales at the game store side.

  A variable winning device 65 is disposed below the second winning port 640, and a horizontally-long rectangular specific winning port (large opening) 65a is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. In the pachinko machine 10, when the special symbol lottery performed by the main controller 110 is a big win, the LED 37a of the first symbol display device 37 is turned on so that the big win is stopped after a predetermined time (fluctuation time) has elapsed. In addition, a stop symbol of the third symbol corresponding to the jackpot is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 to indicate the occurrence of the jackpot. Thereafter, the game state transitions to a special game state (16 rounds of big hit) in which a larger amount of prize balls are paid out than usual. In this special gaming state, the special winning opening 65a that is normally closed is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds have elapsed or ten balls have been won).

  The specific winning opening 65a is closed when a predetermined time elapses, and after the closing, the specific winning opening 65a is opened again for a predetermined time. The opening / closing operation of the specific winning opening 65a can be repeated 16 times (16 rounds). The state in which the opening / closing operation is performed is a form of a special gaming state advantageous to the player, and the player is given out a larger amount of prize balls than usual in order to give a gaming value (game value). Is done.

  Specifically, the variable winning device 65 is a horizontally long rectangular opening / closing plate covering the specific winning opening 65a, and a large opening opening solenoid (not shown) for driving to open / close forward with the lower side of the opening / closing plate as an axis. And. The special winning opening 65a is normally closed so that the ball cannot win or is difficult to win. In the case of a big hit, the large opening opening solenoid is driven to tilt the opening / closing plate to the lower front side to temporarily form an open state in which the ball is likely to win the specific winning opening 65a. It operates to repeat the state and the state alternately.

  Note that the special gaming state is not limited to the above-described form. When the game area is provided with a large opening that is opened and closed separately from the specific winning opening 65a, and the LED 37a corresponding to the jackpot is turned on in the first symbol display device 37, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time, and the specific winning opening A special gaming state is defined as a game state in which a large opening provided separately from the specific winning port 65a is opened for a predetermined time and a predetermined number of times when the ball 65 is opened into the specific winning port 65a. You may make it form.

  Adhesive spaces K1, K2 for adhering certificate papers, identification labels, etc. are provided at the left and right corners on the lower side of the game board 13, and the certificate paper, etc., adhered to the adhesive space K1, is a front frame 14. It can be visually recognized through the small window 35 (see FIG. 1).

  Further, the game board 13 is provided with an out port 66. A ball that has not entered any of the winning openings 63, 64, 65a is guided through an out port 66 to a ball discharge path (not shown). A number of nails are planted on the game board 13 in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the ball, and various members (instruments) such as a windmill are arranged.

  As shown in FIG. 3, control board units 90 and 91 and a back pack unit 94 are mainly provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 10. The control board unit 90 is unitized by mounting a main board (main control apparatus 110), an audio lamp control board (audio lamp control apparatus 113), and a display control board (display control apparatus 114). The control board unit 91 is unitized by mounting a payout control board (payout control apparatus 111), a firing control board (launching control apparatus 112), a power supply board (power supply apparatus 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

  The back pack unit 94 includes a back pack 92 and a dispensing unit 93 that form a protective cover. In addition, each control board is used for MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each control, a port for communicating with various devices, a random number generator used for various lotteries, time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generation circuit or the like is mounted as necessary.

  The main control device 110, the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the payout control device 111 and the firing control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. . The board boxes 100 to 104 include a box base and a box cover that covers the opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are connected to each other, and each control device and each board are accommodated.

  Further, the substrate box 100 (main control device 110) and the substrate box 102 (dispensing control device 111 and launch control device 112) connect the box base and the box cover so that they cannot be opened by a sealing unit (not shown) (caulking structure). Consolidated). In addition, a seal (not shown) is attached to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover so as to cover the box base and the box cover. This seal seal is made of a brittle material. If the seal is to be peeled off in order to open the substrate boxes 100, 102, or if the substrate boxes 100, 102 are forcibly opened, the box base side and the box cover are removed. Cut to the side. Therefore, it is possible to know whether or not the substrate boxes 100 and 102 have been opened by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal.

  The payout unit 93 includes a tank 130 that is located at the top of the back pack unit 94 and opens upward, a tank rail 131 that is connected to the lower side of the tank 130 and is gently inclined toward the downstream side, and downstream of the tank rail 131. A case rail 132 that is vertically connected to the side, and a payout device 133 that is provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and that pays out a ball by a predetermined electrical configuration of the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 49). ing. The tank 130 is successively replenished with balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall, and a required number of balls are paid out by the payout device 133 as appropriate. A vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131.

  The payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the firing control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor operation knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erase switch 122. The state return switch 120 is operated, for example, to eliminate ball clogging (return to a normal state) when a payout error occurs, such as ball clogging in the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 49). The operation knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on to return the pachinko machine 10 to the initial state.

<About the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10>
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 49 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

  The main controller 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer that is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 202 that stores various control programs executed by the MPU 201 and fixed value data, and a memory that temporarily stores various data when the control program stored in the ROM 202 is executed. A certain RAM 203 and various other circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are incorporated. Various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device by the data transmission / reception circuit in order to instruct the sub control device such as the payout control device 111 and the sound lamp control device 113 to operate. Such a command is transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sub controller only in one direction.

  In main controller 110, special symbol lottery, normal symbol lottery, display setting on first symbol display device 37, display setting on second symbol display device 83, and display setting on third symbol display device 81 The main processing of the pachinko machine 10 is executed. The RAM 203 is provided with various counters for controlling these processes. Here, with reference to FIG. 52, a counter and the like provided in the RAM 203 of the main controller 110 will be described. These counters, etc., are a special symbol lottery, a normal symbol lottery, a display setting on the first symbol display device 37, a display setting on the second symbol display device 83, and a display setting on the third symbol display device 81. For example, the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 is used.

  In order to select a special symbol lottery and the first symbol random number counter C1 used for the special symbol lottery and the special symbol lottery for setting the display of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 The first hit type counter C2 used for the initial value, the initial value random number counter CINI1 used for setting the initial value of the first hit random number counter C1, and the change type counter CS1 used for change pattern selection are used. In addition, the second random number counter C4 is used for lottery of normal symbols, and the second initial random number counter CINI2 is used for setting the initial value of the second random number counter C4. Each of these counters is a loop counter that adds 1 to the previous value every time it is updated and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

  Each counter is updated, for example, at an interval of 2 milliseconds, which is the execution interval of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 58), and some counters are updated irregularly in the main process (see FIG. 67). Then, the updated value is appropriately stored in a counter buffer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 203. The RAM 203 stores a special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a composed of four reserved areas (holding first to fourth areas) for storing a special symbol 1 reserved ball and a special symbol 2 reserved ball. The special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b composed of the four reserved areas (holding first to fourth areas) is provided, and the special symbol reserved ball execution area common to the special symbol 1 and the special symbol 2 is provided. Is provided. In each area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, the values of the first per-random number counter C1 and the first per-type counter C2 are stored in accordance with the timing of entering the first winning opening 64. Similarly, in each area of the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b, the same value is stored in accordance with the timing of entering the second winning opening 640.

  In addition, the RAM 203 is provided with a normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c including one execution area and four holding areas (holding first to fourth areas). The value of the second per-random number counter C4 is stored in accordance with the timing of passing through the gate 67.

  Next, each counter will be described in detail with reference to FIG. The first per-random number counter C1 is incremented by 1 within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 299) and reaches 0 after reaching the maximum value (for example, 299 for a counter that can take a value of 0 to 299). It is the composition which returns to. In particular, when the first random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the first random number counter C1.

  The initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the first random number counter C1. That is, for example, when the first random number counter C1 is a loop counter that can take a value of 0 to 299, the initial value random number counter CINI1 is also a loop counter in the range of 0 to 299. The initial value random number counter CINI1 is updated once every time the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 58) is executed, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 57).

  The value of the first random number counter C1 is updated, for example, periodically (in this embodiment, once for each timer interrupt process), and the RAM 203 at the timing when the ball wins the first winning port 64 or the second winning port 640. Are stored in the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a. The random number value that is a special symbol jackpot is set by a special symbol jackpot random number table (not shown) stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110, and the value of the first random number counter C1 is the special symbol jackpot random number table C1. When it matches with the value of the random number that becomes the jackpot set by the symbol jackpot random number table, it is determined that the jackpot of the special symbol. In addition, this special symbol jackpot random number table is used for special symbols at low probability (period when the special symbol is in a low probability state), and at high probability (special symbols) that have a higher probability of winning a special symbol than that low probability. The period of a high probability state) is divided into two types, and the number of random numbers that are jackpots included in each is set differently. In this way, by changing the number of random numbers that are jackpots, the probability of jackpots is changed between when the special symbol has a low probability and when the special symbol has a high probability. A special symbol jackpot random number table (not shown) for a special symbol with a high probability and a special symbol jackpot random number table (not shown) for a special symbol with a low probability are stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110. Is provided.

  The first hit type counter C2 determines the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 when the special symbol is a big hit, and increments one by one within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 99). Then, after reaching the maximum value (for example, 99 in the case of a counter that can take a value of 0 to 99), it returns to 0. The value of the first hit type counter C2 is updated, for example, periodically (in this embodiment, once for each timer interrupt process), and the special symbol 1 in the RAM 203 is held at the timing when the ball wins the first winning port 64. It is stored in the sphere storage area 203a.

  Here, if the value of the first per-random number counter C1 stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a is not a random number that is a big hit of the special symbol, that is, if it is a random number that is out of the special symbol, The display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed on the one symbol display device 37 is the one when the special symbol is off.

  On the other hand, if the value of the first per-random number counter C1 stored in the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a is a random number that is a big hit of the special symbol, it corresponds to the stop symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37. The display mode is that of the special symbol jackpot. In this case, the specific display mode at the time of the big hit is the display mode indicated by the value of the first hit type counter C2 stored in the same special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a. In the present embodiment, two types of jackpot types, “jackpot A” and “jackpot B”, are set, and either the “jackpot A” or “jackpot B” is set by the first jackpot type counter C2. Is determined. A display mode indicating the jackpot type is displayed on the first symbol display device 37 as a jackpot symbol.

  The first random number counter C1 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a 2-byte loop counter in the range of 0 to 299. In the first per random number counter C1, there are three random numbers that are big hits of the special symbol when the special symbol has a low probability, and the random value “7, 107, 282” is a special symbol for the low probability. Stored in the jackpot random number table. Thus, when the special symbol has a low probability, the total number of random numbers that are jackpots is 3 among the total number of random number values, and therefore, the probability that the special symbol is jackpot is “1/100”.

  On the other hand, when there is a high probability of a special symbol, there are 30 random numbers that are jackpots of the special symbol, which are “4, 11, 28, 38, 45, 52, 64, 78, 83, 99, 106, 112, 122, 134, 140, 151, 168, 176, 183, 197, 207, 218, 222, 231, 249, 256, 263, 270, 285, 299 "is a special symbol jackpot random number table for high probability. Stored in Thus, when the special symbol has a high probability, the total number of random numbers that are jackpots is 30 among the total number of random number values, so the probability that the special symbol is jackpot is “1/10”.

  In the present embodiment, the random number value that is a jackpot stored in the special symbol jackpot random number table for the low probability time, and the random number value that is the jackpot stored in the special symbol jackpot random number table for the high probability time In order to avoid duplicate values, random numbers for each jackpot are set. Here, if there is a value that is always used as a jackpot random number regardless of the situation of the pachinko machine 10, the random number value may be input from the outside, and the jackpot may be easily illegally assigned. On the other hand, as in this embodiment, depending on the situation (that is, depending on whether the pachinko machine 10 is in a high probability state of a special symbol or a low probability state of a special symbol), the random number value that is a jackpot is changed. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult to predict a random value that is a big hit of a special symbol, and thus it is possible to suppress fraud.

  Further, the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a loop counter in the range of 0-99. In the first jackpot type counter C2 set in the jackpot type selection table (not shown), the jackpot type when the random number value is “0 to 59” is “jackpot A”. The jackpot type when the value is “60 to 99” is “jackpot B”.

  As described above, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured such that two types of hit types (big hit A and big hit B) are determined based on the random number value indicated by the first hit type counter C2. The random value for determining the special symbol jackpot type from the value (random number value) of the first hit type counter C2 is set by the special symbol jackpot type table (see FIG. 52 (b)). The table is provided in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110.

  The variation type counter CS1 is, for example, incremented by 1 within a range of 0 to 198, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 198). The variation display counter CS1 determines rough display modes such as so-called short-time deviation, long-term deviation, normal reach, and super reach. Specifically, the determination of the display mode is determination of the variation time of the symbol variation. Based on the fluctuation time determined by the fluctuation type counter CS1, the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 determine the reach type of the third symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the detailed symbol variation mode. The The value of the variation type counter CS1 is updated once every time a main process (see FIG. 67) described later is executed once, and is repeatedly updated even within the remaining time in the main process. A variation pattern selection table 202d (not shown) that stores a random value that determines one variation time of symbol variation from the value (random number value) of the variation type counter CS1 is provided in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110. It has been.

  In the variation pattern selection table 202d, a variation pattern selection table for selecting a variation pattern dedicated to the special symbol 1 is set for each gaming state (normal gaming state, short-time gaming state, probability variation gaming state). In addition, although it demonstrates in detail by description about the selection of the fluctuation | variation pattern in the audio lamp control apparatus 113 mentioned later, in the main control apparatus 110, it is based on the determination result, the number of reservation balls, and the value of the fluctuation | variation classification counter CS1. Thus, the contents of the rough variation pattern (reach, super reach, non-reach, etc.) and the variation time are determined, and a variation pattern command indicating the determined content is set.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 52 (c), when the value of the second random number counter C4 acquired is any one of 5 to 20 at the low probability of the normal symbol, the normal symbol normal It is determined that it is a win. On the other hand, when the value of the acquired second random number counter C4 is any of 5 to 204 at the time of high probability of the normal symbol, it is determined that the normal symbol is normal.

  In this way, by changing the number of random numbers to be won, the probability of winning is changed between the low probability of the normal symbol and the high probability of the normal symbol. Therefore, when the probability is low, the frequency with which the electric accessory 640a is operated can be lowered, and the frequency of entering the second winning opening 640 can be reduced. Therefore, it is centered on entering the first winning opening 64, and the player's consumption of game balls can be increased, thereby increasing the profit on the game store side. On the other hand, in the short time and high probability period with high probability, the opportunity to operate the electric accessory 640a can be given with a probability of “1 / 1.2”, and the chance to enter the second winning opening 640 is increased. be able to. Therefore, it is possible to set a gaming state advantageous to the player while suppressing the player's consumption of the game ball. Therefore, a player can play a game aiming at a game with a high probability, and can play a game for a longer time.

  When the pachinko machine 10 has a low probability of a normal symbol, when the ball passes through the through gate 67, the value of the second random number counter C4 is acquired, and the variation display of the normal symbol is displayed on the second symbol display device 83. Is executed for 30 seconds. Then, if the value of the acquired second random number counter C4 is in the range of “5 to 28”, it is determined that the winning symbol is selected, and after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 ends, the stop symbol (second symbol) ), The symbol “○” is lit. Then, if the value of the second random number counter C4 is “5 to 20”, the second winning port 640 is opened for “0.2 seconds × 1 time” as a normal winning. In the present embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 is at a low probability of a normal symbol, the second winning opening 640 is opened only once for “0.2 seconds × 1” when the normal symbol is hit. The opening time and number of times may be set arbitrarily. For example, “0.5 seconds × 2 times” may be opened.

  On the other hand, when there is a high probability of a normal symbol, there are 200 random values that are jackpots of the normal symbol, and the range is “5-204”. These random number values are stored in a normal hit random number table 202c (see FIG. 53A) for high probability. Thus, when the special symbol has a low probability, the total number of random numbers that are jackpots is 200 among the total number of random number values, and therefore, the probability that the special symbol is jackpot is “1 / 1.2”.

  When the pachinko machine 10 has a high probability of a normal symbol, when the ball passes through the through gate 67, the value of the second random number counter C4 is acquired and the second symbol display device 83 displays the variation of the normal symbol. Is executed for 3 seconds. Then, if the acquired value of the second random number counter C4 is in the range of “5 to 204”, it is determined that the winning symbol is selected, and after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 ends, the stop symbol (second symbol) ), The symbol “◯” is lit and displayed, and the second winning opening 640 is opened “2 seconds × 2 times”. As described above, when the normal symbol has a high probability, the variation display time becomes “30 seconds → 3 seconds” as compared with the normal symbol having a low probability, and the release period of the second prize opening 640 is further reduced. Since “0.2 seconds × 1 time → 2 seconds × 2 times” is very long, it becomes easy for the ball to enter the second winning opening 640. In the present embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 has a high probability of a normal symbol, the second winning opening 640 is opened only “2 seconds × 2 times” when the normal symbol is hit. The number of times may be set arbitrarily. For example, “3 seconds × 3 times” may be opened.

  The second initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the second random number counter C4 (value = 0 to 239), and is updated once every timer interrupt process (see FIG. 58). And repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 67).

  As described above, the RAM 203 is provided with various counters and the like, and the main control device 110 performs the big win lottery and the display in the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 according to the value of the counter and the like. The main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as setting and lottery of the display result on the second symbol display device 83 can be executed.

  Returning to FIG. 49, the description will be continued. In addition to the various counters illustrated in FIG. 50, the RAM 203 stores a stack area for storing the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 201 and the return address of a control program executed by the MPU 201, various flags and counters, I / O, and the like. There is a work area (work area) in which the value is stored.

  Note that the RAM 203 is configured so that the backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 and the data can be retained (backed up) even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut off, and all data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

  When the power is shut down due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer and the value of each register when the power is shut off (including when the power failure occurs, the same applies hereinafter) are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, at the time of power-on (including power-on due to power failure cancellation, the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before power-off based on information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed when the power is shut off by the main process (see FIG. 67), and restoration of each value written in the RAM 203 is executed in a startup process (see FIG. 41) when the power is turned on. Note that the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 is input to the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 when the power is interrupted due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. Is input, the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 65) as a power failure process is immediately executed.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 51 (b), the RAM 203 has a special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, a special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b, a normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c, and a special symbol 1 reserved ball number. It has a counter 203d, a normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f, a time-shortage counter 203g, a probability variation flag 203h, and other memory areas 203z.

  The special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a has one execution area for the special symbol 1 and four holding areas (holding first area to holding fourth area). Each value of the per-random number counter C1, the first per-type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 is stored.

  More specifically, each value of each of the counters C1 to C3 is acquired at the timing when the ball wins the first winning opening 64 (start winning prize), and the acquired data is stored in four holding areas (holding first). Among the vacant areas (area to reserved fourth area), the areas are stored in order from the area with the smallest area number (first to fourth). That is, as the area number is smaller, the data corresponding to the winning that is older in time is stored, and the data corresponding to the winning that is older in time is stored in the first reserved area. If data is stored in all four reserved areas, nothing is newly stored.

  Thereafter, when the special controller lottery is performed in the main controller 110, the values of the counters C1 to C3 stored in the reserved first area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a are transferred to the execution area. Based on the values of the counters C1 to C3 that are shifted (moved) and stored in the execution area, a determination such as lottery of a special symbol is performed.

  Note that when the data is shifted from the reserved first area to the execution area, the reserved first area becomes empty. Therefore, a shift process is performed in which winning data stored in other reserved areas (holding second area to holding fourth area) is packed into a holding area having a smaller area number (holding first area to holding third area). Done. In the present embodiment, in the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, data is shifted only for the reserved areas (second reserved area to fourth reserved area) where winning data is stored. Further, the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b is different from the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a only in that it is a storage area corresponding to the special symbol 2.

  Similarly to the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c has one execution area and four reserved areas (holding first area to holding fourth area). In each of these areas, a second random number counter C4 is stored.

  More specifically, the value of the counter C4 is acquired at the timing when the ball passes through the through gate 67, and the acquired data is vacant in four reserved areas (holding first area to holding fourth area). Are stored in order from the area with the smallest area number (first to fourth). That is, as with the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, the data corresponding to the winning is stored while the winning order is maintained. If data is stored in all four reserved areas, nothing is newly stored.

  Thereafter, when the main controller 110 performs a lottery for the normal symbol, the value of the counter C4 stored in the first reserved area of the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c is shifted to the execution area ( Based on the value of the counter C4 stored in the execution area, a determination such as lottery for a normal symbol is performed.

  When the data is shifted from the reserved first area to the execution area, the reserved first area becomes empty, and as in the case of the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, the prizes stored in the other reserved areas are stored. A shift process is performed in which data is packed into a reserved area with an area number smaller by one. The data is also shifted only for the reserved area where the winning data is stored.

  The special symbol 1 reserved ball counter 203d is a variable symbol display (third symbol display) of the special symbol (first symbol) which is performed by the first symbol display device 37 based on the winning (start winning) at the first winning opening 64. It is a counter that counts the number of reserved balls (number of waiting times) of the variable display performed by the device 81 up to four times. The special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d has an initial value set to zero, and every time a ball enters the first winning port 64 and the number of held balls in variable display increases, the maximum value 4 is increased to 1. Addition is performed (see S404 in FIG. 61). On the other hand, the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is decremented by 1 every time a special symbol variation display is newly executed (see S307 in FIG. 60).

  The value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d (the number N1 of the variable display hold in the special symbol) is notified to the voice lamp control device 113 by the reserved ball number command. The reserved ball number command is a command transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113 every time the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is changed.

  The special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is a counter that counts the reserved balls based on winning in the second winning opening 640, and the other configurations are the same as the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d. Detailed description is omitted.

  The voice lamp control device 113 holds the variable display held in the main control device 110 by the hold ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110 every time the value of the special symbol 1 held ball number counter 203d is changed. The value of the number of spheres can be acquired. As a result, the number of held balls in the variable display managed by the special symbol held ball number counter 223b of the sound lamp control device 113 is the actual number of held balls in the variable display held in the main controller 110 due to the influence of noise or the like. Even if it is deviated from, the deviation can be corrected by the next number of reserved balls command received.

  The voice lamp control device 113 manages the number of held balls based on the number of held balls command, and each time the number of held balls changes, the display hold for notifying the display control device 114 of the number of held balls. Send the ball number command. The display control device 114 displays the reserved ball number symbol in the small area Ds1 of the third symbol display device 81 based on the reserved ball number notified by the display reserved ball number command.

  The normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f displays the number of held balls (the number of waiting times) of the normal symbol (second symbol) displayed on the second symbol display device 83 based on the passage of the ball in the through gate 67 up to four times. It is a counter that counts up to. The normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f has an initial value set to zero, and is incremented by 1 to a maximum value of 4 each time the ball passes through the through gate 67 and the number of held balls for fluctuation display increases. (See S704 in FIG. 64). On the other hand, the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is decremented by 1 every time a variation display of the normal symbol (second symbol) is newly executed (see S605 in FIG. 63).

  When the ball passes through the through gate 67, if the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f (the number M of the variable display hold in the normal symbol) is less than 4, the value of the second random number counter C4 is acquired. The acquired data is stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c (S705 in FIG. 64). On the other hand, when the ball passes through the left or right through gate 67, if the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is 4, nothing is newly stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c (FIG. 64, S703: No).

  The hour / minute counter 203g is a counter indicating whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal symbol hour / short state. If the hour / hour counter 203g is 1 or more, the pachinko machine 10 is in the ordinary symbol hour / short state. If the value of the hour / minute counter 203g is 0, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the normal symbol. At this time, the initial value of the short / medium counter 203g is set to zero, and a special symbol lottery is performed in the main controller 110, and a value corresponding to the jackpot type is set every time it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit. Is done. That is, when the special symbol is a big hit, a value corresponding to the jackpot type is newly set regardless of how many values of the hour / middle counter 203g are.

  The probability change flag 203h is a flag indicating that the game state is a probability change game state. When the probability variation gaming state is set as the gaming state, the probability variation flag 203h is set to ON. The probability variation flag 203h is set off when the big hit B is won. In the initialized state, it is set to off.

  An input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 via a bus line 204 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 205 has a payout control device 111, an audio lamp control device 113, a first symbol display device 37, a second symbol display device 83, a second symbol hold lamp 84, and a lower side of the opening / closing plate of the specific winning opening 65a. A solenoid 209 made up of a large opening solenoid for opening and closing the front side and a solenoid for driving an electric accessory is connected to the MPU 201 via the input / output port 205. Send.

  The input / output port 205 is connected to various switches 208 including a switch group and a sensor group (not shown) and a RAM erasure switch circuit 253 described later provided in the power supply device 115, and the MPU 201 is output from the various switches 208. And various processes are executed based on the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253.

  The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to perform payout control of prize balls and rental balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, includes a ROM 212 that stores a control program executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 213 that is used as a work memory or the like.

  The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area for storing the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211, the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211, and various flags and counters. And a work area (work area) in which values such as I / O are stored. The RAM 213 is configured to be able to retain (backup) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. As with the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, the power failure signal SG1 is also input to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is interrupted due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, an NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 65) as a power failure process is immediately executed.

  An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main control device 110, the payout motor 216, the firing control device 112, and the like are connected to the input / output port 215, respectively. Although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected to a prize ball detection switch for detecting a prize ball that has been paid out. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111 but is not connected to the main control device 110.

  The launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a so that the launch strength of the ball according to the rotational operation amount of the operation handle 51 is obtained when the main control device 110 gives an instruction to launch a ball. The ball launching unit 112a includes a launching solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the operation handle 51 is detected on the condition that the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51 and the stop switch 51b for stopping the ball firing is turned off (not operated). The firing solenoid is excited in accordance with the amount of rotation 51, and a ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51.

  The sound lamp control device 113 outputs sound in a sound output device (such as a speaker (not shown)) 226, outputs lighting and extinguishing in a lamp display device (lighting units 29 to 33, display lamp 34, and the like) 227, and variable effects (variation Display) and setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 performed by the display control device 114 such as a continuous notice effect. The MPU 221 that is an arithmetic unit includes a ROM 222 that stores a control program executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 223 that is used as a work memory or the like.

  An input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 including an address bus and a data bus. Main controller 110, display controller 114, audio output device 226, lamp display device 227, frame button 22 and the like are connected to input / output port 225, respectively.

  The voice lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, the background mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed, or the super-reach mode is used. The audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 are controlled so as to change the contents of the production, and the display control device 114 is instructed.

  The sound lamp control device 113 determines an error according to the command from the main control device 110 or the status of various devices connected to the sound lamp control device 113, and displays and controls the error command including the type of the error. To device 114. The display control device 114 performs control to display an error message image corresponding to the error type (for example, vibration error) indicated by the received error command on the third symbol display device 81 without delay.

  The ROM 222 of the sound lamp control device 113 stores a variation pattern selection table 222a as shown in FIG. Also, in the RAM 223 of the sound lamp control device 113, as shown in FIG. 53 (b), a winning information storage area 223a, a special symbol 1 reserved ball counter 223b, a special symbol 2 reserved ball counter 223c, a normal symbol reserved ball Number counter 223d, variation start flag 223e, stop type selection flag 223f, effect counter 223g, hold effect flag 223h, eight effect flags 223i, set time storage area 223j, effect mode storage area 223k, normal period flag 223m, start period flag 223o, extended effect flag 223p, extended effect time storage area 223q, button effect flag 223r, button effect counter 223s, and other memory area 223z are provided.

  The winning information storage area 223a is an area in which winning information is stored in correspondence with the holding ball based on a winning command output from the main control device 110. As the winning information, various kinds of information such as a determination result, a variation pattern, a stop type, and the like are set.

  The special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b is a storage area for storing the number of reserved balls of the special symbol 1 based on the reserved ball command. The special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c is a storage area for storing the number of reserved balls of the special symbol 2 based on the reserved ball number command.

  The normal symbol reserved ball number counter 223d is a storage area in which the number of reserved balls of the normal symbol is stored based on a hold ball command.

  The variation start flag 223e is a flag indicating that it is the timing to start variation of the third symbol.

  The stop type selection flag 223f is a flag indicating a stop type to be stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on a stop type command output from the main control device 110.

  The effect counter 223g is a counter used in the sound lamp control device 113 for determining various effects and details of variation patterns, various lotteries, and the like. This effect counter 223h is repeatedly updated in the main process in the range of 0 to 198.

  The hold effect flag 223h is a flag indicating that the normal hold effect is being executed. It is set to ON when the normal holding effect is executed, and is set to OFF based on the timing when the holding symbol starts to fluctuate.

  The eight effect flag 223i is a flag indicating that eight effects are being executed. It is set to ON based on the decision to execute the eight effects, and OFF based on the timing when the eighth reserved symbol displayed when the eight effects are executed starts to fluctuate. Is a flag set to

  The set time storage area 223i is a storage area in which time information for executing the time effect period is stored. In the set time storage area 223i, when the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, the time setting process (FIG. 69, S1214) in the start-up process (see FIG. 68) executed by the MPU 113 of the sound lamp control device 113 is performed. In S1222, information on the time effect period is set for 24 hours.

  The effect mode storage area 223k is a storage area in which information regarding the effect mode A, the effect mode B, and the effect mode C is stored (set). If the current production mode is the normal game period (outside the time production period), the production mode A is stored. If the current production mode is the time production period, the production mode B is stored. Mode C is stored.

  The normal period flag 223m is a flag indicating that the normal game period is started. When the normal period flag 223m is set to ON, the background image is changed from the time effect period or the extended time effect period to the background image corresponding to the normal game period. In this case, after the background image shown in FIG. 48 is displayed, the background image indicating the normal game period is displayed.

  The start period flag 223o is a flag indicating that the time effect period is started. When this time effect period is set to ON, a background image (see FIG. 46A) of the super fish school indicating the time effect period is set in the third symbol display device 81.

  The extension effect flag 223p is a flag indicating that the time effect extension period is started. When this time effect extension period is set, a background image indicating the time effect extension period shown in FIG. 47B is set.

  The extended effect time storage area 223q is a storage area in which information indicating the time is calculated by calculating the time until the big hit change ends when the time effect extension period is set. Based on the value of the extended effect time storage area 223q, the remaining time of the time effect extension period is displayed.

  The button effect flag 223r is a flag indicating that the variation pattern for executing the button effect is selected. Based on this flag, it is determined that the button effect is executed.

  The button effect counter 223s is a counter for selecting a display mode of the button effect.

  In addition, the RAM 223 includes a command storage area (not shown) that temporarily stores a command received from the main controller 110 until processing corresponding to the command is performed. Note that the command storage area includes a ring buffer, and data is read and written by a FIFO (First In First Out) method. When the command determination process (see FIG. 71) of the sound lamp processing device 113 is executed, the first stored command is read out of the unprocessed commands stored in the command storage area. The command is analyzed and processing corresponding to the command is performed.

  The display control device 114 is connected to the voice lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81, and based on a command received from the voice lamp control device 113, the third symbol display device 81 displays the variation of the third symbol (variation). Control). Details of the display control device 114 will be described later with reference to FIG.

  The power supply device 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each unit of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to a power failure, and a RAM deletion switch 122 (see FIG. 3). And an erasing switch circuit 253. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies a necessary operating voltage to each of the control devices 110 to 114 through a power supply path (not shown). As its outline, the power supply unit 251 takes in the voltage of AC 24 volts supplied from the outside, and drives various switches such as various switches 208, solenoids such as the solenoid 209, motors, etc. A 5 volt voltage for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and the 12 volt voltage, the 5 volt voltage, and the backup voltage are supplied to the control devices 110 to 114 as necessary voltages.

  The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the DC stable voltage of 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power failure (power interruption, power interruption) occurs when this voltage falls below 22 volts. Then, the power failure signal SG1 is output to the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111. Based on the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute the NMI interrupt process. Note that the power supply unit 251 outputs a voltage of 5 volts, which is a drive voltage of the control system, for a time sufficient to execute the NMI interrupt processing even after the DC stable voltage of 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts. Is maintained at a normal value. Therefore, main controller 110 and payout controller 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt processing (see FIG. 65).

  The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing backup data to the main controller 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. When the RAM erase signal SG2 is input when the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, the main control device 110 clears the backup data, and the payout control device 111 issues a payout initialization command for clearing the backup data. Transmit to device 111.

  Next, the electrical configuration of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 54 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the display control device 114. The display control device 114 includes an MPU 231, a work RAM 233, a character ROM 234, a resident video RAM 235, a normal video RAM 236, an image controller 237, an input port 238, an output port 239, and bus lines 240 and 241. have.

  The input side of the input port 238 is connected to the output side of the sound lamp control device 113, and the output side of the input port 238 is connected to the MPU 231, work RAM 233, character ROM 234, and image controller 237 via the bus line 240. . A resident video RAM 235 and a normal video RAM 236 are connected to the image controller 237, and an output port 239 is connected via a bus line 241. A third symbol display device 81 is connected to the output side of the output port 239.

  It should be noted that the pachinko machine 10 is a symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 even if it is a different model that has different lottery probabilities for special symbol jackpots or different number of prize balls to be paid out for one special symbol jackpot. Since there are models having the same specifications, the display control device 114 is made a common part to reduce costs.

  In the following, the MPU 231, the character ROM 234, the image controller 237, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 will be described first, and then the work RAM 233 will be described.

  First, the MPU 231 controls the display content of the third symbol display device 81 based on the display variation pattern command output from the sound lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command of the main control device 110. The MPU 231 has a built-in instruction pointer 231a, reads and fetches the instruction code stored at the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a, and executes various processes according to the instruction code. The MPU 231 is configured to receive a system reset from the power supply device 115 immediately after power-on (including power recovery from a power failure; the same applies hereinafter). When the system reset is released, the instruction pointer 231a Is automatically set to “0000H” by the hardware of the MPU 231. Each time the instruction code is fetched, the value of the instruction pointer 231a is incremented by one. When the MPU 231 executes an instruction pointer setting instruction, the pointer value designated by the setting instruction is set in the instruction pointer 231a.

  Although details will be described later, in this embodiment, the control program executed by the MPU 231 and various fixed value data used in the control program are provided with a dedicated program ROM as in a conventional gaming machine. Is stored in a character ROM 234 provided for storing image data to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  As will be described in detail later, the character ROM 234 is configured by a NAND flash memory 234a capable of increasing the capacity with a small area. As a result, not only image data but also a control program or the like can be sufficiently stored. If a control program or the like is stored in the character ROM 234, there is no need to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing the control program or the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in failure occurrence rate due to an increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

  On the other hand, the NAND flash memory has a problem that the reading speed becomes slow particularly when random access is performed. For example, in the case of reading data continuously arranged on a plurality of pages, the data on the second and subsequent pages can be read at high speed, but an address is specified for reading the data on the first page. It takes a long time for the data to be output. Further, when reading non-continuous data, a long time is required every time the data is read. As described above, since the NAND flash memory is slow in reading, if the MPU 231 directly reads out the control program from the character ROM 234 and executes various processes, it takes time to read out the instructions constituting the control program. May occur, and even if a high-performance processor is used as the MPU 231, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may be deteriorated.

  Therefore, in this embodiment, when the system reset of the MPU 231 is released, first, the control program stored in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234 is transferred to the work RAM 233 provided for temporary storage of various data. Store. Then, the MPU 231 executes various processes according to the control program stored in the work RAM 233. As will be described later, the work RAM 233 is constituted by a DRAM (Dynamic RAM), and data is read and written at high speed. Therefore, the MPU 231 can read instructions constituting the control program without delay. Therefore, it is possible to maintain high processing performance in the display control device 114, and it is possible to easily execute diversified and complicated effects using the third symbol display device 81.

  The character ROM 234 is a memory that stores a control program executed in the MPU 231 and image data displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and is connected to the MPU 231 via the bus line 240. The MPU 231 directly accesses the character ROM 234 via the bus line 240 after canceling the system reset, and transfers a control program stored in a second program storage area 234a1 (to be described later) of the character ROM 234 to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. An image controller 237 is also connected to the bus line 240, and the image controller 237 converts image data stored in a character storage area 234a2 (to be described later) of the character ROM 234 into a resident video RAM 235 connected to the image controller 237, and the like. Transfer to normal video RAM 236.

  The character ROM 234 is configured by modularizing a NAND flash memory 234a, a ROM controller 234b, a buffer RAM 234c, and a NOR ROM 234d.

  The NAND flash memory 234a is a non-volatile memory provided as a main storage unit in the character ROM 234. Most of the control program executed by the MPU 231 and fixed value data for driving the third symbol display device 81 are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a. It has at least a second program storage area 234a1 for storing, and a character storage area 234a2 for storing data of an image (such as a character) to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Here, the NAND flash memory has a feature that a large storage capacity can be obtained with a small area, and the capacity of the character ROM 234 can be easily increased. Thus, in this pachinko machine, for example, by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a capacity of 2 gigabytes, many images can be stored in the character storage area 234a2 as images to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can. Therefore, in order to further enhance the interest of the player, the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be diversified and complicated.

  In addition, the NAND flash memory 234a can store a control program and fixed value data in the second program storage area 234a1 in a state where a lot of image data is stored in the character storage area 234a2. Thus, the control program and fixed value data are provided for storing the image data to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 without storing the dedicated program ROM as in the conventional gaming machine. Since it can be stored in the character ROM 234, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in failure occurrence rate due to an increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

  The ROM controller 234b is a controller for controlling the operation of the character ROM 234. For example, based on the address transmitted from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the corresponding data from the NAND flash memory 234a or the like. Are output to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

  Here, because of the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, a relatively large number of error bits (bits in which erroneous data has been written) are generated when data is written, or defective data blocks in which data cannot be written are generated. Or Therefore, the ROM controller 234b performs known error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a, and is known so that data is read from and written to the NAND flash memory 234a while avoiding a defective data block. Performs data address conversion.

  The ROM controller 234b performs error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a including the error bit. Thus, it is possible to prevent the MPU 231 from performing processing and the image controller 237 from generating various images.

  In addition, since the ROM controller 234b analyzes the defective data block of the NAND flash memory 234a and avoids access to the defective data block, the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 have different defective data in each NAND flash memory 234a. The character ROM 234 can be easily accessed without considering the block address position. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, it is possible to prevent the access control to the character ROM 234 from becoming complicated.

  The buffer RAM 234c is a memory used as a buffer for temporarily storing data read from the NAND flash memory 234a. When an address assigned to the character ROM 234 is designated from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the ROM controller 234b is for one page including data corresponding to the designated address (for example, 2 kilobytes). It is determined whether or not the data is set in the buffer RAM 234c. If not set, data for one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) including data corresponding to the designated address is read from the NAND flash memory 234a (or NOR ROM 234d) and temporarily set in the buffer RAM 234c. To do. Then, the ROM controller 234b performs known error correction processing, and then outputs data corresponding to the designated address to the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

  The buffer RAM 234c is composed of two banks, and data for one page of the NAND flash memory 234a can be set per bank. Thereby, for example, the ROM controller 234b outputs the data of the NAND flash memory 234a to the outside using the other bank while the data is set in one bank, or is designated by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237. One page of data including the data corresponding to the designated address is transferred from the NAND flash memory 234a to one bank and set, and the data corresponding to the address designated by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 is set to the other A process of reading from the bank and outputting to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 can be performed in parallel. Therefore, the responsiveness in reading out the character ROM 234 can be improved.

  The NOR ROM 234d is a non-volatile memory provided as a sub storage unit in the character ROM 234, and has an extremely small capacity (for example, 2 kilobytes) than the NAND flash memory 234a for the purpose of complementing the NAND flash memory 234a. ). In the NOR type ROM 234d, among the control programs stored in the character ROM 234, a program that is not stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, specifically, first after the system reset is released in the MPU 231. At least a first program storage area 234d1 for storing a part of the boot program to be executed is provided.

  The boot program is a control program for activating the display control device 114 so that various controls on the third symbol display device 81 can be executed. The MPU 231 first executes this boot program after the system reset is released. As a result, the display control device 114 can be in a state where various controls can be executed. The first program storage area 234d1 should be processed first by the MPU 231 after releasing the system reset within the capacity range of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c (that is, one page of the NAND flash memory 234a) in the boot program. A predetermined number of instructions (for example, instructions for 1024 words (1 word = 2 bytes) if the capacity of one page is 2 kilobytes) are stored. The number of boot program instructions stored in the first program storage area 234d1 only needs to be less than or equal to the capacity of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c, and is appropriately set according to the specifications of the display control device 114. There may be.

  When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the value of the instruction pointer 231a to “0000H” by hardware and designates the address “0000H” indicated by the instruction pointer 231a for the bus line 240. It is configured. On the other hand, when the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address “0000H” is designated on the bus line 240, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d is transferred to one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. The corresponding data (instruction code) is output to the MPU 231.

  When the MPU 231 fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 234, the MPU 231 executes various processes according to the fetched instruction code, adds 1 to the instruction pointer 231a, and sends the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. Specify. Then, the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 reads from the programs previously set in the buffer RAM 234c from the NOR ROM 234d while the address specified by the bus line 240 is an address indicating the program stored in the NOR ROM 234d. The instruction code of the corresponding address is read from the buffer RAM 234c and output to the MPU 231.

  In this embodiment, instead of storing all the control programs in the NAND flash memory 234a, a predetermined number of instructions from the first instruction to be processed by the MPU 231 after canceling the system reset in the boot program are obtained from the NOR ROM 234d. The reason for storing is in the following reason. In other words, as described above, the NAND flash memory 234a is unique to the NAND flash memory in that it takes a long time for data to be output after the address is specified when reading the first page of data. There's a problem.

  When all the control programs are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, the address “0000H” is designated from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 in order to fetch the instruction code to be executed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. In this case, the character ROM 234 must read out data for one page including data (instruction code) corresponding to the address “0000H” from the NAND flash memory 234a and set it in the buffer RAM 234c. Then, because of the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a lot of time from reading to setting to the buffer RAM 234c. It takes a lot of waiting time to receive the code. Therefore, since the time required for starting the MPU 231 becomes longer, as a result, there is a problem that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

  On the other hand, since the NOR-type ROM is a memory that can read data at high speed, a predetermined number of instructions from the first instruction to be processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released is stored in the NOR-type ROM 234d in the boot program. Thus, when the address “0000H” is designated from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 immediately loads the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d into the buffer RAM 234c. The corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231. Therefore, the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address “0000H” in a short time after designating the address “0000H”, and can activate the MPU 231 in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

  The boot program is a control program other than the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, that is, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d. The program storage area of the work RAM 233 stores fixed value data (for example, a display data table, a transfer data table, etc. described later) used in the control program by a predetermined amount (for example, the capacity of one page of the NAND flash memory 234a). It is programmed to transfer to 233a and data table storage area 233b. Then, the MPU 231 first sets the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 according to the boot program read from the first program storage area 234d1 after the system reset is released, in the first program storage area 234d1. While using a bank different from the buffer RAM 234c, a predetermined amount is transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a.

  Here, since the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 has a capacity corresponding to one bank of the buffer RAM 234c as described above, the address of the internal bus is designated as “0000H”. In response to this, when the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 is set in the buffer RAM 234c, the boot program is set only in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, when the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a in accordance with the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1, the first program set in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c The transfer process can be executed using the other bank while leaving the boot program in the storage area 234d1. Therefore, it is not necessary to set the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 again in the buffer RAM 234c after the transfer process, so that the time related to the boot process can be shortened.

  When the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 transfers a predetermined amount of the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a, the instruction pointer 231a is transferred to the program storage area 233a. It is programmed to set the first predetermined address. Thus, after the system reset is released, when the MPU 231 transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a, the instruction pointer 231a is transferred to the first predetermined storage area 233a. Set to the address.

  Therefore, when a predetermined amount of programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 reads out the control program stored in the program storage area 233a, Various processes can be executed. That is, the MPU 231 reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetches the instruction instead of reading the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1. Then, various processes are executed. As will be described later, since the work RAM 233 is composed of a DRAM, a read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when most of the control program is stored in the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the MPU 231 can fetch an instruction at a high speed and execute processing for the instruction.

  Here, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 includes the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. On the other hand, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 is the control program transferred from the second program storage area 234a1 by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. It is programmed to be included, and programmed to set the instruction pointer 231a with the first address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a as the first predetermined address.

  Thereby, the MPU 231 transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a by the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1, and then transfers the control program. The remaining boot program included in the control program is executed.

  In this remaining boot program, the remaining control program that has not been transferred to the program storage area 233a and fixed value data (for example, a display data table and a transfer data table described later) that are used in the control program are all stored in the second program. A process of transferring a predetermined amount from the area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b is executed. At the end of the boot program, the instruction pointer 231a is set to a second predetermined address in the program storage area 233a. Specifically, an initialization process (see S2002 in FIG. 83) executed after the end of the boot process (see S2001 in FIG. 84) stored in the program storage area 233a as the second predetermined address. Set the start address of the program corresponding to.

  By executing the remaining boot program, the MPU 231 transfers all the control programs and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b. When the boot program is executed to the end by the MPU 231, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address. Thereafter, the MPU 231 is transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. Various processes are executed using the control program.

  Therefore, even when most of the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the control program is transferred to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 after the system reset is released. As a result, the MPU 231 can read out the control program from the work RAM constituted by the DRAM having a high reading speed and perform various controls. Accordingly, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and the diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed using the third symbol display device 81.

  Further, as described above, a predetermined number of instructions are stored from the first instruction to be processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released without storing the entire boot program in the NOR-type ROM 234d. Even if the program is stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start up the MPU 231 in a short time only by adding an extremely small-capacity NOR-type ROM 234d. Can do.

  The image controller 237 is a digital signal processor (DSP) that draws an image and displays the drawn image on the third symbol display device 81 at a predetermined timing. The image controller 237 draws an image for one frame based on a drawing list (see FIG. 57) to be described later transmitted from the MPU 231, and either one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c to be described later The image drawn in the buffer is developed, and the image information for one frame previously developed in the other frame buffer is output to the third symbol display device 81 to display the image on the third symbol display device 81. . The image controller 237 performs the image drawing process for one frame and the image display process for one frame on the image display time for one frame on the third symbol display device 81 (20 milliseconds in this embodiment). Parallel processing in

  The image controller 237 transmits a vertical synchronization interrupt signal (hereinafter referred to as a “V interrupt signal”) to the MPU 231 every 20 milliseconds when drawing processing of an image for one frame is completed. Each time the MPU 231 detects this V-interrupt signal, it executes a V-interrupt process (see FIG. 85B) and instructs the image controller 237 to draw an image for the next one frame. In response to this instruction, the image controller 237 executes a drawing process for the image for the next one frame, and also executes a process for causing the third symbol display device 81 to display the image previously developed by the drawing.

  As described above, the MPU 231 executes the V interrupt process in accordance with the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 and gives a drawing instruction to the image controller 237. Therefore, the image controller 237 performs the image drawing process and display. An image drawing instruction can be received from the MPU 231 every processing interval (20 milliseconds). Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive an instruction to draw the next image when the image drawing process or the display process is not finished, so that drawing of a new image is started in the middle of drawing the image, It is possible to prevent the image from being developed in response to a new drawing instruction in the frame buffer in which the image information being displayed is stored.

  The image controller 237 also executes a process of transferring the image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 based on the transfer instruction from the MPU 231 and the transfer data information included in the drawing list.

  The image drawing is performed using image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236. That is, the image data required for drawing is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 based on an instruction from the MPU 231 before the drawing is performed.

  Here, the NAND flash memory facilitates an increase in the capacity of the ROM, while the reading speed is slower than other ROMs (mask ROM, EEPROM, etc.). On the other hand, in the display control device 114, the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to transfer a part of the image data stored in the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. It is configured to As will be described later, the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 is controlled to be resident without being overwritten.

  Thus, after the transfer of the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on, the image controller 237 draws an image while using the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235. Processing can be performed. Therefore, if the image data used for the drawing process is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed during image drawing. The time required for the readout can be omitted, and the image drawn can be immediately displayed and the image drawn on the third symbol display device 81 can be displayed.

  In particular, the resident video RAM 235 resident image data of frequently displayed images or image data of images to be displayed immediately after the display is determined by the main control device 110 or the display control device 114. Even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a, the responsiveness until a certain image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be kept high.

  Further, when the image is drawn using the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235, the display control device 114 is necessary for drawing from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 before the drawing is performed. The MPU 231 is configured to instruct the image controller 237 to transfer the image data. As will be described later, the image data transferred to the normal video RAM 236 may be deleted by overwriting after being used for image drawing, but at the time of image drawing, the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed is used. Therefore, it is not necessary to read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 configured as described above, and it is possible to omit the time required for the reading. it can.

  Further, by storing the image data in the normal video RAM 236, it is not necessary to make all the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, it is not necessary to prepare a large capacity resident video RAM 235. Therefore, an increase in cost due to the provision of the resident video RAM 235 can be suppressed.

  The image controller 237 includes a buffer RAM 237a configured by an SRAM of 132 kilobytes that is a capacity of one block of the NAND flash memory 234a.

  In the image data transfer instruction that the MPU 231 performs to the image controller 237 according to the transfer instruction or the transfer data information of the drawing list, the start address (storage source start address) of the character ROM 234 storing the image data to be transferred is used. Final address (storage source final address), transfer destination information (information indicating whether to transfer to resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236), and start of transfer destination (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) An address is included. Note that the data size of the image data to be transferred may be included instead of the storage source final address.

  The image controller 237 reads out data for one block from a predetermined address of the character ROM 234 according to the various information of the transfer instruction, temporarily stores it in the buffer RAM 237a, and when the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is not used, the buffer RAM 237a Is transferred to the resident RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236. The process is repeatedly executed until all the image data stored in the storage source end address indicated by the transfer instruction is transferred.

  Thus, the image data read from the character ROM 234 over time is temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a, and then the image data is transferred from the buffer RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 in a short time. Can do. Therefore, while the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236, the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is prevented from being occupied for a long time by the transfer of the image data. be able to. Therefore, since the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are occupied by the transfer of the image data, the video RAMs 235 and 236 cannot be used for the image drawing process. It is possible to prevent the display on the third symbol display device 81 from being in time.

  In addition, since the image controller 237 transfers image data from the buffer RAM 234c to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236, the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 perform image drawing processing and third symbol display. The period that is not used for the display process on the device 81 can be easily determined, and the process can be simplified.

  The resident video RAM 235 is used so that the image data transferred from the character ROM 234 is maintained without being overwritten while the power is turned on. 235e and an error message image area 235f, at least a power-on variation image area 235b and a third symbol area 235d are provided.

  The power-on main image area 235a is a power-on main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 from when the power is turned on until all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is stored. This area stores the corresponding data. In addition, in the power-on variation image area 235b, a game is started by the player while the main image at power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and a ball entering the first winning port 64 is detected. In this case, the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image for displaying the lottery result performed in the main controller 110 by the variation effect is stored.

  When the power supply from the power supply unit 251 is started, the MPU 231 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variation image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a. A transfer instruction is transmitted to the controller 237 (see FIG. 83).

  Here, the power-on variation image will be described. The display control device 114 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variation image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on variation image area 235b immediately after the power is turned on. Subsequently, the remaining image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. While the remaining image data is being transferred, the display control device 114 uses the image data previously stored in the power-on main image area 235a to display a power-on main image (not shown). It is displayed on the 3 symbol display device 81.

  At this time, when the display variation pattern command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 is received based on the variation pattern command from the main control device 110 that is a variation start instruction command, the display control device 114 displays the power-on main image. On the display screen of, the fluctuation image at power-on of the “○” symbol at the lower right position toward the screen and the fluctuation image at power-on of the “×” symbol at the same position as the “○” symbol. It is displayed repeatedly alternately. Then, the lottery performed in the main control device 110 from the display variation pattern command and the display stop type command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command and the stop type command from the main control device 110. Judgment result, if it is "special symbol jackpot", the image showing it will be displayed for a certain period of time after stopping the changing effect, and if it is "out of special symbol", the image showing it will stop the changing effect It will be displayed for a certain period later.

  The MPU 231 uses the image data stored in the main image area 235a when the power is turned on to the image controller 237 until all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235. Instructs to draw main image when power is turned on. Thus, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the hall related person can confirm the main image at the time of power-on displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can. Therefore, the display control device 114 transfers the remaining image data to be resident over time from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 while displaying the main image when the power is turned on on the third symbol display device 81. be able to. Further, since the player or the like can recognize that some processing is being performed while the main image at the time of power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the image to be resident in the remaining resident video RAM 235. Wait until the transfer of image data to the resident video RAM 235 is completed without worrying about whether the operation has stopped until the data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Can do.

  Also in the operation check at the factory or the like at the time of manufacturing, the main image at the time of turning on the power is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the third symbol display device 81 starts operating without any problem when the power is turned on. In addition, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the efficiency of the operation check by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed as the character ROM 234.

  In addition, when the player starts playing while the main image at the time of power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and a ball is detected in the first entrance ball 64, the fluctuation image area at the time of power-on The power-on variation image is drawn using the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image resident in 235b, and images indicating “o” and “x” are alternately displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Thus, the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237. Thereby, a simple variation effect can be performed using the variation image at power-on. Therefore, the player can confirm that the lottery is surely performed by the simple variation effect even while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on.

  Further, when the main image at power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the image data corresponding to the varying effect image at power-on is already resident in the power-on varying image area 235b. When a ball is detected in the first entrance sphere 64 while the hour main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the corresponding variation effect can be immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can.

  Returning to FIG. 54, the description will be continued. The back image area 235c is an area for storing image data corresponding to the back image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The third symbol area 235d is an area for resident the third symbol used in the variation effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81. That is, in the third symbol area 235d, image data corresponding to the above-mentioned ten types of main symbols (see FIG. 40) with the numbers “0” to “9” as the third symbols are resident. As a result, when changing effects are performed on the 3rd symbol display device 81, it is not necessary to read image data from the character ROM 234 one by one. Fluctuation production can be started quickly. Therefore, the first symbol display device 37 changes in the third symbol display device 81 in spite of the fact that the first symbol display device 37 has started changing after the first winning port 64 or the second winning port 640 has entered the ball. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a state where the production is not started immediately.

  The character symbol area 235e is an area for storing image data corresponding to character symbols used in various effects displayed on the third symbol display device 81. In the pachinko machine 10, various characters such as “boy” are displayed in accordance with various effects, and data corresponding to these characters is displayed in the character design area 235e, so that display control is performed. When the device 114 changes the character design based on the content of the command received from the audio lamp control device 113, the device 114 does not newly read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, but reads it into the character design area 235e of the resident video RAM 235. A predetermined image can be drawn by the image controller 237 by reading the image data resident in advance. Thereby, since it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, even if the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed is used for the character ROM 234, the character design can be changed immediately.

  The error message image area 235f is an area for storing image data corresponding to an error message displayed when an error occurs in the pachinko machine 10. In the pachinko machine 10, for example, when the sound lamp control device 113 detects vibration from the output of a vibration sensor (not shown) attached to the back surface of the game board 13, the sound lamp control device 113 generates a vibration error. The display controller 114 is notified by an error command. Further, when the occurrence of other errors is detected by the sound lamp control device 113, the sound lamp control device 113 notifies the display control device 114 of the occurrence of the error together with the error type by an error command. When receiving an error command, the display control device 114 is configured to display an error message corresponding to the received error on the third symbol display device 81.

  Here, the error message is required to be displayed almost simultaneously with the occurrence of the error from the viewpoint of preventing the player's fraud and protecting the player against the error. In the pachinko machine 10, since the image data corresponding to various error messages is resident in the error message image area 235f in advance, the display control device 114 performs the error message of the resident video RAM 235 based on the received error command. By reading out image data resident in the image area 235f in advance, each error message image can be immediately drawn by the image controller 237. This eliminates the need to sequentially read out image data corresponding to the error message from the character ROM 234. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed is used as the character ROM 234, the corresponding error message is received after the error command is received. It can be displayed immediately.

  The normal video RAM 236 is used so that data is overwritten and updated as needed, and is provided with at least an image storage area 236a, a first frame buffer 236b, and a second frame buffer 236c.

  The image storage area 236a is an area for storing image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 among image data necessary for drawing an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image storage area 236a is divided into a plurality of subareas, and the type of image data stored in each subarea is predetermined for each subarea.

  The MPU 231 transmits image data required for subsequent image drawing out of the image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the sub-areas provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 from the character ROM 234. The image controller 237 is instructed to transfer the type of the image data to a predetermined sub-area to be stored. As a result, the image controller 237 reads the image data instructed by the MPU 231 from the character ROM 234, and transfers the read image data to a specified sub-area designated in the image storage area 236a via the buffer RAM 237a.

  The image data transfer instruction is performed by including transfer data information in a drawing list (to be described later) in which the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to draw an image. As a result, the MPU 231 can perform an image drawing instruction and an image data transfer instruction simply by transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, thereby reducing the processing load.

  The first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c are buffers for expanding an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image controller 237 writes an image for one frame drawn in accordance with an instruction from the MPU 231 into one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, thereby storing one frame in the frame buffer. While the image is developed and the image is developed in one of the frame buffers, the image information of one frame previously developed from the other frame buffer is read, and the third symbol display device 81 is read together with the drive signal. By transmitting the image information, the third symbol display device 81 executes a process for displaying the image for one frame.

  As described above, by providing the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c as the frame buffers, the image controller 237 can simultaneously develop an image for one frame drawn in one of the frame buffers. The first frame image developed from the other frame buffer can be read out, and the read one frame image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  A frame buffer for developing an image for one frame and a frame buffer for reading out image information for one frame for displaying an image on the third symbol display device 81 include an image drawing process for one frame. Every 20 milliseconds to be completed, the MPU 231 designates one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c alternately.

  That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for reading image information for one frame, and When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for developing the image for one frame after 20 milliseconds after the drawing process for the image for one frame is completed. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer from which the image information is read out. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. The

  Further, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read. Is done. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. The Thereafter, a frame buffer that expands an image for one frame and a frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read out are changed to either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds. By alternately alternating and designating, it is possible to continuously display an image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while drawing an image for one frame.

  The work RAM 233 is a memory for storing a control program and fixed value data stored in the character ROM 234, and temporarily storing work data and flags used when executing various control programs by the MPU 231. Composed. The work RAM 233 includes a program storage area 233a, a data table storage area 233b, a simple image display flag 233c, a display data table buffer 233d, a transfer data table buffer 233e, a pointer 233f, a drawing list area 233g, a time counter 233h, and stored image data discrimination. It has at least a flag 233i and a drawing target buffer flag 233j.

  The program storage area 233a is an area for storing a control program executed by the MPU 231. When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 reads the control program from the character ROM 234, transfers it to the work RAM 233, and stores it in this program storage area 233a. When all the control programs are stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 executes various controls using the control program stored in the program storage area 233a. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is constituted by a DRAM, a read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, the display control device 114 can maintain high processing performance, and the third symbol display device 81 Can be used to easily perform diversified and complicated effects.

  The data table storage area 233b includes a display data table describing display contents to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 over time for one effect to be displayed based on a command from the main controller 110, and display data. This is an area for storing transfer data information of image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 and transfer data table that defines transfer timing among image data used in one effect displayed by the table.

  These data tables are normally stored as a kind of fixed value data in the second program storage area 434 provided in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234, and are in accordance with a boot program executed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. These data tables are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the work RAM 233 and stored in the data table storage area 233b. When all the data tables are stored in the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 thereafter controls the display of the third symbol display device 81 using the data table stored in the data table storage area 233b. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is constituted by a DRAM, a read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when various data tables are stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the display control device 114 can maintain high processing performance, and the third symbol display device Using 81, it is possible to easily execute diversified and complicated effects.

  Here, details of various data tables will be described. First, the display data table is prepared for each effect mode of each effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on a command from the main control device 110. Display data tables corresponding to ending effects and demonstration effects are prepared.

  The variation effect is an effect that is started in the third symbol display device 81 when a display variation pattern command is received from the sound lamp control device 113. When a display variation pattern command is received, a display stop type command indicating a variation effect stop type is also received. For example, when a variation effect is started, if the stop type of the variation effect is out, the stop symbol indicating the outage is finally stopped and displayed, while the stop type of the variation effect is a jackpot A, a jackpot B If it is any of these, the stop symbol which shows each jackpot will be stop-displayed finally. The player can recognize the jackpot type by visually recognizing the stop symbol in this variation effect, and can easily determine the game value given according to the jackpot type.

  Further, since the first winning opening 64 is a winning opening from which five balls are paid out as winning balls when a ball enters, the electric symbol is released as a big bonus of the normal symbol, and the ball becomes the second winning opening. As it becomes easier to enter 640, the number of prize balls increases. As a result, the pachinko machine 10 is in a state where the number of possessed balls is difficult to decrease or the number of possessed balls is not decreased even when a game is performed. You can get a feeling of a period that you can get a big jackpot of special symbols in the absence. Therefore, since the player's willingness to participate in the game can be increased, the player can have the willingness to participate in the game continuously.

  As described above, the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the next variation effect associated with the start winning is not started even after a predetermined time has elapsed since the one variation effect was stopped. The third symbol composed of the main symbols not numbered “0” to “9” is stopped and displayed, and only the back image changes. If a demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, a player or a hall-related person can recognize that no game is being played in the pachinko machine 10.

  The data table storage area 233b stores one display data table corresponding to each of the round effect, the ending effect, and the demonstration effect. Further, the variation display data table, which is a display data table for variation effects, has 32 tables in total for one variation effect pattern, if there are 32 variable effect patterns to be set.

  Here, the details of the display data table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 55 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the variable display data table in the display data table. The display data table should be displayed at the time corresponding to the address in which the time for displaying an image for one frame on the third symbol display device 81 (in this embodiment, 20 milliseconds) is represented as one unit. The content (drawing content) of an image for one frame is defined in detail.

  The drawing content specifies the type of sprite for each sprite that is a display object constituting an image for one frame, and the display position coordinates, magnification, rotation angle, and translucency according to the type of sprite. Drawing information for drawing the sprite on the third symbol display device 81 such as value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information is defined.

  The type of sprite is information for specifying the sprite to be displayed. The display position coordinates are information for specifying coordinates on the third symbol display device 81 on which the sprite is to be displayed. The enlargement ratio is information for designating an enlargement ratio with respect to a standard display size preset for the sprite, and the size of the sprite displayed according to the enlargement ratio is specified. If the enlargement ratio is larger than 100%, the sprite is displayed in an enlarged size than the standard size. If the enlargement ratio is less than 100%, the sprite is reduced in size than the standard size. Is displayed.

  The rotation angle is information for specifying the rotation angle when the sprite is rotated and displayed. The translucency value is for specifying the transparency of the entire sprite. The higher the translucency value, the more the image is displayed so that the image displayed on the back side of the sprite can be seen through. The α blending information is information for specifying a known α blending coefficient used when performing superimposition processing with other sprites. The color information is information for designating the color tone of the sprite to be displayed. The filter designation information is information for designating an image filter to be applied to the sprite when the designated sprite is drawn.

  In the variable display data table, as a drawing content for one frame defined corresponding to each address, one back image, nine third symbols (symbol 1, symbol 2,...), Light in the image. Drawing information for each sprite, such as an effect that expresses the insertion of characters, characters used for various effects such as boy images and characters, is defined for each address. Note that one or more pieces of information regarding effects and characters are defined according to the contents to be displayed in the frame.

  Here, the display position of the back image is fixed to the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81, and the enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucency value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information Since it is constant, only the back surface type, which is information for specifying the back image type, is defined in the variable display data table.

  When the MPU 231 specifies to display any one of the backgrounds corresponding to the background mode (in the sea, on the beach, the background for the preparation period, or the background dedicated to the time effect) according to the back surface type, the MPU 231 The rear image corresponding to the designated stage is specified as a drawing target, and the range of the rear image to be displayed with respect to the frame is specified with the passage of time.

  In this embodiment, the case where only the back surface type is specified as the rendering content of the back image in the display data table will be described, but instead, the back surface type and which range of the back image corresponding to the back surface type is described. Position information indicating whether or not should be displayed may be defined. This position information may be, for example, information indicating the elapsed time since the rear image in the range corresponding to the initial position is displayed. In this case, the MPU 231 specifies the range of the rear image to be displayed for the frame based on the elapsed time after the rear image in the range corresponding to the initial position indicated by the position information is displayed.

  Further, the position information may be information indicating an elapsed time from the start of image drawing (or display on the third symbol display device 81) based on the display data table. In this case, the MPU 231 displayed the range of the rear image to be displayed for the frame at the stage when drawing of the image (or display on the third symbol display device 81) was started based on the display database. The position is specified based on the position of the back image and the elapsed time since the drawing of the image indicated by the position information (or display on the third symbol display device 81) is started.

  Further, the position information includes information indicating the elapsed time since the rear image in the range corresponding to the initial position is displayed and the drawing of the image based on the display data table (or the third symbol display device 81 according to the rear surface type). May indicate any of the information indicating the elapsed time from the start of display, and the type information of the position information (for example, the range of the range corresponding to the initial position) This is information indicating the elapsed time since the rear image was displayed, or information indicating the elapsed time since the drawing of the image based on the display database (or display on the third symbol display device 81) was started. May be defined as the drawing content of the back image. In addition, the position information may not be information indicating the elapsed time but may be information indicating an address in which the range of the back image to be displayed is stored.

  In the third symbol (symbol 1, symbol 2,...), Symbol type offset information is described as symbol type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed. This offset information is information representing the difference between the numbers assigned to the third symbols. Instead of directly specifying the type of the third symbol, the offset information is specified because the display of the third symbol in the variation effect is the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before and the variation effect performed this time. This is because it changes depending on the stop symbol, and in the symbol offset information from when the change is started until a predetermined time elapses, the offset information from the stop symbol of the change effect performed immediately before is described. Thereby, the variation effect is started from the stop symbol in the previous variation effect.

  On the other hand, after a lapse of a predetermined time from the start of the fluctuation, an offset from the stop symbol set according to the stop type command (display stop type command) received from the main control device 110 via the sound lamp control device 113. Enter information. Thereby, the variation effect can be stopped with the stop symbol corresponding to the stop type specified by the main control device 110.

  In addition, since a unique number is attached to each 3rd symbol, the 3rd symbol is displayed as a variation symbol in the previous variation effect or a stop symbol corresponding to the stop type specified by the main controller 110. It is possible to identify the third symbol to be displayed easily from the offset information by managing the offset information with the number attached to the symbol and expressing the offset information by the difference between the digits attached to each third symbol.

  Also, in the symbol offset information, the third symbol fluctuates at a high speed for a predetermined time during which the offset information of the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before is changed to the offset information of the stop symbol of the variation effect currently performed. It is set to be the displayed time. While the third symbol is variably displayed at a high speed, the third symbol is invisible to the player, and during that time, the symbol of the change effect that was performed immediately before the symbol offset information is displayed. By switching from the offset information to the offset information of the stop symbol of the variation effect currently being performed, even if the continuity of the number 3 symbol is interrupted, the player will not recognize the discontinuity of the number continuity be able to.

  “0000H”, which is the top address of the display data table, describes “Start” information indicating the start of the data table, and the last address of the display data table (“02F0H” in the example of FIG. 55) contains the data table. "End" information indicating the end of is described. Then, for each address between the address “0000H” in which “Start” information is described and the address in which “End” information is described, the rendering contents corresponding to the rendering mode to be specified in the display data table Is described.

  The MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used in accordance with a command (for example, display variation pattern command) transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110, and the selected display. The data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and the pointer 233f is initialized. Each time drawing processing for one frame is completed, the pointer 233f is incremented by one. In the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, based on the drawing contents specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f, The image content to be drawn is specified, and a drawing list (see FIG. 57) described later is created. By sending this drawing list to the image controller 237, a drawing instruction for the image is given. As a result, the drawing contents are specified in the order defined in the display data table according to the update of the pointer 233f, so that the image as defined in the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, in the display control device 114, according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110 or the like, The effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed by simply replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d as appropriate, instead of changing the program to be executed by the MPU 231. .

  Here, when the program executed by the MPU 231 is activated each time the effect image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed as in the conventional pachinko machine, the effect image is diversified. Since a large load is required for starting up and executing a complicated and enormous program, the processing capability of the display control device 114 is limited, and there is a possibility that the diversification of controllable effect images may be limited. there were. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d. Regardless of the processing capability of the control device 114, various types of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display 81.

  Also, in this way, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each effect mode, a display data table buffer corresponding to the effect mode to be displayed is set, and a drawing list is displayed frame by frame according to the set data table. The reason that the pachinko machine 10 can create is that an effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in advance is determined based on the result of the lottery performed based on the start winning prize. On the other hand, in game machines other than gaming machines such as pachinko machines, the display contents change on the spot based on the user's operation, so the display contents cannot be predicted. It is not possible to have a display data table corresponding to the effect mode. In this way, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each effect mode, a display data table buffer is set according to the effect mode to be displayed, and a drawing list is created frame by frame according to the set data table. The configuration to be realized can be realized for the first time based on the fact that the pachinko machine 10 is a configuration that determines in advance the presentation mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the result of the lottery performed based on the start winning.

  Next, details of the transfer data table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 56 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the transfer data table. The transfer data table is prepared corresponding to the display data table prepared for each effect, and as described above, among the sprite image data used in the effect specified in the display data table, Transfer data information and transfer timing for transferring image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 are defined.

  If all the sprite image data used in the production defined in the display data table is stored in the resident video RAM 235, a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. Thereby, an increase in the capacity of the data table storage area 233b can be suppressed.

  The transfer data table corresponds to an address defined in the display data table, and transfer data information of sprite image data (hereinafter referred to as “transfer target image data”) to be transferred at the time indicated by the address. (Addresses “0001H” and “0097H” in FIG. 56 correspond). Here, the transfer start timing of the transfer target image data is set so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. In the transfer data table, the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is defined in correspondence with the address corresponding to the transfer start timing.

  On the other hand, if there is no transfer target image data to start transfer at the time indicated by the address specified in the display data table, there is no transfer target image data to start transfer corresponding to the address. Is defined (corresponding to the address “0002H” in FIG. 56).

  As the transfer data information, the start address (storage source start address) and the end address (storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 storing the transfer target image data, and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are stored. Is included.

  Note that “0000H”, which is the start address of the transfer data table, describes “Start” information indicating the start of the data table, as in the display data table, and the final address of the transfer data table (in the example of FIG. 56, “02F0H”) describes “End” information indicating the end of the data table. For each address between the address “0000H” in which “Start” information is described and the address in which “End” information is described, transfer data information of transfer target image data to be defined in the transfer data table Is described.

  When the MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used in accordance with a command (for example, display variation pattern command) transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110, the display data table is displayed. If there is a transfer data table corresponding to, the transfer data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and stored in a transfer data table buffer 233e of the work RAM 233 described later. Then, every time the pointer 233f is updated, the drawing contents specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f are specified from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and a drawing list (see FIG. 57) described later is created. In addition, transfer data information of image data of a predetermined sprite to be transferred at that time is acquired from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and the transfer data information is created in the created drawing list. to add.

  For example, in the example of FIG. 56, when the pointer 233f becomes “0001H” or “0097H”, the MPU 231 creates transfer data information defined by the address of the transfer data table based on the display data table. In addition to the drawing list, the drawing list after the addition is transmitted to the image controller 237. On the other hand, when the pointer 233f is “0002H”, Null data is defined in the address “0002H” of the transfer data table, so it is determined that there is no transfer target image data to start transfer, and is generated. The drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237 without adding the transfer data information to the drawing list.

  When the transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the process.

  Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is defined for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a in accordance with the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table. When a predetermined sprite is drawn according to the display data table, image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 necessary for drawing the sprite can always be stored in the image storage area 236a. Then, it is possible to draw a predetermined sprite based on the display data table using the image data stored in the image storage area 236a.

  As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. A corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while drawing an image of each sprite designated in the data table. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 10, the display control device 114 displays data according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110 or the like. As the table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e, so that the sprite image data used in the display data table is The character ROM 234 can be reliably transferred to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing.

  In the transfer data table, the transfer data information is defined so that the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to the sprite. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. By controlling the transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in sprite units, it is possible to control the transfer of image data in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in load on transfer.

  The transfer data table has a data structure similar to that of the display data table, and transfers image data to be transferred that should start transfer at the time indicated by the address corresponding to the address defined in the display data table. Since the data information is defined, the image data is surely stored in the normal video RAM 236 before the image data of the predetermined sprite is used based on the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d. As described above, since the transfer start timing can be instructed, a variety of effect images can be easily displayed on the third symbol display device 81 even if the character ROM 234 is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed. be able to.

  The simple image display flag 233c is a flag indicating whether or not to display a power-on image (power-on main image and power-on variation image) (not shown) on the third symbol display device 81. This simple image display flag 233c is displayed after image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variation image is transferred to the power-on main image area 235a or power-on variation image area 235b of the resident video RAM. The main process (see FIG. 83) executed by the MPU 231 is set to ON (see S2005 in FIG. 83). Then, when all the resident target image data is stored in the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer process of the image transfer process, in order to display an image other than the power-on image on the third symbol display device 81, It is set to off (see S3605 in FIG. 95B).

  The simple image display flag 233c is referred to in the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 every time a V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 is detected (see S2301 in FIG. 85B). When the image display flag 233c is on, a simple command determination process (see S2308 in FIG. 85 (b)) and a simple display setting process (see FIG. 85) so that the power-on image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. 85 (b) S2309) is executed. On the other hand, when the simple image display flag 233c is OFF, the command determination is performed so that various images are displayed according to the command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on the command from the main control device 110 or the like. Processing (see FIGS. 86 to 91) and display setting processing (see FIGS. 92 to 94) are executed.

  The simple image display flag 233c is referred to in the transfer setting process executed by the MPU 231 in the V interrupt process (see S3501 in FIG. 95A), and the simple image display flag 233c is on. Since there is resident target image data that is not stored in the resident video RAM 235, a resident image transfer setting process (see FIG. 95B) for transferring the resident target image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 is executed. If the simple image display flag 233c is off, a normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 96) for transferring image data necessary for the drawing process from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 is executed.

  The display data table buffer 233d stores a display data table corresponding to an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 according to a command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110 or the like. It is a buffer to do. The MPU 231 determines an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on a command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113, and displays a display data table corresponding to the effect mode from the data table storage area 233b. After selecting, the selected display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the MPU 231 increments the pointer 233f one by one, and the image controller 237 for each frame based on the drawing contents defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. A drawing list (see FIG. 57), which describes the contents of image drawing instructions for, is generated. As a result, the third symbol display device 81 displays an effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d.

  The MPU 231 increments the pointer 233f one by one, and based on the drawing content defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the image to the image controller 237 is displayed frame by frame. A drawing list (see FIG. 57), which will be described later, describing the drawing instruction content is generated. Thereby, the 3rd symbol display device 81 displays the effect corresponding to the display data table.

  The transfer data table buffer 233e is a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d in accordance with a command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110 or the like. Is a buffer for storing. The MPU 231 selects a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table from the data table storage area 233b in accordance with storing the display data table in the display data table buffer 233d, and transfers the selected transfer data table. Store in the data table buffer 233e. When all the sprite image data used in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is stored in the resident video RAM 235, a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. Therefore, the MPU 231 clears the contents by writing Null data indicating that there is no transfer target image data in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

  Then, the MPU 231 defines the transfer data information of the transfer target image data specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e while adding the pointer 233f one by one. If this is the case (that is, if Null data is not described), the transfer data information is stored in a drawing list (see FIG. 57), which will be described later, describing the image drawing instruction contents for the image controller 237 generated for each frame. to add.

  Thereby, when the transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the transfer process. Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Transfer data information of transfer target image data is defined for a predetermined address. Therefore, when image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information defined in this transfer data table, it is necessary to draw the sprite when drawing a predetermined sprite according to the display data table. The image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can always be stored in the image storage area 236a.

  As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. A corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while drawing an image of each sprite designated in the data table. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  The pointer 233f is an address at which the corresponding drawing content or transfer data information of the transfer target image data is to be acquired from the display data table and the transfer data table respectively stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table buffer 233e. It is for designating. The MPU 231 once initializes the pointer 233f to 0 as the display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the display setting process of the V-interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 based on the V-interrupt signal transmitted every 20 milliseconds when the image rendering process for one frame is completed from the image controller 237 (FIG. 85 (b) ) (See S2303), pointer update processing (see S3105 in FIG. 70B) is executed, and the value of the pointer 233f is incremented by one.

  Each time the pointer 233f is updated, the MPU 231 specifies the drawing content specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and the drawing list to be described later (See FIG. 57), and from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the transfer data information of the image data of a predetermined sprite to be transferred at that time is acquired, and the transfer data Add information to the created drawing list.

  Thereby, the effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, it is possible to easily change the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 simply by changing the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Therefore, regardless of the processing capability of the display control device 114, a wide variety of effects can be displayed.

  Further, when the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e is stored, the sprite is displayed before drawing of a predetermined sprite is started by the corresponding display data table based on the transfer data table. The image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 that is used in the above drawing can always be stored in the image storage area 236a. As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. A corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while drawing an image of each sprite designated in the data table. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  The drawing list area 233g is an image controller for drawing an image for one frame generated based on the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e. This is an area for storing a drawing list instructed to 237.

  Here, the details of the drawing list will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 57 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of a drawing list. The drawing list is an instruction table for instructing the image controller 237 to draw an image for one frame. As shown in FIG. 57, a back image to be used for an image of one frame, a third symbol (design 1, Symbol (Effect 1, Effect 2,...), Character (Character 1, Character 2,..., Reserved ball number symbol 1, Reserved ball number symbol 2,..., Error For each sprite (design), detailed drawing information (detailed information) of the sprite is described. In the drawing list, transfer data information for causing the image controller 237 to transfer predetermined image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 is also described.

  Detailed drawing information (detailed information) of each sprite includes information indicating the RAM type (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) in which the image data of the corresponding sprite (display object) is stored, The image controller 237 acquires the image data of the sprite from the memory area specified by the RAM type and the address. Further, the detailed drawing information (detailed information) includes display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucency value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information. The standard image generated from the image data of the sprite read from the video RAM is subjected to enlargement / reduction processing according to the enlargement ratio, rotation processing according to the rotation angle, and translucency according to the translucency value According to the α blending information, synthesis processing with other sprites, color tone correction processing according to the color information, and filtering processing according to the method specified by the information according to the filter specification information. After that, an image obtained by performing various processes on the display position indicated by the display position coordinates is drawn. The drawn image is developed by the image controller 237 into either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233j.

  In the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 displays the drawing contents defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f and the contents of the other image to be drawn (for example, the holding ball number symbol for displaying the holding ball number symbol). Generate detailed drawing information (detailed information) for all sprites used to draw an image for one frame based on images and warning images that notify the occurrence of errors. Create a drawing list by rearranging.

  Here, among the detailed information of each sprite, the storage RAM type and address of the data of the sprite (display object) are the sprite type specified in the display data table and the sprite type specified from the contents of other images. Is generated accordingly. That is, for each sprite, the area of the resident video RAM 235 in which the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed. Thus, it is possible to immediately specify the storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored, and easily include such information in the detailed information of the drawing list.

  In addition, the MPU 231 defines other information (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information) among the detailed information of each sprite in the display data table. Copy the information as it is.

  Further, when generating the drawing list, the MPU 231 rearranges the order of the sprites to be arranged on the back side from the sprites to be arranged on the front side in the image for one frame, and displays detailed drawing information for each sprite. Describe (detailed information). That is, in the drawing list, detailed information corresponding to the back image is described first, then the third symbol (symbol 1, symbol 2,...), Effect (effect 1, effect 2,...) Detailed information corresponding to each sprite is described in the order of characters (character 1, character 2,..., Retained ball number design 1, retained ball number design 2,..., Error design).

  The image controller 237 executes drawing processing of each sprite according to the order described in the drawing list, and expands the drawn sprite in the frame buffer by overwriting. Therefore, in the image for one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be arranged on the most back side, and the sprite drawn last can be arranged on the most front side.

  In addition, when the transfer data information is described at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the MPU 231 transfers the transfer data information (the character storing the transfer target image data). The storage source head address and the storage source last address in the ROM 234, and the storage destination head address of the sub area provided in the image storage area 236a in which the transfer target image data is to be stored are added to the end of the drawing list. If the transfer data information is included in the drawing list, the image controller 237 reads an image from a predetermined area (area indicated by the storage source start address and the storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 based on the transfer data information. The data is read, and the image data to be transferred is transferred to a predetermined sub-area (storage destination address) provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.

  The time counter 233h is a counter that counts the effect time of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. The MPU 231 sets time data indicating the production effect time displayed based on the display data table in accordance with storing one display data table in the display data table buffer 233d. This time data is a value obtained by dividing the effect time by the image display time for one frame in the third symbol display device 81 (in this embodiment, 20 milliseconds).

  Then, based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing and display processes for one frame are completed, the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 (FIG. 85 (b)). Each time the display setting process (see) is executed, the time counter 233h is decremented by 1 (see S3107 in FIG. 69). As a result, when the value of the time counter 233h becomes 0 or less, the MPU 231 determines that the effect displayed by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is ended, and performs it in accordance with the end of the effect. Various processes to be performed are executed.

  The stored image data discrimination flag 233i is stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 for each sprite for which the corresponding image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235, respectively. It is a flag indicating a storage state indicating whether or not there is.

  The stored image data determination flag 233i is generated by an initial setting process (see S2002 in FIG. 83) executed by the MPU 231 during the main process when the power is turned on. The stored image data determination flag 233i generated here is set to “off” indicating that the storage state for all sprites is not stored in the image storage area 236a.

  The stored image data determination flag 233i is updated when a transfer instruction of transfer target image data corresponding to one sprite is set in the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 96) executed by the MPU 231. Is called. In this update, the storage state corresponding to one sprite in which the transfer instruction is set is set to “ON” indicating that the corresponding image data is stored in the image storage area 236a. Further, the image data of other sprites that are to be stored in the same subarea of the image storage area 236a as that one sprite are always in an unstored state by storing the image data of one sprite. Therefore, the storage state corresponding to other sprites is set to “off”.

  Further, the MPU 231 refers to the stored image data determination flag 233i when transferring image data of a sprite whose image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, and determines the sprite to be transferred. It is determined whether the image data has already been stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 235 (see S3713 in FIG. 96). If the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is “OFF” and the corresponding image data is not stored in the image storage area 236a, an instruction to transfer the image data is set (see S3514 in FIG. 96). Then, the image controller 237 transfers the image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a. On the other hand, if the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is “ON”, the corresponding image data has already been stored in the image storage area 236a, and the transfer processing of the image data is stopped. As a result, it is possible to prevent unnecessary transfer from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, thereby reducing the processing load on each part of the display control device 114 and reducing the traffic on the bus line 240. it can.

  The drawing target buffer flag 233i is a frame buffer for developing an image drawn by the image controller 237 from the two frame buffers (the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c). When the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 0, the first frame buffer 236b is specified as the drawing target buffer, and when the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 1, the second frame buffer 236c is specified. Then, the information on the designated drawing target buffer is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list (see S3802 in FIG. 97).

  As a result, the image controller 237 executes a drawing process for developing an image drawn based on the drawing list on the designated drawing target buffer. Further, the image controller 237 reads out previously developed drawing image information from a frame buffer different from the drawing target buffer in parallel with the drawing processing, and outputs the image to the third symbol display device 81 together with the drive signal. By transferring the information, a display process for displaying an image on the third symbol display device 81 is executed.

  The drawing target buffer flag 233j is updated when the drawing target buffer information is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list. This update is performed by inverting the value of the rendering target buffer flag 233j, that is, when the value is “0”, it is set to “1”, and when it is “1”, it is set to “0”. Is done by. As a result, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c every time the drawing list is transmitted. The drawing list is transmitted by a V interrupt executed by the MPU 231 based on a V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and the display process for one frame are completed. This is performed every time the drawing process of the process (see FIG. 85B) is executed (see S3802 in FIG. 97).

  That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for reading image information for one frame, and When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for developing the image for one frame after 20 milliseconds after the drawing process for the image for one frame is completed. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer from which the image information is read out. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. The

  Further, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read. Is done. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. The Thereafter, a frame buffer that expands an image for one frame and a frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read out are changed to either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds. By alternately alternating and designating, it is possible to continuously display an image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while drawing an image for one frame.

<Regarding control processing of main controller 110>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. The MPU 201 is roughly divided into a startup process that is started when the power is turned on, a main process that is executed after the startup process, and a startup process that is periodically performed (at intervals of 2 milliseconds in this embodiment). There are a timer interrupt process and an NMI interrupt process activated by the input of the power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal. For convenience of explanation, the timer interrupt process and the NMI interrupt process are described first, and then the startup Processing and main processing will be described.

  FIG. 58 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110. The timer interruption process is a periodic process executed every 2 milliseconds, for example. In the timer interruption process, first, reading process of various winning switches is executed (S101). That is, the state of various switches connected to the main controller 110 is read, and the state of the switch is determined and the detection information (winning detection information) is stored.

  Next, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S102). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (299 in this embodiment). Then, the updated value of the first initial value random number counter CINI 1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203. Similarly, 1 is added to the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (239 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0 and the updated value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is updated. Is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

  Further, the first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the second hit random number counter C4 are updated (S103). Specifically, 1 is added to each of the first per-random number counter C1, the first per-type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the second per-random number counter C4, and these counter values are the maximum values (in this embodiment, When it reaches 299, 99, 239), it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated values of the counters C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

  Next, a special symbol variation process for setting a variation pattern of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 is executed (S104), which is a process for displaying on the first symbol display device 37 (S104). A start winning process associated with winning (start winning) at the first winning opening 64 is executed (S105). Details of the special symbol variation process and the start winning process will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  After executing the start winning process, the normal symbol variation process, which is a process for displaying on the second symbol display device 83, is executed (S106), and the through gate passing process accompanying the passing of the ball in the through gate 67 is executed. (S107). Details of the normal symbol variation process and the through gate passing process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 63 and 64. After executing the through gate passing process, the firing control process is executed (S108), and other processes to be executed periodically are executed (S109), and the timer interrupt process is terminated. In the launch control process, the ball is fired on the condition that the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51 and the stop switch 51b for stopping the firing is not operated. Is a process for determining ON / OFF of. The main controller 110 instructs the launch controller 112 to launch a sphere when the launch of the sphere is on.

  Next, the special symbol variation process (S104) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 59 is a flowchart showing this special symbol variation process (S104). This special symbol variation process (S104) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 58), and the special symbol (first symbol) variation display performed by the first symbol display device 37 or the third symbol display device. This is a process for controlling the variation display of the third symbol, etc. performed in 81.

  In this special symbol variation process, first, it is determined whether or not the present symbol is a special symbol jackpot (S201). During the special symbol jackpot, the special symbol jackpot (including the special symbol jackpot game) is being displayed on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, and the special symbol jackpot Includes during a predetermined time after the end of the jackpot game. As a result of the determination, if the special symbol is a big hit (S201: Yes), this processing is terminated as it is.

  If the special symbol is not big hit (S201: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S202), and the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing. If not (S202: No), a special symbol variation start process for starting variation display in the first symbol display device 37 is executed (S203). The special symbol variation start process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In the process of S202, if the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S202: Yes), it is determined whether or not the change time of the variable display executed in the first symbol display device 37 has elapsed. (S204). The variation display variation time executed by the first symbol display device 37 is determined according to the variation pattern selected by the stop type selection counter C3 (determined according to the variation pattern command). If the time has not passed (S204: No), this process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if the variation time of the variation display being executed has elapsed in the process of S204 (S204: Yes), a display mode corresponding to the stop symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is set (S205). The setting of the stop symbol is performed in advance by a special symbol variation start process (S203) described later with reference to FIG. When this special symbol variation start process is executed, based on the values of various counters stored in the execution area provided in common for the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a and the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b. A special symbol lottery will be held. More specifically, whether or not the special symbol is a big hit is determined according to the value of the first per random number counter C1, and if the special symbol is a big hit, the value depends on the value of the second per category counter C2. The jackpot A or the jackpot B is determined.

  In this embodiment, when the jackpot A is reached, the blue LED is turned on in the first symbol display device 37, and when the jackpot B is reached, the red LED is turned on. Further, when it is off, the red LED and the green LED are turned on. In addition, although the lighting of each LED is released when the next fluctuation display is started, it may be turned on only for a few seconds after the fluctuation stops.

  After the process of S205 is completed, when the variation display being executed in the first symbol display device 37 is started, the lottery result (the current lottery result) of the special symbol performed by the special symbol variation start process is as follows. It is determined whether or not the special symbol is a big hit (S206). If the current lottery result is a special symbol jackpot (S206: Yes), it is determined which of the two types of special symbols jackpot (jackpot A, jackpot B) is the jackpot type (S207). Is a big hit B, 100 is set to the hour / medium counter 203g of the RAM 203 (S209). Thereafter, the process of S210 is executed. If the jackpot type is jackpot A, the gaming state after the jackpot game is set to a high probability that is a probability variation period (S208). Then, the special symbol jackpot start is set (S210), and the process is terminated.

  In the process of S206, if the current lottery result is out of the special symbol (S206: No), it is determined whether the value of the hour / hour counter 203g is 1 or more (S211), and the value of the hour / hour counter 203g is 1. If it is above (S211: Yes), 1 is subtracted from the value of the hour / minute counter 203g (S212), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, if the value of the hour / minute counter 203g is 0 (S211: No), the process of S212 is skipped and the process is terminated.

  Next, the special symbol variation start process (S203) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 60 is a flowchart showing special symbol variation start processing (S203). This special symbol fluctuation start process (S203) is a process executed in the special symbol fluctuation process (see FIG. 59) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 58). Based on the values of various counters stored in the execution area provided in common with the special symbol 2 holding ball storage area 203b, a lottery (decision of success / failure) of “special symbol jackpot” or “extra special symbol” is performed. It is the process for determining the production pattern (variation production pattern) of the variation production performed by the 1st symbol display device 37 and the 3rd symbol display device 81 while performing.

  In the special symbol fluctuation start process (S203), first, the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d or the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e (the number N2 of the variable display hold in the special symbol) is acquired. (S301). Next, it is determined whether or not the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is larger than 0 (S302), and the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is not 0 ( S302: Yes), the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is decremented by 1 (S303), and the reserved ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e changed by the calculation is set. (S304). The reserved ball number command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and in an external output process (S1001) of a later-described main process (see FIG. 67) executed by the MPU 201. And sent to the sound lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command, it extracts the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e from the reserved ball number command, and the extracted value is stored in the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c of the RAM 223. Store.

  After the reserved ball number command is set by the process of S304, the data stored in the special symbol 2 reserved ball number area 203b is shifted (S305). In the process of S305, data stored in the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area of the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b is sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, the holding area 1 → the execution area, the holding area 2 → the holding area 1, the holding area 3 → the holding area 2, the holding area 4 → the holding area 3, etc. Shift data. After the process of S305 is executed, a process of acquiring execution area data in the special symbol reserved ball number storage area is executed (S310).

  On the other hand, in the process of S302, when it is determined that the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is 0 (S302: No), the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d acquired in the process of S301. It is determined whether (N1) is 0 (S306). If it is determined that the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is 0 (S306: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S306, when it is determined that the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is not 0 (S306: Yes), the value (N1) of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203d is decremented by 1. (S307), a reserved ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol 1 held ball number counter 203d changed by the calculation is set (S308). The reserved ball number command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and in an external output process (S1001) of a later-described main process (see FIG. 67) executed by the MPU 201. And sent to the sound lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command, it extracts the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d from the reserved ball number command, and the extracted value is stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b of the RAM 223. Store.

  After setting the reserved ball number command by the processing of S308, the data stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a is shifted (S309). In the process of S309, the data stored in the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a are sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, the holding area 1 → the execution area, the holding area 2 → the holding area 1, the holding area 3 → the holding area 2, the holding area 4 → the holding area 3, etc. Shift data. After the data is shifted, the values of the first per-random number counter C1 and the first per-type counter C2 stored in the execution area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a and the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b are obtained. (S310).

  Next, it is determined whether or not the gaming state is currently in the probability variation period (high probability gaming state) (S311). The determination as to whether or not it is the probability variation period is executed by determining whether or not a probability variation flag (not shown) is on. The probability variation flag is set to ON based on the end of the jackpot game based on the jackpot A. On the other hand, it is set off based on the start of the jackpot game.

  If it is determined that the probability change is in progress (S311: Yes), since the pachinko machine 10 is in a special symbol probability change state, the process proceeds to S312. In the process of S312, a lottery result as to whether or not the special symbol is a big hit is acquired based on the value of the first per-random number counter C1 acquired in the process of S310 and the special symbol big hit random number table for high probability ( S312). Specifically, the value of the first random number counter C1 is compared with 30 random numbers stored in the special symbol large random number table for high probability one by one. As described above, as random numbers that are big hits of special symbols, "4, 11, 28, 38, 45, 52, 64, 78, 83, 99, 106, 112, 122, 134, 140, 151, 168" , 176, 183, 197, 207, 218, 222, 231, 249, 256, 263, 270, 285, 299 ”are set, and the value of the first random number counter C1 and If the random number value matches, it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit. If the lottery result of the special symbol is acquired, the process proceeds to S314.

  On the other hand, in the process of S311, when it is determined that the pachinko machine 10 is in the special symbol normal state (S311: No), the process of S313 is executed. In the process of S313, based on the value of the first random number counter C1 acquired in the process of S310 and the special symbol jackpot random number table for low probability, a lottery result as to whether or not the special symbol is jackpot is acquired ( S313). Specifically, the value of the first random number counter C1 is compared one by one with the three random number values stored in the special symbol jackpot random number table for low probability. Three random numbers “7, 107, 282” are set as special symbol jackpots, and when the value of the first random number counter C1 matches the random number value that hits them. It is determined that it is a big hit of the special symbol. If the lottery result of the special symbol is acquired, the process proceeds to S314.

  In the process of S314, it is determined whether the special symbol lottery result acquired by the process of S312 or S313 is a special symbol jackpot (S314), and if it is determined that the special symbol is a big jackpot (S314: Yes), the display mode for the big hit is set based on the value of the second hit type counter C2 acquired in the process of S310 (S315). More specifically, the value of the second hit type counter C2 acquired in the process of S310 is compared with the random number value stored in the special symbol big hit type table, and two types of special symbols big hit (big hit A, Among jackpots B), it is determined what kind of jackpot. As described above, if the value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of “0 to 59”, it is determined that the jackpot A (16R jackpot, probable change period until the next jackpot after the jackpot game), “60 to If it is in the range of “99”, it is determined that the jackpot B (16R jackpot, 100 times for a short period of normal symbols).

  In the process of S315, the display mode (the lighting state of the LED 37a) of the first symbol display device 37 is set according to the determined jackpot type (big hit A, big hit B). Further, in order to stop and display the stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot type on the third symbol display device 81, the jackpot type (big hit A, jackpot B) is set as the stop type.

  Next, the variation pattern at the time of jackpot is determined (S316). When the variation pattern is set in the process of S316, the variation time (display time) of the variation effect in the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the third symbol display device 81 is stopped until the big hit symbol is stopped. The variation time of the symbol is determined. At this time, the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203 is confirmed, and the variation time of symbol variation such as normal reach and super reach is determined based on the value of the stop type selection counter C3. The relationship between the numerical value of the stop type selection counter C3 and the variation time is defined in advance by a table or the like.

  In the variation pattern, main controller 110 determines the variation time of the third symbol for notifying the result of the determination, and notifies the sound lamp controller 113 of the determined variation time. The sound lamp control device 113 determines the content (variation pattern) of the variation display mode that is actually displayed on the third symbol display device 81 according to the variation time and the result of the determination. The main control device 110 is configured such that even if the display mode is out of reach, the audio lamp control device 113 can be switched to the out display mode that is not the reach display mode as long as the variation time is the same. Thereby, various display modes can be displayed, and effects can be diversified.

  For example, variation patterns for detachment are defined as “displacement (for a long time)”, “detachment (for a short time)”, “reason normal reach”, “reason superreach”, and “reason special reach”. ing. As a variation pattern for jackpot A and jackpot B, “normal reach” and “super reach” are defined.

  In the process of S314, when it is determined that the special symbol is off (S314: No), the display mode at the time of removal is set (S317). In the process of S317, the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is set to a display mode corresponding to the off symbol, and stored in the execution area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b. Based on the value of the stop type selection counter C <b> 3, the variation time (variation pattern) to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is set.

  Next, the fluctuation pattern at the time of deviation is determined (S318). Here, the display time of the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the variation time of the third symbol until the third symbol display device 81 stops at the off symbol is determined. At this time, similarly to the process of S317, the value of the stop type selection counter C3 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203 is confirmed, and the fluctuation of symbols such as normal reach and super reach is determined based on the value of the stop type selection counter C3. Determine the variation time.

  Next, a variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 of the variation pattern determined in S316 or S318 is set (S319). Next, a stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the value of the stop type selection counter C3 set in the process of S316 or S318 is set (S320). These variation pattern commands and stop type commands are stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and these commands are transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 in the process of S1001 of the main process (FIG. 67). The The sound lamp control device 113 transmits the stop type command to the display control device 114 as it is. When the process of S320 ends, the process returns to the special symbol variation process.

  Next, the start winning process (S105) executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 61 is a flowchart showing the start winning process (S105). This start winning process (S105) is executed in the timer interruption process (see FIG. 58), and it is determined whether or not there is a winning (start winning) in the first winning port 64, and when there is a starting win, This is a process for holding a value indicated by various random number counters and prefetching a lottery result in a special symbol from the values indicated by the various random number counters held.

  When the start winning process is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the ball has won the first winning opening 64 (start winning prize) (S401). Here, the ball entering the first winning port 64 is detected over three timer interruption processes. When it is determined that the ball has won the first winning opening 64 (S401: Yes), the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d (the number N1 of the variable display hold in the special symbol) is acquired (S402). . Then, it is determined whether or not the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is less than the upper limit value (4 in the present embodiment) (S403).

  Then, there is no winning in the first winning opening 64 (S401: No), or even if there is a winning in the first winning opening 64, the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball counter 203d is less than 4. If not (S403: No), the process proceeds to S407. On the other hand, if there is a winning at the first winning opening 64 (S401: Yes) and the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 holding ball counter 203d is less than 4 (S403: Yes), the special symbol 1 holding ball. The value (N1) of the number counter 203d is incremented by 1 (S404). Then, a special symbol 1 reserved ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d changed by the calculation is set (S405).

  The reserved ball number command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and in an external output process (S1001) of a later-described main process (see FIG. 67) executed by the MPU 201. And sent to the sound lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command, it extracts the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d from the reserved ball number command, and the extracted value is stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b of the RAM 223. Store.

  After setting the reserved ball number command by the process of S405, the values of the first per-random number counter C1, the second per-type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 updated in S103 of the timer interrupt process described above are stored in the RAM 203. Is stored in the first area among the empty reserved areas (the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a (S406). In the process of S406, the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball counter 203d is referred to. If the value is 0, the reserved first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the reserved third area is set as the first area, and if the value is 3, the reserved fourth area is set as the first area.

  Next, about S407-S411, about each process of S401-S406 demonstrated above, the process with respect to having won the 1st prize opening 64 is changed into the process with respect to having won the 2nd prize opening 640, Since the same processing is executed, detailed description thereof is omitted. In addition, when a game ball is won in the second winning port 640 and stored as a holding ball, the values of the first random number counter C1 and the second type counter C2 are acquired and the corresponding special It is stored in the empty reservation area of the symbol 2 reservation ball storage area 203b.

  In this way, by acquiring the respective values of the first per-random number counter C1 and the second per-type counter C2 for the special symbol 2 based on the entrance to the second winning port 640, the same as the special symbol 1. Since the lottery can be executed using a common random number for the special symbol 1 and the special symbol 2, the winning probability can be made constant for both the special symbol 1 and the special symbol 2.

  After performing the process of S411, a prefetch process is performed (S412). Details of the look-ahead process (S412) will be described with reference to FIG. 62, but based on the values of various counters acquired for entering the first winning port 64 or the second winning port 640. Thus, a process for determining in advance each lottery result executed at the start of variation is executed.

  In the present embodiment, the value of each counter is configured to be selected based on the incoming ball, but may be configured to be selected at the start of fluctuation. With this configuration, there is no need for a storage area for storing the value of each counter until the start of fluctuation, and the use of the storage area of the RAM 203 can be suppressed. Moreover, you may comprise so that some counters (for example, only stop classification selection counter C3) may be acquired at the time of a fluctuation | variation start among each counter. By configuring in this way, a counter related to the determination of success / failure is acquired at the time of entering the ball, and a counter not related to the determination of success / failure can be acquired later, and the amount of data to be stored is maintained while maintaining fairness of the game. Can be suppressed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 62, the prefetch process (S412) which is one process in the start winning process (S105) executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 62 is a flowchart showing the prefetching process (S412).

  In the prefetching process (FIG. 62, S412), first, based on the acquired value of the first hit random number counter C1, it is determined whether or not the determination of success / failure at the start of fluctuation is a big hit (S501). The determination of success / failure at the start of change is a special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area indicating whether the game state at the start of change is a normal game state (low probability) or a probability change game state (high probability game state). The determination is made based on whether or not the counter value stored in the special symbol 2 holding ball storage area 203b is variably displayed and the hit type. When it is determined that the determination result is a jackpot (S501: Yes), a winning command indicating a jackpot is set (S502). On the other hand, in the process of S501, if the determination result is not a big hit (S501: No), it is determined whether or not it is an outlier super reach (S503). If it is determined in the process of S503 that the game is out of super reach (S503: Yes), a winning command indicating that it is out of super reach is set (S504). On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S503 that it is not an outlier super reach (S503: No), a winning command indicating that it is out is set (S505). As described above, since the result of the determination of whether or not prior to the start of the fluctuation is output as a winning command to the sound lamp control device 113 every time a holding ball is established, the sound lamp control device 113 The success / failure determination result and its hit type can be recognized in advance. Therefore, the sound lamp control device 113 can change the player's advance notice determination result for the hold ball to the player based on the winning command (for example, the color of the hold symbol can be changed to a color for notifying the determination result). In addition, it is possible to execute an effect such as outputting a notification sound for notifying the result of the determination of the success / failure in the holding ball. In addition, since the winning command is output as one winning command for the holding ball every time the holding ball is established, the voice lamp control device 113 can also recognize the establishment of the holding ball.

  Next, the normal symbol variation process (S106) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIG. The normal symbol variation process (S106) is executed in the timer interruption process (see FIG. 58), and the second symbol variation display performed by the second symbol display device 83 and the electric motor attached to the second winning opening 640. This is a process for controlling the opening time of the accessory 640a.

  In this normal symbol variation process, first, it is determined whether or not the present symbol is being hit by a normal symbol (second symbol) (S601). As for the winning of the second symbol, while the display indicating the winning is being made in the second symbol display device 83, and during the opening and closing control of the electric accessory 640a associated with the second winning opening 640, Is included. If the result of determination is that the second symbol is being hit (S601: Yes), this processing is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, if the second symbol is not hit (S601: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is changing (S602), and the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is determined. Is not changing (S602: No), the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f (the number M of the variable display hold in the normal symbol) is acquired (S603). Next, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is greater than 0 (S604), and if the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is 0 (S604: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is not 0 (S604: Yes), 1 is subtracted from the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f (S605).

  Next, the data stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c is shifted (S606). In the process of S606, the data stored in the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area of the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c is sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, the holding area 1 → the execution area, the holding area 2 → the holding area 1, the holding area 3 → the holding area 2, the holding area 4 → the holding area 3, etc. Shift data. After shifting the data, the value of the second per-random number counter C4 stored in the execution area of the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c is acquired (S607).

  Next, it is determined whether or not the time is short (S608). If the time is not short (S608: No), the process proceeds to S611. On the other hand, if the time is short (S608: Yes), it is determined whether or not the special symbol is being hit (S609). During the special symbol jackpot, the special symbol jackpot (including the special symbol jackpot game) is being displayed on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, and the special symbol jackpot Includes during a predetermined time after the end of the jackpot game.

  In the process of S609, if the special symbol is not big hit (S609: No), the process proceeds to S610. In the process of S609, if the special symbol is a big hit (S609: Yes), the process proceeds to S610.

  If the probability change or time is short (that is, the time is short state) (S609: Yes), if the pachinko machine 10 is not in the big hit of the special symbol (S609: No), the second random number counter C4 acquired in the process of S607 Based on the value and the normal hit random number table 202c for high probability (see FIG. 52C), the lottery result indicating whether or not the normal symbol is hit is acquired (S610). Specifically, the value of the second random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the ordinary random number table 202c for high probability (see FIG. 52C).

  In the process of S611, since the pachinko machine 10 is in the big hit of the special symbol or the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the normal symbol, the value of the second per-random number counter C4 acquired in the process of S607 is low. Based on the probability random number table 202c for normal use (see FIG. 52C), a lottery result indicating whether or not the normal symbol is won is acquired (S611). Specifically, the value of the second random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the ordinary random number table 202c for low probability (see FIG. 52C).

  In the present embodiment, the special symbol lottery is difficult to win during the special symbol jackpot. This is because during the big hit of the special symbol (that is, during the special game state), the player hits the ball in an attempt to win the special prize opening 65a, so that the electric accessory 640a attached to the second prize opening 640 is released. This is because it is possible to suppress, as much as possible, the ball that is going to win the special winning opening 65a to enter the second winning opening 640. The special prize opening 65a is provided immediately below the second prize opening 640. Therefore, even if the ball is prevented from entering the second prize opening 640 during the special symbol jackpot, There are many balls in 640. As a result, in most cases, while the pachinko machine 10 is transitioning to the special game state, the number of reserved balls for the second winning opening 640 becomes maximum (four times).

  Next, it is determined whether the lottery result of the normal symbol acquired by the processing of S610 or S611 is a hit of the second symbol (S612), and if it is determined that the symbol is a hit of the second symbol (S612: Yes), the display mode for winning is set (S613). Next, it is determined whether or not the time is short (S614).

  In the process of S614, if it is determined that the time is short (S614: Yes), it is determined whether or not the present symbol is a big hit with a special symbol (S615). As a result of the determination, if the special symbol is a big hit (S615: Yes), the process proceeds to S617. In the present embodiment, during the jackpot of the special symbol, in order to suppress the ball from entering the second winning opening 640 as much as possible, even when it hits the normal symbol, it is the same as when the normal symbol falls off The number of opening times and the opening time of the electric accessory 640a are set.

  In the process of S615, if the special symbol is not big hit (S615: No), the opening period of the electric accessory 640a associated with the second prize opening 640 is set to 1 second, and the number of opening is set to 2 (S616), and the process proceeds to S619.

  In the process of S614, when it is determined that the time is not short (S614: No), the process proceeds to S617. In the process of S617, since the pachinko machine 10 is in the big hit of the special symbol or the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the second symbol, the opening period of the electric accessory 640a associated with the second winning opening 640 is set. In addition to setting to 0.2 seconds, the number of times of opening is set to 1 (S617), and the process proceeds to S619.

  In the process of S612, when it is determined that the second symbol is off (S612: No), the display mode at the time of the off is set (S618). In the process of S618, after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is finished, the symbol “x” is set to be lit and displayed as the stop symbol (second symbol). When the setting of the display mode at the time of removal is completed, the process proceeds to S619.

  In the process of S619, it is determined whether or not it is in the time-short state (S619). If it is in the time-short state (S619: Yes), the variation display variation time in the second symbol display device 83 is set to 3 seconds ( S620), the process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is not the time-short state in the process of S619 (S619: No), the change time of the change display in the second symbol display device 83 is set to 30 seconds (S621), and this process ends. In this way, except for the big hit of the special symbol, when the probability of the second symbol is high, the time of the variable display is very short as “30 seconds → 3 seconds” compared to the low probability of the second symbol, Further, since the release period of the second winning opening 640 becomes very long as “0.2 seconds × 1 time → 1 second × 2 times”, it becomes easy for the ball to enter the second winning opening 640.

  On the other hand, in the process of S602, if the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is changing (S602: Yes), whether or not the change time of the variable display executed in the second symbol display device 83 has elapsed. Is discriminated (S622). Here, the variation time is a time set in advance by the process of S620 or the process of S621 before the variable display is started on the second symbol display device 83.

  If the variation time has not elapsed in the process of S622 (S622: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if the variation time of the variation display being executed has elapsed in the process of S622 (S622: Yes), the stop display of the second symbol display device 83 is set (S623). In the process of S623, if the normal symbol lottery is won, and the display mode is set by the process of S613, the symbol “◯” as the second symbol is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device 83 (lights up). Display). On the other hand, if the normal symbol lottery is lost and the display mode is set by the processing of S618, the “x” symbol as the second symbol is stopped and displayed (lit display) on the second symbol display device 83. Is set to When the stop display is set by the process of S623, when the second symbol display update process (see S1007) of the main process (see FIG. 67) is executed next, the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is displayed. The stop symbol (second symbol) is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device 83 (lit display) in the display mode set in the processing of S613 or S618.

  Next, whether or not the normal symbol lottery result (the current lottery result) performed by the normal symbol variation process is the normal symbol hit when the variation display being executed in the second symbol display device 83 is started. Is determined (S624). If the current lottery result is a normal symbol (S624: Yes), the opening / closing control start of the electric accessory 640a associated with the second winning opening 640 is set (S625), and this process is terminated. When the opening / closing control start of the electric accessory 640a is set by the process of S625, when the electric accessory opening / closing process (see S1005) of the main process (see FIG. 67) is executed next, the electric accessory 640a The opening / closing control is started, and the opening / closing control of the electric accessory 640a is continued until the opening time and the number of opening times set in the processing of S616 or S617 are completed. On the other hand, in the process of S624, if the current lottery result is out of the normal symbol (S624: No), the process of S625 is skipped and the process is terminated.

  Next, the through gate passage process (S107) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 64 is a flowchart showing the through gate passing process (S107). This through gate passing process (S107) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 58), and it is determined whether or not a sphere has passed through the through gate 67. This is a process for acquiring and holding the value indicated by the random number counter C4.

  In the through gate passing process, first, it is determined whether or not the sphere has passed through the through gate 67 (S701). Here, the passage of the sphere in the through gate 67 is detected over three timer interruption processes. If it is determined that the ball has passed through the through gate 67 (S701: Yes), the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f (the number M of the variable display hold in the normal symbol) is acquired (S702). Then, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is less than the upper limit value (4 in the present embodiment) (S703).

  Whether the ball has not passed through the through gate 67 (S701: No), or even if the ball has passed through the through gate 67, the value (M) of the normal symbol reservation ball number counter 203f is not less than 4 (S703). : No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if the ball passes through the through gate 67 (S701: Yes) and the value (M) of the normal symbol reservation ball number counter 203f is less than 4 (S703: Yes), the normal symbol hold ball number counter 203f The value (M) is incremented by 1 (S704). Then, the value of the second random number counter C4 updated in S103 of the timer interruption process described above is used as the first of the free reserved areas (the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area) of the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c of the RAM 203. (S705). In the process of S705, the value of the normal symbol reserved ball counter 203f is referred to, and if the value is 0, the reserved first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area is set as the first area, and if the value is 2, the reserved third area is set as the first area. Exit.

  FIG. 65 is a flowchart showing an NMI interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110. The NMI interruption process is a process executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut down due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. By this NMI interrupt processing, the information on the occurrence of power interruption is stored in the RAM 203. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main controller 110. Then, the MPU 201 interrupts the control being executed and starts the NMI interrupt process, stores the power-off occurrence information in the RAM 203 as a setting of the power-off occurrence information (S801), and ends the NMI interrupt process. To do.

  The above NMI interrupt process is executed in the same manner in the payout and emission control device 111, and information on the occurrence of power interruption is stored in the RAM 213 by the NMI interrupt process. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control being executed. Thus, the NMI interrupt process is started.

  Next, a startup process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 when the main control device 110 is powered on will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 66 is a flowchart showing this start-up process. This start-up process is activated by a reset at power-on. In the start-up process, first, an initial setting process associated with power-on is executed (S901). For example, a predetermined value set in advance for the stack pointer is set. Next, a wait process (1 second in this embodiment) is executed in order to wait for the sub-side control device (peripheral control devices such as the sound lamp control device 113 and the payout control device 111) to be operable. (S902). Then, access to the RAM 203 is permitted (S903).

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) provided in the power supply device 115 is turned on (S904). If it is turned on (S904: Yes), the process proceeds to S912. On the other hand, if the RAM erasure switch 122 is not turned on (S904: No), it is further determined whether or not the power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S905), and if not stored (S905: No). Since there is a possibility that the process at the time of the previous power-off was not completed normally, the process proceeds to S912 also in this case.

  If the power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S905: Yes), the RAM determination value is calculated (S906). If the calculated RAM determination value is not normal (S907: No), that is, the calculated RAM If the determination value does not match the RAM determination value stored at the time of power-off, the backed up data has been destroyed. In such a case as well, the process proceeds to S912. As will be described later in the processing of S1014 in FIG. 67, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at the work area address of the RAM 203. Instead of the RAM determination value, the validity of the backup may be determined based on whether or not the keyword written in a predetermined area of the RAM 203 is correctly stored.

  In the process of S912, a payout initialization command is transmitted in order to initialize the payout control device 111 as the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) (S912). Upon receiving this payout initialization command, the payout control device 111 clears an area (working area) other than the stack area of the RAM 213, sets an initial value, and enters a state in which game ball payout control can be started. After transmitting the payout initialization command, main controller 110 executes initialization processing (S913, S914) of RAM 203.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, when RAM data is initialized when the power is turned on, for example, when the hall starts business, the power is turned on while the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed. Therefore, if the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed during the start-up process, the RAM initialization process (S913, S914) is executed. Similarly, initialization processing (S913, S914) of the RAM 203 is executed even when the information on occurrence of power interruption is not set or when a backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value or the like). . In the RAM initialization process (S913, S914), the used area of the RAM 203 is cleared to 0 (S913), and then the initial value of the RAM 203 is set (S914). After the initialization process of the RAM 203 is executed, the process proceeds to S910.

  On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (S904: No), the information on occurrence of power interruption is stored (S905: Yes), and the RAM judgment value (checksum value etc.) is normal ( (S907: Yes), the power-off occurrence information is cleared while the backed up data is held in the RAM 203 (S908). Next, a payout return command at the time of power recovery for returning the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) to the gaming state when the drive power supply is cut off is transmitted (S909), and the process proceeds to S910. When the payout control device 111 receives this payout return command, the payout control device 111 is in a state where the payout control of the game ball can be started while holding the data stored in the RAM 213.

  In the process of S910, an effect permission command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113, and the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 are permitted to execute various effects. Next, an interrupt is permitted (S911), and the process proceeds to a main process described later.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 67, the main process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 after the above-described startup process will be described. FIG. 67 is a flowchart showing this main process. In this main process, the main process of the game is executed. As its outline, each process of S1001 to S1007 is executed as a periodic process with a period of 4 milliseconds, and the counter update process of S1010 and S1011 is executed in the remaining time.

  In the main processing, first, during execution of the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 58), output data such as commands stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203 is transferred to each control device (peripheral). External output processing to be transmitted to the control device is executed (S1001). Specifically, the presence / absence of winning detection information detected in the switch reading process of S101 in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 58) is determined, and if there is winning detection information, the payout control device 111 corresponds to the number of balls acquired. Send a prize ball command. Further, the reserved ball number command set in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 58) or the start winning process (see FIG. 61) is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. Also, the winning command set in the start winning process or the prefetch process (see FIG. 62) is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. Further, by this external output processing, a variation pattern command, a stop type command, and the like necessary for the third symbol variation display by the third symbol display device 81 are transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113.

  Next, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is updated (S1002). Specifically, the variation type counter CS1 is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (198 in this embodiment). Then, the update value of the variation type counter CS 1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

  When the update of the variation type counter CS1 is completed, the winning ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S1003). Next, when the special symbol is in the big hit state, the big hit effect is executed or variable. A jackpot control process for opening or closing the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a of the winning device 65 is executed (S1004). In the jackpot control process, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for each round of the big hit state, and it is determined whether the maximum opening time of the specific winning opening 65a has elapsed or whether a specified number of balls have won the specific winning slot 65a. When any of these conditions is met, the specific winning opening 65a is closed. The opening and closing of the specific winning opening 65a is repeated for a predetermined number of rounds. In the present embodiment, the jackpot control process (S1004) is executed in the main process, but may be executed in the timer interrupt process.

  Next, an electrical accessory opening / closing process for performing opening / closing control of the electrical accessory 640a associated with the second winning opening 640 is executed (S1005). In the electric accessory opening / closing process, when the opening / closing control start of the electric accessory 640a is set by the process of S625 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 63), the opening / closing control of the electric accessory 640a is started. The opening / closing control of the electric accessory 640a is continued until the opening time and the number of opening times set in the processing of S613 in FIG. 63 or the processing of S617 in the normal symbol variation processing are completed.

  Next, the 1st symbol display update process which updates the display of the 1st symbol display apparatus 37 is performed (S1006). In the first symbol display update processing, when a variation pattern is set by the processing of S316 or the processing of S318 of the special symbol variation start processing (see FIG. 60), the variation display corresponding to the variation pattern is displayed as the first symbol display. Begin at device 37. In the present embodiment, among the LEDs 37a of the first symbol display device 37, until the fluctuation time elapses after the fluctuation starts, for example, if the currently lit LED is red, the red LED is turned off. The green LED is turned on, and if the green LED is lit, the green LED is turned off and the blue LED is turned on. If the blue LED is lit, the blue LED is turned off. And turn on the red LED.

  The main process is executed every 4 milliseconds, but if the LED lighting color is changed every time the main process is executed, the player cannot confirm the change in the LED lighting color. Therefore, a counter (not shown) is counted once every time the main process is executed so that the player can confirm the change in the lighting color of the LED. Change the lighting color of. That is, the lighting color of the LED is changed every 0.4 seconds. The counter value is reset to 0 when the lighting color of the LED is changed.

  In the first symbol display updating process, when the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern set by the process of S315 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 60) or the process of S317 is completed, the first symbol display device The variation display being executed in 37 is terminated, and the stop symbol (first symbol) is displayed as the first symbol in the display mode set by the processing of S315 or the processing of S317 of the special symbol variation start processing (see FIG. 60). The device 37 is stopped (lighted).

  Next, a second symbol display update process for updating the display of the second symbol display device 83 is executed (S1007). In the second symbol display update process, when the variation time of the second symbol is set by the process of S620 of the normal symbol variation start process (see FIG. 63) or the process of S621, the second symbol display device 83 displays the variation display. Start. Thereby, in the 2nd symbol display apparatus 83, the variable display which turns on the symbol of "(circle)" and the symbol of "x" as a 2nd symbol alternately is performed. Further, in the second symbol display update process, when the stop display of the second symbol display device 83 is set by the processing of S623 of the normal symbol variation processing (see FIG. 63), the second symbol display device 83 executes the symbol display update processing. The display of the change is terminated, and the stop symbol (second symbol) is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device 83 (lighted display) in the display mode set by the processing of S613 in the normal symbol variation start process (see FIG. 63). To do.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not occurrence information of power interruption is stored in the RAM 203 (S1008). If no occurrence information of power interruption is stored in the RAM 203 (S1008: No), a power failure signal is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252. SG1 is not output and the power supply is not shut off. Therefore, in such a case, it is determined whether or not the next main processing execution timing has been reached, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 milliseconds in the present embodiment) has elapsed since the start of the current main processing (S1009). ) If the predetermined time has already passed (S1009: Yes), the process proceeds to S1001, and the processes after S1001 described above are repeatedly executed.

  On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not yet elapsed from the start of the current main process (S1009: No), the initial time is reached until the predetermined time is reached, that is, within the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main process. The value random number counter CINI1, the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and the variation type counter CS1 are repeatedly updated (S1010, S1011).

  First, the initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S1010). Specifically, the initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are incremented by 1, and are cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (299, 239 in the present embodiment). Then, the updated values of the initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203, respectively. Next, the variation type counter CS1 is updated by the same method as the processing of S1002 (S1011).

  Here, since the execution time of each process of S1001 to S1007 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the next main process execution timing is not constant and varies. Therefore, the initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are repeatedly updated using the remaining time, whereby the initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 (that is, the first per random number counter CINI2) The initial value of the random number counter C1 and the initial value of the second random number counter C4) can be updated at random. Similarly, the stop type selection counter C3 can be updated at random.

  In the processing of S1008, if the occurrence information of the power supply interruption is stored in the RAM 203 (S1008: Yes), the power supply is shut down due to the occurrence of a power outage or the power off, and the power outage monitoring circuit 252 outputs the power outage signal SG1. As a result, since the NMI interruption process of FIG. 65 has been executed, the power-off process after S1012 is executed. First, the generation of each interrupt process is prohibited (S1012), and a power-off command indicating that the power has been cut off is sent to other control devices (peripheral control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the sound lamp control device 113). (S1013). Then, the RAM determination value is calculated and stored (S1014), access to the RAM 203 is prohibited (S1015), and the infinite loop is continued until the power supply is completely shut down and the process cannot be executed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the stack area and work area to be backed up in the RAM 203.

  Note that the processing of S1008 is performed at the timing when the series of processing corresponding to the game state change performed in S1001 to S1007 ends, or at the end of one cycle of the processing of S1010 and S1011 performed within the remaining time. It is running. Therefore, in the main process of the main controller 110, the occurrence information of the power supply interruption is confirmed at the timing when each setting is completed. The process can be started from S1001. That is, the process can be started from the process of S1001 as in the case where the initialization is performed in the startup process. Therefore, in the process at the time of power shutdown, the contents of each register used by the MPU 201 are not saved in the stack area or the value of the stack pointer is not saved. In the initial setting process (S901), the stack pointer By setting to a predetermined value (initial value), it is possible to start from the processing of S1001. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the control burden on the main control device 110 and to perform accurate control without causing the main control device 110 to malfunction or run away.

<Control processing executed by the sound lamp control device 113>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIGS. The processing of the MPU 221 is roughly classified into a startup process that is started when the power is turned on, and a main process that is executed after the startup process.

  First, a startup process executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 68 is a flowchart showing this start-up process. This startup process is started when the power is turned on.

  When the start-up process is executed, first, an initial setting process associated with power-on is executed (S1201). Specifically, a predetermined value set in advance for the stack pointer is set. Thereafter, depending on whether or not the power-off process flag is turned on, the power-on process of S1320 is performed in this startup process due to an instantaneous voltage drop (momentary power failure, so-called “momentary power failure”) (see FIG. 70). ) Is determined during execution (S1202). As will be described later with reference to FIG. 70, when the sound lamp control device 113 receives a power-off command from the main control device 110 (see S1317 in FIG. 70), it executes a power-off process in S1320. The power-off process flag is turned on before the power-off process is executed, and the power-off process flag is turned off after the power-off process ends. Therefore, whether or not the power-off process in S1320 is in the middle of execution can be determined by the state of the power-off process flag.

  If the power-off processing flag is off (S1202: No), the current start-up processing is started after the power supply is completely shut off, or after an instantaneous power failure, and the power-off in S1320 It was started after the execution of the process was completed, or started only after the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 was reset due to noise or the like (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110). is there. Therefore, in these cases, it is confirmed whether or not the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1203).

  Confirmation of data destruction of the RAM 223 is performed as follows. That is, data as a keyword “55AAh” is written in a specific area of the RAM 223 by the process of S1206. Therefore, the data stored in the specific area is checked, and if the data is “55AAh”, there is no data destruction in the RAM 223. Conversely, if the data is not “55AAh”, the data destruction in the RAM 223 can be confirmed. If data destruction of the RAM 223 is confirmed (S1203: Yes), the process proceeds to S1204, and initialization of the RAM 223 is started. On the other hand, if data destruction of the RAM 223 is not confirmed (S1203: No), the process proceeds to S1208.

  If the current start-up process is started after the power supply is completely shut down, the keyword “55AAh” is not stored in the specific area of the RAM 223 (the memory in the RAM 223 is lost due to the power-off). ), It is determined that the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1203: Yes), and the process proceeds to S1204. On the other hand, this startup process was started after an instantaneous power failure and after completing the power-off process in S1320, or reset only to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 due to noise or the like. When the process starts, since the keyword “55AAh” is stored in the specific area of the RAM 223, it is determined that the data in the RAM 223 is normal (S1203: No), and the process proceeds to S1208.

  If the power-off process flag is on (S1202: Yes), the startup process of this time is after an instantaneous power failure has occurred and during the execution of the power-off process of S1320, the sound lamp control device 113. The MPU 221 is started after being reset. In such a case, since the power-off process is being executed, the storage state of the RAM 223 is not necessarily correct. Therefore, since control cannot be continued in such a case, the process proceeds to S1204, and initialization of the RAM 223 is started.

  In the process of S1204, the entire storage area of the RAM 223 is checked (S1204). As a check method, first, “0FFh” is written for each byte, and it is read for each byte to check whether it is “0FFh”. If “0FFh”, it is determined as normal. The writing and checking for each byte are performed in the order of “55h”, “0AAh”, and “00h” after “0FFh”. This RAM 223 read / write check clears all storage areas of the RAM 223 to zero.

  If it is determined that the read / write check is normal for all the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S1205: Yes), the keyword “55AAh” is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 and the RAM destruction check data is set (S1206). By checking the keyword “55AAh” written in this specific area, it is checked whether or not there is data corruption in the RAM 223. On the other hand, if an abnormality in the read / write check is detected in any storage area of the RAM 223 (S1205: No), the abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified (S1207), and an infinite loop is performed until the power is shut off. The abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified by the display lamp 34. The sound output device 226 may output a sound to notify the abnormality of the RAM 223, or an error command may be transmitted to the display control device 114 to display an error message on the third symbol display device 81. It may be.

  In the processing of S1208, it is determined whether or not the power-off flag is turned on (S1208). The power-off flag is turned on when the power-off process in S1320 is executed (see S1317 in FIG. 70). In other words, since the power-off flag is turned on before the power-off process in S1320 is executed, the current start-up process is instantaneous because the power-off flag is turned on to reach the process in S1208. This is a case where the process is started after the power failure has occurred and the execution of the power-off process in S1320 is completed. Therefore, in such a case (S1208: Yes), the RAM work area is cleared to initialize each process of the sound lamp control device 113 (S1209), the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S1210), and an interrupt is performed. The permission is set (S1211), and the process proceeds to the main process. Note that the work area of the RAM 223 is an area other than an area for storing commands received from the main control device 110.

  On the other hand, when the power-off flag is turned off, the process of S1208 is reached because the current start-up process is started after, for example, the power supply is completely shut down. This is a case where the processing has been reached, or the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 is reset only (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110) due to noise or the like. Therefore, in such a case (S1208: No), S1209 which is the process of clearing the work area of the RAM 223 is skipped, the process proceeds to S1210, the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S1210), and the interrupt permission is set. In step S1211, the process proceeds to the main process. Thereafter, it is determined whether a status command has been received from the main controller 110 (S1212).

  The reason for skipping the clear process in S1209 is that when the process from S1204 to S1208 is reached via the process in S1206, all the storage areas of the RAM 223 have already been cleared by the process in S1204. When only the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like and the start-up process is started, the data in the work area of the RAM 223 is stored without being cleared, so that the sound lamp control device 113 is saved. This is because the control can be continued.

  In the process of S1214, a time setting process is executed (S1214). The time setting process (S1214) will be described in detail with reference to FIG.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 69, the time setting process (S1214) which is one process in the start-up process (see FIG. 68) executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 69 is a flowchart showing the time setting process (S1214). In the time setting process (FIG. 69, S1214), the setting switch 291 is determined to determine whether or not to execute the time effect. If the setting is to execute the time effect, the time information is acquired from the RTC 292. Then, based on the time information, a process of setting the time effect period in the set time storage area 223j is executed.

  In the time setting process (FIG. 69, S1214), first, time information is acquired from the RTC 292 (S1221). As the time information acquired here, a value of “hour, minute” is acquired. Note that the RTC 292 is a timing unit having a battery inside, and is configured such that when the pachinko machine 10 is assembled, the same current time is initially set in the pachinko machine 10 by a predetermined jig. The capacity of the internal battery is about three and a half years. The RTC 292 also has a calendar function and is configured to be able to determine “year / month / day”. Therefore, for example, on Christmas day, it is possible to control to change to a background image exclusively for Christmas or to display a special character such as Santa.

  Next, based on the acquired time information, a preparation period and a time effect period are calculated and set in the set time storage area 223j (S1222).

  In the present embodiment, the preparation period and the time effect period for 24 hours are calculated based on the acquired time information and set in the set time storage area 223j. It is also possible to set 54 minutes to execute the game, measure the period by counting down or counting up, and set the preparation period based on the passage of 54 minutes. In addition, a time after 54 minutes may be set, and the time for the next period may be set when the time is reached. With this configuration, the required capacity of the storage area can be reduced. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can be configured at a lower cost.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 70, the main process executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 after the start-up process of the sound lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 70 is a flowchart showing this main process. When the main process is executed, it is first determined whether or not one millisecond or more has elapsed since the main process was started or the current process of S1301 was executed (S1301). If the time has not elapsed (S1301: No), the process proceeds to S1312 without performing the processes in S1302 to S1311. Whether or not 1 millisecond has elapsed in the processing of S1301 is mainly processing related to display (production) in S1302 to S1311, and it is not necessary to edit in a short cycle (within 1 millisecond). On the other hand, it is preferable to execute the command determination process of S1312, the change display setting process of S1313, and the process of updating various counter values not shown in a short cycle. By executing the processing of S1312 in a short cycle, it is possible to prevent a command received from the main controller 110 from being missed. By executing the processing of S1313 in a short cycle, the command received by the command determination processing Based on the above, it is possible to make a setting related to the changing effect without delay.

  If one millisecond or more has elapsed in the process of S1301 (S1301: Yes), first, various commands for the display control apparatus 114 set by the processes of S1303 to S1314 are transmitted to the display control apparatus 114 ( S1302). Next, the setting of the lighting mode of the display lamp 34 and the lighting mode of the lamp edited in the processing of S1308 described later are set (S1303), and then the power-on notification process is executed (S1304). In the power-on notification process, when the power is turned on, a notification is given to notify that the power is turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds). The notification is performed by the audio output device 226 or the lamp display device 227. Is called. Moreover, it is good also as what transmits a command to the display control apparatus 114 to alert | report that power was supplied on the screen of the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81. FIG. If the power is not turned on, the process proceeds to S1305 without performing the notification by the power-on notification process.

  In the process of S1305, a waiting-for-waiting effect process is executed, and then a hold number display update process is executed (S1306). In the customer waiting effect process, when a predetermined period of time elapses when the pachinko machine 10 is not played by the player, setting for switching the display of the third symbol display device 81 to the title screen is performed, and the setting is displayed as a command. Sent to device 114. In the number-of-holds display update process, a process for turning on a hold lamp (not shown) according to the value of the special symbol 1 number-of-holds ball counter 223b is performed.

  Thereafter, frame button input monitoring / effect processing is executed (S1307). This frame button input monitoring / production process monitors the input of whether or not the frame button 22 operated by the player has been pressed to enhance the production effect, and corresponds to the case where the input of the frame button 22 is confirmed. This is a process for setting to produce an effect. Details of the frame button input monitoring / production process (S1307) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the frame button input monitoring / production process ends, the lamp editing process is executed (S1308), and then the sound editing / output process is executed (S1309). In the lamp editing process, lighting patterns and the like of the illumination units 29 to 33 are set so as to correspond to the display performed on the third symbol display device 81. In the sound editing / output process, the output pattern of the sound output device 226 is set so as to correspond to the display performed on the third symbol display device 81, and the sound is output from the sound output device 226 according to the setting.

  After the process of S1309, a liquid crystal effect execution management process is executed (S1310), and a background image setting process is further executed (S1311). Thereafter, the process proceeds to S1312. In the liquid crystal effect execution management process, a time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed by the third symbol display device 81 is set based on the variable pattern command transmitted from the main controller 110. The lamp editing process of S1308 is executed based on the time set in the liquid crystal effect execution monitoring process. Note that the sound editing / output process of S1309 is also executed in a time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed in the third symbol display device 81.

  In the process of S1312, a command determination process for performing a process according to the command received from the main controller 110 is performed (S1312). Details of this command determination processing will be described later with reference to FIG. After the command determination process (FIG. 71, S1312) is executed, the variable display setting process is executed (S1313). In the variation display setting process, a variation pattern command for display is generated and set based on the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110 in order to cause the third symbol display device 81 to execute a variation effect. As a result, the command is transmitted to the display control device 114. Details of this variation display setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the process of S1313 is completed, the process of the synchronized effect management process (S1314) is executed. Details of this synchronized effect management process (S1314) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the processing of S1314 is completed, it is determined whether or not the information on occurrence of power interruption is stored in the work RAM 233 (S1317). The information on the occurrence of power-off is stored when a power-off command is received from the main controller 110. If power failure occurrence information is stored in the processing of S1317 (S1317: Yes), both the power interruption flag and the power interruption processing flag are turned on (S1319), and the power interruption processing is executed (S1320). After the power-off process is executed, the power-off process flag is turned off (S1321), and then the process is looped infinitely. In the power-off process, the generation of the interrupt process is prohibited and each output port is turned off to turn off the output from the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227. Further, the storage of the information on occurrence of power interruption is also erased.

  On the other hand, if the occurrence information of power interruption is not stored in the process of S1317 (S1317: No), it is determined whether or not the RAM 223 is destroyed based on the keyword stored in the RAM 223 (S1318), and the RAM 223 is destroyed. If not (S1318: No), the process returns to S1301, and the main process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1318: Yes), the process is looped infinitely to stop the execution of the subsequent processes. Here, if it is determined that the RAM is destroyed and an infinite loop is performed, the main process is not executed, and thereafter, the display by the third symbol display device 81 does not change. Therefore, since the player can know that an abnormality has occurred, he can call a hall clerk or the like and request repair of the pachinko machine 10 or the like. Further, when it is confirmed that the RAM 223 is destroyed, the sound output device 226 or the lamp display device 227 may notify the RAM destruction.

  Next, a command determination process (S1312) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 71 is a flowchart showing this command determination processing (S1312). This command determination processing (S1312) is executed in the main processing (see FIG. 70) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113, and determines the command received from the main control device 110 as described above. .

  In the command determination process, first, the first command received from the main controller 110 among unprocessed commands is read from the command storage area provided in the RAM 223, analyzed, and the variation pattern command is received from the main controller 110. It is determined whether or not (S1401). When the variation pattern command is received (S1401: Yes), the variation start flag 223e is turned on (S1402), and the data of the corresponding winning information storage area is shifted (S1403). Thereafter, a notice selection process is executed (S1404), and the process proceeds to S1419.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 72, the details of the notice selection processing (S1404) will be described. FIG. 72 is a flowchart showing the notice selection processing (S1404).

  In the advance notice selection process (S1404), first, the value of the effect counter 223g is acquired (S1501). It is determined whether or not the effect mode set in the effect mode storage area 223k is the effect mode A (S1502). When it is determined that the effect mode A is set (S1502: Yes), the normal notice effect is selected based on the determination result and the value of the effect counter 223g (S1503). Thereafter, a display notice command indicating the selected notice effect is set (S1504).

  On the other hand, if the effect mode A is not set in the process of S1502 (S1502: No), it is determined whether the effect mode C is set (S1505). When the production mode C is set (S1505: Yes), if the result of the determination is correct, the third symbol display device 81 displays a notice of the super fish school in which the school of fish flows from right to left. A notice command is set (S1507).

  On the other hand, when the effect mode C is not set in the processing of S1505 (S1505: No), or when the determination result is not successful in the processing of S1506 (S1506: No), this processing ends.

  As described above, the display notice command to be set can be switched based on the set effect mode. In addition, since the notice effect is also determined based on the determination result at the start of the change and the value of the effect counter 223g, it is not necessary to perform a process of discriminating and selecting the display start timing and the like, thereby reducing the control load. be able to. In the present embodiment, the timing for displaying the notice is determined in advance by the variation pattern, and the display control device 114 displays the notice at that timing by setting a display notice display command for indicating the timing. To be set.

  Here, returning to FIG. 71, the description will be continued. After the notice selection process (FIG. 72, S1404) is executed, this process is terminated and the process returns to the main process. If it is determined that a variation pattern command has not been received (S1401: No), it is then determined whether a stop type command has been received from the main controller 110 (S1405). When the stop type command is received (S1405: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223f of the RAM 223 is set to ON (S1406), and the stop type is extracted from the received stop type command (S1407). Return to processing. The stop type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223 and is referred to when a later-described variable display setting process (see FIG. 74) is executed. Then, it is used to set a display stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type of the variation effect.

  On the other hand, if a stop type command has not been received (S1405: No), it is then determined whether or not a reserved ball number command has been received from the main control device 110 (S1408). If a reserved ball number command is received (S1408: Yes), the number of held balls is extracted from the received command, and the corresponding special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b and special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c are extracted. The number of reserved balls is set for each (S1409).

  Here, the number-of-holding balls command is transmitted from the main controller 110 when the ball has won (start winning) at the first winning port 64 or the second winning port 640, or when a special symbol lottery has been performed. Therefore, every time a start winning is detected or every time a special symbol is drawn, the special symbol 1 reserved ball counter 223b and the special symbol 2 reserved ball counter 223c of the voice lamp control device 113 are processed by the processing of S1407. Can be adjusted to the values of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e of the main controller 110, respectively. Therefore, due to the influence of noise or the like, the values of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c of the sound lamp control device 113 are the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d of the main controller 110, and the special symbol. 2 Even if it deviates from the value of the reserved ball number counter 203e, the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c of the voice lamp control device 113 when the start winning is detected or when the special symbol is drawn. Can be adjusted to the values of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e of the main control device 110. When the processing of S1407 is executed, a display reserved ball number command for notifying the display control device 114 of the updated values of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c. Is set. Thereby, in the display control device 114, the number of reserved balls corresponding to the number of reserved balls is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  On the other hand, if no pending ball number command has been received (S1408: No), it is then determined whether or not a special symbol winning command has been received from the main controller 110 (S1410). When a winning command is received (S1410: Yes), a winning command receiving process is executed (S1411). Thereafter, processing according to other commands is executed (S1419), and the process returns to the main processing. As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, when the ball wins (starts winning) in the first winning port 64 or the second winning port 640, each value of each of the counters C1 to C3 is acquired in the main controller 110. The acquired values of the counters C1 to C3 are respectively stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number storage area 203b. Further, as soon as each value of each of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 is acquired in the main controller 110, the original value of each of the counters C1 to C3 is obtained from the original value, separately from the original special symbol jackpot lottery. Various information obtained when the lottery is performed is pre-read (predicted). When the main control device 110 finishes prefetching, a winning command including various types of information obtained by prefetching (whether, stop type, variation pattern) is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 73, a winning command reception process (S1411) which is a process in the command determination process (FIG. 71, S1312) will be described. FIG. 73 is a flowchart showing a winning command reception process (S1411). In the winning command reception process, first, data is set in the winning information storage area corresponding to the received winning command (S1511), and the value of the effect counter 223g is acquired (S1512). Next, it is determined whether the eight effect flags 223i are on (S1513). If the eight effect flags 223i are on (S1514: Yes), this process ends. On the other hand, if the eight effect flag 223i is not on, whether the total number of reserved symbols in the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c is eight (that is, the first special symbol and Whether the number of reserved balls with the second special symbol is the maximum value) is determined (S1514).

  When the number of holding is eight (S1514: Yes), based on the effect counter 223g, an eight effect lottery is executed as to whether or not to perform a notice display mode executed for eight reserved balls ( S1519). Here, in the eight effect lottery, it is determined whether the value of the effect counter 223g (counter updated in the range of 0 to 198) acquired in the processing of S1512 is any of “0 to 49”.

  When the result of the eight effect lottery executes the eight effect (S1520: Yes), the eight effect flag 223i is turned on and the eight effect is set (S1522). On the other hand, when the result of the eight effect lottery does not execute the eight effect (S1520: No), this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S1514, if the number of holds is not eight (S1514: No), a normal hold effect is selected based on the value of the acquired effect counter 223g (S1515), and whether there is a change in the hold effect. It is determined (S1516). Here, if the received winning command is a win, if the value of the effect counter 223g is “0 to 99”, the normal holding effect (the display mode of the reserved symbol corresponding to the received winning command is shown in FIG. ) Is changed to a symbol displayed as PUSH), and otherwise the normal holding effect is not selected (that is, the holding effect (the display pattern of the holding symbol is not changed)).

  If there is a change in the hold effect (S1516: Yes), the corresponding hold effect flag 223h is set to ON (S1517), and the selected normal hold effect is set (S1518). On the other hand, if there is no change in the hold effect (S1516: No), this process is terminated.

  Returning to FIG. 71, the description will be continued. If it is determined in S1410 that a special symbol winning command has not been received (S1410: No), it is determined whether another command has been received, and processing according to the received command is executed. The process returns to the main process (S1419). For example, if the other command is a command used in the sound lamp control device 113, the processing corresponding to the command is performed, the processing result is stored in the RAM 223, and if the command is used in the display control device 114, the command is displayed. The command is set to be transmitted to the device 114.

  Thus, in the present embodiment, the hold effect displayed is set differently depending on the difference in the number of holds. When the number of holds reaches the maximum value, as shown in FIG. 42 (a), an effect mode different from the normal hold effect (see FIG. 41 (a)) is displayed, so the player tries to increase the number of holds as much as possible. You can play games with motivation.

  In addition, as will be described later, in the normal holding effect, it is changed by operating the frame button 22 to the holding symbol for notifying the result of the determination of the success / failure corresponding to the changed holding symbol. Specifically, when the determination result is a win, the symbol is displayed variably by pressing the frame button 22 on a star symbol, and when the selected variation pattern is super reach, the triangle symbol is pressed. The Further, in the eight effects, the notification mode is determined based on the result of the determination of whether or not one of the eight reserved symbols is displayed and the type of the variation pattern. For example, the big hit hold is stored, and as a notification mode based on it, as shown in FIG. 42 (b), when the frame button 22 is pressed and displayed for each of the eight PUSH symbols, the change is displayed. Is displayed with the word “Ohatsu !!!!”. FIG. 42 (b) shows a state in which the second PUSH symbols are variably displayed.

  In the present embodiment, for the eight effects, when it is determined to execute the eight effects, an effect mode is displayed according to the determination result of the determination in the hold storage and the selected variation pattern type. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and based on the fact that the number of holdings is eight, it is determined whether to execute eight effects and when it is determined to execute eight effects. Displays the reserved symbol display in a display manner as shown in FIG. When a hold memory that is a big hit in the hold memory is set in the hold memory, a notification mode (for example, “hit !!!!”) indicating a big win is set. On the other hand, when a hold that results in a big hit is not stored, a notification mode for expecting a big hit (for example, “big hit determined ????”) is set and the frame button 22 is pressed. If the reserved ball is digested before and a new reserved ball is stored, the notification mode set by the determination result of the reserved ball may be changed and set. In this case, if the determination result of the newly established holding ball is a jackpot, the notification mode (for example, jackpot determination is determined!) That suggests a jackpot is newly set as the notification mode. Also good. As a result, the player can enjoy the pleasure of determining when to press the frame button 22.

  Next, the variable display setting process (S1313) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 74 is a flowchart showing the change display setting process (S1313). This variable display setting process (S1313) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 70) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113, and in order to execute a variable effect in the third symbol display device 81, A display variation pattern command is generated and set based on the variation pattern command received from main controller 110.

  In the fluctuation display setting process (FIG. 74, S1313), first, it is determined whether or not the fluctuation start flag 223e provided in the RAM 223 is ON (S1601). If it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223e is not on (that is, it is off) (S1601: No), the fluctuation pattern command is not received from the main controller 110, and thus the process proceeds to S1605. Transition. On the other hand, if it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223e is on (S1601: Yes), the fluctuation start flag 223e is turned off (S1602), and then a fluctuation pattern selection process is executed (S1603). Details of this variation pattern selection process (S1603) will be described with reference to FIG. 75, but the details of the variation pattern are determined according to the variation pattern command received from main controller 110 based on the current effect mode. Is executed. As for the selection of the fluctuation pattern, a rough content such as a fluctuation time, a fluctuation type (reach, non-reach, etc.) is determined by a fluctuation pattern command from the main controller 110, and the effect mode set in the sound lamp controller 113 is set. The contents of the variation mode to be actually displayed (details of the variation pattern) are determined by the value of the production counter or the like.

  Then, based on the acquired variation pattern type, a variation pattern command for display for notifying the display control device 114 is generated, and the command is set to be transmitted to the display control device 114 (S1604). The display control device 114 receives the display variation pattern command so that the third symbol display device 81 performs the variation display of the third symbol with the variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command. Display control of the variation effect is started.

  Next, although not shown, the data stored in the winning information storage area 223f is shifted. In this process, data stored in the first area to the fourth area of the winning information storage area 223f is sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, the data in each area is shifted such as first area → execution area, second area → first area, third area → second area, and fourth area → third area. After shifting the data, the process proceeds to S1605.

  In the processing of S1605, it is determined whether or not the stop type selection flag 223f provided in the RAM 233 is on (S1605). If it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223f is not on (that is, it is off) (S1605: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223f is on (S1605: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223f is turned off (S1606), and the stop type in the variation effect extracted from the stop type command is obtained from the RAM 223. Obtain (S1607). Next, the stop type instructed by the stop type command from the main control device 110 is set as it is as the stop type of the variable effect in the third symbol display device 81 (S1608), and the process proceeds to S1609.

  In the processing of S1609, a display stop type command for notification to the display control device 114 is generated based on the set stop type, and the command is set for transmission to the display control device 114 (S1609). . In the display control device 114, by receiving this display stop type command, the stop symbol corresponding to the stop type indicated by this display stop type command is stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The stop display of the fluctuation effect is controlled. After the process of S1609 is executed, this process ends.

  Next, referring to FIG. 75, a variation pattern selection process (S1603), which is one process in the variation display setting process (FIG. 74, S1313) executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 in the second embodiment. Will be described. FIG. 75 is a flowchart showing the contents of the variation pattern selection process (S1603).

  In the variation pattern selection process (S1603), first, the value of the effect counter 223g is acquired (S1611). It is determined whether or not effect mode A (normal game period) is set in effect mode storage area 223k (S1612). If it is determined that the effect mode A is set (S1612: Yes), button effect selection processing is executed (S1613). Thereafter, this process is terminated. The button effect selection process (S1613) will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 75, but a process for selecting a variation pattern dedicated to the normal game period is executed.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1612 that the mode is not the production mode A (S1612: No), it is determined whether the production mode B (time production period) is set (S1614). If it is determined that the effect mode B is set (S1614: Yes), the variation pattern is determined based on the value of the effect counter 223g and the content of the variation pattern command from the variation pattern selection table 222a of the corresponding time effect period. Select and set (S1615). Thereafter, this process is terminated.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in the processing of S1614 that the mode is not the production mode B, that is, the production mode C (time production extension period) (S1614: No), the corresponding time production extension period variation pattern selection table 222a. A variation pattern is selected and set based on the effect counter 223g and the content of the received variation pattern command (S1616). Thereafter, this process is terminated.

  As described above, since the dedicated variation pattern is selected based on the set effect mode, the contents of the effect displayed depending on the period can be changed. Therefore, it is possible to produce a variety of game effects, and to suppress the problem that the player gets bored with the game early.

  Next, referring to FIG. 76, a button effect selection process (S1613) which is one process in the variation pattern selection process (FIG. 75, S1603) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the second embodiment. Will be described. FIG. 76 is a flowchart showing the contents of this button effect selection process (S1613).

  In the button effect selection process (FIG. 76, S1613), first, a variation pattern is selected based on the value of the effect counter 223g and the content of the received variation pattern command from the corresponding variation pattern selection table 222a dedicated to the normal game period. Set (S1621). It is determined whether or not the selected variation pattern is a button effect (a variation pattern of the composite display mode). If it is determined that the variation pattern of the composite display mode (see FIG. 43) (S1622: Yes), a stop symbol for button effect is set as a reach stop symbol (S1623). Here, the sub-design is set so as to have a reach display mode in which the diagonal position is located. The button effect flag 223r is set to ON (S1624). Thereafter, this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S1622, when it is determined that the selected fluctuation pattern is not the fluctuation pattern of the composite display mode (S1622: No), this process ends.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 77, the synchronous effect management process (S1314) which is one process in the main process (FIG. 70) performed by MPU221 of the audio lamp control apparatus 113 is demonstrated. FIG. 77 is a flowchart showing this synchronous effect management process (S1314). In this synchronized effect management process (S1314), time information is acquired from the RTC 292, and based on the time information, it is determined whether it is a normal game period, a time effect period, or a time effect extension period, and an effect indicating it. Execute the process to set the mode.

  In the synchronized effect management process (FIG. 77, S1314), first, time information of “hour, minute” is acquired from the RTC 292 (S1701). It is determined whether or not the effect mode A (normal game period) is set in the effect mode storage area 223k (S1702). If it is determined that the effect mode A is set (S1702: Yes), it is determined whether the time data acquired in the process of S1701 is within the time effect period (S1703). When it is determined that it is within the time effect period, that is, when it is determined that it is the start timing of the time effect (S1703: Yes), the start period flag 223o is set to ON (S1704). The effect mode B (time effect period) is set in the effect mode storage area 223k (S1705), and then this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1703 that it is not the time effect period, this processing ends.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1702, when it is determined that the effect mode A is not set (S1702: No), it is determined whether the effect mode B (time effect period) is set (S1706). If it is determined that the effect mode B is set (S1706: Yes), the time data acquired in the process of S1701 is 3 seconds before the end of the time effect, that is, 3 of the end timing of the time effect period. It is determined whether it is a second before (S1707). By configuring in this way, it is possible to execute a precursor effect as to whether or not to execute an extended effect for 3 seconds.

  If it is determined that it is the end timing of the time effect period (S1707: Yes), an extended effect setting process is executed (S1708). Thereafter, this process is terminated. The extended effect setting process (S1708) will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 78, but a process for determining whether or not to set a time effect extended period is executed. On the other hand, when it is determined that it is not the production mode B, that is, the production mode C (time production extension period) (S1706: No), it is outside the time production extension period, that is, the end timing of the time production extension period. Is determined (S1709). If it is determined that it is the end timing of the time effect extension period (S1709: Yes), the effect mode is set to A (S1710). Thereafter, this process is terminated.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 78, an extended effect setting process (S1708) which is one process in the synchronous effect management process (FIG. 77, S1314) executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 in the second embodiment. Will be explained. FIG. 78 is a flowchart showing the contents of the extended effect setting process (S1708).

  In the extended effect setting process (FIG. 78, S1708), first, it is determined whether or not a big hit game is being played (S1721). When it is determined that the game is a big hit game (S1721: Yes), the normal period flag 223m is set to ON (S1722), and the production mode A (normal game period) is set (S1723). Thereafter, this process is terminated.

  As described above, when the jackpot game is in progress, the extension effect cannot be executed. Therefore, by executing the process of setting the normal game period, the background image of the normal game period is set after the jackpot game. Can be controlled.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1721 that the game is not a big hit game (S1721: No), it is determined whether it is the end timing of the time effect period (S1724). When it is determined that it is the end timing of the time effect period (S1724: Yes), it is determined whether the re-change effect is set in the process of S1728 described later, that is, whether the extension effect is set. (S1725). When the extension effect is determined (S1725: Yes), the extension effect flag 223p is set to ON (S1725). The effect mode is set to C (S1727). Thereafter, this process is terminated.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the extension effect has not been determined in the process of S1725 (S1725: No), the process proceeds to S1722. If it is determined in the processing of S1724 that it is not the end timing of the time effect (S1724: No), the winning information that corresponds to the winning information storage area 223a is stored or it is determined whether or not the winning is changing. It is determined whether or not there is (S1728). If winning information is stored or the winning / decision determination is being changed (S1728: Yes), the time until the winning change ends is calculated and set as the extended performance time. (S1729). A re-variation effect is set (S1730). Here, as the revariation effect, as shown in FIG. 47B, a display mode in which the display mode of the fish school appears from the right is set. After the processing of S1730 is finished, this processing is finished.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 79, the pending number display update process (S1306), which is one process in the main process (see FIG. 70) executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 in the second embodiment, will be described. To do. FIG. 79 is a flowchart showing the contents of the reserved number display update process (S1306).

  In the hold number display update process (FIG. 79, S1306), it is first determined whether or not the display of the hold symbol needs to be changed (S1801). This determination is made based on the hold command acquired from the main control device 110. A hold command for display indicating the hold symbol display after the change is set (S1802). Thereafter, this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that there is no change in the hold display in the process of S1801 (S1801: No), this process ends.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 80, frame button input monitoring / effect processing (S1307), which is one processing in the main processing (see FIG. 80) executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 in the second embodiment. Will be described. FIG. 80 is a flowchart showing the contents of the frame button input monitoring / production process (S1307).

  In the frame button input monitoring / production process (FIG. 80, S1307), first, it is determined whether or not an effective period that is determined to be valid when the frame button 22 is pressed is set (S1811). If it is determined that the period is valid (S1811: Yes), it is determined whether the frame button 22 has been pressed (S1812). If it is determined that the frame button 22 has been pressed (S1812: Yes), it is determined whether the eight effect flags 223i are set to ON (S1813). If it is determined that the eight effect flags 223i are on (S1813: Yes), the corresponding eight effect flags 223i that are held are set off (S1814). Note that the eight effect flags are configured such that the flags are set for each of the holding balls, and the flag corresponding to the holding symbol displayed by changing to the notification holding symbol is set to ON. Further, the notification hold symbol is set to be off based on (when it is) displayed based on the operation of the frame button 22 while being variably displayed in the notification mode (character display in the present embodiment).

  After the process of S1814, the notification mode of the eight effects is set for the notification pending symbol whose change start order is the earliest among the reserved symbols for which the eight effect flags 223i are set to ON (S1815). . Thereafter, this process is terminated. This notification mode is set in advance when eight effects are set.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the frame button 22 is outside the valid period (S1811: No), or when it is determined that the frame button 22 is not pressed in the process of S1812 (S1812: No), this process is terminated. To do.

  If it is determined in the process of S1813 that the eight effect flags 223i are off (S1813: No), it is determined whether the hold effect flag 223h is on (S1816). If it is determined that the hold effect flag 223h is on (S1816: Yes), the corresponding hold effect flag 223h is set to off (S1817). The corresponding hold normal hold effect is executed (S1816). On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1816 that the hold effect flag 223h is OFF (S1816: No), the change effect pattern of the composite display mode is being executed, so the button effect execution process is executed ( S1819). Thereafter, this process is terminated.

  Next, referring to FIG. 81, a button effect execution process which is one process in the frame button input monitoring / effect process (FIG. 80, S1307) executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 in the second embodiment. (S1819) will be described. FIG. 81 is a flowchart showing the contents of this button effect execution process (S1819). In this button effect execution process (S1819), control of the button effect in the variation pattern of the composite display mode shown in FIGS. 43 to 44 is executed.

  In the button effect execution process (FIG. 81, S1819), first, it is determined whether or not the button effect flag 223r is on (S1831). The button effect flag 223r is a flag indicating that the variation pattern in which the composite display mode illustrated in FIG. 44B is displayed is selected. The fluctuation pattern of the composite display mode includes a fake fluctuation pattern in which the composite display mode shown in FIG. 44B is not displayed.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the button effect flag 223r is on (S1831: Yes), it is determined whether it is the timing after the composite display mode (see FIG. 44B) is displayed (S1832). When it is determined that it is the timing after the combined display mode is displayed (S1832: Yes), a display command indicating the combined display mode corresponding to the selected variation pattern is set (S1843). Thereafter, this process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1831 that the button effect flag 223r is off (S1831: No), the timing of variably displaying the notification symbol before the composite display mode is displayed (FIG. 43B). It is determined whether it is a reference) (S1835). If it is determined that the timing is before the composite display (S1835: Yes), 1 is added to the button effect counter (S1836). Based on the selected variation pattern and the value of the button effect counter, a display command indicating the pre-combination effect mode (notification mode) is set (S1837). Thereafter, this process is terminated. Here, characters such as “chance”, characters, and the like are displayed, and the player is notified of the result of the success / failure determination.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1835 that it is not the pressing timing before the composite display mode is displayed, this process ends.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, a plurality of button effects are set. However, by controlling each flag, control is performed properly. By configuring in this way, it can be configured without increasing the number of frame buttons 22, and can be configured at low cost and in an easy-to-understand manner.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 82, the background image setting process (S1311) which is one process in the main process (see FIG. 70) executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 in the second embodiment will be described. . FIG. 82 is a flowchart showing the contents of the background image setting process (S1311).

  In the background image setting process (FIG. 82, S1311), first, it is determined whether or not the extended effect flag 223p is on (S1901). When the extended effect flag 223p is on, that is, when it is the start timing of the extended effect (S1901: Yes), the extended effect flag 223p is set to off (S1902). A display background image command corresponding to the time effect extension period is set (S1903). In the present embodiment, a background image in which the color of the background image in the time effect period is changed to gold is set. Since this background image is when the time effect period is extended, that is, when it is determined that the winning variation is started, it becomes a background image for notifying the player of the hit. Thereafter, this process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1901 that the extended effect flag 223p is off (S1901: No), it is determined whether the start period flag 223o is on (S1904). If it is determined that the start period flag is on (S1904: Yes), the start period flag 223o is set to off (S1905), and a display background change command corresponding to the time effect period is set (S1906). . Thus, when the start period flag 223o is on, it is the start timing of the time effect period, so a background image dedicated to the time effect period (see FIG. 46A) is set. Thereby, since a background image can be changed according to a start timing, a background image can be changed synchronizing with the other pachinko machine 10 of the same model.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1904, when it is determined that the start period flag 223o is off (S1904: No), it is determined whether the normal period flag 223m is on (S1907). If it is determined that the normal period flag 223m is on (S1907: Yes), the normal period flag 223m is set to off (S1908), and a display background command corresponding to the normal period is set (S1909). Thereafter, this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the normal period flag 223m is off (S1907: No), this process ends.

<Regarding Control Processing in Display Control Device 114>
Next, each control executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIGS. 83 to 97. The MPU 231 is roughly divided into a main process that is repeatedly executed after the power is turned on, a command interrupt process that is executed when a command is received from the sound lamp control device 113, and one frame worth from the image controller 237. There is a V-interrupt process executed when the MPU 231 detects a V-interrupt signal transmitted every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing process is completed. The MPU 231 normally executes main processing, and executes command interrupt processing and V interrupt processing in accordance with reception of a command and detection of a V interrupt signal. If command reception and V interrupt signal detection are performed at the same time, command reception processing is preferentially executed. As a result, the contents of the command received from the voice lamp control device 113 can be quickly reflected to execute the V interrupt process.

  First, the main process executed by the MPU 231 in the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 83 is a flowchart showing this main process. The main process executes an initialization process when the power is turned on.

  Specifically, the main process is activated according to the following flow. When power is turned on from the power supply circuit 115 to the display control device 114 and the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the instruction pointer 231a provided in the MPU 231 to “0000H” according to its hardware configuration. The address “0000H” indicated by the instruction pointer 231a is designated for the bus line 240. When the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address specified on the bus line 240 is “0000H”, it sets the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d in the buffer RAM 234c. The corresponding data (instruction code) is output to the MPU 231. Then, the MPU 231 fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 234, and starts the main process by starting execution of the process according to the fetched instruction.

  Here, if all the boot programs processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, the character ROM 234 confirms that the address specified on the bus line 240 is “0000H”. Upon detection, one page of data including data (instruction code) corresponding to the address “0000H” must be read from the NAND flash memory 234a and set in the buffer RAM 234c. Then, because of the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a long time to set it from the reading to the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, the MPU 231 receives the instruction code corresponding to the address “0000H” after designating the address “0000H”. A lot of waiting time will be consumed. Therefore, since the time required for starting the MPU 231 becomes longer, as a result, there is a problem that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

  On the other hand, as in this embodiment, a predetermined number of instructions from the first instruction to be processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released is stored in the NOR ROM 234d in the boot program. Since the memory can read data, when the address “0000H” is designated from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 is immediately stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d. The stored boot program can be set in the buffer RAM 234 c and the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231. Therefore, since the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address “0000H” in a short time after designating the address “0000H”, the MPU 231 can start the main process in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

  When the main processing is executed as described above, first, the boot processing executed by the boot program is executed (S2001), and the display control device 114 is configured so that various controls on the third symbol display device 81 can be executed. Start up.

  Here, the boot process (S2001) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 84 is a flowchart showing a boot process (S2001) executed in the main process in the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the control program and fixed value data executed by the MPU 231 are stored in the third symbol display device 81 instead of providing and storing a dedicated program ROM as in the conventional gaming machine. It is stored in a character ROM 234 provided for storing image data to be displayed. The character ROM 234 is composed of a NAND flash memory 234a capable of increasing the capacity with a small area, so that not only image data but also a control program or the like can be sufficiently stored. There is no need to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing programs and the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in failure occurrence rate due to an increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

  On the other hand, the NAND flash memory has a slow read speed especially when random access is performed. Even if a high-performance processor is used, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may be deteriorated. Therefore, in this boot process, the control program and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are transferred to the program storage area 233a or data table provided in the work RAM 233 constituted by DRAM. The process of transferring to the storage area 233b and storing it is executed.

  Specifically, first, based on the above-described hardware operations of the MPU 231 and the character ROM 234, the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR-type ROM 234d after the system reset is released is read according to the boot program set in the buffer RAM 234c. Among the control programs stored in the two program storage area 234a1, a predetermined amount is transferred to the program storage area 233a (S2101). The predetermined amount of control program transferred here includes the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1.

  Then, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the first predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, the head address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a (S2102). As a result, the MPU 231 starts executing the remaining boot program included in the control program transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a by the processing of S2101.

  Also, by setting the instruction pointer 231a to a predetermined address in the program storage area 233a by the processing in S2102, the MPU 231 executes various processes while reading the control program stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. become. That is, the MPU 231 reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetches the instruction instead of reading the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1. Then, various processes are executed. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is constituted by a DRAM, a read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the MPU 231 can fetch an instruction at high speed and execute processing for the instruction.

  When the instruction pointer 231a is set by the processing of S2102, subsequently, the instruction pointer 231a is stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a according to the remaining boot program to be executed by the set instruction pointer 231a. The remaining control programs and fixed value data that have not been transferred to the program storage area 233a are transferred to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b by a predetermined amount (S2103). Specifically, the control program and some fixed data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233, and the above-described various data tables (display data table, transfer data table) among the fixed value data are stored in the data table. Transfer to the storage area 233b.

  Then, after executing other processes necessary for the boot process (S2104), the instruction pointer 231a is executed after the second predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, after the end of this boot process (see S2001 in FIG. 83). By setting the start address of the program corresponding to the power initialization process (see S2002 in FIG. 83) (S2105), the boot program is finished and the boot process is terminated.

  As described above, when the boot process (S2001) is executed, the control program and the fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are all stored in the work RAM 233 configured by DRAM. It is transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a and the data table storage area 233b. At the end of the boot process, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address described above. Thereafter, the MPU 231 reads the control program transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. To execute various processes.

  Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, the control program and the fixed value data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 after the system reset is released. By transferring the data to the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 can read out a control program and fixed value data from a work RAM constituted by a DRAM having a high reading speed and perform various controls. High processing performance can be maintained, and diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed using the auxiliary effect section.

  On the other hand, not all boot programs are stored in the NOR-type ROM 234d, but a predetermined number of instructions are stored from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released, and the remaining boot programs are stored in the NAND-type flash memory 234a. Even if it is stored in the second program storage area 234a1, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start up the MPU 231 in a short time only by adding an extremely small-capacity NOR-type ROM 234d. Can do.

  In the boot process shown in FIG. 84, the predetermined amount of control program transferred to the program storage area 233a by the process of S2101 includes all the remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. Although it is configured, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. The predetermined amount of control program transferred to the program storage area 233a by the process of S2101 is a boot program that executes a boot process to be processed following the process of S2102 It may be part of The boot program transferred here transfers a predetermined amount of the control program including the remaining boot programs to the program storage area 233a, and further, the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a is set as an instruction pointer. The process set to 231a may be performed. Then, the processing of S2103 to S2105 may be executed by all the remaining boot programs stored in the program storage area 233a.

  In addition, the boot program transferred by the processing of S2101 further transfers a part of the remaining boot program by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a, and then the head of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a. Processing for setting an address in the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. In addition, a part of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a by this processing further transfers a part of the remaining boot program to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently to the program storage area 233a. Processing for setting the head address of the stored boot program in the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. Then, a part of the remaining boot program is transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and then the process of setting the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a in the instruction pointer 231a is performed in S2101. The processing of S2103 to S2105 may be executed after repeating a plurality of times including the processing of S2102.

  Thus, even if the boot program has a large program size and the remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1 cannot be transferred to the program storage area 233a at a time, the MPU 231 is already stored in the program storage area 233a. The boot program can be transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount.

  In the present embodiment, a case has been described in which a part of the boot program executed by the MPU 231 is first stored in the first program storage area 234d1 when the system reset is released, but all the boot programs are stored in the first program storage area 234d1. One program storage area 234d1 may be stored. In this case, when starting the boot process, the MPU 231 may execute the processes of S2103 to S2105 without performing the processes of S2101 and S2102. This eliminates the need to transfer the boot program to the program storage area 233a, thereby reducing the number of times the program is transferred to the character ROM 234 or the program storage area 233a, thereby reducing the boot processing time. Therefore, the control of the auxiliary effect section in the MPU 231 that can be performed after the boot process can be started earlier.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. 83. When the boot process ends, an initial setting process is then executed according to the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 (S2002). Specifically, the value of the stack pointer is set in the MPU 231 and various settings for the register group in the MPU 231 and the I / O device are performed. Further, processing for clearing the storage of the work RAM 233, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 is performed. Further, various flags are provided in the work RAM 233, and initial values are set for the respective flags. Note that “off” or “0” is set as the initial value of each flag unless otherwise specified.

  Further, in the initial setting process, after the initial setting of the image controller 237, the image controller 237 draws an image so that an image of a specific color is displayed on the entire screen on the third symbol display device 81. And instructing execution of display processing. Thus, immediately after the power is turned on, an image of a specific color is first displayed on the entire screen on the third symbol display device 81. Here, the color of the image displayed on the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the power is turned on is set to be different depending on the model of the pachinko machine. Thereby, in the operation check at the factory or the like at the time of manufacture, immediately after turning on the power, the pachinko machine 10 is checked by checking whether an image of a color corresponding to the model is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. It is possible to easily and immediately determine whether or not the start can be normally started.

  Next, a transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller 237 so that the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on is transferred to the main image area 235a at power-on of the resident video RAM 235 (S2003). This transfer instruction includes the start address and end address of the character ROM 234 storing image data corresponding to the main image when the power is turned on, transfer destination information (here, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination. In accordance with this transfer instruction, the image data corresponding to the power-on main image is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 in accordance with the transfer instruction. It is transferred to the image area 235a.

  When the transfer of the image data indicated by the transfer instruction is completed, the image controller 237 transmits a transfer end signal indicating the transfer end to the MPU 231. By receiving this transfer end signal, the MPU 231 can recognize that the transfer of the image data designated by the transfer instruction has ended. When the image controller 237 completes the transfer of the image data indicated by the transfer instruction, transfer end information indicating the end of transfer is stored in a register or a partial area of the built-in memory provided in the image controller 237. You may make it write. The MPU 231 reads information in this register or a partial area of the built-in memory as needed, and detects that transfer of the image data designated by the transfer instruction has been completed by detecting writing of transfer end information by the image controller 237. You may do it.

  The image data transferred to the main image area 235a when the power is turned on is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off. When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on main image to the power-on main image area 235a is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 in the process of S2003, the power-on variation image is then displayed. A transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller so that the image data corresponding to is transferred to the power-on variation image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235 (S2004). In this transfer instruction, the head address of the character ROM 234 storing the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image, the data size of the image data, transfer destination information (here, the resident video RAM 235), , The start address of the power-on variation image area 235b as the transfer destination is included, and the image controller receives image data corresponding to the power-on variation image from the character ROM 234 in the resident video RAM 235 in accordance with the transfer instruction. The image is transferred to the fluctuation image area 235b at power-on. The image data transferred to the power-on variation image area 235b is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off.

  When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image to the power-on variation image area 235b is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 in the process of S2004, then, the simple image display flag 233c. Is turned on (S2005). Thus, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 in a transfer setting process (see FIG. 95A) described later. Resident image transfer setting processing for instructing transfer to the image controller 237 so as to transfer is executed (see S3402 in FIG. 95A).

  The simple image display flag 233c is used to transfer all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 based on a transfer instruction to the image controller 237 by the resident image transfer setting process. It remains on until it is finished. Thus, during this time, in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 85 (b)), the simple command so that the power-on image (power-on main image and power-on variation image) shown in FIG. 47 is drawn. Determination processing (see S2308 in FIG. 85B) and simple display setting processing (see S2309 in FIG. 85B) are executed.

  As described above, since the pachinko machine 10 uses the NAND flash memory 234a for the character ROM 234, all the image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is caused by the slow reading speed. It takes a lot of time to be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, as in the main processing, after the power is turned on, the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image are first transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, and the power-on main image is transferred to the third image. By displaying on the symbol display device 81, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the hall-related person can turn on the power displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The main image can be confirmed. Therefore, the display control device 114 transfers the remaining image data to be resident over time from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 while displaying the main image when the power is turned on on the third symbol display device 81. be able to. On the other hand, the player or the like can recognize that some initialization processing is being performed while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, so that the player resides in the remaining resident video RAM 235. Until the image data to be transferred is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, it is possible to wait until the initialization is completed without worrying about whether the operation has stopped.

  Also in the operation check at the factory or the like at the time of manufacturing, the main image at the time of turning on the power is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the third symbol display device 81 starts operating without any problem when the power is turned on. The use of the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed as the character ROM 234 can suppress the deterioration of the operation check efficiency.

  In the display control device 114 of the pachinko machine 10, the power-on variation image is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 together with the power-on main image after the power is turned on. When the player starts playing while being displayed on the display device 81, there is a ball entry (start winning) into the first winning opening 64, and an instruction to start the changing effect is sent from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device. 113, that is, when a display variation pattern command is received, a variation image at power-on (not shown) can be displayed immediately during the variation rendering period to perform a simple variation rendering. it can. Therefore, the player can confirm that the lottery is surely performed by the simple variation effect even while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on.

  As described above, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, the main image is continuously displayed on the third symbol display device 81, but the character ROM 234 is displayed. Is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, and therefore, it takes time to transfer the data. Therefore, after the power is turned on, the time during which the main image is displayed when the power is turned on also becomes longer. However, since the pachinko machine 10 can perform a simple variation effect using the power-on variation image transferred to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on, immediately after the power is turned on, for example, after power failure Even immediately after the main image is displayed when the power is turned on, the player can play the game with peace of mind.

  After the process of S2005, interrupt permission is set (S2006), and thereafter, the main process executes an infinite loop process until the power is turned off. Thereby, after the interrupt permission is set by the process of S2006, the command interrupt process and the V interrupt process are executed according to the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal.

  Next, a command interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 85A is a flowchart showing the command interrupt process. As described above, when a command is received from the audio lamp control device 113, the MPU 231 executes a command interrupt process.

  In this command interrupt process, the received command data is extracted, the extracted command data is sequentially stored in the command buffer area provided in the work RAM 233 (S2201), and the process ends. Various commands stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process are read by a command determination process or a simple command determination process of a V interrupt process described later, and a process corresponding to the command is performed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 85 (b), a V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114 will be described. FIG. 85B is a flowchart showing the V interrupt process. In this V interrupt process, various processes corresponding to the command stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process are executed, and an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is specified, and then the image is drawn. A list (see FIG. 57) is created, and the drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237, thereby instructing the image controller 237 to execute drawing processing and display processing of the image.

  As described above, the execution of this V interrupt process is started when the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 is detected. This V-interrupt signal is a signal that is generated every 20 milliseconds when image rendering processing for one frame is completed in the image controller 237 and transmitted to the MPU 231. Therefore, by executing the V interrupt process in synchronization with the V interrupt signal, a drawing instruction is issued to the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing process for one frame is completed. become. Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive an instruction to draw the next image when the image drawing process or the display process is not finished, so that drawing of a new image is started in the middle of drawing the image, It is possible to prevent the image from being developed in response to a new drawing instruction in the frame buffer in which the image information being displayed is stored.

  Here, the outline of the flow of the V interrupt process will be described first, and then the details of each process will be described with reference to other drawings. In this V interrupt process, as shown in FIG. 85B, first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (S2301), and the simple image display flag 233c is not on. If it is off (S2301: No), it means that the transfer of all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been completed. Therefore, it is not a power-on image shown in FIG. In order to display the image on the third symbol display device 81, a command determination process (S2302) is executed, and then a display setting process (S2303) is executed.

  In the command determination process (S2302), the content of the command from the voice lamp control device 113 stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process is analyzed, the process corresponding to the command is executed, the display demo command, When the display variation pattern command is stored, a display data table for demonstration or a variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern type is set in the display data table buffer 233d, and transfer corresponding to the set display data table is performed. The data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

  In this command determination process, all commands stored in the command buffer area at that time are analyzed and the process is executed. This is because the command determination process is performed at intervals of 20 milliseconds when the V interrupt process is executed, and it is highly likely that a plurality of commands are stored in the command buffer area during the 20 milliseconds. is there. In particular, when the main control device 110 determines the start of a variation effect, there is a high possibility that a display variation pattern command, a display stop type command, and the like are simultaneously stored in the command buffer area. Therefore, by analyzing and executing these commands at once, the variation effect mode and stop type selected by the main control device 110 and the sound lamp control device 113 can be quickly grasped, and an effect image corresponding to the mode can be obtained. Drawing of an image can be controlled so as to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Details of this command determination processing will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  In the display setting process (S2303), an image for one frame to be displayed next on the third symbol display device 81 based on the contents of the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the command determination process (S2302) or the like. The contents of are specifically identified. Further, an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined according to the processing status and the like, and a display data table corresponding to the determined effect mode is set in the display data table buffer 233d. Details of the display setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  After the display setting process is executed, a task process is then executed (S2304). In this task process, the image is constructed based on the content of the next one frame image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 specified by the display setting process (S2303) or the simple display setting process (S2309). In addition to specifying the type of sprite (display object) to be performed, various parameters necessary for drawing such as a display coordinate position, an enlargement ratio, and a rotation angle are determined for each sprite.

  Next, a transfer setting process is executed (S2305). In this transfer setting process, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, the image controller 237 transfers image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined area of the resident video RAM 235. Set instructions. In addition, while the simple image display flag 233c is off, predetermined image data is transmitted from the character ROM 234 to the normal controller for the image controller 237 based on the transfer data information in the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Even when a transfer instruction to be transferred to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the video RAM 236 is set and a continuous notice command (not shown) is received from the audio lamp control device 113, a continuous notice is given to the image controller 237. A transfer instruction for transferring the image data of the continuous preview image used in the production and the image data of the rear image after the change from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is set. Details of the transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 95 and 96.

  Next, a drawing process is executed (S2306). In this drawing process, the type of various sprites constituting one frame determined by the task process (S2304), parameters necessary for drawing each sprite, and the transfer instruction set by the transfer setting process (S2305) are used. 57, the drawing list shown in FIG. 57 is generated, and the drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing target buffer information. Thereby, the image controller 237 executes image drawing processing according to the drawing list. Details of the drawing process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, update processing of various counters provided in the display control device 114 is executed (S2107). Then, the V interrupt process ends. As a counter updated by the process of S2107, for example, there is a stop symbol counter (not shown) for determining a stop symbol. The value of the stop symbol counter is stored in the work RAM 233, and an update process is performed each time the V interrupt process is executed. In the command determination process, when reception of the display stop type command is detected, the stop type table corresponding to the stop type (big hit A, big hit B) indicated by the display stop type command is compared with the stop type counter. Then, the stop symbol after the change effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is finally set.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2301 that the simple image display flag 233c is on (S2301: Yes), this means that transfer of all image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been completed. Therefore, in order to display the power-on image (not shown) on the third symbol display device 81, the simple command determination process (S2308) is executed, and then the simple display setting process (S2309) is executed, and the process of S2304 is executed. Migrate to

  Next, details of the above-described command determination process (S2302), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114, will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 64 is a flowchart showing the command determination process.

  In this command determination process (FIG. 86, S2302), as shown in FIG. 86, first, it is determined whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area (S2401), and if there is no unprocessed new command. (S2401: No), the command determination process is terminated and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, if there is an unprocessed new command (S2401: Yes), the new command flag for notifying the display setting process (S2303) that the new command has been processed in the ON state is set to ON (S2402), and then the command For all unprocessed commands stored in the buffer area, the command type is analyzed (S2403).

  First, it is determined whether or not there is a display variation pattern command among the unprocessed commands (S2404). If there is a display variation pattern command (S2404: Yes), the variation pattern command processing is executed. (S2405), the process returns to S2401.

  Details of the variation pattern command process (S2405) will be described with reference to FIG. 87 (a). FIG. 87A is a flowchart showing the variation pattern command process. This variation pattern command process executes a process corresponding to the display variation pattern command received from the sound lamp control device 114.

  In the variation pattern command processing, first, a display data table corresponding to the command is determined and set in the display data table buffer (S2501). Here, the display data table buffer 233d is configured to be able to set a plurality of display data tables, and the set display data tables can be processed by moving the pointer in synchronization. Therefore, even when different displays are executed corresponding to a plurality of background modes, it is possible to switch to a plurality of display contents by setting one of the plurality of display data table buffers to active and switching.

  Here, since the determination of the start of fluctuation is always performed several seconds or more in the main controller 110, two or more display fluctuation pattern commands are not received within 20 milliseconds. When executing, it is impossible that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, but part of the command changes due to the influence of noise etc., and another command is displayed incorrectly. It may be interpreted as a variation pattern command. In such a case, if it is determined that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern with the shortest variation time is displayed in the display data table buffer. Set to 233d.

  If a change display data table corresponding to a change pattern with a long change time is set in the display data table buffer 233d, a change effect having a change time shorter than the set display data table is actually generated by the main control device. 110, the next display variation pattern command is received from the main control device 110 while the variation effect according to the set variation display data table is being displayed on the third symbol display device 81. As a result, another variable display is suddenly started, which may cause the player to feel uncomfortable.

  On the other hand, as shown in the present embodiment, by setting the display data table buffer 233d with the display data table buffer 233d corresponding to the change pattern with the shortest change time, the change is actually longer than the set display data table. Even when the variable effect having time is instructed by the main controller 110, as will be described later, after the variable effect according to the display data table buffer 233d is completed, the main controller 110 performs the next display. Since the display setting process controls the display of the 3rd symbol display device 81 so that the demonstration effect is displayed until the pattern command is received, the player can feel the 3rd symbol display device 81 without any discomfort. You can continue to see changes in the three symbols.

  Next, a transfer data table corresponding to the set display data table is determined and set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S2502). It is determined whether or not the variation pattern of the composite display mode is (the variation pattern of the button effect) (S2503). If it is determined that the variation pattern is a combined display mode (S2503: Yes), a reach symbol corresponding to the combined display mode variation pattern is set (S2504). Thereafter, the process of S2505 is executed. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2503 that the pattern is not a combined display mode variation pattern (S2503: No), the process of S2505 is executed.

  Then, among the data table determination flags provided for each variation display data table corresponding to each variation pattern, the data table determination flag corresponding to the set variation display data table is turned on, and other variation display data tables are also displayed. The corresponding data table determination flag is set to OFF (S2505). In the display setting process, by referring to the data table determination flag set in the process of S2506, it is easy to determine which fluctuation pattern the fluctuation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d corresponds to. Judgment can be made.

  Next, based on the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the fluctuation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, time data representing the fluctuation time is set in the time counter 233h (S2506), and the pointer 233f is set to 0. Initialization is performed (S2507). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the confirmed display flag are set to OFF (S2508), the variation pattern command is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

  By executing this variation pattern command processing, in the display setting processing, the pointer 233f initialized by the processing in S2508 is updated, and the pointer 233f is changed from the variation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d. The drawing contents defined at the indicated address are extracted, and the contents of the image for one frame to be displayed next are specified on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, the transfer data table buffer 233e is set by the processing of S2505. Transfer data information defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted from the transfer data table, and image data of the sprite required in the set variable display data table is previously stored in the image storage area of the normal video RAM 236 from the character ROM 234. To be transferred to 236a, and controls the image controller 237.

  In the display setting process, the time of the variation effect defined in the variation display data table is measured using the time counter 233h in which the time data is set by the processing of S2507, and the variation effect in the variation display data table is completed. If it is determined, the stop display setting is controlled so that the stop symbol corresponding to the display stop type command from the main control device 110 is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. 86. If it is determined in step S2404 that there is no display variation pattern command (S2404: No), it is then determined whether there is a display stop type command among unprocessed commands (S2406). If there is a display variation type command (S2406: Yes), stop type command processing is executed (S2407), and the processing returns to S2401.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 87B, details of the stop type command process (S2407) will be described. FIG. 87 (b) is a flowchart showing stop type command processing. This stop type command process executes a process corresponding to the display variation type command received from the sound lamp control device 114.

  In the stop type command process, first, a stop type table corresponding to the stop type information (before big hit A and big hit B) indicated by the display stop type command is determined (S2601), the stop type table and V interrupt processing are performed. The stop symbol after the change effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is finally set by comparing the value of the stop type counter updated every time (see FIG. 85 (b)). (S2602).

  Then, among the stop symbol determination flags provided for each stop symbol, the stop symbol determination flag corresponding to the stop symbol set by the processing of S2602 is turned on, and the stop symbol determination flags corresponding to other stop symbols are set. It is set to off (S2603). Thereafter, the processing returns to S2401 in FIG.

  Here, as described above, in the variation display data table, as the type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 after a predetermined time has elapsed since the variation based on the data table was started. , Offset information (symbol offset information) from the stop symbol set by the processing of S2602 is described. In the task process (S2304) described above, after a predetermined time has elapsed since the change was started, the stop symbol set by the process of S2602 is specified from the stop symbol determination flag set in S2603, and the specified stop By adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the symbol, the third symbol to be actually displayed is specified. Then, the address at which the image data corresponding to the specified third symbol is stored is specified. Note that the image data corresponding to the third symbol is stored in the third symbol area 235d of the resident video RAM 235 as described above.

  Returning to FIG. 86, the description will be continued. If it is determined in the process of S2406 that there is no display stop type command (S2406: No), it is then determined whether or not there is a display notice display command among the unprocessed commands (S2408). When it is determined that the display notice command is received (S2408: Yes), notice command processing is executed (S2409).

  Here, with reference to FIG. 88, details of the advance command processing (S2409) will be described. FIG. 88 is a flowchart showing the contents of the notice command processing (FIG. S2409).

  In the advance command processing, first, a display data table corresponding to the command is determined and set in the display data table buffer (S2701). Here, the display data table buffer 233d is configured to be able to set a plurality of display data tables, and the set display data tables can be processed by moving the pointer in synchronization. Therefore, even when different displays are executed corresponding to a plurality of background modes, it is possible to switch to a plurality of display contents by setting one of the plurality of display data table buffers to active and switching.

  Here, since the determination of the start of fluctuation is always performed several seconds or more in the main controller 110, two or more display fluctuation pattern commands are not received within 20 milliseconds. When executing, it is impossible that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, but part of the command changes due to the influence of noise etc., and another command is displayed incorrectly. It may be interpreted as a variation pattern command. In such a case, if it is determined that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern with the shortest variation time is displayed in the display data table buffer. Set to 233d.

  Next, a transfer data table corresponding to the set display data table is determined and set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S2702). Then, among the data table determination flags of the variable display data table corresponding to each notice pattern, the set data table determination flag is turned on, and the other data table determination flags are set off (S2703). In the display setting process, by referring to the data table determination flag set by the process of S2703, it is easy to determine which fluctuation pattern the fluctuation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d corresponds to. Judgment can be made.

  Next, based on the variation time of the variation pattern corresponding to the variation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, time data representing the variation time is set in the time counter 233h (S2704), and the pointer 233f is set to 0. Initialization is performed (S2705). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the confirmed display flag are set to OFF (S2706), the notice command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

  Returning to FIG. 86, the description will be continued. In the process of S2408, when it is determined that there is no display notice command (S2408: No), it is determined whether there is a display hold command among the unprocessed commands. When it is determined that the display hold command is received (S2410: Yes), the hold command processing is executed.

  Here, the pending command process (S2411) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 89 is a flowchart showing the contents of the hold command process (S2411).

  In the hold command process (FIG. 89, S2411), first, it is determined whether the received command is a command indicating the number of hold (S2801). If it is determined that the command indicates the number of reserved items (S2801: Yes), the display number of the reserved display data corresponding to the reserved symbols in the number of reserved items and the symbols (pattern, color, etc.) indicated by the received display-holding command is displayed in the display data table. (S2802). Thereafter, this process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S2801 that the received command is not a command indicating the number of holds (S2801: No), it is determined whether the received command is a command for normal hold effect (S2803). If it is determined that the command is a normal hold effect (S2803: Yes), the corresponding hold symbol is changed to a normal hold effect symbol and set in the display data table (S2804). Thereafter, this process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2803 that the received command is not a command indicating a normal hold effect (S2803: No), it is determined whether the received command is a command of eight effects (S2805). If it is determined that the command is for eight effects (S2805: Yes), display data to be changed to the notice symbol for eight effects is set in the display data table (S2806), and then this process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S2805 that the command is not an eight effect, other hold display settings are executed (S2807). Thereafter, this process is terminated.

  Returning to FIG. 86, the description will be continued. If it is determined in step S2410 that the display hold command has not been received (S2410: No), it is determined whether a display effect command has been received (S2412). When it is determined that the display effect command is received (S2412: Yes), effect command processing is executed (S2413).

  Here, with reference to FIG. 90, the details of the effect command process (S2413) will be described. FIG. 90 is a flowchart showing the contents of the effect command process (S2413).

  In the effect command process (FIG. 90, S2413), first, it is determined whether or not the re-change effect (see FIG. 47B) in the time effect extension period is set (S2901). Here, the re-change effect is notified to the display control device 114 by a command when it is set in the processing of S1730 of the extended effect setting processing (FIG. 78, S1708) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113. When it is determined that the re-variation effect is set (S2901: Yes), a display data table corresponding to the re-change effect is set in the display data table buffer (S2902). Thereafter, the process proceeds to S2909.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2901 that the re-variation effect is not set (S2901: No), it is determined whether the effect is a pseudo extension effect (S2903). This pseudo extension effect is a sign effect displayed 3 seconds before the end of the time effect period, and the effect symbol is displayed with shaking (see FIG. 47A). If it is determined that the pseudo extension effect is set (S2903: Yes), a display data table corresponding to the pseudo extension effect is set in the display data table buffer (S2904). Thereafter, the process proceeds to S2909.

  On the other hand, in the process of S2903, when it is determined that the pseudo extension effect is not set (S2903: No), it is determined whether eight effects are set (S2905). If it is determined that eight effects are set (S2905: Yes), a display data table corresponding to the eight effects is set in the display data table buffer (S2906). Thereafter, the process proceeds to S2909.

  On the other hand, in the process of S2905, when it is determined that eight effects are not set (S2905: No), it is determined whether the normal hold effect is set (S2907). If it is determined that the normal hold effect is set (S2907: Yes), a display data table corresponding to the normal hold effect is set in the display data table buffer (S2908). Thereafter, the process proceeds to S2909. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2907 that the normal hold effect is not set (S2907: No), this process ends.

  In the process of S2909, a transfer data table corresponding to the set display data table is determined and set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S2909). Then, among the data table discrimination flags of the display data table corresponding to each display pattern, the set data table discrimination flag is turned on, and the other data table discrimination flags are set off (S2910).

  Next, based on the display time corresponding to the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, time data representing the variation time is set in the time counter 233h (S2911), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S2911). S2912). Thereafter, this process is terminated.

  Returning to FIG. 86, the description will be continued. If it is determined that there is no display effect command in the process of S2412 (S2412: No), it is determined whether a back image change command is received (S2414). If it is determined that a back image change command has been received (S2414: Yes), back image change command processing is executed (S2415).

  Here, with reference to FIG. 91, the back image change command process (S2415) will be described. FIG. 91 is a flowchart showing the contents of the rear image change command process (S2415).

  In the rear image change command processing (FIG. 91, S2415), the rear image change flag is set to ON (S3001). The rear image discrimination flag corresponding to the changed rear image type indicated by the command is set to ON (S3002). Thereafter, this process is terminated.

  Here, returning to FIG. 86, the description will be continued. If it is determined in step S2414 that the rear image change command has not been received (S2414: No), it is determined whether there is an error command (S2416). If it is determined that an error command has been received (S2416: Yes), error command processing is executed (S2417).

  Details of the error command process (S2417) will be described with reference to FIG. 91 (b). FIG. 91B is a flowchart showing error command processing. This error command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the error command received from the sound lamp control device 114.

  In the error command processing, first, an error occurrence flag indicating that an error has occurred in the ON state is set to ON (S3101). Then, among the error determination flags provided for each error type, the error determination flag corresponding to the error type indicated by the error command is turned on, and the other error determination flags are set to OFF (S3102). The process ends, and the process returns to the command determination process.

  In the display setting process, when the occurrence of an error is detected based on the error occurrence flag set by the process of S3101, the error type generated from the error determination flag set by the process of S3102 is determined, and the error type is dealt with. The processing is executed so that the warning image to be displayed is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  If it is determined that two or more error commands are stored in the command buffer area, in step S3002, the error determination flags corresponding to all error types indicated by the respective error commands are set to ON. As a result, warning images corresponding to all error types are displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that a player or a hall-related person can correctly grasp the error occurrence status.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. 86. If it is determined in the processing of S2416 that there is no error command (S2416: No), then processing corresponding to other unprocessed commands is executed (S2419), and the processing returns to S2401.

  In the process of S2401, which is executed again after the process of each command is executed, it is determined again whether there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, and if there is an unprocessed new command (S2401: Yes). ), The processing of S2402 to S2419 is executed again. Then, the processes of S2401 to S2419 are repeatedly executed until there is no unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, and if it is determined in S2401 that there is no unprocessed new command, this command determination The process ends.

  In the V interrupt process (see FIG. 85B), the simple command determination process (S2308) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is on is the same as the command determination process. However, in the simple command determination process, commands necessary for displaying a power-on image (not shown) from unprocessed commands stored in the command buffer area, that is, a display variation pattern command and a display stop type command Only the variable pattern command process (see FIG. 87 (a)) and the stop type command process (see FIG. 87 (b)), which are processes corresponding to each command, are executed, and other commands are also extracted. Performs a process of discarding without executing a process corresponding to the command.

  Here, in the variation pattern command processing (see FIG. 87A) executed in this case, the display data table buffer corresponding to the display of the variation image at power-on is displayed in the display data table buffer 233d in the processing of S2301. The image data of the power-on main image and the power-on variation image that are set and required in that case are stored in the power-on main moving image area 235a and the power-on variation moving image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, in the process of S2302, Null data is written in the transfer data table buffer 233e and the content is cleared.

  Next, the details of the display setting process (S2303), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114, will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 92 is a flowchart showing this display setting process.

  In this display setting process, as shown in FIG. 92, it is determined whether or not the new command flag is on (S3201). If the new command flag is not on, that is, if it is off (S3201: No), In the command determination process executed first, it is determined that a new command has not been processed, the processes of S3202 to S3204 are skipped, and the process proceeds to S3205. On the other hand, if the new flag is ON (S3201: Yes), it is determined that a new command has been processed in the command determination process executed first, and after setting the new command flag to OFF (S3202), S3203 to S3204. By this process, the process corresponding to the new command is executed.

  In the process of S3203, it is determined whether or not the error occurrence flag is ON (S3203). If the error occurrence flag is on (S3203: Yes), warning image setting processing is executed (S3204).

  Here, the details of the warning image setting process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 93 is a flowchart showing the warning image setting process. This process is a process for developing image data that causes the third symbol display device 81 to display a warning image corresponding to the error that has occurred. First, an error determination flag is referred to, and all error determinations that are set to ON are performed. The warning image data for displaying the warning image of the error corresponding to the flag on the third symbol display device 81 is developed (S3301).

  In the task processing, the type of sprite (display object) constituting the warning image is specified based on the developed warning image data, and the display coordinate position, the enlargement ratio, and the rotation angle are drawn for each sprite. Determine the various parameters required.

    In the warning image setting process, after the process of S3301, the error occurrence flag is set to OFF (S3302), and the process returns to the display setting process.

  Now, the description returns to FIG. After the warning image setting process (S3204) or in the process of S3203, if it is determined that the error occurrence flag is not on, that is, is off (S3203: No), the process proceeds to S3205.

  In S3205, pointer update processing is executed (S3205). Here, the details of the pointer update processing will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 94 is a flowchart showing pointer update processing. This pointer update processing acquires the corresponding drawing content or transfer data information of the transfer target image data from the display data table and transfer data table respectively stored in the display data table buffer 233d and transfer data table buffer 233e. This is a process for updating the pointer 233f for designating the power address.

  In this pointer update process, first, 1 is added to the pointer 233f (S3401). That is, the update process is performed so that the pointer 233f is incremented by 1 every time the V interrupt process is executed. Further, as described above, in the various data tables, the start information is described in the address “0000H”, and the substance of each data is specified after the address “0001H”. When the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 as it is stored in the data table buffer 233d, the value is updated to 1 by this pointer update processing. Substantial data can be read from the data table.

  After updating the value of the pointer 233f by the processing of S3301, next, in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, whether or not the data at the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is End information. Is discriminated (S3402). As a result, if it is End information (S3402: Yes), it means that in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, the pointer 233f has been updated past the address where the entity data is described.

  Therefore, it is determined whether or not the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is a demonstration display data table (S3403). If the display data table is a demonstration display data table (S3403: Yes), the display data is displayed. Time data corresponding to the presentation time in the demonstration display data table set in the table buffer 233d is set in the time counter 233h (S3404), the pointer 233f is set to 1 and initialized (S3405), and this process is terminated. Return to the display setting process. Thereby, in the display setting process, the drawing contents can be developed in order from the top of the demonstration display data table, so that the demonstration effect can be repeatedly displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S3303 that the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is not a display data table for demonstration (S3403: No), the value of the pointer 233f is subtracted by 1 ( In step S3406, the process ends, and the process returns to the display setting process. As a result, in the display setting process, when a display data table other than the display data table for demonstration, for example, a variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the previous address in which End information is described. Since the drawing contents of the above are always developed, the third image display device 81 can display the last image defined by the display data table in a stopped state. On the other hand, in the process of S3302, if the data at the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is not End information (S3402: No), this process is terminated and the process returns to the display setting process.

  Here, returning to FIG. 92, the description will be continued. After the pointer update process, the drawing content at the address indicated by the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process is expanded from the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d (S3206). In the task processing, the type of sprite (display object) constituting the image is specified based on the drawing image expanded in the processing of S3206 together with the warning image previously expanded and the display coordinates for each sprite. Various parameters necessary for drawing such as position, magnification, and rotation angle are determined.

  Next, 1 is subtracted from the value of the time counter 233h (S3207), and it is determined whether or not the value of the time counter 233h after the subtraction is 0 or less (S3208). If the value of the time counter 233h is 1 or more (S3108: No), the display setting process is terminated and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, when the value of the time counter 233h is equal to or less than 0 (S3208: Yes), it means that the production effect time corresponding to the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d has elapsed. At this time, if the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, it is time to end the variable display and perform stop display, so it is confirmed whether the fixed display flag is on. (S3209).

  As a result, if the confirmation display flag is off (S3209: No), the confirmation display effect is not yet performed, and the confirmation display effect is performed. Therefore, first, the confirmation display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. The setting is made (S3210), and then the null data is written into the transfer data table buffer 233e to clear the contents (S3211). Then, time data corresponding to the presentation time in the final display data table is set in the time counter 233h (S3212), and the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S3213). Then, after the confirmation display flag indicating that the confirmation display effect is being performed in the ON state is set to ON (S3214), the content of the stop symbol determination flag is directly copied to the previous stop symbol determination flag provided in the work RAM 233. (S3215), the process returns to the V interrupt process.

  As a result, when the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the fixed symbol display effect of the stop symbol in the variable effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with the end of the effect. Thus, the drawing content can be set. Moreover, the effect displayed on the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81 can be easily changed into a fixed display effect only by changing the display data table set to the display data table buffer 233d to a fixed display data table. And, compared with the case where the display contents are changed by starting another program as in the prior art, the program does not become complicated and bloated, and therefore, the MPU 231 is not greatly loaded. Regardless of the processing capability of the display control device 114, various types of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display 81.

  The previous stop symbol determination flag set by the process of S3215 is used to specify the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the next variation effect. That is, as described above, the display of the third symbol in the variation effect changes depending on the stop symbol of the variation effect performed one time before. In the variation display data table, the variation based on the data table is changed. The symbol offset information from the stop symbol of the fluctuating effect performed one time before is described until a predetermined time elapses from the start. In the task process (S2304), until the predetermined time has elapsed since the change was started, the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before is specified from the previous stop symbol determination flag set in S3215, and the The third symbol to be actually displayed is specified by adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the specified stop symbol. Thereby, the variation effect is started from the stop symbol in the previous variation effect.

  On the other hand, if the confirmation display flag is OFF instead of ON in the processing of S3209 (S3209: No), it is determined whether or not the demonstration display flag is ON (S3216). If the demo display flag is off (S3216: Yes), it means that the value of the time counter 233h becomes 0 or less with the end of the final display effect, so the display data table for demonstration is displayed as the display data table. The buffer 233d is set (S3217), and then the null data is written to the transfer data table buffer 233e to clear the contents (S3218). Then, time data corresponding to the production time in the demonstration display data table is set in the time counter 233h (S3219). Then, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S3220), the demonstration display flag indicating that the demonstration effect is being performed in the ON state is set to ON (S3221), this process ends, and the process returns to the V interrupt process.

  If the demonstration display flag is on in the process of S3216 (S3216: Yes), it means that the demonstration effect is performed after the final display effect is finished, and the demonstration effect is finished. Then, the process returns to the V interrupt process. In this case, as described above, various settings are made so that the demonstration effect is started again by the pointer update process executed in the next V interrupt process. The demonstration effect can be repeatedly displayed on the third symbol display device 81 until a new display variation pattern command is received.

  Note that, in the simple display setting process (S2309) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is turned on in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 85B), the same process as the display setting process is performed. However, in the simple display setting process, after the effect time of the variation effect by the power-on variation image ends, one of the power-on variation images corresponding to the stop symbol set based on the display stop type command for a predetermined time. The display data table buffer 233d is set to a display data table that stipulates that the image (not shown) is stopped and displayed.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 95 and 96, details of the above-described transfer setting process (S2305), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114, will be described. First, FIG. 95A is a flowchart showing this transfer setting process.

  In this transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (S3501). If the simple image display flag 233c is on (S3501: Yes), all image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. The process is executed (S3502), the transfer setting process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. Thereby, a transfer instruction for transferring the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 is set to the image controller 237. Details of the resident image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, if the simple image display flag 233c is not on as a result of the processing of S3501, that is, if it is off (S3501: No), all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video. It is transferred to the RAM 235. In this case, the normal image transfer setting process is executed (S3503), the transfer setting process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. Thus, the transfer instruction is set so that the subsequent transfer of the image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236. Details of the normal image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the resident image transfer setting process (S3502), which is one process of the transfer setting process (S2305) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114, will be described with reference to FIG. 95 (b). FIG. 95B is a flowchart showing the resident image transfer setting process (S3502).

  In this resident image transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not an instruction to transfer untransferred image data is issued to the image controller 237 (S3601), and if a transfer instruction is transmitted (S3501: Yes). Further, based on the transfer instruction, it is determined whether or not the image data transfer process performed by the image controller 237 has ended (S3602). In the process of S3602, when an image data transfer instruction is given to the image controller 237 and a transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process has ended. . If it is determined that the transfer process is not completed by the process of S3602 (S3602: No), the image transfer process is continuously performed in the image controller 237. Therefore, the resident image transfer setting process is performed. finish. On the other hand, when it is determined that the transfer process is completed (S3602: Yes), the process proceeds to S3603. Also, as a result of the process of S3501, when the transfer instruction of the untransferred image data is not transmitted to the image controller 237 (S3601: No), the process proceeds to S3603.

  In the process of S3603, it is determined whether or not all resident target image data that should reside in the resident video RAM 235 has been transferred (S3603). A transfer instruction to the image controller 237 is set so as to transfer the image data to be transferred to the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 (S3604), and the resident image transfer setting process ends.

  As a result, transfer data information relating to untransferred resident object image data is included in the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process, and the image controller 237 transfers the transfer described in the drawing list. Based on the data information, the resident target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 236. The transfer data information includes the head address and final address of the character ROM 234 storing the resident target image data, transfer destination information (in this case, the resident video RAM 235), and transfer destination (transferred here). The head address of an area provided in the resident video RAM 235 in which the resident target image data is to be stored is included. The image controller 237 executes image transfer processing based on this transfer data information, reads the image data specified by the transfer processing from the character ROM 234, temporarily stores it in the buffer RAM 237a, and then during the unused period of the resident video RAM 236. To the designated address of the resident video RAM 236. When the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231.

  If all the resident target image data have been transferred as a result of the process of S3603 (S3603: Yes), the simple image display flag 233c is set to OFF (S3605), and the resident image transfer setting process is terminated. Thus, in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 85B), the command is not the simple command determination process (see S2308 in FIG. 85B) and the simple display setting process (see S2309 in FIG. 85B). Since the determination process (see FIGS. 86 to 91) and the display setting process (see FIGS. 92 to 94) are executed, normal image drawing is set, and the third symbol display device 81 has The normal image is displayed. Further, the subsequent transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236 by the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 96) (see S3401: No in FIG. 95A).

  By executing this resident image transfer setting process, the MPU 231 removes all the resident images to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 excluding the power-on main image and the power-on variation image that have already been transferred in the main process. The target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Then, the MPU 231 performs control so that the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 is held without being overwritten while the power is turned on. Thus, the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer setting process is resident in the resident video RAM 235 while the power is turned on.

  Therefore, after all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the display controller 114 uses the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235 while using the image controller 237. The image drawing process can be performed at. Thus, if the image data used for the drawing process is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed at the time of image drawing. Therefore, the time required for the reading can be omitted, and the drawn image can be displayed immediately on the third symbol display device 81 by drawing the image.

  In particular, in the resident video RAM 235, image data of frequently displayed images such as a back image, a third symbol, a character symbol, and an error message, the main controller 110, the sound lamp controller 113, and the display controller 114 are displayed. Since the image data of the image to be displayed is made resident immediately after the display is determined by, for example, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a, the player can perform various operations performed at an arbitrary timing. The responsiveness until some image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be kept high.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 96, the normal image transfer setting process (S3503) which is one process of the transfer setting process (S2305) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114 will be described. FIG. 96 is a flowchart showing the normal image transfer setting process (S3503).

  In this normal image transfer setting process, first, from the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process (S3205) of the display setting process (S2303) executed previously is used. Information described in the indicated address is acquired (S3701). Then, it is determined whether or not the acquired information is transfer data information (S3702). If it is transfer data information (S3702: Yes), the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored from the transfer data information. Start address (storage source start address), final address (storage source final address), and transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) start address are extracted and stored in a transfer data buffer provided in the work RAM 233 ( In step S3703, a transfer start flag provided in the work RAM 233 and indicating that there is image data to be transferred in the on state is set to on (S3704), and the process proceeds to step S3705.

  In the process of S3702, if the acquired information is not transfer data information but Null data (S3702: No), the processes of S3703 and S3704 are skipped, and the process proceeds to S3705. In the process of S3705, it is determined whether or not a new image data transfer instruction has been set for the image controller 237 after the previous transfer of image data has been completed (S3705), and the transfer instruction is set. If so (S3705: Yes), it is further determined whether the transfer of the image data performed by the image controller 237 has been completed based on the transfer instruction (S3706).

  In the process of S3606, when an image data transfer instruction is set for the image controller 237 and a transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process has ended. . If it is determined that the transfer process is not completed by the process of S3606 (S3706: No), the image controller 237 continues the image transfer process. finish. On the other hand, when it is determined that the transfer process has been completed (S3706: Yes), the process proceeds to S3707. Also, as a result of the processing in S3705, when the image data transfer instruction is not set for the image controller 237 after the end of the previous transfer processing (S3705: No), the processing proceeds to S3707.

  In the process of S3707, it is determined whether or not the transfer start flag is on (S3707). If the transfer start flag is on (S3707: Yes), there is image data to be transferred, so the transfer start flag is present. Is turned off (S3708), the image data of the sprite indicated by the various information stored in the transfer data buffer by the process of S3703 is set as the transfer target image data, and the process proceeds to S3709. On the other hand, if the transfer start flag is not on but off (S3707: No), this process ends.

  In the processing of S3709, it is determined whether or not the transfer target image data is already stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S3709). The determination in the process of S3709 is performed by referring to the stored image data determination flag 233i. That is, when the storage state corresponding to the sprite that is the transfer target image data is read from the stored image data determination flag 233i and the storage state is “ON”, the image data of the sprite that is the transfer target is the normal video. If it is determined that the image is stored in the RAM 236 and the storage state is “OFF”, it is determined that the image data of the sprite to be transferred is not stored in the normal video RAM 236.

  If the transfer target image data is stored in the normal video RAM 236 as a result of the processing in S3709 (S3709: Yes), it is not necessary to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. Then, the normal image transfer setting process is finished as it is. Thereby, it is possible to suppress unnecessary transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, thereby reducing the processing load on each part of the display control device 114 and reducing the traffic on the bus line 240. Can be planned.

  On the other hand, if the transfer target image data is not stored in the normal video RAM 236 as a result of the process of S3709 (S3709: No), a transfer instruction for the transfer target image data is set (S3710). Thereby, the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is included in the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process, and the image controller 237 stores the transfer data information described in the drawing list. Based on this, the image data of the transfer target image can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. The transfer data information includes the start address and end address of the character ROM 234 storing the image data of the transfer target image, transfer destination information (in this case, the normal video RAM 236), and transfer destination (transfer here). The start address of the sub area provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 to store the image data of the transfer target image is included. The image controller 237 executes an image transfer process based on the transfer data information, reads the image data specified by the transfer process from the character ROM 234, and specifies the specified video RAM (here, the normal video RAM 236). To the specified address. When the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231.

  After the process of S3610, the stored image data determination flag 233i is updated (S3711), and the normal transfer setting process is terminated. As described above, the stored image data determination flag 233i is updated by setting the storage state corresponding to the sprite that has become the transfer target image data to “ON”, and also in the same image storage area 236a as that one sprite. This is done by setting the storage state corresponding to the other sprites to be stored in the area to “off”.

  As described above, by executing the normal image transfer process, the process corresponding to the display stop type command is executed in the command determination process executed earlier, and as a result, the display stop type command is used. When it is determined that the stop type information shown is a jackpot stop type, the image data used in the fanfare effect can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. Further, when the rear image is changed based on the reception of the rear image change command in the command determination process executed earlier, the rear surface of the resident video RAM 235 among the image data used in the rear image. Image data not stored in the image area 235c can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay.

  In the present embodiment, the display data table is displayed in the display data table buffer 233d according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110 or the like. As a result, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Then, the MPU 231 executes the normal image transfer setting process to the image controller 237 according to the transfer data information described in the area indicated by the pointer 233f of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Since the transfer instruction of the transfer target image data is set, the sprite image data used in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d is surely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing. Can do.

  In the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information is specified for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a in accordance with the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table, so that the transfer data information is determined in accordance with the display data table. When drawing a sprite, image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 necessary for drawing the sprite can always be stored in the image storage area 236a.

  As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. A corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while drawing an image of each sprite designated in the data table. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  In the transfer data table, the transfer data information is defined so that the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to the sprite. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. By controlling the transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in sprite units, it is possible to control the transfer of image data in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in load on transfer.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 97, details of the above-described drawing process (S2306), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114, will be described. FIG. 97 is a flowchart showing this drawing process.

  In the drawing process, the types of various sprites constituting one frame determined in the task process (S2304) and the parameters (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucency value, α blending information required for drawing each sprite) , Color information, filter designation information) and a transfer instruction set by the transfer setting process (S2305), the drawing list shown in FIG. 57 is generated (S3801). That is, in the process of S3701, the storage RAM type and address storing the image data of each sprite are specified for each sprite from the types of various sprites constituting one frame determined in the task process (S2304). Then, the parameters necessary for the sprite determined by the task processing are associated with the specified storage RAM type and address. Then, after rearranging each sprite in the order of the sprite that should be placed on the front side from the sprite that should be placed on the back side in the image for one frame, the details for each sprite in the order of the sprite after the rearrangement As a drawing information (detailed information), a drawing list is generated by describing a storage RAM type and address where sprite image data is stored, and parameters necessary for drawing the sprite. When a transfer instruction is set by the transfer setting process (S2305), the leading address (storage source leading address) of the character ROM 234 storing the transfer target image data as transfer data information at the end of the drawing list. And the final address (storage source final address) and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are added.

  As described above, since the area of the resident video RAM 235 in which the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed for each sprite, the MPU 231 Depending on the sprite type, the storage RAM type and address in which image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified, and such information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

  When the drawing list is generated, the generated drawing list and the drawing target buffer information specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233j are transmitted to the image controller (S3802). Here, when the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 0, the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 1 including information instructing to expand the image drawn in the first frame buffer 236b as the drawing target buffer information. Includes information instructing to expand the image drawn in the second frame buffer 236c as drawing target buffer information.

  Based on the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 draws images sequentially from the sprite described at the top of the drawing list, and develops the image by overwriting the frame buffer designated by the drawing target buffer information. Thereby, in the image for one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be arranged on the most back side, and the sprite drawn last can be arranged on the most front side.

  Further, when transfer data information is included in the drawing list, the start address (storage source start address) and the final address (storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 storing the transfer target image data are determined from the transfer data information. ) And the destination address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are extracted, and the image data stored from the source address to the end address of the storage source are sequentially read from the character ROM 234 and temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a. After that, the image data stored in the buffer RAM 237a is sequentially transferred to the area indicated by the transfer destination head address of the normal video RAM 236 in anticipation of the normal video RAM 236 being in an unused state. Then, the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 is used based on a drawing list transmitted from the MPU 231 thereafter, and an image is drawn according to the drawing list.

  The image controller 237 reads the image information of the previously developed image from a frame buffer different from the frame buffer instructed by the drawing target buffer information, and displays the image information together with the drive signal in the third symbol display device 81. Send to. As a result, the developed image in the frame buffer can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, while developing the image drawn in one frame buffer, the image developed from one frame buffer can be displayed on the third symbol display 81, and the drawing process and the display process are processed simultaneously in parallel. Can do.

  In the drawing process, after the process of S3702, the drawing target buffer flag 233j is updated (S3703). Then, the drawing process ends, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. The drawing target buffer flag 233j is updated by inverting the value, that is, by setting the value to “1” when the value is “0” and setting it to “0” when the value is “1”. Done. As a result, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c every time the drawing list is transmitted.

  Here, the drawing list is transmitted based on the V interrupt signal executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and the display process for one frame are completed. This is performed every time the drawing process of the embedding process (see FIG. 85B) is executed. Thus, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for reading out image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for developing the image for one frame after 20 milliseconds after the drawing process for one frame is completed. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer from which image information for the remaining minutes is read out. Therefore, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. .

  Further, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read. Is done. Therefore, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. . Thereafter, a frame buffer that expands an image for one frame and a frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read out are changed to either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds. By alternately designating, it is possible to continuously display the image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while drawing the image for one frame.

  Moreover, in the said embodiment, although the audio | voice lamp control apparatus 113 and the display control apparatus 114 are provided separately, instead, each apparatus 113,114 may be integrated and provided as one apparatus.

  In the above embodiment, first, a command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113, and when the command is received by the sound lamp control device 113, the sound lamp control device 113 transmits the command to the display control device 114. A command to be determined is determined, and thereafter, the command is transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 to the display control device 114. On the other hand, first, a command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the display control device 114, and when the command is received by the display control device 114, the display control device 114 determines a command to be transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. After that, the command may be transmitted from the display control device 114 to the sound lamp control device 113.

  In the above embodiment, the case where the image controller 237 executes the process of transferring the image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the MPU 231 may directly access the character ROM 234, read image data from the character ROM 234, and transfer it to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236. In this case, the image data read by the MPU 231 from the character ROM 234 is temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a, and then the MPU 231 determines whether the transfer destination resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is unused. If it is not used, the image data may be transferred from the buffer RAM 237a to the transfer destination resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236.

  In this case, whether or not the transfer destination resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is unused is determined by the image controller 237 accessing the resident video RAM 235 (that is, being used). And a normal video RAM access flag (not shown) indicating that the image controller 237 is accessing (ie, in use) the normal video RAM 236. ) In the image controller 237, and the MPU 231 may check the access flag corresponding to the transfer destination buffer RAM.

  Alternatively, a signal transmitted / received between the image controller 237 and the resident video RAM 235 or a signal transmitted / received between the image controller 237 and the normal video RAM 236 is monitored by the MPU 231, and the signal is resident from the state of the signal. It may be confirmed whether or not the video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are unused. Alternatively, when the image controller 237 starts access to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 or ends access, the MPU 231 notifies the MPU 231 of the information from time to time, so that the MPU 231 Based on the notification, it may be determined whether the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are unused.

  Alternatively, when the image controller 237 scans the third symbol display device 81, the MPU 231 confirms the driving state of the image controller 237 or notifies from the image controller 237 whether or not the scanning is in the blank period. If the scanning state is in the blank period, it may be determined that the video RAMs 235 and 236 are not used. As a result, the image controller 237 checks only the scanning state of the third symbol display device 81 and determines whether or not it is unused, so that the determination can be made easily.

  In this case, the MPU 231 also transfers transfer data that is not Null data at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e or the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d. When the information exists, the image data may be read from the character ROM 234 according to the transfer data information and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. Here, the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is stored so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the normal video RAM 236 before drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table or the like. Since it is defined for a predetermined address, when image data is transferred in accordance with the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table, when drawing a predetermined sprite according to the display data table or the like, the drawing of the sprite is performed. Therefore, image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 and is required to be stored in the normal video RAM 236 can be stored. A predetermined sprite can be drawn based on the display data table using the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236.

  Note that the process of reading the image data from the character ROM 234 and transferring it to the normal video RAM 236 may be performed in a display main process executed by the MPU 231 or a loop of the main process. As a result, the MPU 231 can execute the image data transfer process by using the time during which the important process in the display control device 114 such as the command interrupt process and the V interrupt process is not performed. Further, since the command interrupt process and the V interrupt process are executed with priority over the display main process and the like, the MPU 231 can execute the image data without affecting the command interrupt process or the V interrupt process. The transfer process can be executed.

  In the above embodiment, the MPU 231 does not manage each video RAM using the addresses of the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236, but uses them in common with the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236. In the address system, a different address area may be assigned to each video RAM to manage each video RAM. In this way, the MPU 231 does not directly specify the video RAM (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) to be accessed from the image controller 237, but simply specifies the address, and the The image controller 237 can determine whether the designated area is for the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236. That is, when designating the video RAM to be accessed and the address of the video RAM area from the MPU 231 to the image controller 237, it is only necessary to designate an address set in a common address system. It is possible to simplify the configuration of the instruction for performing the designation. For example, in the drawing list transmitted from the MPU 231 to the image controller 237, as the information indicating the storage location of the sprite data, the address set in a common address system is used without including the storage RAM type. Since it is only necessary to specify the storage destination address, the structure of the drawing list can be simplified.

  In the above embodiment, the case where the character ROM 234 is directly connected to the internal bus (bus line 240) to which the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 are connected has been described. 237 may be directly connected. Also, a bridge circuit for converting the input / output specification of the character ROM 234 into the input / output specification of the mask ROM is provided, and the character ROM 234 is provided by connecting to the internal bus (bus line 240) or the image controller 237 via the bridge circuit. Also good.

  By providing this bridge circuit, the NAND flash memory 234a uses the existing image controller 237 or internal bus (bus line 240) designed on the assumption that a general mask ROM is used as the character ROM. The configured character ROM 234 can be connected. Even if the character ROM 234 is connected via the image controller 237 or a bridge circuit, the MPU 231 may be directly accessible to the character ROM 234.

  In the above embodiment, the case where the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a has been described. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and is configured by a large-capacity and inexpensive non-volatile storage means such as a hard disk. May be. Such a large-capacity and inexpensive storage means generally has a low reading speed, but the display control device 114 is configured as described in the above embodiment, so that an image can be displayed without any problem at a desired display time. be able to.

  In the above embodiment, the case where the NOR ROM 234d is provided in the character ROM 234 and a part of the boot program executed first after the system reset is released in the MPU 231 in the first program storage area 234d1 has been described. The first program storage area is provided in a memory constituted by a non-volatile storage medium capable of reading operation faster than the NAND flash memory 234a, and the MPU 231 first releases the system reset in the area. A part of the boot program to be executed may be stored. For example, instead of the NOR-type ROM 234d, a FeRAM (Ferroelectric RAM), an MRAM (Magnetic Resistive RAM) or a PRAM (Phase change RAM) is provided in the character ROM 234, and a first program storage area is provided in the character ROM 234. A part of the boot program executed first may be stored.

  In the above embodiment, the first program storage area 234d1 is provided in the NOR-type ROM 234d connected to the internal bus (bus line 240), and a part of the boot program executed first after the system reset is released in the MPU 231 in the area. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a memory constituted by a non-volatile storage medium capable of performing a read operation at a higher speed than the NAND flash memory 234a is used as an internal bus (bus line 240). The first program storage area may be provided in the memory, and a part of the boot program executed first after the system reset is canceled in the MPU 231 may be stored in the area. For example, instead of the NOR-type ROM 234d, an FeRAM (Ferroelectric RAM), an MRAM (Magnetic Resistive RAM), a PRAM (Phase change RAM) or the like is provided in the internal bus (bus line 240), and a first program storage area is provided in the MPU 231. A part of the boot program executed first after the system reset is released may be stored.

  In the above embodiment, when the ROM controller 234b detects that the address of the internal bus (bus line 240) is designated as “0000H”, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 is set in the buffer RAM 234c. Then, the case where data (instruction code) corresponding to the designated address is read from the buffer RAM 234c and output to the MPU 231 via the internal bus (bus line 240) has been described. In contrast, when the ROM controller 234b detects that the power is supplied from the power supply device 115, the ROM controller 234b sets the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 in the buffer RAM 234c, and then When the ROM controller 234b detects that the address of the internal bus (bus line 240) is designated as “0000H”, data (instruction code) corresponding to the designated address is read from the buffer RAM 234c, and the internal bus (bus line) is read. 240) may be output to the MPU 231. In this case, if the MPU 231 designates the address “0000H” for the internal bus (bus line 240) after releasing the system reset, is the boot program already stored in the first program storage area 234d1 set in the buffer RAM 234c? Since it is being set, the character ROM 234 can output the corresponding data (instruction code) with less delay after the address “0000H” is designated by the MPU 231. Accordingly, since the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address “0000H” in a short time after designating the address “0000H”, the MPU 231 can start the display main process in a short time. As a result, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow reading speed, the control of the auxiliary effect unit or the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 is immediately started. Can do.

  Further, when the ROM controller 234b detects that the address designated in the internal bus (bus line 240) designates the control program stored in the first program storage area 234d1, the first program storage area 234d1. The data (instruction code) corresponding to the designated address may be read directly from the data and output to the MPU 231 via the internal bus (bus line 240). Thereby, the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address “0000H” in a short time after designating the address “0000H”, so that the display main process can be activated in the MPU 231 in a short time. As a result, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow reading speed, the control of the auxiliary effect unit or the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 is immediately started. Can do. In this case, the process of setting the control program (boot program) stored in the first program storage area 234d1 in the buffer RAM 234c may not be performed. Thereby, power consumption in the character ROM 234 can be suppressed.

  In the above embodiment, the case where the resident video RAM 235 is provided connected to the image controller 237 has been described. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. It may be provided directly connected to line 240). When the character ROM 234 is connected to the internal bus (bus line 240) or the image controller 237 via the bridge circuit, a resident video RAM 235 may be connected to the bridge circuit. If the resident video RAM 235 is configured to be connected to the bridge circuit, the resident video RAM 235 can be connected even if the existing image controller 237 or the internal bus (bus line 240) is not configured to be directly connectable to the resident video RAM 235. The RAM 235 can be easily provided in the display control device 114.

  In the above embodiment, the case where one resident video RAM 235 and one normal video RAM 236 are provided in the display control device 114 has been described, but the number of various video RAMs is not limited to this, and more A video RAM may be provided. Further, a plurality of resident video RAMs may be provided, and image data corresponding to images corresponding to various modes may be resident in each, and the resident video RAM to be used may be selected according to the mode.

  In the above-described embodiment, the case where the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are configured by a one-port type (one input / output port) DRAM has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this. A type of RAM may be used. As a result, writing to and reading from the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 can be performed at the same time. For example, the image data is read from the normal video RAM 236 and is read from the character ROM 234 while drawing the image. The process of writing the image data to the normal video RAM 236 can be performed in parallel. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the possibility that the drawing process is delayed due to the writing of the image data.

  In the above embodiment, the case where the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are configured by different memories has been described. The same content as that of the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 may be stored in each area. In the case where the resident area and the normal area are configured by one RAM, the input / output port of the memory is prevented from being occupied by one of the resident area and the normal area in the read or write process It is desirable to use a multiport RAM.

  The type of image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 in the above embodiment is an example, and the type may be appropriately set according to the content of the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. . In this case, at least resident image data corresponding to an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 immediately in response to a received command received from the main control device 110 or the sound lamp control device 113 or other input from the outside. Preferably it resides in the video RAM 235.

  In the above embodiment, a case has been described in which a part of the image data stored in the character ROM 234 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235 and made resident. However, all the image data stored in the character ROM 234 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235. May be. In this case, since the image data stored in the non-resident character ROM 234 does not exist in the resident video RAM 235, the normal video RAM 236 is used as a dedicated memory for storing the drawing image data obtained by drawing by the image controller 237. May be.

  In the above embodiment, the case where the contents of the resident video RAM 235 are retained without being overwritten when the power is turned on has been described. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and the main controller 110 or the sound lamp controller 113 is not limited thereto. The image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 may be overwritten and updated based on a predetermined trigger, such as when the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is greatly different based on the command received from Good. In this case, a predetermined transition image may be displayed as the transition period while the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed. Also, the image data corresponding to the transition image is stored in the resident video RAM 235 when the power is turned on, and is not updated even when other resident images are updated, and is continuously held in the resident video RAM 235. It may be left. In addition, while displaying the transition image, the MPU 231 directly accesses the character ROM 234 to read out newly resident image data, and the read image data is stored in the resident video RAM 235 via the buffer RAM 237a. You may make it transfer during unused (namely, during the period when the image data corresponding to a transfer image is not read). Alternatively, while displaying the transition image, the MPU 231 transmits a transfer instruction (transfer data information) of image data to be newly resident to the image controller 237, and the image controller 237 transmits the transfer command (transfer). The image data to be resident is read from the character ROM 234 according to the data information) and transferred via the buffer RAM 237a while the resident video RAM 235 is not used (that is, during the period when the image data corresponding to the transition image is not read). You may make it do.

  When the resident video RAM 235 is updated, the image data corresponding to the transfer image is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in advance, and the transfer image is stored in the normal video RAM 236 using the image data. You may make it display on the 3 symbol display apparatus 81. FIG. While the transition image is displayed, the MPU 231 directly accesses the character ROM 234 to read out the image data to be newly resident, and transfer the read out image data through the buffer RAM 237a. Also good. Alternatively, the image controller 237 that has received an instruction to transfer image data to be resident from the MPU 231 accesses the character ROM 234 to read out the image data to be newly resident, and transfers the read image data through the buffer RAM 237a. You may do it. By updating the contents of the resident video RAM 235 while displaying the transition image, the resident video RAM 235 can be updated without making the player feel uncomfortable.

  In the above embodiment, after all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is resident, a RAM determination value for determining whether or not the data in the resident video RAM 235 is normal when the power failure is resolved is stored. Before starting to transfer main image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 in the main display process or the main process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 after turning on, the RAM judgment value is checked, If the RAM determination value is a normal value, it means that the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is being stored normally. Therefore, the transfer of the image data to the resident video RAM 235 is not executed. You may comprise. In this case, the transfer of image data to the resident video RAM 235 may be disabled by turning off the simple image display flag. Accordingly, even when a system reset is input to the display control device 114 due to the occurrence of an instantaneous power failure and the execution of the display main process or the main process is started by the MPU 231, the data in the resident video RAM 235 is normally stored. If it is, image data can be prevented from being unnecessarily transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, and the time required for power recovery can be shortened. In particular, since the character ROM 234 is constituted by the character ROM 234a having a low reading speed, it takes a long time to transfer image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. On the other hand, if the RAM determination value is stored in the resident video RAM 235 as in this modification, and the data in the resident video RAM 235 remains normal due to a momentary power interruption or the like, it is necessary to transfer the image data. Since the time can be shortened, a normal effect image can be immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, the player can start the game immediately. The RAM determination value may be a checksum value of image data stored in the resident video RAM 235, for example. Further, instead of the RAM determination value, the validity of the data may be determined based on whether or not the keyword written in a predetermined area of the resident video RAM 235 is correctly stored.

  Although the case where the buffer RAM 237a is provided in the image controller 237 has been described in the above embodiment, the present invention is not limited to this, and the buffer RAM 237a may be provided outside the image controller 237. For example, the buffer RAM may be configured alone and connected directly to the internal bus (bus line 240). When the character ROM 234 is connected to the internal bus (bus line 240) or the image controller 237 via the bridge circuit, a buffer RAM may be provided in the bridge circuit. Further, the resident video RAM 235 may be directly connected to the bridge circuit having the buffer RAM. In this case, since the image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 connected to the bridge circuit to the resident video RAM 235 via the buffer RAM provided in the bridge circuit, an internal bus (bus line 240) in which data signals are frequently exchanged. The transfer can be performed efficiently without being affected by the above.

  In the above-described embodiment, the case where the storage capacity of the buffer RAM 237a is one block of the NAND flash memory 234a has been described. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and may be set as appropriate. For example, during the period (blank period) of scanning the blank area that is the scanning area other than the display area in which the actual image is displayed in the scanning period of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. The storage capacity of the buffer RAM 237a may be a data capacity that can complete the transfer of image data from the RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236. As a result, the transfer from the buffer RAM 237a to the image data to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 can be reliably performed by using the unused periods of the video RAMs 235 and 236 generated during the blank period. .

  In the above embodiment, the case where one buffer RAM 237a is provided has been described. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and two or more buffer RAMs may be provided. In this case, while the image data read from the character ROM 234 is stored in one buffer RAM, the image data stored in another buffer RAM is transferred to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236. It may be configured. In addition, while the area is divided into two or more in one buffer RAM and the image data read from the character ROM 234 is stored in one area, another area in which the image data is stored is stored. The image data may be transferred from the area to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236. In any case, the writing of the image data read from the character ROM 234 to the buffer RAM and the transfer of the image data written to the buffer RAM to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 are performed in parallel. Processing time can be shortened.

  In the above embodiment, the case where the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the main image area 235a at power-on of the resident video RAM 235 after power-on has been described. The corresponding image data may be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 after the power is turned on. Thus, the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on stored in the normal video RAM 236 is used to transfer the image data to be resident from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 while displaying the main image at power-on. can do. During this time, since the image data is not read from the resident video RAM 235, the image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 without monitoring the usage state of the resident video RAM 235. The transfer can be completed quickly, and the processing can be simplified.

  Similarly, in the above embodiment, the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on variation image area of the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 after power-on are performed on the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variation image. Although the case of transferring to 235b has been described, the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image may be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 after the power is turned on. Thus, the character ROM 234 displays the power-on image on the third symbol display device 81 using the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variation image stored in the normal video RAM 236. Image data to be resident can be transferred to the resident video RAM 235. During this time, since the image data is not read from the resident video RAM 235, the image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 without monitoring the usage state of the resident video RAM 235. The transfer can be completed quickly, and the processing can be simplified.

  In the above embodiment, the case where image data corresponding to the main image at power-on is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the main image area 235a at power-on of the resident video RAM 235 via the buffer RAM 237a has been described. Since the image data is not read from the resident video RAM 235 while the image data corresponding to is transferred, the image data corresponding to the main image when the power is turned on is not transferred from the character ROM 234 via the buffer RAM 237a. May be directly transferred to the main image area 235a when the power is turned on. The image data corresponding to the main image at power-on is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 after power-on, and the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on stored in the normal video RAM 236 is used. When the image data to be resident is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, for example, by displaying the main image, the image data is not read from the resident video RAM 235. The image data to be resident may be directly transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 without going through the buffer RAM 237a. Thereby, the transfer of the image data can be completed more quickly without using the buffer RAM 237a.

  Similarly, in the above embodiment, the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variation image is transferred from the character ROM 234 via the buffer RAM 237a to the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on variation of the resident video RAM 235. Although the case where the image data is transferred to the image area 235b has been described, the image data is not read from the resident video RAM 235 while the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on and the fluctuation image at power-on is transferred. Image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variation image is directly transferred from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a and power-on variation image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235 without going through the buffer RAM 237a. Also good. The image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variation image is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 after the power is turned on, and the power-on main image and the power-on stored in the normal video RAM 236 are stored. The resident video RAM 235 is transferred while the image data to be resident is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 by, for example, displaying an image upon power-on on the third symbol display device 81 using the image data corresponding to the fluctuating image. If the image data is not read from the image data, the image data to be resident may be directly transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 without going through the buffer RAM 237a. Thereby, the transfer of the image data can be completed more quickly without using the buffer RAM 237a.

  In the above embodiment, when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, the back image change command and the frame button operation command are generated by the sound lamp control device 113, and the back image change command and the frame button are generated by the display control device 114. Although the case where the rear image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the super-reaching effect mode are changed based on the operation command has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, the voice lamp control device 113 grasps the gaming state of the gaming machine 10 based on the content of the command received from the main control device 110, and according to the gaming state, for example, in accordance with the change of the gaming state, A back image change command or a game state command may be generated. Thereby, in the display control apparatus 114, based on the back image change command or the gaming state command, it is possible to change the rendering mode of the back image or super reach according to the gaming state. Further, the display control device 114 may directly grasp the gaming state of the gaming machine 10 and change the rear image and the super-reach effect according to the gaming state. Then, image data corresponding to at least a part of the rear image corresponding to the rear image after the change or the super reach of the effect mode after the change is resident in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. From the resident range, the rear image can be immediately displayed using the image data resident in the rear image area 235c.

  Further, the display control device 114 may change the back image according to the specifications of the display data table, the transfer data table, the additional data table, and the composite data table. In this case, the image data corresponding to the rear image after the change is configured to be transferred in advance from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 according to the transfer data information described in the transfer data table, the composite data table, and the display data table. May be. Here, when transferring the image data of the back image according to the transfer data information described in the transfer data table, the composite data table, and the display data table, the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 storing the original back image is stored. The transfer data information in the transfer data table may be defined so that a new back image is stored in the sub area. What is the sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 in which the original back image is stored? The transfer data information of the transfer data table may be defined so that a new back image is stored in another area. In the latter case, when returning the back image to the original back image that was selected and displayed by the player, there is no need to transfer the image data corresponding to the original back image again. An increase in load can be suppressed.

  In the above embodiment, the output signal of the vibration sensor is input to the sound lamp control device 113, and when a vibration error is detected by the sound lamp control device 113, an error command is transmitted to the display control device 114. Although the case where the display control device 114 immediately displays a warning image on the third symbol display device 81 has been described, the present invention is not limited to this, and the output signal of the vibration sensor is input to the main control device 110 to The control device 110 may detect a vibration error and transmit an error command for notifying the error from the main control device 110 to either the sound lamp control device 113 or the display control device 114. When an error command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113, the sound lamp control device 113 receives the error command and further transmits an error command notifying the display control device 114 of the error. May be.

  On the other hand, the output signal of the vibration sensor may be input to the display control device 114, and the display control device 114 may detect the presence or absence of a vibration error. When a vibration error is detected, the error occurrence flag is turned on, and the error determination flag corresponding to the vibration error is turned on, so that the error occurrence flag is turned on in the display setting process (see FIG. 69). The warning image may be immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by executing the warning image setting process (see FIG. 70A) when the above-mentioned is determined. In this case, this eliminates the need to send and receive an error command from the sound lamp control device 113 to the display control device 114, so that a warning image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 more quickly.

  Moreover, although the said embodiment demonstrated the case where the vibration sensor was attached to the back surface of the game board 13, it replaced with a vibration sensor or the magnet sensor was attached to the back surface of the game board 13 with a vibration sensor. Also good. This magnet sensor is a sensor for detecting the magnetic field applied to the game board in order to prevent the flow of the sphere from being changed by a magnetic field such as a magnet and intentionally entering the entrance. The output signal of the magnet sensor may be input to any of the main control device 110, the sound lamp control device 113, and the display control device 114. When the output signal of the magnet sensor is input to the main controller 110, if the main controller 110 determines that a magnetic field has been applied to the game board 13 based on the output signal of the magnet sensor, the magnetic field error is indicated. The error command to be transmitted may be transmitted from the main control device 110 to the display control device 114 via the sound lamp control device 113 or directly. Further, when the output signal of the magnet sensor is input to the sound lamp control device 113, if it is determined that the magnetic lamp control device 113 has applied a magnetic field to the game board 13 based on the output signal of the magnet sensor, the magnetic field. An error command for reporting an error may be transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 to the display control device 114. In the error message image area 235f of the resident video RAM 235 of the display control device 113, image data corresponding to the error message image for informing the magnetic field error by displaying on the third symbol display device 81 is resident. The display control device 113 may display the warning image on the third symbol display device 81 when an error command for transmitting a magnetic field error is received from the main control device 110 or the sound lamp control device 113. Further, when the output signal of the magnet sensor is input to the display control device 110, if it is determined that the magnetic field is applied to the game board 13 by the display control device 114 based on the output signal of the magnet sensor, the display control device 113. May turn on the error occurrence flag and set the error type flag corresponding to the magnetic field error to on to display the warning image on the third symbol display device 81. Thus, when the display control device 114 receives the error command from the main control device 110 or the sound lamp control device 113 or grasps the occurrence of the magnetic field error based on the output signal from the magnet sensor, the display ROM 114 stores the character ROM 234. Even in the case of the NAND flash memory 234a, the error message image that notifies the magnetic field error without delay using the error message image resident in the error message image area 235f of the resident video RAM 235 is shown in FIG. It can be displayed on the display device 81. Therefore, when a magnetic field is applied to the game board by the player, the magnetic field error is immediately notified by the display of the error message image by the 3rd symbol display device 81. Can be deterred.

  When the drawing contents necessary for changing a part or all of the color tone in one effect are defined by the additional data table or the display data table, the additional data table or the display data table uses 1 in the third symbol display device 81. Corresponding to the address that represents the time (20 milliseconds in this embodiment) for displaying the image for the frame as one unit, at that time, the type of sprite whose color tone is changed, and the sprite after the change in the sprite It may define color information for specifying a color tone. Then, the MPU 231 designates the type of sprite whose color tone is changed to the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the additional drawing contents defined in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 452d, and the color tone after the change in the sprite. If the color information to be specified is specified, the color information of the corresponding sprite type specified in the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the drawing content specified in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d is displayed. A drawing list may be created by replacing the color information defined by the additional drawing contents of the data table. Thus, the image controller 237 can draw an image while changing the color tone of the sprite based on the color information defined by the additional data table.

  In addition, when the display data table defines the drawing content necessary to change and display the image displayed in one effect, the display data table displays an image for one frame in the third symbol display device 81. Is associated with the address expressed as one unit, and at that time, the sprite type to be replaced, the sprite type to be newly displayed, and the new It may define drawing information of sprites to be displayed. The MPU 231 then replaces the sprite type to be replaced, the sprite type to be newly displayed, at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the additional drawing content defined in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 452d, When the drawing information of the sprite to be newly displayed is specified, various sprites specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the drawing contents specified in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d Among them, instead of the sprite to be replaced, the sprite type to be newly displayed and the drawing information of the sprite may be included in the drawing list. Thereby, the image controller 237 can draw an image including a sprite to be newly displayed.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the case has been described in which the transfer data information of the image data necessary for drawing the image according to the drawing content defined in the display data table is included in the display data table. Transfer data information (additional transfer data information) of image data required when an image is drawn according to the additional drawing content defined in the display data table may be included. In this case, the additional transfer data information is added in association with identification information (“addition effect 1”, “addition effect 2”, etc.) for identifying the additional displayable effect for each address. It may be defined together with the drawing content or separately from the additional drawing content. Then, when the MPU 231 determines an effect to be additionally displayed, the MPU 231 creates a drawing list including the additional drawing content and additional transfer data information associated with the identification information corresponding to the determined effect. You may comprise.

  As a result, the image controller 237 can transfer the image data of the sprite used for drawing according to the additional drawing content to the normal video RAM 236 in advance before the image data is used according to the drawing list. Therefore, even if the character ROM 234 is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, the effect to be additionally displayed can be easily and reliably displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, by using the additional transfer data information defined in the display data table, necessary image data can be transferred to the normal video RAM 236 while instructing to draw an image based on the additional drawing content. Many sprites can be drawn depending on the additional drawing content. Therefore, even if the character ROM 234 is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, various effects can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  In the above embodiment, in the display table corresponding to the variation pattern that allows the player to select a super reach, the drawing contents corresponding to all the super reach that can be selected by the player are defined in the display data table. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the drawing content corresponding to the selected super reach is added to the display data table. May be. Thereby, the drawing contents of the super reach selected by the player can be easily specified. Moreover, since it is not necessary to prescribe the drawing contents corresponding to all the super reach in the display data table, it is possible to suppress an increase in the data size of the display data table.

  In the above embodiment, the case where the display data table includes the drawing content and the transfer data information has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the display data table defines the drawing content and the transfer data information. The additional drawing contents of the effects to be additionally displayed may be defined in the additional data table. In this case, the work RAM 233 may be provided with an additional data table buffer, and when an effect to be additionally displayed is determined, an additional data table corresponding to the effect may be set in the additional data table buffer. . Further, the additional data table may be defined to include not only the additional drawing content but also transfer data information (additional transfer data information) of image data necessary for image drawing performed according to the additional drawing content. Good. As a result, it is possible to specify the rendering content of the effect to be added and displayed using the additional data table and the transfer data information of the image necessary for the rendering. Compared with the case of specifying the drawing contents and transfer data information, the processing load required for the specification can be reduced.

  In the above embodiment, the display control device 114 has been described with respect to the case where a display data table is prepared for each variation pattern indicated by the variation pattern command for display. A display data table is prepared for each element such as “change start-up”, “high-speed change”, “notice production”, “normal reach”, “super reach”, and according to the change pattern indicated in the display change pattern command. After identifying the elements necessary for the variation effect, the display data tables corresponding to the sheets necessary for the identified variation effect are combined into one, and a final periodic display data table corresponding to the variation pattern is generated. You may do it. In many cases, “change start-up”, “high-speed change”, “normal reach”, and the like are displayed in common to each change pattern. Therefore, by making the variation effect into elements as described above and preparing a display data table corresponding to each element, the data table can be efficiently provided.

  In the above embodiment, a case has been described in which the display data table and the transfer data table use the common pointer 233f to specify the drawing content and transfer data information from the address indicated by the pointer 233f. On the other hand, a pointer may be prepared.

  In the above-described embodiment, a case where the image controller 237 transmits a V interrupt signal to the MPU 231 at every display interval (one 20 milliseconds in the above-described embodiment) of the image for which the drawing process is finished will be described. However, the image controller 237 may transmit the V interrupt signal to the MPU 231 every time the third symbol display device 81 is driven to display an image for one frame. The third symbol display device 81 is driven so that images for one frame are always displayed at regular time intervals (20 millisecond intervals), so a V interrupt signal is displayed every time an image for one frame is displayed. By transmitting, it is possible to keep accurate even without measuring the time interval.

  In the above embodiment, the image controller 237 specifies the frame buffer in which the rendered image is to be developed based on the rendering target buffer information transmitted from the MPU 231, and the image information previously developed from the other frame buffer. Is read out and transmitted to the third symbol display device 81. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and the image buffer 237 should develop the drawn image every time the image controller 237 receives the drawing list. May be alternately selected, and the previously developed image information may be read from a frame buffer different from the selected frame buffer and transmitted to the third symbol display device 81. Each time the image controller 237 transmits image information for one frame to the third symbol display device 81, the image controller outputs the image information to the third symbol display device 81 and the frame buffer in which the drawn image is to be developed. The frame buffer to be replaced may be replaced.

  In the above-described embodiment, after the confirmed display data table corresponding to the confirmed display effect is set in the display data table buffer 233d, from the main control device 110 via the audio lamp control device 113 until the confirmed display effect ends. When neither the variation pattern command (display variation pattern command) nor the demonstration command (display demonstration command) is received, the display data table for demonstration corresponding to the demonstration effect is set in the display data table buffer 233d. As explained above, a fixed display data table corresponding to the fixed display effect may be set in the display data table buffer 233d again. In this case, the final display effect is displayed until either the variation pattern command (display variation pattern command) or the demo command (display demonstration command) is received from the main control device 110 via the audio lamp control device 113. Each time it ends, the fixed display data table corresponding to the fixed display effect may be reset in the display data table buffer 233d. Thereby, until the variation pattern command or the demo command is received from the main control device 110, it is possible to continuously display the final display effect on the third symbol display device 81.

  In the above-described embodiment, the case where the demonstration effect is to change and display the back image and stop and display the third symbol composed of the main symbols without the numerals “0” to “9”, is not necessarily described. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a third symbol composed of a main symbol with a number or a main symbol without a number may be stopped and displayed in a semi-transparent state. Alternatively, only the back image may be changed without displaying the third symbol. Moreover, you may display a character and back image completely different from the 3rd pattern and back image used by a variable display.

  In the above embodiment, after the power is turned on, the display control unit 114 first supplies image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on of the resident video RAM 235. When the image data is transferred to the time-varying image area 235b, the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 after the transfer is completed, and the remaining image data to be resident is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the display control unit 114 first transfers only image data corresponding to the main image at power-on after the power is turned on from the character ROM 234 to the main image area 235a at the time of power-on of the resident video RAM 235. After the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the image data to be resident including the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image may be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Thereby, since the main image at the time of power-on can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 sooner after the power is turned on, the pachinko machine 10 can be used in an operation check in a player, a hall-related person or a factory at the time of manufacture. It can be immediately confirmed that the operation is started without any problem by turning on the power.

  In this case, the MPU 231 may monitor completion of transfer of image data corresponding to the power-on variation image to the power-on variation image area 235b. As a result, if a display variation pattern command is received from the audio lamp controller 113 after the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image is stored in the power-on variation image area 235b, the display variation pattern command is received. Based on the above, a simple variation display can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 using the image data corresponding to the variation image at power-on stored in the variation image area 235b at power-on. The image data corresponding to the power-on variation image is preferably transferred to the power-on variation image area 235b immediately after the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Thereby, it is possible to perform the change display by the change image at the time of power-on earlier.

  In the above embodiment, the display data table and the transfer data table correspond to the time represented by 20 milliseconds as one unit, and the content of the image to be rendered (rendering content) at that time and the data to be transferred at that time. Although the case of defining the image data information (transfer data information) has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and any display content may be defined at predetermined time intervals. This predetermined time interval may be set in accordance with the frame rate of the third symbol display device 81. For example, when the frame rate of the third symbol display device 81 is 30 fps, that is, when the third symbol display device 81 displays an image of 30 frames per second, the third symbol display device 81 is 1/30. Since an image of one frame is displayed every second, the display data table may define display contents every 1/30 second interval.

  Further, in the display data table, the sprite type to be drawn specified at predetermined time intervals is not indicated, but the address of the character ROM 234 in which image data corresponding to the sprite type is stored. May be defined. In the display control device 114, image data corresponding to the sprite type to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is read from the character ROM 234. Therefore, the character ROM 234 stores image data of the sprite type in association with each sprite type. I manage the address. Therefore, in the display data table, if the address of the character ROM 234 storing the image data corresponding to the sprite type is defined as the display content defined at each predetermined time interval, the sprite is associated with each sprite type. Since it is not necessary to manage both the information for specifying the address and the address of the character ROM 234, the processing load can be reduced.

  In the above embodiment, the stored image data determination flag 233i is provided in the work RAM 233 of the display control device 114, and for each sprite, it is stored whether or not the corresponding image data is stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. Although the case has been described, instead of this, information indicating the sprite type stored in the image storage area 236a may be stored in the work RAM 233. In this case, when the MPU 231 instructs to transfer image data of a predetermined sprite type, the MPU 231 refers to the information indicating the sprite type stored in the image storage area 236a stored in the work RAM 233, and the predetermined image data Is already stored in the image storage area 236a, and if not, an instruction to transfer image data of the predetermined sprite type may be set. When the MPU 231 sets an instruction to transfer image data of a predetermined sprite type, the MPU 231 stores information indicating the sprite type for which the transfer instruction is set in the work RAM 233 and also stores image data of the sprite type. The information indicating the sprite type stored in the sub area of the image storage area 236a may be deleted.

  In the above embodiment, when image data of a predetermined sprite type is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, the image data of the sprite type is stored in the normal video RAM 236 based on the stored image data determination flag 233i. In the normal video RAM 236, if the image data of the predetermined sprite type is stored, the MPU 231 performs the process of not executing the transfer process. The processing may be performed by the image controller 237. In this case, a flag equivalent to the stored image data determination flag 233i is prepared in the work RAM provided in the image controller 237, and whether or not the corresponding image data is stored in the normal video RAM 236 for each sprite. It may be memorized. The work RAM provided in the image controller 237 may store the sprite type stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. In this case, if it is necessary to transfer image data of a predetermined sprite type from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, the MPU 231 sends the image controller 237 to the image controller 237 regardless of the storage state of the image data in the normal video RAM 236. On the other hand, the transfer data information of the image data may be transmitted.

  In the above embodiment, the case where only the image data corresponding to “Back A” among the plurality of back images is made resident in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. Image data corresponding to two or more back images may be resident in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. For example, the image data of the back image used in some super reach may be resident in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. In particular, the image data transfer process from the character ROM 737 to the normal video RAM 536 is executed by making the rear image of the super reach that is expected to appear frequently or high appear in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. Can be suppressed.

  In the above embodiment, the transfer data table or the display data table defines the image data transfer command in association with the address indicated by the pointer 233f, and the MPU 231 receives the transfer command at a predetermined time specified by the display pointer. In the above description, the image controller 237 is controlled so as to transfer the image data instructed by the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. However, the present invention is not limited to this. Information on the sprite type required in the table is described. Based on the information described at the top of the display data table, the MPU 231 transfers the required image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. Controller 237 may be controlled. Alternatively, based on the command received from the sound lamp control device 113, the MPU 231 determines the sprite type to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in response to the command, and the image data of that image type is normally sent from the character ROM 234. The image controller 237 may be controlled to transfer to the video RAM 236 for use.

  In the above embodiment, a case has been described in which the color tone of a part of the image changes with time on the back C, which is the back image of the “island stage”, but even if the color tone of the entire image changes with time. Good. In addition, the back image is not limited to scrolling or changing in color as time passes. In addition, instead of such back image, an object (for example, a person) that appears over time is displayed. It may be something that moves or changes.

  In the above embodiment, the main controller 110 uses the information on the various counters (the first random number counter C1 and the first per type counter C2) acquired at the time of start winning to be notified to the sound lamp controller 113 as the number of reserved balls. Although the case where it is included in the command has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. Information on various counters (first random number counter C1 and first per type counter C2) acquired at the time of starting winning by another command is an audio lamp. You may notify to the control apparatus 113. FIG.

  In the above-described embodiment, when the variation effect is executed, the case where the high-speed variation is displayed in which all the symbols Z1 to Z3 are scrolled at such a high speed that the player cannot visually recognize is displayed. All the symbols Z1 to Z3 may be reduced and displayed so as not to be visually recognized, or all the symbols Z1 to Z3 may be displayed as snow noise-like images in which many white dots are randomly displayed.

  In the above embodiment, a case has been described in which one first winning port 64 on which a special symbol jackpot lottery starts when a ball enters the game board 13 is provided, but this is not necessarily the case. The game board 13 may be provided with a plurality of (for example, two) first entrances where the entrance is detected independently and the jackpot lottery is started. In this case, when there is a holding at each first entrance, the number of held balls command transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sound lamp control device 113 indicates which of the first entrances is holding. Information may be included. Moreover, even if the fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113 when the fluctuation starts is included, information indicating which fluctuation effect is held by which first entrance is included. Good. Thus, in the sound lamp control device 113, when a reserved ball number counter is prepared for each first entrance and a received ball number command is received, the first ball indicated by the held ball number command is displayed. When the number of held balls is set in the held ball number counter for the mouth and a variation pattern command is received, the first ball opening port can be obtained by decrementing the number of held balls counter for the first ball entry indicated by the variation pattern command by one. The number of held balls can be counted every time.

  In the above embodiment, each time the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is updated in the main controller 110 (that is, when it increases or decreases, respectively), Although the case of transmitting from the control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113 has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, only when the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d increases in the main control device 110, the hold number command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113. In addition, the voice lamp control device 113 is configured to decrease the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b by 1 when the variation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received. As a result, the number of times the main control device 110 transmits the hold number command to the sound lamp control device 113 and the number of times that the sound lamp control device 113 receives the hold number command can be reduced. The control burden on the sound lamp control device 113 can be reduced.

  In the above embodiment, the first winning opening 64 and the pass through the through gate 67 are configured to be held up to 4 times each, but the maximum number of balls to be held is not limited to 4 times. You may set to 3 times or less or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). In addition, the number of held balls for variable display based on winning in the first winning opening 64 is different from the number in the part of the third symbol display device 81 by the number of reserved balls or in four divided areas. It may be displayed in a mode (for example, color or lighting pattern), and a light emitting member such as a lamp is provided separately from the first symbol display device 37, and the number of reserved balls is notified by the light emitting member. It may be configured.

  In addition, as shown in the above embodiment, the variable display, which is a kind of dynamic display, is not limited to the one that scrolls the symbol as identification information in the vertical direction on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. It may be performed by moving and displaying a symbol along a predetermined route such as a direction or an L shape. In addition, the dynamic display of the identification information is not limited to the display of variation of the symbol. For example, one or a plurality of characters may be displayed in various manners together with the symbol or displayed in a variety of manners separately from the symbol. The effect display etc. which are displayed are also included. In this case, one or more characters are used as the third symbol.

<Third Embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the third embodiment, display control between the rotary operation unit 600 and the third symbol display device 81 described in the first embodiment will be described.

  FIG. 98A is a schematic diagram showing a display mode when a main symbol is displayed on the spherical liquid crystal device 670 of the rotational operation unit 600. The spherical liquid crystal device 670 forms a display region by arranging a plurality of pixels each having a 1 mm square. The display area Pb of the spherical liquid crystal device 670 shown in FIG. 98 (a) and the display area Pa shown in the third symbol display device 81 are display areas having the same size.

  FIG. 98B is an enlarged view of the display area Pa and the display area Pb. In the display area Pa, 1.5 mm square pixels (pixels) are configured in 2 columns × 2 columns, and are configured with a total of four pixels. The display area Pb is composed of 3 mm × 3 columns of 1 mm square pixels, and is composed of a total of nine pixels. Thus, the third symbol display device 81 is composed of pixels 1.5 times larger than the spherical liquid crystal device 670.

  The spherical liquid crystal device 670 has a display area arranged so as to overlap the front side of the display area of the third symbol display device 81, and is configured to be able to display display effects related to each other.

  Next, an example of a display mode displayed in association with the third symbol display device 81 and the spherical liquid crystal device 670 will be described with reference to FIGS. 98 to 102. FIG. 98 (a) is a diagram showing a state in which the third symbol is displayed only in the spherical liquid crystal and scrolled while being enlarged from the upper right direction to the lower right direction. When the main symbol is displayed up to the end of the display area of the spherical liquid crystal device 670, as shown in FIG. 99 (a), the third symbol moves to the boundary portion of the third symbol display device 81 with the spherical liquid crystal device 670. Displayed. In this case, the third symbol display device 81 is set and displayed with the same display data as the main symbol display data displayed immediately before on the spherical liquid crystal device 670.

  With this configuration, the third symbol display device 81 has a pixel size of 1.5 times that of the spherical liquid crystal device 670, and thus the third symbol size is 1.5 times as large. Is displayed. Thereby, it is possible to show the player that the spherical liquid crystal device 670 is gradually enlarged and scroll-displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Thereby, the process which expands and sets a main symbol can be reduced, and the control load of the display control apparatus 114 can be reduced.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 99 (b), the third symbol is scroll-displayed while being enlarged by 1.5 times. Further, even when scroll display is performed in the display area of the spherical liquid crystal device 670, the display is variably displayed by being enlarged by 1.5 times. With this configuration, even if the spherical liquid crystal device 670 displays on the third symbol display device 81 without changing the enlargement setting, there is no change in the enlargement display rate by the pixels, and the player feels uncomfortable. Defects can be suppressed.

  FIGS. 100A to 100B are views showing an enlarged scroll display while rotating within the display area of the spherical liquid crystal device 670. FIG. In this case as well, every time it is moved and displayed, it is enlarged by 1.5 times. 101 (a) to 101 (b) and FIG. 102 (a) are states in which the display is rotated from the right end of the display area of the third symbol display device 81 to the left after being rotated and displayed on the spherical liquid crystal device 670. FIG. Again, each time it is moved and displayed, it is enlarged and displayed by a factor of 1.5. As shown in FIG. 102 (b), a table showing the sizes of symbols that are actually displayed at the set magnification ratios of the third symbol display device 81 (main liquid crystal) and the spherical liquid crystal device 670 (sub liquid crystal). It is.

  In the sub liquid crystal, the actual size is 1.5 times different between the symbol set with the enlargement factor of c1 and the symbol set with the enlargement factor of c1 in the main liquid crystal.

  In the present embodiment, when scroll display is performed in the same display device, the display is gradually enlarged at the same enlargement rate. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the enlargement rate is increased at a constant rate to increase the main display. The boundary between the liquid crystal and the sub liquid crystal may be set to be close to 1.5 times (ratio of pixel size). With this configuration, the display of switching between the main liquid crystal and the sub liquid crystal can be displayed while suppressing a sense of incongruity. Further, the scroll display may be performed while reducing the main liquid crystal to the sub liquid crystal. In this case, similarly to the enlarged display, the reduction ratio may be gradually changed at the same reduction ratio or at the same ratio so as to match the pixel reduction ratio at the switching timing. In the present embodiment, the main symbol has been described as an example. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and other symbols, characters, characters, and the like may be used.

  With reference to FIG. 103, the electrical configuration of the display control apparatus 114 in the third embodiment will be described. FIG. 103 is a block diagram of the display control device 114 in the third embodiment.

  In the third embodiment, a sub display data table buffer 233m, a sub pointer 233n, and a sub time counter 233i are added to the second embodiment. Here, the sub liquid crystal is configured similarly to the main liquid crystal 81 so that different display modes can be displayed simultaneously with the main liquid crystal. Therefore, the detailed description thereof is the same as the description already given in the second embodiment, and will be omitted.

  Next, control processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114 in the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In the third embodiment, only the command determination process is changed, and the other processes are the same as those in the second embodiment, and thus detailed description thereof is omitted.

  The command determination process (not shown) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 in the third embodiment is a variation pattern command process (FIG. 87, FIG. 87) in the command determination process (FIG. 86, S2302) in the second embodiment. The difference is that S2302 is changed to the fluctuation pattern command process 2 (FIG. 104, S2450). Since other configurations are the same, a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 104, the variation pattern command process 2 (S2450) in the third embodiment is a process of S2519 to S2523 in contrast to the variation pattern command process (FIGS. 87A and S2405) in the second embodiment. Has been added.

  If it is determined in step S2513 that the button effect is not a button effect (S2513: No), it is determined whether the display effect using the sub liquid crystal (spherical liquid crystal device 670) is a variation pattern. If the variation pattern does not use the sub liquid crystal, the process proceeds to S2515.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S2519 that there is an effect using the sub liquid crystal (S2519: Yes), a display data table for the sub liquid crystal is set (S2520). The sub data table discrimination flag corresponding to the set display data table for the sub liquid crystal is set to ON (S2521). Based on the data table, time data is set in the sub time counter (S2522). The sub-pointer is initialized and set (S2523), and the process proceeds to S2515.

  With this configuration, the display mode can be displayed independently for the sub liquid crystal and the main liquid crystal. Therefore, various display effects can be provided to the player.

<Fourth embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the fourth embodiment, the configuration of the distribution unit 1064, the processing order of the balls won in the first winning port 64 and the second winning port 640, and the display control of the third symbol display device 81 are the second embodiment described above. The configuration is different, and other configurations are the same as those of the second embodiment. The same parts are denoted by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof is omitted.

  In addition, if the difference with 2nd Embodiment in the display control of this 4th Embodiment is explained in full detail, the point which added the additional prize effect and the special continuation effect mentioned later in the eight hold effects, and the composite display effect The point that the effect using the frame button 22 is added is different from the point that the time effect period described later in the time effect can be changed.

  FIG. 105 is a front view of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 105, below the variable display device unit 80 provided on the front surface of the game board 13, a distribution unit 1064 into which a ball can enter is disposed. The balls that have entered the distribution unit 1064 are configured to be alternately distributed to a first winning port 964a or a left second winning port 964b, which will be described later.

  In the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment, a right second winning opening 640 (so-called second winning opening) is used as a winning opening (so-called second winning opening) where a special symbol 2 lottery is executed by winning a prize. A second winning port provided on the lower right side of the game board 13 and a second left winning port 964b (a second winning port provided in the distribution unit 1064) are provided.

  Here, the configuration of the distribution unit 1064 will be described with reference to FIG. FIGS. 106A and 106B are diagrams showing the internal structure of the distribution unit 1064. Actually, a cover body made of a transparent resin is arranged on the front side, and the cover body is colored with a spiral pattern so that the inside of the cover body is difficult to see. In addition, a decoration LED (illustrated) is attached to the distribution unit 1064, which emits light when the pachinko machine 10 is playing a big hit game or a normal game, and makes the game board 13 gorgeous. The production for doing. The light emitted when performing such an effect is reflected on the surface of the cover body, so that while the pachinko machine 10 is playing a game, the inside of the sorting unit 1064 is difficult to see and the game is played. In the absence, the inside of the sorting unit 1064 is configured to be easily visible. With this configuration, it is possible to prevent an illegal act using the principle of the ball sorting mechanism and to easily perform a visual inspection of the inside of the sorting unit 1064 by a store clerk when no game is played. ing.

  At the upper part of the sorting unit 1064, there is provided a passage opening through which a game ball can enter, and a transmission type ball entrance sensor 1064a that can detect that the game ball has passed through the passage opening is disposed. . The balls that have passed through the passage opening are alternately distributed by the distribution member 900 to the first winning opening 964a and the left second winning opening 964b arranged below the distributing member 900.

  The balls distributed by the distribution member 900 roll on the first guide member 900z1 and the second guide member 900z2 installed on the distribution unit 1064, and are respectively guided to the winning ports. In this way, by providing each guiding member 900z1 and 900z2 between the distributing member 900 configured to be turnable to the left and right and the winning ports 964a and 964b, the distributing member 900 that is rotationally operated becomes each winning port. It is possible to prevent contact with 964a and 964b. Further, the distribution member 900 can be reduced in size.

  As the size of the distribution member 900, desirably, the storage portion 900a of the distribution member 900 is set to a size that does not allow two spheres to be stored (the length of the wall surface constituting the storage portion 900a is less than 5.5 mm). good. By comprising in this way, it can prevent that the some ball accommodated in the accommodating part 900a balances and obstructs rotation of the distribution member 900. FIG. In addition, in order to prevent the one receiving portion 900a from continuously receiving a plurality of game balls, a gentle slope portion that temporarily receives a ball that has entered the sorting unit 1064 and allows a gentle slope to flow down may be provided. By using such a configuration, a sphere that continuously enters the sorting unit 1064 (a sphere that is a daisy chain) flows down the gently inclined portion, thereby generating a gap between the spheres, It becomes possible to prevent the one receiving portion 900a from continuously receiving the balls.

  The distribution member 900 is attached to a base body provided on the back side of the distribution unit 1064 so as to be turnable to the left and right via a shaft support portion 900d, and an incoming game ball is accommodated in a storage portion 900a of the distribution member 900. Alternatively, it is configured to receive at 900c. The distribution member 900 is configured symmetrically about the shaft support portion 900d, and is fixed so that the boundary wall between the storage portion 900a and the storage portion 900c is vertical (directly above) due to the weight of the distribution member 900. Has been. When a game ball is received in the housing portion 900a, the sorting member 900 rotates counterclockwise as viewed from the front due to the weight of the game ball, and guides the game ball to the first winning port 964a.

  Limiting members 900y1 and 900y2 are erected in the distribution unit 1064, and the rotation range of the distribution member 900 can be rotated about 45 degrees in the left-right direction. In addition, a magnet 900b is provided at the boundary between the housing portion 900a and the housing portion 900b.

  A magnet (base-side magnet) 901 is arranged at a position on the center line of the passage opening on the base body provided on the back side of the sorting unit 1064. The magnet 900b and the base-side magnet 901 of the sorting member 900 are configured to have opposite polarities. Specifically, the base-side magnet 901 is composed of a rod-shaped magnet fixed to the base body, and is configured to generate a magnetic pole (S pole or N pole) at the tip. The base-side magnet 901 is arranged and fixed so that the tip end portion faces the sorting member 900 side.

  The magnet 900b is also composed of a rod-shaped magnet like the base-side magnet 901, and is fixed to the sorting member 900 so that the tip portion faces the base-side magnet 901 side. The base-side magnet 901 and the magnet 900b of the sorting member 900 are closest to each other at the position where the sorting member 900 rotates and the boundary wall between the housing portion 900a and the housing portion 900c is directly above (the tip portions face each other). Position. Here, since the magnets are arranged so that the polarities are the same, they repel each other and do not stop at the position where the boundary wall of the sorting member 900 faces directly above, and are rotated to the left or right. Will be maintained.

  As a result, when the magnet 900b provided on the boundary wall due to its own weight is positioned on the center line of the passage opening (position directly above), the sorting member 900 is repelled by the magnet 900b and the base-side magnet 901. By rotating to the left or right of the sorting member 900, either the storage portion 900a or the storage portion 900c faces the ball receiving side (the upper side of the gaming machine) that enters the sorting unit 1064. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the balls that have entered the ball from coming into contact with the boundary wall between the housing portion 900a and the housing portion 900c and causing the clogging of the balls.

  In addition, when the magnet 900b and the base-side magnet 901 are repelled, for example, the accommodating portion 900a receives the game ball and rotates about 45 degrees to the left to guide the game ball to the first winning port 964a, and then the sorting member It is possible to prevent 900 from rotating to the right (the housing portion 900a faces upward). Thereby, after guiding the game ball to the first winning opening 964a, the storage portion 900c is directed upward, and the next ball that has entered the distribution unit 1064 is received by the storage portion 900c, and the weight of the ball As a result, the sorting member 900 rotates about 90 degrees to the right, and guides the game ball to the second winning opening 964b. As described above, the distribution member 900 can alternately guide the balls entering the distribution unit 1064 to the first winning port 964a and the left second winning port 964b. Therefore, it is possible to distribute the game balls to the first winning port 964a and the left second winning port 964b evenly and enter the lottery game (which will be described later) resulting from the ball entering the first winning port 964a. The first lottery game) and the lottery game (second lottery game) resulting from the ball entering the second left winning port 964b can be efficiently executed.

  Next, the operation of the sorting member 900 when a ball enters the sorting unit 1064 will be described. FIG. 106A shows a state where the accommodating portion 900a of the distribution member 900 is positioned so as to face the passage opening of the distribution unit 1064 (above the gaming machine). In this state, the magnet 900b is located on the right side of the base-side magnet 901, and a position where the rotational force in the left direction due to the weight of the sorting member 900 and the repulsive force between the magnet 900b and the base-side magnet 901 are balanced. Is maintained. In this case, when the ball passes through the passage port, the ball is accommodated in the accommodation portion 900a, and the distribution member 900 is rotated counterclockwise by the weight of the game ball to roll on the guide portion 900z1 to the first winning opening 964a. It is induced. When a ball enters the first winning port 964a, a prize ball (for example, three) is paid out and the first lottery game is executed.

  After the balls are distributed to the first winning opening 964a by the distribution member 900, as shown in FIG. 106 (b), the distribution member 900 is maintained at a position where the housing portion 900c faces upward. Thereafter, when the ball passes through the passage opening, it is housed in the housing portion 900c, and the game ball is distributed to the second left winning opening 964b. When a ball enters the second left winning port 964b, a winning ball (for example, three) is paid out and the second lottery game is executed. Therefore, it can be alternately distributed to the first winning port 964a and the left second winning port 964b.

  Note that the configuration of the sorting member 900 is not limited to the above-described configuration, and for example, a rotating operation may be performed at regular intervals using an electric drive source such as a motor or a solenoid. When such a configuration is adopted, the position where the game ball can be guided to any one of the winning holes (for example, the first winning hole 964a) is set as the original position, and the original position when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on. It may be configured to return to the origin position when it is detected that the lottery game has not been performed for a long time. By doing in this way, it becomes possible to provide a fair game to a player.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the distribution destination of the distribution member 900 is the two directions of the first winning port 964a and the left second winning port 964b, but it may be configured to distribute in three directions or more. In such a case, a through gate 67 that causes the second symbol (ordinary symbol) lottery and a general winning port 63 that causes the payout of the prize ball may be provided at the distribution destination. By doing so, it becomes possible to consolidate the devices that cause the game (lottery and prize balls) of the pachinko machine 10 in one place, and a large area that can be used for decoration and production on the game board 13 is secured. It becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

  Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the number of winning balls when entering the first winning port 964a and the second left winning port 964b is the same, but they may be different. Further, although the distribution member 900 is configured to distribute the distribution destinations evenly, the distribution ratio may be changed.

  In addition, the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment can store a maximum of eight lottery games resulting from the entry in the order of entry (four first lottery games and four second lottery games). (Details will be described later). Therefore, as described above, two lottery games can be stored evenly by adopting a configuration in which balls that have entered the distribution unit 1064 alternately enter the first winning opening 964a and the left second winning opening 964b. Thus, it is possible to prevent a situation in which only one of the lottery games is stored and the maximum number of lottery games (8) is not reached.

  In addition, the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment is configured to perform the second lottery game even when the ball enters the right second winning opening 640. In other words, during a normal game, a left-handed game (a game in which a ball is launched aiming at the left side of the game area provided on the game board 13) is performed, and the distribution unit 1064 is aimed at. 2. Right-handed game (game that launches a ball aiming at the right side of the game area provided in the game board 13) during probability change or short time when the electric player 640a is easily opened by receiving the two lottery games alternately. And aiming at the right second winning opening 640, it is possible to play the game so that the second lottery game is always provided.

  Next, effect control displayed on the third symbol display device 81 of the pachinko machine 10 in the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 107 is a time chart for explaining the effect control related to the reserved symbol effect described later. As shown in FIG. 107, the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment is controlled to perform a plurality of reserved symbol effects based on the increase or decrease of the number of reserved balls.

  Specifically, it is configured to perform a holding symbol effect different from normal (holding effect performed when the number of reserved balls is equal to or less than a predetermined number) on condition that the number of reserved balls is equal to or greater than a predetermined number. The details of the reserved symbol effect will be described later. In this way, when the reserved ball number becomes a predetermined number or more, a special effect is performed so that the player can see the special effect. The game is continuously performed so that the number of reserved balls is equal to or more than a predetermined number or an upper limit value.

  First, the increase / decrease in the number of reserved balls shown in FIG. 107 will be described. The number of reserved balls is a number that stores information related to a lottery game that is performed due to a ball entering the first winning port 964a or the second left winning port 964b. In this embodiment, the number of held balls is The maximum is set to 8 (4 first lottery games, 4 second lottery games). Although the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment has two second winning holes as described above, in this description, a left-handed game that is likely to have eight reserved balls. This will be described using the state. Therefore, the description will be made using the left second winning port 964b of the two second winning ports.

  The pachinko machine 10 is provided with a fluctuating state (fluctuating time) for a predetermined time when displaying the lottery game result (big hit or miss) in an identifiable manner. By using this variable time to provide the player with an effect suggesting the result of the lottery game (for example, dynamic display (variable display) displayed on the third symbol display device 81), the interest of the game is enhanced. . In addition, a plurality of the above-mentioned fluctuation times are set according to the result of the lottery game, for example, 5 seconds when the lottery game result is out, 30 seconds when the reach is out, and 60 seconds when the big hit. ing. This is to ask the player whether or not the result of the lottery game currently being performed is a big hit, and the longer the variation time, the longer the performance can be performed.

  The pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is designed so that a plurality of the above-mentioned lottery games cannot be performed at the same time. During one lottery game, the first winning port 964a and the left second winning port 964b are arranged. When a ball enters, it has a function (holding function) for storing a lottery game resulting from the ball entry after the current lottery game is completed. The number storing the lottery games is the number of reserved balls.

  That is, the increase or decrease in the number of held balls shown in FIG. 107 is the number of held balls when a ball enters the first winning port 964a, the left second winning port 965b, or the right second winning port 640 during the lottery game. Increases, the lottery game ends, and a new lottery game starts, the number of reserved balls decreases. The maximum number of reserved balls is eight. This number of reserved balls is displayed in the secondary display area Ds of the third symbol display device 81 using the reserved symbols (see FIG. 108 (b)), and the lottery results of the lottery games that are stored individually (whether or not determination result) ) A reserved symbol effect (details will be described later) is performed to change the display mode of the reserved symbol based on the information related to.

  A period A shown in FIG. 107 represents a period until the number of reserved balls reaches eight. During this period, a normal holding effect is performed as an effect of the holding symbol. The normal holding effect is the same as the content described in the second embodiment described above, and a description thereof will be omitted.

  Next, when the number of reserved balls reaches eight, eight reserved effects are performed (start of period B). The eight reserved effects are reserved symbol effects performed using the eight reserved symbols displayed in the sub display area Ds (see FIG. 110). Period B is a period from the start of the eight rendition effects to the end of the eight rendition effects (at the time of the last lottery game to be performed among the reserved balls used for the eight rendition effects). is there. That is, the period B is continued until the eighth lottery game is started after the number of reserved balls reaches eight.

  When the number of held balls increases in period B (a new lottery game is stored), an additional prize effect is performed. The additional winning effect is a reserved symbol effect that is performed when a lottery game is newly memorized (additional winning) when a reserved symbol effect using a plurality of reserved symbols such as eight reserved effects is performed. Unlike the normal holding effect, this is an effect of changing the holding symbol so that the holding symbol effect using a plurality of holding symbols is continuously performed (see FIG. 111 (b)). By performing this additional winning effect, the player continues to play the game even while the eight reserved effects are being performed in order to experience a different reserved symbol effect than usual. Therefore, the player's willingness to play a game can be increased, and there is an effect that the trouble that the player gets bored of the game at an early stage can be reduced.

  Next, when the number of reserved balls is five or more at the time when the period B ends, a special continuous effect is performed using all the reserved symbols displayed at that time (start of the period C). That is, the special continuation effect is a reserved symbol effect performed only when at least five lottery games are newly stored during the period B. Since this special continuation effect is more difficult to start than the above-described eight hold effects, the reserved symbol effect provided is also a valuable effect for the player. A valuable performance is, for example, a premium effect that is displayed only in a small portion when the lottery game result is a big win, or points that the player has accumulated regardless of the lottery game result. It is possible to display information that can be given in large quantities. Period C is a period from the start of the special continuation effect to the end of the special continuation effect (at the time of the last lottery game to be performed among the reserved balls used for the special continuation effect). In addition, during the period C, an additional prize effect is being executed.

  When the period C during which the special continuation effect is performed ends, the period A is shifted again. As described above, the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment has a plurality of reserved symbols displayed in the sub display area Ds of the third symbol display device 81 on the condition that the number of reserved balls is a predetermined number (eight). A multiple reserved symbol effect (8 reserved effects) is performed. Then, when the number of reserved symbols displayed in the sub display area Ds is equal to or greater than a predetermined number (5) at the time when the multiple reserved symbol effect ends, the plurality of reserved symbols displayed at that time are displayed. A second multiple reserved symbol effect (special continuation effect) is performed using the symbol. Further, an additional prize effect different from the normal holding effect is performed for the holding symbol newly generated while the plurality of holding symbols effect using the plurality of holding symbols is being performed.

  By configuring in this way, it is possible to urge the player to always display a predetermined number or more of the reserved symbols.

  Next, the display content of the third symbol display device 81 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 108 (a) is a diagram schematically showing area segment setting and effective line setting of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. FIG. In the present embodiment, a reserved symbol corresponding to the winning to the first winning opening 964 (Special Fig. 1 reserved symbol) and a reserved symbol corresponding to the winning to the second left winning port 964b (Special Fig. 2 reserved symbol). They are arranged in the winning display order from the left side of the screen and displayed in the sub display area Ds (maximum 8). Due to the structure of the distribution unit 1064 described above, the special figure 1 reserved symbol and the special figure 2 reserved symbol are alternately displayed in the left-handed state.

  In the present embodiment, the special figure 1 reserved symbol and the special figure 2 reserved symbol are displayed in an indistinguishable display mode, but may be displayed in an identifiable manner. Moreover, you may display separately the holding | maintenance symbol displayed corresponding to the special symbol in the variable display on the main display area | region Dm in the predetermined location of the sub display area | region Ds. By configuring in this way, the player can grasp which of the reserved symbols of the special figure 1 reserved symbol and the special figure 2 reserved symbol is being used (whether it is performed). Thus, it becomes possible to increase interest in the progress of the game. Since other parts have the same configuration as that of the second embodiment described above, description thereof is omitted.

  FIG. 108B illustrates an actual display screen. In FIG. 108 (b), seven reserved symbols are displayed in the sub display area Ds. In the present embodiment, as described above, the reserved memory shown in FIG. 1 and the reserved memory shown in FIG. 2 are alternately stored, but cannot be identified by displaying the reserved symbols. By displaying the reserved symbols in this way, it becomes difficult for the player to grasp whether the lottery game variably displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is based on the special figure 1 or the special figure 2. The game can be performed while expecting what kind of privilege will be provided when the jackpot is won.

  In addition, you may display the aspect of the hold | payment symbol displayed so that identification with the hold memory of special figure 1 and the hold memory of special figure 2 is possible. Further, whether the lottery game that is currently fluctuating is based on the special figure 1 or the special figure 2 may be displayed in an identifiable manner. By configuring in this way, it is possible to cause the player to grasp a privilege in the case of a big hit in advance, and to give a sense of expectation to the changing effect.

  FIG. 109 is a diagram exemplifying a display screen showing a normal hold effect during period A in FIG. In FIG. 109 (a), the fourth reserved symbol from the left is variably displayed as a “push” symbol (notification pending symbol), and when the player presses (operates) the frame button 22, FIG. It is variably displayed in the “Δ” symbol shown in (b). The detailed contents are the same as those in the second embodiment described above, and will be omitted. In the present embodiment, the variable display content (“Δ” symbol) of the holding symbol is determined based on the result of the lottery game corresponding to the holding symbol that is variably displayed. However, the display is variably displayed. You may determine based on the result of the lottery game corresponding to the holding | maintenance symbol currently displayed before and behind a holding | maintenance symbol. When determining in this way, the display content after the variable display may be a display content that causes the player to expect that there is a chance in the vicinity of the suspending display that is variably displayed, such as an “arrow” symbol.

  Further, it may be configured such that the suspended symbol once variably displayed is variably displayed again after a time. In this way, even if the content of the variable display is content that cannot be expected, there is a possibility that it will be changed to content that can be displayed again and can be expected, so the lottery game corresponding to the reserved symbol Until the game is executed, it is possible to give the player expectations.

  FIG. 110 is a diagram exemplifying a display screen showing eight pending effects during period B in FIG. FIG. 110 (a) shows a state in which the eight reserved symbols displayed in the sub-display area Ds of the third symbol display device 81 are changed to notification pending symbols, and the player presses the frame button 22 ( Operation), the notification suspension symbols displayed on the left side are changed in order (see FIG. 110B). The detailed contents are the same as those in the second embodiment described above, and will be omitted. In this embodiment, every time the frame button 22 is pressed, the notification hold symbols are changed in order from the left. However, when the frame button is pressed once, a plurality of notification hold symbols are changed or variably displayed. The order may be set at random. By doing in this way, it becomes possible to give a game property to the player's operation (depressing the frame button 22) for changing the notification suspension symbol.

  FIG. 111 is a diagram exemplifying a display screen showing eight reserved effects and additional effects during period B in FIG. 107. FIG. 111 (a) shows a state after the notification hold symbols displayed in the sub display area Ds of the third symbol display device 81 are all changed by operating the frame button 22. In the present embodiment, when notification is made to confirm that there is a holding memory in which the determination result is a big hit in the eight holding memories, the eight jacking symbols are used to say “hit !!!!!”. It is set to be displayed, and the display of “big hit !!!!?” Shown in this figure informs that there is a possibility that there is a hold memory in which the determination result is a big hit in the eight hold memories. To do.

  FIG. 111 (b) is a diagram illustrating a display screen showing a state in which three reserved memories have been digested and two new reserved memories have been added from the state of FIG. 111 (a). As shown in the figure, in FIG. 111 (a), “Holder !!!!!” was displayed using 8 reserved symbols. However, because three reserved memories were digested, it corresponds to the digested reserved memory. The reserved symbol ("big hit") displayed on the screen disappears from the display screen. In addition, the hold symbols displayed corresponding to the two newly generated hold memories during this period are displayed as two notification hold symbols in the secondary display area Ds.

  In this way, with respect to a new reserved memory that occurs while the reserved symbol effect by the eight-hold effect is performed, it is an additional prize that makes it appear that the eight-hold effect is continued instead of the normal reserved symbol effect. Production will be performed. Specifically, a notification hold symbol (“push” symbol) is displayed as a hold symbol corresponding to the new hold memory (see FIG. 111B). In the same manner as the above-described eight hold effects, the notification hold symbol changes the display mode of the hold symbol by the operation of the frame button 22. Specifically, for example, if there is a hold memory in which the determination result is a big hit in any of the two newly stored hold memories, the notification hold symbol corresponding to the hold storage is displayed on the frame button 22. If it is changed by the operation, the last “?” In the character string of “big hit !!!!?” (See FIG. 111 (a)) displayed in the eight hold effect is changed to “!”, And the notification hold symbol is displayed. Change itself to "!". In addition, when both of the two newly stored on hold are determined to be wrong or wrong, the on-hold notification design is not changed without changing the character string of “big hit! Is changed to “?”. By doing in this way, it becomes possible to associate the holding symbol corresponding to the new holding memory generated during the 8-holding production with the 8-holding production, and the player can also perform while the 8-hold production is being performed. It is possible to continue playing the game ball and play the game so as to generate a more reserved ball.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the notification mode (“?” Or “!”) Of the rightmost character (the character corresponding to the reserved symbol that is digested last) among the character strings displayed by the eight reserved effects. In the additional winning effect, an effect of changing one character using a reserved symbol corresponding to one reserved memory is performed. When adopting a notification mode that suggests the result of determination of the success / failure by using a plurality of characters, a plurality of characters may be changed using a holding symbol corresponding to one holding memory in the additional winning effect. A plurality of characters may be changed using a reserved symbol corresponding to the reserved memory.

  In the present embodiment, the display mode of the reserved symbol is displayed as an 8-character string by the eight-hold effect, that is, the variable display is changed to the number of characters corresponding to the number of the reserved symbols. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a plurality of reserved symbols may be combined and displayed in a variable manner so as to form one notification mode by using eight reserved effects.

  Moreover, in the eight reservations effect of this embodiment, although the alerting mode which suggests a determination result is displayed with the character corresponding to the reservation symbol digested lastly among eight reservation symbols. All of the characters on the right side of the character string displayed by the rendition of eight reserved characters (characters corresponding to the reserved symbols digested in the latter half of the eight reserved symbols), not the last reserved symbol to be digested Or you may display an alerting | reporting aspect using either.

  FIG. 112 is a diagram illustrating a display screen showing a special continuation effect in period C of FIG. 107. FIG. 112 (a) shows a state in which the reserved symbol corresponding to the last reserved memory among the eight reserved memories used for the eight reserved effects is digested, that is, the third symbol display device 81. The five “?” Displayed in the sub display area Ds are displayed by the above-described additional winning effect. In this state, if there are five or more reserved memories, “Please press!” Is displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device. When the player presses (operates) the frame button 22, the mode of the reserved symbol displayed as “???” is changed again. Specifically, for example, in a case where there is a determination result in which the determination result is a big hit in any one of the hold memories corresponding to the hold symbols displayed as “???” in FIG. As shown in FIG. 112 (b), it is changed to five characters “congratulations”. As described above, when the number of reserved memories (the number of displayed reserved symbols) at the time when the display of the reserved symbols by the eight-hold effect is finished is more than a predetermined number (in this embodiment, five), it is more special. Since the reserved symbol effect is performed, it is possible to prompt the player to continuously fire the game ball.

  In the present embodiment, since the special continuation effect is performed using a plurality of reserved symbols displayed as “?” By the additional winning effect, for example, a character indicating that the jackpot is confirmed by the additional winning effect. It is preferable to set a small ratio to be displayed and to set a large ratio to display a character indicating that the jackpot is confirmed by the special continuation effect. By doing in this way, in the special continuation effect performed after the additional winning effect, it is displayed that the determination result that is a big hit is included in the determination result that is stored on hold (see FIG. 112 (b)). It is possible to increase the frequency that can be performed, and it is possible to increase the player's willingness to see the special continuation effect.

  In addition, in the special continuation effect, in addition to the character string (message) based on the determination result of the determination result of the success / failure stored on hold, information for acquiring a large amount of points accumulated by the player is displayed, You may perform the production | presentation which gives the privilege which displays the game state (probability change or normal) of. By doing so, it is possible to prompt the player to continuously fire the game ball in order to receive benefits other than the determination result.

  It should be noted that at the timing of determining whether or not to perform the special continuation effect (the boundary between the period B and the period C in FIG. 107), the number of reserved memories (5 in this embodiment) that is a condition for performing the special continuation effect is greater than or equal to If it is stored on hold, the emphasis character (“!”, “Celebration”, etc.) that emphasizes the character string (“congratulations”) that has been changed by the special continuation effect for the reserved symbol corresponding to the surplus storage memory. It is good to change to. By doing in this way, even if the number of extra reserved storage is indefinite, it is possible to produce an effect that does not give a sense of incongruity without changing the display content displayed by the special continuation effect.

  In addition, when performing the special continuation effect, the holding symbol displayed as “???” may be changed to the notification holding symbol once. In this way, it can be emphasized that the special continuation effect is a reserved symbol effect using a plurality of reserved symbols.

  In the present embodiment, the above-described additional prize-winning effect is performed even while the special continuation effect is being performed.

  As described above, in this embodiment, the normal hold symbol is changed to the notification hold symbol that prompts the player to operate the frame button 22, and then the notification hold symbol is changed based on the operation of the frame button 22. Based on the determination result included in the eight hold memories, a hold symbol (result display hold symbol) having one meaning is displayed by a plurality of hold symbols, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, Further, characters (“Large”, “Win”, “Ri”, etc.) displayed by changing the notification hold symbol may be displayed in another part of the third symbol display device 81. By configuring in this way, the character string displayed as a result of the eight reserved effects can be maintained even if the reserved symbols used for the eight reserved effects are digested as the game progresses. In this case, it is preferable that the character string displayed in another place be erased at the timing when all the reserved symbols used for the eight reserved effects are digested.

  In addition, when the effect of temporarily stopping during the fluctuation time and then restarting (so-called pseudo-continuous effect or development effect to super reach) is performed as the dynamic display of the third pattern, the frame button 22 is already displayed. It is preferable to change the hold symbol that is the result display hold symbol to the notification hold symbol by the operation, and perform the eight hold effects again. By configuring in this way, it is possible to perform a reserved symbol effect corresponding to the dynamic display effect of the third symbol that makes one lottery game appear in a plurality of lottery games.

  Thus, in the case of performing an effect of redoing the reserved symbol effect in conjunction with the dynamic display of the third symbol, the display content of the first result display reserved symbol is used as a result of determination of whether or not to be included in the eight reserved memories. On the other hand, it is assumed that the expectation of jackpot is low, and the reserved symbol display corresponding to the result of the determination of the success / failure is performed in the retentive eight rendition effect, or the result display displayed in advance in the retentive eight rendition effect It is preferable to set the display content based on the hold symbol to a higher expectation than the display content based on the initial result display hold symbol. By doing in this way, it becomes possible to prevent the situation where it changes to the display content with a lower expectation level than the reserved symbol effect of this place as a result of re-doing the reserved symbol effect.

  In addition, eight reserved symbols may be used to display a character string that suggests that the third symbol such as “Keizoku !!!!!!” or “Is it even better !!” is restarted. . By doing in this way, it becomes possible to notify a player about the game content other than the result of the determination of whether or not to be included in the eight on-hold memories by using the on-hold symbol, and it is possible to provide a gaming machine rich in gaming properties. It becomes possible.

  Furthermore, the determination result included in the eight reserved memories, the lottery result of the third symbol dynamically displayed at that time, and the effect of restarting the third symbol dynamically displayed at that time Based on any one result or a combination of two or more results in the determination result of whether or not there is, there is a possibility that a state advantageous to the player is provided, such as “chance !!!!!” or “ It may be displayed with an abstract character string such as “Marine Chan!”. By doing in this way, it becomes possible to provide a gaming machine rich in gaming properties.

  Note that, in this embodiment, the condition for performing the eight-holding effect is the case where the number of eight stored memories is stored, but a predetermined number may be stored, or seven.

  In the present embodiment, the reserved symbol is changed to the notification hold symbol as a notification for prompting the player to operate the frame button 22 while pointing to the reserved symbol that changes due to the reserved symbol effect. You may perform by another display, without changing an aspect.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the result display hold symbol displayed by operating the frame button 22 always in the same display mode (“push” symbol) regardless of whether the notification hold symbol is held and stored. The content of the display mode ("big hit !!!!!!!") is changed on the basis of the result of determination of whether or not it is stored on hold. This allows the player to actively participate in the game because the player can see the effect suggesting the result of the determination that is stored on hold for the first time by operating the frame button 22. It becomes possible to suppress getting tired early. A plurality of notification hold symbols may be provided on the basis of the determination result of the hold stored. By doing in this way, it becomes possible to provide a multiple-stage expectation degree easily by combining the display mode of the notification hold symbol and the display mode of the result display hold symbol.

  Next, details of the composite display effect described in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 113 to 117. In addition, description is abbreviate | omitted about the location which overlaps with 2nd Embodiment mentioned above. FIG. 113 is a time chart for explaining the flow related to the composite display effect. With reference to FIG. 113, a series of flows for variable display in which the composite display effect is used will be described.

  First, when a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds) elapses from the start of the variation of the third symbol on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, a frame button effect preparation period (for example, 10 seconds) is reached. The player is informed that an effect of operating 22 is started (see FIG. 114 (a)). Then, after the 3rd symbol has reached the reach display mode, the frame button operation effective period (for example, 10 seconds) is entered, and a display is made to cause the player to operate the frame button 22, and the frame button 22 is displayed within the frame button operation effective period. Is detected (operated) (see FIG. 114B). If the frame button operation under a predetermined condition is performed within the frame button operation effective period after the frame button operation effective period has elapsed, the process shifts to the PUSH effect that is a composite display effect (see FIG. 115B).

  On the other hand, when the frame button operation under the predetermined condition is not performed within the frame button operation effective period, the process shifts to the normal effect period in which the normal super reach effect is performed (see FIG. 115 (c)). When the current variation is reach loss, the third symbol is stopped in an out-of-phase manner without shifting to the composite display effect regardless of the contents of the frame button operation within the frame button operation effective period.

  The PUSH production is divided into a first half part (period of FIG. 113 (d)) and a second half part (period of FIG. 113 (e)), and a game that collects “push” symbols displayed on the display screen in the first half part. (FIG. 116 (a)), the “push” symbols synthesized and displayed corresponding to the “push” symbols collected in the second half part are displayed (FIG. 116 (b)), and the frame button 22 is pressed (operation). As a result, the “push” symbol is changed to a numeric symbol. Thereafter, the combination of the numerical symbols displayed on the display screen is temporarily stopped, and the symbols are fixed after a predetermined time has elapsed.

  As shown in FIG. 113, the composite display effect in the present embodiment has the same variation time as other predetermined super reach effects. Furthermore, the image data (image data used during the period of FIGS. 113 (a) and (b)) from the start of variation of the third symbol to the development of super reach, and until the variation of the third symbol is temporarily stopped and confirmed. The image data (image data used in the period of FIG. 113 (f)) is configured to be able to use other predetermined super reach effect image data. By doing in this way, it is not necessary to prepare image data to be used for each super reach effect from the start of variation to the determination of symbols, and the amount of image data can be reduced. In addition, it is configured such that an out-of-reach effect can be performed using image data used in the periods (a), (b), and (f) shown in FIG.

  FIG. 114A is a diagram illustrating a display screen during the period of FIG. 113A. This display screen is displayed during the frame button effect preparation period for informing the player in advance that the effect of operating the frame button 22 is performed, and the player forgets to operate the frame button 22. It is a display to prevent

  FIG. 114 (b) is a diagram exemplifying a display screen for the period (b) shown in FIG. This display screen is displayed during the frame button operation effective period in which the operation of the frame button 22 is valid. The display screen prompts the frame button 22 to be repeatedly hit, the continuous hit mission achievement condition “50”, and the current A status display (“1/50”) indicating the number of times the frame button 22 is pressed is “1”. Note that the present embodiment has a function of increasing the number of pressings by continuously pressing the frame button 22 for a predetermined time. In addition, you may display the remaining time of a frame button operation effective period (continuous hit mission period).

  FIG. 115A is a diagram exemplifying the display screen for the period of FIG. 113C. This display screen is a screen that is displayed during the normal performance period that is shifted to when the continuous hit mission cannot be achieved during the frame button operation effective period, and the content thereof is the above-described FIG. 43A of the second embodiment. Since it is the same, description is abbreviate | omitted.

  FIG. 115B is a diagram exemplifying a display screen during the period (d) shown in FIG. The display contents of this display screen are the same as those in the second embodiment described above with reference to FIG. Although not shown, values based on the “push” symbol acquired during this period (for example, 15 seconds) (number of acquisitions, acquisition points and expected value of jackpot) are displayed in a predetermined area on the display screen in colors and characters. .

  FIG. 116A is a diagram illustrating a display screen in the second half period of FIG. 113D. The display content of this display screen is the same as that of FIG. 44 (a) of the second embodiment described above, and a description thereof will be omitted.

  In this figure, six “push” symbols are stopped and displayed. However, the number of “push” symbols that are stopped and displayed varies depending on the stop mode of the symbol row. In this way, the number of “push” symbols that are displayed in a stopped state suggests the degree of expectation of jackpot in the present variation display, and the greater the number of “push” symbols that are displayed in a stopped state, the higher the degree of expectation for jackpots. Is set in advance. In other words, a plurality of variation patterns for performing a composite display effect with different numbers of “push” symbols to be stopped are provided, and “push” to be stopped and displayed is smaller than a variation pattern in which the number of “push” symbols to be stopped is small. The variation pattern with a large number of symbols is set to have a higher ratio of winning / failure determination results.

  FIG. 116B is a diagram exemplifying a display screen for the period (e) shown in FIG. 113. The display contents of this display screen are the same as those in the second embodiment described above with reference to FIG.

  In this embodiment, the blank symbol is changed to the “push” symbol, and the “push” symbol is synthesized and displayed. However, the blank symbol is changed to various characters to correspond to the character. You may comprise so that a text (message) may be synthesized and displayed. With such a configuration, at the timing when the blank symbol is changed to various characters, it becomes possible for the player to combine the displayed characters and to predict the synthesized displayed text for later games. It is possible to have a sense of expectation. In addition, when such a configuration is used, it is preferable that the text is synthesized and displayed using a part of the displayed characters, rather than being synthesized and displayed using all the various displayed characters. By doing in this way, it becomes possible to make a player predict the sentence of various patterns. In addition, in order to be able to identify the characters that are always used, if the character mode (color, size, etc.) that is always used is different from other characters, It is possible to give hints of the sentences to be created, and it is possible to more enjoy predicting the sentences to be created by the composite display.

  FIG. 117 is a display screen for the period (f) shown in FIG. In this display screen, when the player presses the frame button 22, the composite display symbol stops at the combination of the third symbol (main symbol) indicating the determination result. In this figure, it stops at a combination of “777” indicating that the result of the determination is a big hit, and is finally displayed after a predetermined time has elapsed. During the period of (f) shown in FIG. 113, the state is displayed in a state of being temporarily stopped at “777” (slightly shaken), and is completely stopped at the end of the period of (f) shown in FIG. It will be in the state.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the variation pattern having the same variation time has a variation pattern for performing the push effect and a variation pattern (normal super reach variation pattern) for which the push effect is not performed. On the basis of the result of determining the achievement condition, either a variation pattern for performing a push effect or a variation pattern for not performing a push effect is set. In other words, since the push effect is included as the variation pattern, it is easy to easily replace the subsequent effect according to the result of the continuous hit mission. In addition, since a player who wants to experience the push effect needs to achieve a continuous hitting mission, the player actively participates in the game, and the motivation of the game can be increased.

  Next, details of the time effect described above in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 118 to 121. In addition, description is abbreviate | omitted about the location which overlaps with 2nd Embodiment mentioned above. In addition, in this embodiment, it has the function which can set the period which performs time production. By providing this function, it is possible to intentionally produce a time effect (synchronous effect) while performing a conventional time effect (synchronized effect) that has been produced with a sense of unity by synchronizing the effects executed by a plurality of pachinko machines 10. It is possible to vary (extend) the period during which the (synchronized effect) is performed, and to provide the player with an unexpected effect.

  FIG. 118 is a time chart for explaining the flow related to the time effect. A series of flow related to the time effect will be described with reference to FIG.

  In this embodiment, it has a function capable of setting a period for performing a time effect (details will be described later). In FIG. 118A, the first time effect is performed for 5 minutes after the power is turned on. In FIG. 118 (b), the first time effect after power-on is set to be performed for 8 minutes. Further, the 8-minute time effect shown in FIG. 118 (b) is divided into the first 5 minutes and the remaining 3 minutes, and the first 5 minutes are set as the effect mode B which is the time effect period, and the remaining The effect mode D, which is a special time effect period, is set for 3 minutes. By setting in this way, during the first 5 minutes in which the time effect is performed, the effect is performed as the same time effect period (effect mode B) in the case where the time effect period is 5 minutes and in the case of 8 minutes. Is possible. Then, when the production mode B ends (when the time production elapses for 5 minutes), the production mode C is entered if the production mode C or the production mode D is entered. And control to shift to the production mode D.

  In the time effect of the second embodiment described above, the condition that the effect mode B does not shift to the effect mode A that is the normal game period, that is, the condition that the effect mode C shifts to is in the hold memory at the end of the effect mode B. The judgment result includes a jackpot judgment result, and among the gaming machines in which the production mode B is executed, the number of gaming machines that shift to the production mode D is extremely small, and the production mode C There is a problem that the player is not interested in the variable display of the third symbol, because the fact that the transition to is in itself notifies that there is a big hit in the hold memory.

  On the other hand, in this embodiment, in addition to the technique described in the second embodiment described above, the condition for shifting to the effect mode D as the condition for not shifting from the effect mode B to the effect mode A that is the normal game period, That is, since the case where the period during which the time effect is performed is set to 8 minutes in advance is added, the number of gaming machines that shift from the effect mode B to other than the effect mode A can be increased. In addition, by unifying the contents of the production in the production mode C and the production mode D, when the player shifts from the production mode B to the production mode (C or D) other than the production mode A, it will soon be a big hit. It becomes possible to raise expectation.

  FIG. 119 (a) is a diagram illustrating the display screen during the time effect period shown in FIG. 118, and shows a state where two minutes have elapsed since the time effect was started. The “remaining 180 seconds” displayed on the upper right of the screen is the remaining number of seconds until 5 minutes have elapsed since the start of the time effect. That is, the same display is performed when 5 minutes is selected as the time effect period and when 8 minutes is selected. Other contents are the same as those in the second embodiment described above with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 119 (b) is a diagram exemplifying the display screen during the time effect period shown in FIG. 118, and shows a state in which 4 minutes and 57 seconds have elapsed since the time effect was started (remaining 3 seconds). . Note that the display mode is the same as in FIG. 46B of the second embodiment described above, regardless of whether 5 minutes is selected as the time effect period or 8 minutes is selected. Will not be described.

  FIG. 120 (a) is a diagram illustrating a display screen at the end of the time effect period shown in FIG. 118, and shows a state where five minutes have elapsed since the time effect was started. Note that the display mode is the same as in FIG. 47A of the second embodiment described above, regardless of whether 5 minutes is selected as the time effect period or 8 minutes is selected. Will not be described.

  FIG. 120B is a diagram illustrating a display screen during the time effect extension period or the special extension effect period shown in FIG. 118. If it is during the time production extension period, the super fish time will continue until the fluctuation display that is a big win ends, and if it is during the special extension production period, the super school time will continue for 3 minutes. Therefore, if the remaining number of seconds is displayed, the player can easily grasp whether the current super fish time is in the time production extension period or the special extension production period. "Remaining? Seconds" is displayed in the upper right of the screen. By displaying in this way, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation that the player may become a big hit each time the variable display performed during the super school time is performed. Other display contents are the same as those in the second embodiment described above with reference to FIG. 47B, and thus the description of the display contents is omitted.

  FIG. 121 shows that the determination result that is a big hit in the determination result of the hold memory or the changing special symbol stored at that time at the end of the time effect period shown in FIG. 118 or at the end of the special extension effect period. It is the figure which illustrated the display screen when not set. Thus, since the image at the end of the super fish school time is shared in any state after the end of the time effect period or after the end of the special extension effect period, the capacity of the image data can be reduced. it can. Since the display contents are the same as those in the second embodiment described above with reference to FIG. 48, the description of the display contents is omitted.

  In the time production in the present embodiment, during the time production period (during production mode B), the production is not performed to suggest that the production mode C or the production mode D is to be shifted to the end during the time production period. Although the player is expected to have the expectation, the winner judgment is made based on the information stored on hold just before the end of the time presentation period, and the success judgment result has a jackpot holding memory, that is, the time presentation period When it is determined that the game has shifted to the time effect extension period (effect mode C) and the jackpot is determined after the end, an effect suggesting that may be provided.

  Further, when a time effect of 5 minutes or more is set in advance, that is, when the time effect period ends and the transition to the special extended effect period (effect mode D) is made, an effect that suggests that may be provided. In this case, the content of the suggestion effect is a content that suggests that it will continue for 5 minutes or longer, and preferably a suggestion content that cannot be determined whether to shift to the effect mode C or the effect mode D. For that purpose, the timing of executing the suggestion effect is just before the end of the time effect period, that is, when the variation stop timing of the third symbol corresponding to the hold memory whose success / failure determination result corresponds to the jackpot storage passes the time effect period (for example, the jackpot If the fluctuation time is 1 minute, the remaining time of the time production period is within 59 seconds).

<Electrical Configuration in Fourth Embodiment>
Next, an electrical configuration in the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 122 to 125. The pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment differs from the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment in terms of electrical configuration in that the ROM 202 and the RAM 203 in the main controller 110 and the ROM 222 and the RAM 223 in the sound lamp controller 113 are part. And the ROM 234 (production) part of the display control device 114 is changed (added), and the fact that the RTC 292 is connected to the audio lamp control device 113 is different. The point is the same. The same parts are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof is omitted.

  First, with reference to FIG. 122, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the fourth embodiment will be described. FIG. 122 is a block diagram illustrating an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment.

  This block diagram is different from the block diagram (FIG. 49) showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the second embodiment described above in that the RTC 292 is clearly connected to the audio lamp control device 113. Since other points are the same, description thereof is omitted. As described above, the RTC 292 is used as a time measuring means for performing a time effect.

  As other changes, the ROM 202 and the RAM 203 in the main control device 110, the ROM 222 and the RAM 223 in the sound lamp control device 113, and the ROM 234 in the display control device 114 are changed (added). This will be described later with reference to FIGS. 123 to 148. Since other parts are the same, the same reference numerals are given and description thereof is omitted.

  With reference to FIG. 123, the contents of the ROM 202 and the RAM 203 in the main controller 110 of this embodiment will be described. FIG. 123A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 202 in the main controller 110, and FIG. 123B is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the RAM 203 in the main controller 110. .

  Since the ROM 202 in the present embodiment is the same as the ROM 202 in the main controller 110 of the second embodiment, the description thereof is omitted.

  Further, the RAM 203 in the present embodiment has at least a change execution flag 203i and a change order storage area 203j in addition to the RAM 203 in the second embodiment.

  The fluctuation execution flag 203i is a flag used to determine whether the fluctuation is executed in FIG. 1 or whether the fluctuation is executed in FIG. The variation execution flag 203i is set in the variation execution determination process (S4004 in FIG. 127) executed in the special symbol variation process 2 (S120 in FIG. 126) (see S4105 and S4107 in FIG. 127). Then, the special symbol variation process 2 (S120 in FIG. 126) is referred to to determine variation execution (see S4005 and S4010 in FIG. 126), and is off when the variation execution determination process (S4004 in FIG. 127) is performed. (See S4101 in FIG. 127).

  The fluctuation order storage area 203j is an area for storing a winning order for each piece of reserved data stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a and the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b. Eight storage areas are set in the change order storage area 203j, and are stored in the previous storage area in the order of winning. Note that the storage area is also shifted based on the start of fluctuation of the special symbol. This change order storage area j stores the winning order in the start winning process 2 (S121 in FIG. 130) (see S4407 and S4414 in FIG. 130). Then, it is referenced in the variation execution determination process (4004 in FIG. 126) executed in the special symbol variation process 2 (S120 in FIG. 126) (see S4102 to S4104 and S4106 in FIG. 127).

  Next, the contents of the ROM 222 and RAM 223 of the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. The ROM 222 in this embodiment has at least an effect time selection table 222b in addition to the ROM 222 in the second embodiment described above (see FIG. 124 (a)). In addition to the RAM 223 in the second embodiment, the RAM 223 in this embodiment includes a special continuation effect flag 223t, an additional effect flag 223u, an eight effect counter 223v, a special continuation effect counter 223w, an identification number storage area 223x, It has at least an effect time storage area 223y and an activation flag 223α (see FIG. 124 (b)).

  The effect time selection table 222b is a table that is referred to when selecting a period during which a synchronous effect (time effect) is performed, and is used in the effect time setting process (S4904 in FIG. 145). The effect time selection table 222b has a plurality of data having different periods (time effect periods) during which the synchronization effect (time effect) is performed, and corresponds to an identification number stored in an identification number storage area 223x described later. By selecting the time effect period, different time effect periods are selected. Therefore, for example, by giving the same identification number to adjacent gaming machines, it is possible to start the synchronized effect at the same timing.

  In the present embodiment, all of the plurality of pachinko machines 10 are selected by selecting a predetermined time effect period from a plurality of time effect periods included in the effect time selection table 222b based on the assigned identification numbers. Synchronous effects are executed at the same timing, and an effect with a sense of unity is executed, or among some pachinko machines 10, the timing at which only some of the pachinko machines 10 are intentionally produced is different, It is possible to perform a certain production.

  The special continuation effect flag 223t is turned on when a condition for performing the special continuation effect is established in the eight effect setting process (S4806 in FIG. 143). Then, when the value of a special continuation effect counter described later becomes 0 (S4809 in FIG. 143). When the special continuation effect flag is turned on, a special continuation effect is performed on the reserved symbol (S4605 in FIG. 136).

  The additional effect flag 223u is turned on (S4802 in FIG. 143) when the condition for performing the additional effect is established in the eight effect setting process (S1353 in FIG. 143). Then, the value is turned off when the stored number is 4 or less when the value of the eight effect counters described later becomes 0 and when the value of the special continuation effect counter becomes 0 (see FIG. 143). S4810, S4812). When the additional effect flag 223u is turned on, an additional effect is performed on the reserved symbol (S4607 in FIG. 136).

  When the eight effect flag 223i is turned on, the eight effect counter 223v is set to 8 as the counter value (S1553 in FIG. 139). When the variation start flag 223e is on in the variation display setting process 2 (S1352 in FIG. 140), the counter value is decremented by 1 (S1654 in FIG. 140). The eight effect counter 223v determines a period during which eight effects are performed. In the case of this embodiment, the counter value is set to 8, and when a new change is started, the value is decremented by one. Then, by determining that the value of the counter becomes 0, it is determined whether or not all the reserved symbols (eight) corresponding to the eight effects have been digested.

  In this embodiment, the effect (8 effects) is performed using 8 reserved symbols. However, when the effect is performed using other than 8 reserved symbols (for example, 7), the counter of this counter is used. The value should be set to 7.

  The special continuation effect counter 223w is set to 5 when the special continuation effect flag 223t is turned on in the eight effect setting process (S4807 in FIG. 143). When the fluctuation start flag 223e is turned on in the fluctuation display setting process 2, the counter value is decremented by 1 (S1655 in FIG. 140). The special continuation effect counter 223w determines the period during which the special continuation effect is performed. In the case of this embodiment, the counter value is set to 5, and when a new change is started, the value is decremented by one. Then, by determining that the value of the counter becomes 0, it is determined whether or not all the reserved symbols (5) corresponding to the special continuation effect have been digested.

  In this embodiment, the effect (special continuation effect) is performed using five reserved symbols, but the effect (special continuation effect) is performed using other than five (for example, six) reserved symbols. May set the value of this counter to 6.

  The identification number storage area 223x stores the identification number input in the identification number input process (S1851 in FIG. 135) executed in the frame button input monitoring / production process 2 (S1351 in FIG. 134) (S4506 in FIG. 135). ). And the identification number memorize | stored in the starting process 2 is cleared (S1209 of FIG. 131). This identification number storage area 223x stores the identification number input by the operator in the identification number input process for setting a period (time) in which the time effect (synchronous effect) is performed using the RTC 292. It is used. When the operator does not input the identification number, the initial value stored in the identification number storage area 223x in the initial setting process of the RAM 223 (S1210 in FIG. 131) is used.

  In this embodiment, an identification number can be assigned to each gaming machine by performing a predetermined operation of the frame button 22 for a predetermined time after the power is turned on. And the time effect (synchronous effect) using RTC292 is performed by reading the effect time (time when a synchronous effect is performed) corresponding to the assigned identification number from the effect time selection table 222b stored in ROM222. It is possible to set a period.

  When the production time is read from the production time selection table 222b, the production time is read based on the two parameters of the identification number stored in the identification number storage area 223x and the time data (date, day of the week, etc.) acquired from the RTC 292. It is good to do so. By doing in this way, even if it is the same identification number, the period when a synchronous effect is performed can be changed because a date changes, and it becomes possible to reduce the operation | work which provides an identification number.

  The effect time storage area 223y stores the effect time selected in the effect time setting process (S4905 in FIG. 145). Then, the effect time stored in the start-up process 2 is cleared (S4504 in FIG. 135). This effect time storage area 223y is used to store an effect time which is a period for performing a synchronized effect based on the RTC 292. Based on the effect time stored in this storage area, a synchronized effect (time effect) is stored. Will be done.

  The activation flag 223α is set to ON by the time setting process 2 executed in the startup process 2 of the sound lamp control device (S1262 in FIG. 132). Then, by the identification number input process, it is set to off when a predetermined time (20 minutes) has elapsed since the activation flag was turned on or when an identification number input operation is performed (S4504 in FIG. 135). This activation flag 223α is used for performing processing (identification number input processing) that enables operation only for a predetermined time after the power of the gaming machine is activated, and the activation flag 223α is turned on. The identification number can be entered only when

  Next, the effect time selection table 222b stored in the ROM 222 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 125 (a) schematically shows an effect time selection table 222b, and FIG. 125 (b) schematically shows an effect time table selected by the effect time selection table 222b. It is.

  The effect time selection table 222b is used when setting specific effect time data from a plurality of effect time data stored in the ROM 222 in the sound lamp control device 113. In the present embodiment, Specific presentation time data is set using as parameters the identification number that can be set and input by the operator and the day-of-week data that is time information acquired from the RTC 292.

  The day of the week data includes items for event 1 and event 2 separately from days of the week from Sunday to Saturday. This is an item for a special day such as a holiday or anniversary. The date of the year corresponding to the event 1 or the event 2 is set so that the event item is used in preference to the item of the day of the week (Sunday to Saturday).

  Next, a time table for each effect time will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 125 (b) shows a time table for each effect time selected by the effect time selection table 222b. Different timetables are set for the performance times from “I” to “XI”. “A”, “B”, and “D” described on the time table are effect modes set in the period, and indicate effect mode A, effect mode B, and effect mode D, respectively. . The number described below is the time (minutes) indicating the period.

  Among the effect modes, effect mode A is a period in which a normal effect is performed, and effect mode B and effect mode D are periods in which a time effect (synchronous effect) is performed. In particular, the effect mode D is set so that the transition frequency is lower than that of the effect mode B, and during the effect mode D, an effect that provides information that may be advantageous to the player is executed. Therefore, by starting the time effect (synchronous effect), it is possible to cause the player to play the game while expecting that there is a possibility that the player may shift to the effect mode D.

  It should be noted that the production mode C is the production mode that is shifted only when the jackpot exists in the hold memory at the time when the production mode B and the production mode D are finished, that is, whether or not the production mode is shifted according to the game lottery result. However, the description is omitted in FIG. 125 (b). Actually, after the production mode B and the production mode D, both the production mode A and the production mode C are set. It is set so that the production mode is appropriately selected according to the result.

  In the present embodiment, “I” to “VIII” are effect times selected using normal items (Sunday to Saturday) in the day-of-week data, and special items (event 1, event 2) in the day-of-week data. "X" and "XI" are assigned as the production times selected when using ().

  Here, the production time “I” will be described. The production time “I” is a time table in which the production mode B (time production (synchronous production)) is executed for 5 minutes after the production mode A (normal period) is executed for 55 minutes, and is repeated.

  Next, the production time “II” will be described. In the production time “II”, the production mode A (normal production) is executed for 55 minutes, the production mode B (time production (synchronous production)) is 5 minutes, and the production mode D (time production (synchronous production)) is 3. Minutes, that is, a time effect (synchronous effect) is executed for a total of 8 minutes. Then, after the effect mode A is executed for 52 minutes, the effect mode B is executed again for 5 minutes.

  The production time “I” and the production time “II” are set to be different from each other during the time production (synchronization production). Similarly, the production times “I” to “VIII” are set so that the periods during which the time production (synchronous production) is performed are different (some parts are the same). However, the timing at which the time effect (synchronous effect) is started is set to be the same regardless of which effect time is selected. In the above-described effect time “I” and effect time “II”, the period of effect mode A is made different so that the time effect (synchronous effect) starts 55 minutes and 115 minutes after the start. . By configuring in this way, even when various production times are selected, it is possible to achieve a sense of unity by matching the timing at which the time production (synchronous production) is started (timing when the production mode A is switched to the production mode B). A certain performance can be executed. Also, since the player cannot grasp whether the current time production is set to 5 minutes or 8 minutes at the timing when the time production starts, is the time production extended? It is possible to see the time production while enjoying whether or not, and to improve the interest of the game.

  In this embodiment, the day of the week data includes stage times “X” and “XI” which are stage times selected only when a special item such as “event 1” or “event 2” is referred to. . As shown in FIG. 125 (b), the two performance times “X” and “XI” are set to be clearly different from the other performance times. Synchronous production) occupies half of the entire time, and in the production time “XI”, all the times are time production (synchronous production).

  In this way, when normal items (day to soil) are used as day-of-week data, the player is not noticed as much as possible about the difference in the period in which the time effect is performed (the player is not aware of the time effect at the start of the time effect). However, when special items (event 1, event 2) are used as day-of-week data, a production time that can clarify the period in which the time production is performed is set.

  In the present embodiment, the production time is set as described above, but other methods may be used as the production time setting method. For example, the production time corresponding to the identification number may be selected without using day-of-week data in the production time selection table. When such a configuration is used, when the date has been changed by referring to the time information acquired from the RTC 292, the content of the production time assigned corresponding to the identification number is changed. Thus, the same effects as in the present embodiment can be achieved.

  In this embodiment, when the identification number is not set by the operator, the identification number “I” stored as the initial value in the identification number storage area 223x of the RAM 223 is used, but the time information acquired from the RTC 292 is used. With reference to this, when it is determined that the date has changed, the identification number stored as the initial value in the identification number area 223x may be changed. By doing in this way, it becomes possible to change the period in which a time effect is performed without performing the input operation of an identification number, and the operator's work can be reduced.

  In the present embodiment, it is configured so as to perform the synchronous effect by referring to the time information acquired from the RTC 292. However, any configuration can be used as long as the period for performing the synchronous effect can be set, and another configuration is used instead of the RTC 292. It may be used.

  As another configuration, for example, a timer that measures an elapsed time from the time of power-on is provided, and after a predetermined time has elapsed, a configuration that can be set to enter a predetermined period during which a synchronous effect can be executed, or a frame button 22 A configuration is conceivable in which predetermined information is input by operating, and a predetermined period of time during which a synchronized effect can be executed based on the input predetermined information.

  Specifically, in order to cause the other pachinko machine 10 to display the production mode (the production mode stored on hold) scheduled to be executed by the specific pachinko machine 10 in synchronization with the other pachinko machine 10, The third symbol display device 81 outputs, as a password that can be input to the pachinko machine 10, production information including information indicating the production mode that is reserved and stored. The player inputs the password to the other pachinko machine 10, and the other pachinko machine 10 sets a specific effect mode based on the effect information included in the input password. And it becomes possible to synchronize with the production | presentation aspect performed with the specific pachinko machine 10 because a player performs the production | presentation aspect set at arbitrary timings.

  When such a configuration is used, it is preferable to use RTC 292 to include information indicating the time at which the effect mode stored and stored in the effect information described above is actually executed. By doing in this way, it becomes possible to enjoy the production mode synchronized with the specific pachinko machine 10 and the other pachinko machine 10 at that time simply by inputting the password to the other pachinko machine 10.

  Further, the effect information displayed on the third symbol display device 81 may be a two-dimensional information code that is information that can be acquired by an external device (portable terminal) instead of a password. If comprised in this way, it will become possible to acquire the production | presentation information with a portable terminal, and to perform the production | presentation aspect synchronized with the pachinko machines which are distant by transmitting production | presentation information to a distant player by communication.

  In addition, what is synchronized in this way is not limited to the effect mode that is reserved and stored, but may be an effect mode that is a big hit. In addition, in the production mode of the pachinko machine 10 (main pachinko machine) on the side that is the source of synchronization and the pachinko machine 10 (secondary pachinko machine) on the side that is to be synchronized, the slave pachinko machine is synchronized only when the game is not playing The display area of the third symbol display device 81 may be divided and displayed even during a special symbol game.

  By using such a configuration, the player can set a predetermined period during which the synchronized performance can be executed. For example, the player can freely experience the synchronized performance, and it is possible to reduce the tiredness of the game. It becomes.

<Regarding Control Process Performed by Main Controller in Fourth Embodiment>
Next, a control process executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 126 to 130. The fourth embodiment differs from the second embodiment described above in the order of digesting the reserved balls of the special symbol 1 and the reserved balls of the special symbol 2. That is, in the second embodiment described above, control is performed such that the reserved ball of the special symbol 2 is preferentially digested with respect to the reserved ball of the special symbol 1. Control is performed to digest the reserved balls of design 2 in the order of winning. Since the other points are the same, the same parts are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof is omitted.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 126, the special symbol variation process 2 (S120) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 126 is a flowchart showing this special symbol variation process 2 (S120). This special symbol variation process 2 (S120) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 58), and the special symbol (first symbol) variation display or the third symbol display performed in the first symbol display device 37. This is a process for controlling the variation display of the third symbol performed in the device 81.

  In this special symbol variation process 2, it is first determined whether or not the present symbol is a special symbol jackpot (S4001). During the special symbol jackpot, the special symbol jackpot (including the special symbol jackpot game) is being displayed on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, and the special symbol jackpot Includes during a predetermined time after the end of the jackpot game. As a result of the determination, if the special symbol is a big hit (S4001: Yes), this processing is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, if the special symbol is not big hit (S4001: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S4002), and the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changed. If not changing (S4002: No), the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d (the number N1 of the variable display hold in the special symbol) and the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e (the variable display of the special symbol) The number of times of holding N2) is acquired (S4003). Next, it is determined whether the change is executed with the holding ball of the first special symbol (hereinafter referred to as special figure 1) or the second special symbol (hereinafter referred to as special figure 2). A variation execution determination process for setting the flag 203i is executed (S4004). The variation execution determination process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  It is determined whether the variable execution flag 203i set by the variable execution determination process (S4004) is variable execution in FIG. 1 (S4005). It is determined whether or not the execution flag 203i is the variation execution of FIG. 2 (S4010). If the execution flag 203i is not the variation execution of FIG. 2 (S4010: No), this processing is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, if the variation execution flag 203i is variation execution in the special figure 1 (S4005: Yes), the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is decremented by 1 (S4006), and the special symbol changed by the calculation A reserved ball number command indicating the value of the one held ball number counter 203d is set (S4007). The reserved ball number command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and in an external output process (S1001) of a later-described main process (see FIG. 67) executed by the MPU 201. And sent to the sound lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command, it extracts the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d from the reserved ball number command, and the extracted value is stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b of the RAM 223. Store.

  After the reserved ball number command is set by the processing of S4007, the data stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a is shifted (S4008). In the process of S4008, the data stored in the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a is sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, the holding area 1 → the execution area, the holding area 2 → the holding area 1, the holding area 3 → the holding area 2, the holding area 4 → the holding area 3, etc. Shift data. After shifting the data, a special symbol 1 variation start process for starting variation display on the first symbol display device 37 is executed (S4009). The special symbol 1 variation start process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In the process of S4005, if the fluctuation execution flag 203i is not the fluctuation execution of the special figure 1 (S4005: No), it is determined whether the fluctuation execution flag 203i is the fluctuation execution of the special figure 2 (S4010), the fluctuation execution flag. If 203i is the variation execution of special figure 2 (S4010: Yes), the same process as the process for the special ball of FIG.

  Specifically, the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is decremented by 1 (S4011), and the reserved ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e changed by the calculation is set. (S4012). The special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c in the RAM 223 is updated by the reserved ball number command set here. After the reserved ball number command is set by the processing of S4012, the data stored in the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b is shifted (S4013), and the special symbol for starting the variable display in the first symbol display device 37 is started. Two fluctuation start processing is executed (S4014). The special symbol 2 variation start process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In the process of S4002, if the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S4002: Yes), it is determined whether or not the change time of the variable display executed in the first symbol display device 37 has elapsed. (S4015). The variation time of the variation display executed in the first symbol display device 37 is determined according to the variation pattern selected by the variation type counter CS1 (determined according to the variation pattern command), and this variation time. Is not passed (S4015: No), the display of the 1st symbol display apparatus 37 is updated (S4016), and this process is complete | finished.

  On the other hand, if the variation time of the variation display being executed has elapsed in the process of S4015 (S4015: Yes), the display mode corresponding to the stop symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is set (S4017). The stop symbol is set in advance by a special symbol 1 variation start process (S4009) described later with reference to FIG. 128 or a special symbol 2 variation start process (S4014) described later with reference to FIG. 129. When this special symbol 1 variation start process or special symbol 2 variation start process is executed, it is based on the values of various counters stored in the execution area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b. Thus, the stop symbol of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is set. More specifically, in the case of the big hit of the first special symbol, whether the big hit A or the big hit B is determined according to the value of the first hit type counter C2, and the big hit of the second special symbol In this case, it is determined whether the jackpot A or the jackpot B is set according to the value of the first hit type counter C2.

  In this embodiment, when the jackpot A is reached, the blue LED is turned on in the first symbol display device 37, and when the jackpot B is reached, the red LED is turned on. Further, when it is off, the red LED and the green LED are turned on. In addition, although the lighting of each LED is released when the next fluctuation display is started, it may be turned on only for a few seconds after the fluctuation stops.

  After the process of S4017 is completed, when the variation display being executed in the first symbol display device 37 is started, the special symbol display (the current lottery result) performed by the special symbol variation start process is It is determined whether the symbol is a big hit (S4018). If the current lottery result is a special symbol jackpot (S4018: Yes), the jackpot start is set (S4019), and the process proceeds to S4022.

  On the other hand, in the process of S4018, if the current lottery result is out of the special symbol (S4018: No), it is determined whether or not the value of the hour / minute counter 203g is larger than 0 (S4020), If it is determined that the value is greater than 0 (S4020: Yes), the value of the hour / minute counter 203g is decremented by 1 (S4021), and the process proceeds to S4022. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the hour / middle counter 203g is 0 (S4020: No), the process of S4021 is skipped and the process proceeds to S4022.

  In the process of S4022 executed after the process of S4019, S4020, or S4021, the lighting of the LED, which is the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 corresponding to the stop symbol set in the process of S4017, and the third symbol display device 81 are performed. A stop command is set in order to synchronize the change stop of (S4022).

  Next, with reference to FIG. 127, the variation execution determination process (S4004) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 127 is a flowchart showing the variation execution determination process (S4004). This variation execution determination process (S4004) is a process executed in the special symbol variation process 2 (see FIG. 126) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 58), and includes the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol. The effect pattern (variation effect pattern) of the variable effect performed on the display device 81 is set to the value of various counters stored in either execution area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b. It is a process for determining whether to execute based on.

  In the variation execution determination process, first, initialization is performed by setting the variation execution flag 203i to 0 (S4101), and data in the variation order storage area 203j is acquired (S4102). Thereafter, the data in the fluctuation order storage area 203j is shifted (S4103). In the process of S4103, a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the first area to the eighth area of the fluctuation order storage area 203j to the execution area side is performed. More specifically, first area → execution area, second area → first area, third area → second area, fourth area → holding third area, fifth area → fourth area, sixth area → The data in each area is shifted such as the fifth area, the seventh area → the reserved sixth area, the eighth area → the reserved seventh area. After the data is shifted, it is determined whether or not the data in the execution area is special figure 1 (S4104).

  When it is determined in the process of S4104 that the execution area data is special figure 1 (S4104: Yes), the variable execution flag 203i is set to variable execution in special figure 1 (S4105), and this process ends. Then, the process returns to the special symbol variation process 2.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the execution area data is not the special figure 1 (S4104: No), it is determined whether or not the execution area data is the special figure 2 (S4106). When it is determined in the process of S4106 that the execution area data is special figure 2 (S4106: Yes), the variable execution flag 203i is set to variable execution in special figure 2 (S4107), and this process ends. Then, the process returns to the special symbol variation process 2.

  If it is determined in the process of S4106 that the execution area data is not special figure 2 (S4106: No), since there is no reserved ball to be fluctuated, this process is terminated while the fluctuating execution flag 203i remains in the initial state. Return to the special symbol variation process.

  Next, the special symbol 1 variation start process (S4009) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 128 is a flowchart showing special symbol 1 variation start processing (S4009). This special symbol 1 fluctuation start process (S4009) is a process executed in the special symbol fluctuation process 2 (see FIG. 126) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 58), and the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a. This is a process for determining the effect pattern (variation effect pattern) of the variable effect performed by the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 based on the values of the various counters stored in the execution area.

  In the special symbol 1 variation start process, first, the first special random number counter C1, the first per category counter C2, and the stop type selection of the first special symbol stored in the execution area of the special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a Each value of the counter C3 is acquired (S4201), and it is determined whether or not the probability is changing (S4202). Specifically, when the probability changing counter 203g is larger than 0, it is determined that the probability changing is being performed, and when the probability changing counter 203g is 0, it is determined that the probability changing is not being performed. If it is determined in the process of S4202 that the probability change is in progress (S4202: Yes), the lottery result is acquired based on the jackpot determination value at the high probability of the special symbol jackpot random number table 202a (S4203), and the process of S4205 Move on. Here, the lottery result of the special symbol is stored in the value of the first per-random number counter C1 updated in the process of S103 and the jackpot determination value at the time of high probability in the first per-random number table 202a (FIG. 52 (a)). It is determined by comparing the value (win value) that has been made one by one (S4203). If the value of the first random number counter C1 is in the range of “0-9”, it is determined that it is a big hit, and if it is in the range of “10-399”, it is determined that it is out of place (see FIG. 52A). .

  On the other hand, when it is determined that there is no probability change (S4202: No), the lottery result is acquired based on the jackpot determination value and the jackpot determination value at the low probability of the special symbol jackpot random number table 202a (S4204), and the process of S4205 Move on. Here, the lottery result of the special symbol is stored in the value of the first per random number counter C1 updated in the processing of S103 and the big hit determination value (FIG. 52 (a)) at the high probability of the special symbol big hit random number table 202a. It is determined by comparing the value (win value) that has been made one by one (S4204). If the value of the first random number counter C1 is “7”, it is determined that it is a big hit, and if it is in the range of “0-6” or “8-399”, it is determined that it is out of place (FIG. 52 (a) )reference).

  Next, a winning information command including a lottery result is set (S4205), and the process proceeds to S4206. In the process of S4206, it is determined whether or not the lottery result acquired in the process of S4203 or S4204 is a big hit. When it is determined that the lottery result acquired in the process of S4203 or S4204 is a big hit (S4206: Yes), based on the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired in the process of S4201, the selection table 202b1 for special figure 1 A display mode is set more (S4207), and the process proceeds to S4208.

  More specifically, the acquired value of the first hit type counter C2 is compared with the random number value stored in the big hit type selection table 202b, and the big hits (big hit A, big hit B) of two types of special symbols are compared. Of these, it is determined which jackpot type is. As described above, if the value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of “0 to 59”, it is determined that it is a big hit A (16R probability variation big hit), and if it is in the range of “60 to 99”, the big hit B (16R normal jackpot) is determined (see FIG. 52B).

  In the process of S4207, the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 (the lighting state of the LED 37a) is set according to the determined jackpot type (big hit A, big hit B). Further, in order to stop and display the stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot type on the third symbol display device 81, the jackpot type (big hit A, jackpot B) is set as the stop type.

  Next, the jackpot variation pattern is determined based on the value of the variation type counter CS1 (S4208). When the variation pattern is set in the process of S4208, the variation time (display time) of the variation effect in the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the third symbol display device 81 is stopped until the big hit symbol is stopped. The variation time of the symbol is determined. At this time, the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer 203i of the RAM 203 is confirmed, and the variation time of symbol variation such as normal reach and super reach is determined based on the value of the variation type counter CS1. The relationship between the numerical value of the variation type counter CS1 and the type of symbol variation is defined in the variation pattern selection table 202d (see FIGS. 53A to 53D). Specifically, if it is a big hit, normal reach (30 seconds) if the value of the variation type counter CS1 is in the range of “0 to 50”, and super reach (60 seconds) if it is in the range of “51 to 179”. If it is in the range of “180 to 198”, it becomes a fluctuation pattern of special reach (90 seconds) (see FIG. 53B).

  In the process of S4206, when it is determined that the special symbol is out (S4206: No), a display mode of out is set (S4209). In the processing of S4209, the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is set to a display mode corresponding to the off symbol, and the value of the stop type selection counter C3 stored in the execution area of the special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a is set. The stop type to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined based on the above. For example, as the stop type, “front / rear out of reach”, “reach other than out of front / rear”, “complete out” and the like are defined.

  Next, a deviation variation pattern is determined (S4210). It is determined based on the out (normal) selection table 202d2 at normal time (when the probability changing counter 203 is 0), and based on the out (probability) selection table 202d3 at the time of probability change (when the probability changing counter 203g is greater than 0). It is determined. Here, the display time of the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the variation time of the third symbol until the third symbol display device 81 stops at the off symbol is determined. At this time, similarly to the processing of S4208 and S4210, the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer 203i of the RAM 203 is confirmed, and the symbol variation such as normal reach, super reach, etc. is determined based on the value of the variation type counter CS1. Determine the variation time. The relationship between the numerical value of the variation type counter CS1 and the type of symbol variation is defined in the variation pattern selection table 202d (see FIGS. 53A to 53D). Specifically, if it is completely out of the range when it is not in the midst of a certain change, if the value of the variation type counter CS1 is in the range of “0 to 98”, it is short out (7 seconds), and if it is in the range of “99 to 198”. If the value of the variation type counter CS1 is in the range of “0 to 149”, it is normal reach (30 seconds), and if it is in the range of “150 to 197”, it is super reach (60). If it is “198”, it will be a special reach (90 seconds).

  When the processing of S4208 and S4210 is completed, next, a variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 of the variation pattern determined in the processing of S4208 and S4210 is set (S4211). Next, a stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type set in the processes of S4208 and S4210 is set (S4212). These variation pattern commands and stop type commands are stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and these commands are sent to the sound lamp control device 113 in the external output processing of S1001 of the main processing (FIG. 67). Sent. The sound lamp control device 113 transmits the stop type command to the display control device 114 as it is. When the process of S4212 is completed, the process returns to the special symbol variation process.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 129, the special symbol 2 fluctuation start process (S4014) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 129 is a flowchart showing special symbol 2 variation start processing (S4014). This special symbol 2 fluctuation start process (S4014) is a process executed in the special symbol fluctuation process (see FIG. 59) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 58), and is stored in the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b. This is a process for determining the effect pattern (variation effect pattern) of the variable effect performed by the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 based on the values of the various counters stored in the execution area.

  In this special symbol 2 variation start process, as in the special symbol 1 variation start process (S4009), the determination value of the first special random number counter C1 of the second special symbol and the special symbol large random number table 202a are obtained by the process of S4301. Based on the lottery result. Except for the processes of S4307 and S4309, the same process as the process of S4009 is performed on the execution area data in the reserved sphere storage area of the second special symbol, and thus detailed description thereof is omitted.

  The process of S4307 is executed when the lottery result acquired in the process of S4303 or S4304 is a big hit (S4306: Yes). In the process of S4307, the jackpot variation pattern is determined based on the special figure 2 selection table 202e2 (FIG. 54C) (S4307). When the variation pattern is set in the process of S4307, the variation time (display time) of the variation effect in the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the third symbol display device 81 is stopped until the jackpot symbol is stopped. The variation time of the symbol is determined. The relationship between the numerical value of the variation type counter CS1 and the type of symbol variation is defined in the time variation pattern selection table 202e (see FIGS. 54A to 54C). Specifically, the variation type counter Regardless of the value of CS1 (in the range of values), the fluctuation pattern is B (0.5 seconds) per short time (see FIG. 54C).

  Further, the process of S4309 is executed when the lottery result acquired in the process of S4303 or S4304 is out of place (S4306: No). In the processing of S4309, a deviation variation pattern is determined based on the special figure 2 short time variation pattern table 202e2 (FIG. 54C) (S4309). When the variation pattern is set in the process of S4309, the variation time (display time) of the variation effect in the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the third symbol display device 81 is stopped until the big hit symbol is stopped. The variation time of the symbol is determined. The relationship between the numerical value of the variation type counter CS1 and the type of symbol variation is defined in the time variation pattern selection table 202e (see FIGS. 54A to 54C). Specifically, the variation type counter Regardless of the value of CS1 (in the entire range of values), the fluctuation pattern of the time deviation B (0.5 seconds) is obtained (see FIG. 54C).

  Next, the start winning process 2 (S121) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 130 is a flowchart showing the start winning process 2 (S121). This start winning process 2 (S121) is executed in the timer interruption process (see FIG. 58), and it is determined whether or not there is a winning (start winning) at the first starting port 63a. This is a process for holding a value indicated by various random number counters.

  When the start winning process 2 is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the ball has won the first start opening 63a (start winning prize) (S4401). Here, the ball entering the first start port 63a is detected over three timer interruption processes. If it is determined that the ball has won the first start opening 63a (S4401: Yes), the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d (the number N1 of the variable display hold in the special symbol) is acquired (S4402). . Then, it is determined whether or not the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is less than the upper limit (4 in the present embodiment) (S4403).

  Then, there is no winning at the first starting port 63a (S4401: No), or even if there is a winning at the first starting port 63a, the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball counter 203d is less than 4. If not (S4403: No), the process proceeds to S4408. On the other hand, if there is a winning at the first starting port 63a (S4401: Yes) and the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is less than 4 (S4403: Yes), the special symbol 1 reserved ball The value (N1) of the number counter 203d is incremented by 1 (S4404). Then, a reserved ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d changed by the calculation is set (S4405).

  The reserved ball number command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and in an external output process (S1001) of a later-described main process (see FIG. 67) executed by the MPU 201. And sent to the sound lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command, it extracts the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d from the reserved ball number command, and the extracted value is stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b of the RAM 223. Store.

  After setting the reserve ball number command by the process of S4405, the values of the first per-random number counter C1, the first per-type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 updated in S103 of the timer interrupt process described above are used as special symbols. 1 is stored in the reserved ball storage area 203a (S4406), special figure 1 is stored in the first area of the change order storage area 203j (S4407), and the process proceeds to S4408. In the process of S4407, the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball counter 203d or the special symbol 2 reserved ball counter 203e is referred to. If the total value is 1, the first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 2, the second area is the first area, if the value is 3, the third area is the first area, and if the value is 4, the fourth area is the first area. By determining the value set in the fluctuation order storage area 203j in the above-described fluctuation execution determination process (S4004), the start opening fluctuates the first special symbol as in the present embodiment, and the second special symbol. Even when there are two types of fluctuations that change the symbol, the fluctuations can be started in the order of winning in the starting slot.

  In the process of S4408, it is determined whether or not the ball has won a prize (start prize) at the second starting port 63b (S4408). If it is determined that the ball has won the second starting port 63b (S4408: Yes), the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e performs the same processing as when the first starting port 63a was won.

  More specifically, the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e (the number N2 of the variable display hold in the special symbol) is acquired (S4409), and if the value is less than the upper limit value (4 in this embodiment) ( (S4410: Yes), the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is incremented by 1 (S4411), and a reserved ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is set (S4412). Then, the values of the first per-random number counter C1, the first per-kind type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 are stored in the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b (S4413), and the first area of the fluctuation order storage area 203j is stored. Special figure 2 is set (S4414), and the process proceeds to S4415. Note that the determination of the first area in S4414 is performed in the same manner as in S4407.

  If there is no winning at the second starting port 63b (S4408: No), or even if there is a winning at the second starting port 63b, the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball counter 203e is not less than 4. (S4410: No), prefetch processing is executed (S4415), and this processing is terminated as it is.

<Regarding Control Process Performed by Audio Lamp Control Device in Fourth Embodiment>
Next, control processing executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 according to the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 131 to 146. The fourth embodiment is different from the above-described second embodiment in the contents of eight hold effects, a composite display effect, and a time effect (synchronous effect). Other parts are the same, and the same parts are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof is omitted.

  First, with reference to FIG. 131, the start-up process 2 executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 131 is a flowchart showing the start-up process 2. This start-up process 2 is a process performed when the sound lamp control device 113 is turned on, as in the second embodiment described above. In the startup process 2, the processes from S1201 to S1211 are executed as in the second embodiment. Thereafter, the time setting process 2 (S1251 in FIG. 132) is executed, and the process proceeds to the main process 2.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 132, the time setting process 2 (S1251) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 132 is a flowchart showing the time setting process 2 (S1251). This time setting process 2 (S1251) is a process executed in the start-up process 2, and sets a time (time) at power-on (power activation) based on the time information acquired from the RTC 292, and power activation This is a process for turning on the activation flag 223α for executing a process performed only for a predetermined time from the hour.

  In the time setting process 2, time information is acquired from the RTC 292, which is a time measuring means, as in the second embodiment described above (S1221). Thereafter, based on the acquired time information, the activation time is set in the set time storage area 223j (S1261), and the activation flag 223α is set on (S1262).

  By executing this process and setting the activation flag 223α to ON, it is possible to perform a process (identification number input process (see FIG. 135)) that can be operated only for a predetermined time after the power is turned on.

  Next, the main process 2 executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 133 is a flowchart showing the main process 2. The main process 2 is executed after the startup process 2 of the sound lamp control device 113 is completed. In the main process 2, the processes from S1301 to S1306 are executed as in the second embodiment described above. Thereafter, frame button input monitoring / effect processing 2 is executed (S1351). Details of the frame button input monitoring / production process (S1351) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  After the frame button input monitoring / production process 2 (S1351) is executed, the processes from S1308 to S1312 are executed as in the second embodiment described above. Thereafter, the variable display setting process 2 (S1352) is executed. Details of the variable display setting process 2 (S1352) will be described later with reference to FIG. After the variable display setting process 2 (S1352) is executed, the processes are executed in the order of eight effect setting processes (S1353) and synchronous effect management process 2 (S1354). Then, similarly to the second embodiment described above, the processes from S1317 to S1321 are executed. Details of the eight effect setting process (S1353) will be described later with reference to FIG. 136 and the synchronization effect management process 2 (S1354) with reference to FIG.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 134, the frame button input monitoring / production process 2 (S1351) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 133 is a flowchart showing frame button input monitoring / effect processing 2. This frame button input monitoring / effect process 2 (S1351) is executed in the main process 2 executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113, and the frame button input monitoring / effect process (in the second embodiment described above) In addition to the same contents as S1307) in FIG. 80, this is a process for inputting an identification number used to set a period (time effect period) for performing a synchronized effect, which will be described later.

  In the frame button input monitoring / production process 2, first, an identification number input process (S1851) is executed.

  Here, the identification number input process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 135 is a flowchart showing the identification number input process (S1851).

  In the identification number input process (S1851), first, it is determined whether or not the symbol is changing (S4501). If it is determined that the symbol is changing (S4501: Yes), this processing is completed. On the other hand, if it is determined that the symbol is not changing (S4501: No), it is determined whether the activation flag 223α is set to ON (S4502). If the activation flag 223α is not set to ON (S4501: Yes), this process is completed.

  On the other hand, when the activation flag 223α is set to ON (S4501: No), it is determined whether or not 20 minutes have elapsed since the activation (S4503). This determination is made by comparing the activation time set in the set time storage area (S1261 in FIG. 132) with the current time information acquired from the RTC 292. If 20 minutes have elapsed since the activation, the activation flag is set to OFF (S4504), and this process is completed. On the other hand, if 20 minutes have not elapsed since the activation, it is determined whether or not there is an identification number input operation (S4504).

  Here, the identification number input operation will be described. The pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment is configured to be able to execute a predetermined input operation using the frame button 22, within a predetermined time (within 20 minutes in the present embodiment) after the power is turned on, and to the third When the symbol variation is not performed on the display screen of the symbol display device 81 (for example, during the demonstration screen display), when the frame button 22 is pressed once, an identification number input screen is displayed. After inputting a desired identification number on the identification number input screen, the user can input the identification number by selecting “input completed” displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. As an input method of the identification number, a method may be used in which a plurality of input numbers are displayed on the display screen, and any one of them is selected, or a number from 0 to 9 displayed on the display screen is selected. It is possible to input an identification number by selecting it. Also, “random” is displayed on the display screen, and a predetermined identification number is automatically selected from a plurality of identification numbers by selecting “random”. The method may be used.

  In this embodiment, the predetermined time after the power activation is set to 20 minutes, but this is the time during which the identification numbers can be input to all the pachinko machines 10 even if a plurality of power supplies of the pachinko machine 10 are activated simultaneously. The time may be set as appropriate.

  Furthermore, in this embodiment, the period during which the identification number can be input is set to a predetermined time after the power is turned on, but this is intended to prevent the player from entering the identification number during the game. As long as this purpose can be achieved, other methods may be adopted, for example, by pressing a switch provided at a position where the player cannot operate (for example, the back of the gaming machine). It is configured so that the identification number input operation screen is displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, or it is determined that the time information timed by the RTC 292 is outside business hours, and only the hours outside business hours are displayed. An identification number input operation screen may be displayed. Even if such a configuration is adopted, it is possible to prevent the player from entering an identification number.

  Returning to FIG. 135, the description will be continued. If the identification number input operation has not been performed in S4505, the process ends. That is, if the identification number input operation is not performed in a state where the predetermined time has not elapsed since the power is turned on, the identification number input operation may be performed before the predetermined time elapses. This determination is repeated until elapses.

  On the other hand, if an identification number input operation is performed (S4505: Yes), the input identification number is stored in the identification number storage area 223x (S4506), the activation flag 223α is set to OFF (S4504), and this processing is performed. Exit.

  In the identification number input process described above, an identification number, which is a parameter necessary for setting a period (time effect period) in which a synchronization effect to be described later is set, is set within a limited time within a predetermined time after the power is turned on. The period during which the synchronized effect is performed is changed based on the identification number set by this process. Therefore, the store side can easily input the identification number and prevents the player from easily entering the identification number. Therefore, the store side intentionally assigns the same identification number to the adjacent platforms. When an attempt is made to perform a related synchronized effect between adjacent stands, the identification number set by the store is not changed by the player, and the desired synchronized effect can be performed reliably.

  Here, returning to FIG. 134, the description will be continued. After the identification number input process (S1851) is executed, the processes from S1811 to S1813 are performed in the same manner as the process performed in the second embodiment described above, and the hold effect flag is set to ON in S1813. If not, an eight-holding effect process (see S1852 in FIG. 136) described later is executed, and then a button effect process (see S1853 in FIG. 137) described later is executed. On the other hand, when the hold effect flag is set to ON, the processes of S1814 and S1815 are executed in the same manner as the process performed in the second embodiment described above.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 136, the eight hold effect process (S1852) will be described. FIG. 136 is a flowchart showing the eight hold effect process (S1852). In this eight-holding effect process (S1852), eight effects that are performed when eight balls are stored, a special continuation effect that is continuously performed, and eight effects and a special continuation effect are performed. This is a process of executing an effect when the frame button 22 is pressed (operated) while an additional effect is performed while the hold symbol is “push” (notification hold symbol). This is a process of performing an effect corresponding to the operation of the frame button 22 operated when displayed.

  In the eight hold effect process (S1852), first, it is determined whether or not the eight effect flag 223i is set to ON (S4601). If the eight effect flags 223i are not set to on (S4601: No), it is next determined whether or not the special continuation effect flag 223t is set to on (S4602). If the special continuation effect flag 223t is not set to ON (S4602: No), it is next determined whether or not the additional effect flag is set to ON (S4603). If the additional effect flag is not set to ON (S4603: No), this process ends.

  On the other hand, when the eight effect flags 223i are set to ON (S4601: Yes), the corresponding eight pending effects are executed (S4604), and the process proceeds to S4603. It should be noted that eight presentations are in progress and the notification hold symbol is not displayed, that is, the notification hold symbol (the “push” symbol shown in FIG. 110A) has already been displayed as a result display hold by the operation of the frame button 22. When the frame button 22 is operated at the timing after the change to the symbol (the “big hit !!!!?” Symbol shown in FIG. 111 (a)), the production is not performed on the reserved symbol, but is expected by voice. A so-called roaring effect is performed in which the degree is expressed, or the color of a reserved symbol (for example, “big hit !!!!?”) That has already been changed by eight effects is changed.

  If the special continuation effect flag 223t is set to ON in S4602 (S4602: Yes), the corresponding special continuation effect on hold is executed (S4605), and the process proceeds to S4603. In addition, when the special continuation effect is being performed (while the special continuation effect flag 223t is on) and the hold symbol has already been changed by the operation of the frame button 22, the operation input of the frame button 22 has been described above. As in the case of the eight productions, the production effect is performed based on the operation of the frame button.

  If the additional effect flag 223u is set to ON in S4603 (S4603: Yes), the corresponding reserved additional effect flag 223u is set to OFF (S4606), and the corresponding reserved additional effect is executed (S4606). S4607).

  As described above, in the 8-hold effect (S1852) executed during the frame button input monitoring / effect process 2 (S1351 in FIG. 134), various flags (eight effects at the timing when the frame button 22 is operated). Since the effects executed based on the setting status of the flag 223i, the special continuation effect flag 223t, and the additional effect flag 223u) are different, the player can experience various effects only by performing the same operation. It becomes.

  Next, the button effect process (S1853) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 137 is a flowchart showing the button effect process (S1853). This button effect process (S1853) is a process of setting a display effect when the frame button 22 is pressed (operated) during the composite display effect, and is based on the button hitting mission displayed in FIG. 114 (b). This is processing corresponding to pressing (operation) of the frame button 22 and pressing (operation) of the frame button 22 based on the “push” symbol displayed in FIG. 116 (b).

  In the button effect process (S1853), first, it is determined whether or not the button effect flag 223r is set to ON (S4701). If the button effect flag 223r is not set to ON (S4701: No), this process ends. On the other hand, when the button effect flag 223r is set to ON (S4701: Yes), it is next determined whether or not the button effect stop symbol (“push” symbol in FIG. 116B) has been stopped. It is determined (S4702).

  Here, the button effect flag 223r will be described. The button effect flag 223r is turned on by a button effect selection process 2 (see FIG. 142) described later, and is turned on when the selected variation pattern is a variation pattern corresponding to the composite display effect. Is set.

  In S4702, if the button effect stop symbol is after the stop (S4702: Yes), a display command indicating a composite effect mode corresponding to the selected variation pattern is set (S4703). That is, it is determined that the pressing (operation) of the frame button 22 this time is to operate the “Push” symbol displayed in FIG. 116B, and the “Push” symbol is changed to a numeric symbol. Set the display command.

  On the other hand, if the button effect stop symbol is not after the stop (S4702: No), it is determined whether the button operation effective period has passed (S4705). The button operation effective period is a period indicated by (b) in FIG. 113 and is measured by a counter (not shown). If the button operation valid period has elapsed (S4705: Yes), it is determined whether or not the button pressing condition is achieved (S4706). In the present embodiment, pressing the button 50 times is a button pressing condition (see FIG. 114B).

  If the button pressing condition has not been achieved (S4706: No), the button effect flag is set to OFF (S4704), and this process ends. On the other hand, if the button pressing condition has been achieved (S4706: Yes), this process is terminated. That is, when the button operation effective period has elapsed, if the button pressing condition has not been achieved, the combined display effect is not continued, and the normal effect period is reached after the period (b) of FIG. 113 ends ( In order to shift to c), the button effect flag is set to OFF so that the button effect process is not performed.

  Here, it returns to the process of S4705 and continues description. If the button operation valid period has not elapsed in S4705 (S4705: No), the number of button presses is accumulated (S4707), and this process ends.

  The button effect process has been described above. In this process, when the composite display effect is selected by the button effect selection process 2 (see FIG. 142), the button operation valid period before the stop of the button effect stop symbol is displayed. It is determined whether or not the button has been pressed a sufficient number of times to achieve the button pressing condition (during the button hitting mission), and the button pressing is performed after the button effect stop symbol ("push" symbol) has stopped. In such a case, a process of setting a display command for changing the button effect stop symbol to a numeric symbol is performed. If the button press condition cannot be achieved, the button effect flag is set to OFF, and the normal effect pattern (see FIG. 115A) is displayed without stopping the button effect stop symbol. Will be.

  Next, referring to FIG. 138, the advance notice selection process 2 (S1454) executed in the command determination process (S1312) in the main process 2 (see FIG. 133) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113. ). FIG. 138 is a flowchart showing the advance notice selection process 2 (S1454). This advance notice selection process 2 (S1454) is a process of setting a display advance notice command based on the time information acquired from the RTC 292 and the effect mode set by the later-described synchronous effect management process 2 (see FIG. 144).

  In the advance notice selection process 2 (S1454), first, similarly to the advance notice selection process executed in the second embodiment described above, the processes from S1501 to S1507 are executed. If it is determined in step S1505 that the effect mode C is not set, it is determined whether the effect mode D is set (S1541). When the effect mode D is not set (S1541: No), this process is ended as it is.

  On the other hand, when the production mode D is set (S1541: Yes), based on the determination result and the production counter, the game state announcement production is selected (S1542), and the display announcement command indicating the selected announcement production is displayed. Is set (S1543). Then, this process ends.

  Here, the display notice command set when the production mode D is set will be described. The effect mode D is set only when the period during which the synchronized effect (time effect) is performed is set longer than normal (5 minutes) by the effect time setting process (see FIG. 145) (8 minutes). Mode. During such an effect mode D, a notice effect that can be advantageous to the player is performed so that the player is satisfied that the player has entered the effect mode D. For example, it is not related to the notice effect that informs that the current game situation is changing, the notice effect that does not appear in another effect mode, or the result of the direct game, but the player has accumulated There may be a notice effect including information that can acquire a large amount of points (points for raising the level of the character) and information that can acquire a privilege video (information display that can be read by a mobile phone).

  Next, with reference to FIG. 139, a winning command reception process 2 (S1312) executed in the command determination process (S1312) in the main process 2 (see FIG. 133) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113. S1461) will be described. FIG. 139 is a flowchart showing the winning command reception process 2 (S1461). This winning command reception process 2 (S1461) is a process performed when a winning command transmitted from the main controller 110 is received.

  In the winning command receiving process 2 (S1461), first, similarly to the winning command receiving process (S1411 in FIG. 73) executed in the second embodiment described above, the processes of S1511 and S1512 are executed. It is determined whether the flag is set to ON (S1551). When the additional effect flag is not set to ON (S1551: No), the processing from S1514 to S1522 is executed as in the second embodiment described above.

  On the other hand, when the additional effect flag is set to ON (S1551: Yes), the additional effect is set (S1552), and this process is terminated.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 140, the variable display setting process 2 (S1352) executed in the main process 2 (see FIG. 133) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 140 is a flowchart showing the variable display setting process 2 (S1352).

  In the variable display setting process 2 (S1352), first, similarly to the variable display setting process (S1313 in FIG. 74) executed in the second embodiment, the processes of S1601 and S1602 are executed. Then, the variation pattern selection process 2 is executed (S1651).

  Here, with reference to FIG. 141, the variation pattern selection process 2 (S1651) will be described. FIG. 141 is a flowchart showing variation pattern selection processing 2 (S1651). This variation pattern selection process 2 (S1651) is based on the current effect mode and the value of the acquired effect counter, similarly to the variation pattern selection process (S1603 in FIG. 75) executed in the second embodiment. This is the process of selecting and setting the fluctuation pattern.

  In the variation pattern selection process 2 (S1651), first, similarly to the variation pattern selection process (S1603) executed in the second embodiment described above, the processes of S1611 and S1612 are executed. If the effect mode A is set in S1612 (S1612: Yes), button effect selection processing 2 is executed (S1661). The button effect selection process 2 will be described in detail later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, when the effect mode A is not set in S1612, S1614 and S1615 are executed as in the variation pattern selection process (S1603) executed in the second embodiment described above. If the effect mode B is not set in S1614 (S1614: No), it is then determined whether the effect mode C is set (S1662).

  When it is determined that the effect mode C is set (S1662: Yes), the variation pattern is selected and set from the variation pattern selection table of the corresponding time effect extension period. On the other hand, when the production mode C is not set (S1662: No), since the current production mode is D, the variation pattern is selected from the variation pattern selection table of the special extended production period corresponding to the production mode D. Set.

  Here, the button effect selection process 2 (S1661) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 142 is a flowchart showing the button effect selection process 2 (S1661).

  In the button effect selection process 2, first, the processes of S1621 and S1622 are executed as in the second embodiment described above. In the process of S1622, when the variation pattern selected from the variation pattern selection table is a button effect, the number of button presses is set (S1671). The number of times the button is pressed is the number of times the button is pressed in order to achieve the button hitting mission (see FIG. 114B) performed during the composite display effect, and is set to 50 in this embodiment. . In the present embodiment, the number of button presses is set to 50, and the mission achievement condition during the composite display effect is used. However, as a mission imposed during the composite display effect (condition setting for reaching the Push effect), the number of button presses is increased or decreased. Alternatively, the frame button may be operated at a predetermined timing.

  And after performing the process of S1623 and S1624 similarly to 2nd Embodiment mentioned above, this process is complete | finished.

  As described above, the button effect selection process 2 is a push effect performed during the composite display effect in addition to the button effect selection process (S1613 in FIG. 76) executed in the second embodiment. The number of button presses is set as a condition setting for reaching. By performing this condition setting, even if the button effect is selected as the variation pattern, the player moves to the push effect unless the player operates the frame button 22 and achieves the set condition (50 button presses). Since there is no such thing, the player can enjoy the pachinko machine 10 because he / she actively operates the frame button 22 to see a special performance and participates in the gaming machine.

  Further, when the player feels that he / she wants to see a normal performance, it is not necessary to press the button. Depending on the player's mood, it is possible to select a later production.

  In this embodiment, the number of button presses is set to 50. However, it is preferable that the number of button presses can be changed each time a button effect is selected as a variation pattern. Also, even if the number of button presses set as the condition setting is achieved, it does not always shift to the push effect. For example, if the game lottery result is a big hit, the game always shifts to the push effect, but the game lottery result is lost. In this case, it may be possible to shift to the push effect only with a predetermined probability (30%). By doing in this way, it becomes possible to raise the expectation to the jackpot only by shifting to the push effect, and the player can more actively participate in the game using the operation of the frame button 22.

  In addition, by making it possible to change the number of button presses set as the condition setting, because the lottery result has been lost to the player, it has not shifted to the push effect, or the condition has not been achieved and the push effect has been achieved. It can be difficult to grasp whether it has not been migrated. Moreover, it is possible to provide an unexpected effect by setting the number of button presses to be set as the condition setting to one.

  When setting the number of times this button is pressed, for example, a number that is set only when the game lottery result is a jackpot may be provided. With this configuration, it becomes possible for the player to recognize that the game result is a big hit at a display timing of an effect different from usual, and to pay attention to the effect of the game. Therefore, it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 116 (a), the blank symbol is changed to “push” symbol and the “push” symbol is synthesized and displayed. However, the blank symbol is changed to various characters. A sentence (message) that is changed and associated with the character may be combined and displayed. With such a configuration, at the timing when the blank symbol is changed to various characters, it becomes possible for the player to combine the displayed characters and to predict the synthesized displayed text for later games. It is possible to have a sense of expectation. In addition, when such a configuration is used, it is preferable that the text is synthesized and displayed using a part of the displayed characters, rather than being synthesized and displayed using all the various displayed characters. By doing in this way, it becomes possible to make a player predict the sentence of various patterns. In addition, in order to be able to identify the characters that are always used, if the character mode (color, size, etc.) that is always used is different from other characters, It is possible to give hints of the sentences to be created, and it is possible to more enjoy predicting the sentences to be created by the composite display.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 143, the eight effect setting processing (S1353) executed in the main process 2 (see FIG. 133) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 143 is a flowchart showing the eight effect setting process (S1353). This eight effect setting process (S1353) is a process for performing various settings related to the reserved symbol effect (see FIGS. 110 to 112) performed based on the number of reserved symbols (the number of reserved memories).

  In the eight effect setting process (S1353), first, it is determined whether the eight effect flag 223i is set to ON (S4801). When the eight effect flags 223i are set to ON (S4801: Yes), the additional effect flag 223u is set to ON (S4802). As described above, the additional effect flag 223u is a flag used when determining whether or not to perform an additional prize effect. Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the eight effect counter 223v is greater than 0 (S4803). The eight effect counter 223v is a counter that counts the number of symbol fluctuations after the eight effects using the reserved symbols are executed as described above. If the value is greater than 0, the eight effects are continued. It represents the state.

  When the value of the eight effect counter 223v is larger than 0, that is, in a state where the eight effects are continued (S4803: Yes), this process is ended as it is. On the other hand, if the value of the eight effect counter 223v is not larger than 0, that is, if the value of the eight effect counter 223v is 0 (S4803: No), the eight effect flag 223i is set to OFF (S4804). Next, it is determined whether or not the number of holds is greater than 4 (S4805).

  If the number of reserved items is greater than 4 (S4805: Yes), the special continuation effect flag 223t is set to ON (S4806), then the value of the special continuation effect counter 223w is set to 5 (S4807), and this process is performed. finish. On the other hand, if the reserved number is not more than 4 (in the case of 4 or less) (S4805: No), the additional effect flag 223u is set to off (s4811), and this process ends.

  Returning to S4801, the description will be continued. If the eight effect flags 223i are not on (S4801: No), it is determined whether or not the special continuation effect flag 223t is set to on (S4808). If the special continuation effect flag 223t is not set to ON (S4808: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if the special continuation effect flag 223t is set to ON (S4808: Yes), it is determined whether the value of the special continuation effect counter 223w is greater than 0 (S4809).

  If the value of the special continuation effect counter 223w is greater than 0 (S4809: Yes), this process ends. On the other hand, when the value of the special continuation effect counter 223w is not larger than 0 (when the value of the special continuation effect counter 223w is 0) (S4809: No), the special continuation effect flag 223t is set to OFF (S4810). The additional effect flag 223u is set to OFF (S4811). Then, this process ends.

  As described above, in the setting process during the eight productions, when determining whether to perform the eight productions, the special continuation production, and the additional prize production performed based on the number of retained symbols (the number of stored memories). Various flags to be referenced are set.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 144, the synchronized effect management process 2 (S1354) executed in the main process 2 (see FIG. 133) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 144 is a flowchart showing the synchronized effect management process 2 (S1354). This synchronous production management process 2 (S1354) is a process of setting the production mode (A to D) based on the time information acquired from the RTC 292. The synchronous production management process executed in the second embodiment described above. One set production mode is added to (S1314).

  In the synchronized effect management process 2 (S1354), an effect time setting process (S1751) is first executed. This effect time setting process (S1751) is performed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 in the time setting process 2 (S1251 in FIG. 132) executed in the start-up process 2 (FIG. 131) executed after the power is turned on. And the identification number stored in the identification number storage area in the identification number input process (S1851 in FIG. 135) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113. This is a process of setting the production time.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 145, the effect time setting process (S1751) will be described. FIG. 145 is a flowchart showing the effect time setting process (S1751).

  In the production time setting process, first. It is determined whether or not the production time has already been set (S4901). If the effect time has already been set (S4901: Yes), this process is terminated. On the other hand, if the production time is not set (S4901: No), it is next determined whether the activation flag is set to ON (S4902). If the activation flag is set to ON (S4902: Yes), this process ends. On the other hand, when the activation flag is not set to ON (S4902: No), the process proceeds to S4903 described later.

  That is, in S4902, it is possible to determine that the period during which the identification number can be assigned to the pachinko machine 10 has elapsed by looking at the state of the activation flag 223α, and to assign the identification number to the pachinko machine 10. The production time is set after a long period of time has passed. In the identification number input process (S1851 in FIG. 135), when the activation flag is turned off without inputting the identification number, the identification number stored as the initial setting in the identification number storage area 223x is used.

  After it is determined in S4902 that the activation flag is not set to ON, the identification number stored in the identification number storage area 223x is acquired (S4903), and the production time corresponding to the identification number is obtained as the production time selection table. Select from (222b). Then, the selected effect time is stored in the effect time storage area 223y (S4905), and this process ends.

  The production time selection table (222b) used in S4904 is created based on the identification number stored in the identification number storage area 223x and the time information acquired from the RTC 292, as described above with reference to FIG. The presentation time can be selected with reference to the data. By using such an effect time selection table 222b, the time at which the effect time is provided is changed only by changing the day of the week, so that it is not necessary to change the identification number every day when it is desired to change the effect time every day. It is possible to reduce the change work.

  In addition to the normal day of the week data, two event days are set based on the time information acquired from the RTC 292. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and any parameter that can be created based on the time information acquired by the RTC 292 may be used. Other parameters may be referenced. Examples of other parameters include a parameter that separates even days and odd days, a parameter that identifies holidays, and a parameter that identifies dates having the same month and day.

  In this embodiment, the effect time is set with reference to two parameters of day data and an identification number, but the effect time may be set with reference to three or more parameters. By doing in this way, a more complicated combination can be provided easily.

  In the present embodiment, an identification number can be input as a parameter that can be set by the operator, so that a predetermined plurality of units (for example, adjacent pachinko machines 10) can be synchronized with the same timing (time). In addition to this, parameters that can be set by the operator may be provided.

In the present embodiment, parameters (day of the week data) based on time information acquired from the RTC 292 are used as parameters set by the pachinko machine 10, but other parameters may be provided. For example, parameters based on the game information (the number of jackpots and number of balls) of the previous day of the pachinko machine 10 may be set. Good. By configuring in this way,
In addition to the frame button 22, an input means such as a touch panel type input means or a selection button (cross button) for selecting information displayed on the display screen is used as a means for the operator to set and input parameters. It may be provided in the machine 10. By providing such an input means, it is possible to prepare a complicated setting input. Further, such input means may be used for display effects of the pachinko machine 10.

  Returning to FIG. After performing the effect time setting process (S1751 in FIG. 145), the processes from S1701 to S1705 are performed in the same manner as the synchronous effect management process (S1314 in FIG. 77) executed in the second embodiment described above. finish. On the other hand, if the effect mode is not set to the effect mode A in S1702, it is determined whether the effect mode is set to the effect mode B or the effect mode D (S1752).

  If it is determined that the mode is not the production mode B or the production mode D (S1752: No), the processing of S1709 and S1710 is performed in the same manner as in the second embodiment described above, and this processing is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the production mode B or the production mode D (S1752: Yes), whether or not the time information (data) acquired from the RTC 292 is the time information after 4 minutes and 57 seconds have elapsed from the start of the time production. Is discriminated (S1753).

  In S1753, the elapsed time may be calculated by comparing the time production start time and the current time, or the time table of the production time (see FIG. 125 (b)) 4 minutes 57 in advance. A timing after the second may be set, and it may be determined whether the timing (time) has elapsed. Further, a configuration may be used in which a timer that starts timing from the timing at which the time effect is started is provided without acquiring time information from the RTC 292, and the timer counts 4 minutes and 57 seconds using the timer.

  When the time information acquired from the RTC 292 has not passed 4 minutes 57 seconds from the start of the time effect (S1753: No), this process ends. On the other hand, when the time information acquired from the RTC 292 has passed 4 minutes 57 seconds from the start of the time effect (S1753: Yes), it is determined whether the current time effect period is 5 minutes (S1754).

  When the time effect period is 5 minutes (S1754: Yes), that is, when the effect mode is the effect mode C, the process of S1708 is performed similarly to the second embodiment described above, and this process ends. On the other hand, when the time effect period is not 5 minutes (S1754: No), that is, when the effect mode is the effect mode D, the extension effect setting process 2 is executed (S1755), and this process ends.

  Next, the extension effect setting process 2 (S1755) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 145 is a flowchart showing the extended effect setting process 2 (S1755). This extended effect setting process 2 is a process that is executed when the time effect period is not 5 minutes, that is, when the time effect period is 8 minutes. In order to produce an effect so as to extend the time effect period of 5 minutes. This is a process for making necessary settings.

  In the extended effect setting process 2 (S1755), first, it is determined whether or not a big hit is being made (S5001). If it is determined that the jackpot is being won (S5001: Yes), the normal period flag 223m is set to ON (S5002), the effect mode is set to effect mode A (S5003), and then this process ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the jackpot is not being hit (S5001: No), it is determined whether the time effect period (synchronous effect period) has ended (S5004). If the time effect period has not ended (S5004: No), it is then determined whether 5 minutes have elapsed since the time effect was started (S5005). When 5 minutes have not elapsed since the time effect was started (S5005: No), a re-change effect is set (S5008), and this process is terminated.

  That is, in S5008, it is determined in S1753 of FIG. 144 that 4 minutes 57 seconds have elapsed since the start of the time effect, and in S5005 of FIG. 146, 5 minutes have elapsed since the start of the time effect. This is a process performed when it is determined that the time effect is not present, and is a process of setting a re-variation effect performed between 4 minutes 57 seconds and 5 minutes after the start of the time effect.

  Since the re-variation effect is the same effect as in the second embodiment, description thereof is omitted.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in S5005 that 5 minutes have passed since the time effect is started (S5005: Yes), the extended effect flag is set to ON (S5006), and then the effect mode is set to effect mode D. (S5007), and this process ends.

  Returning to S5004, the description will be continued. If it is determined in S5004 that the time effect period has ended (S5004: Yes), the normal period flag 223m is set to ON (S5009), and then the effect mode is set to effect mode A (S5010). Next, it is determined whether or not there is winning information in the winning information storage area 223a (S5011).

  The winning information storage area 223a stores the determination result that is stored on hold and the determination result that is currently changing, and a maximum of nine determination results are stored.

  If there is no jackpot information in the winning information storage area 223a (S5011: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, if there is jackpot information in the winning information storage area 223a (S5011: Yes), the time until the big hit change is calculated, and that time is set as the extension effect time in the extension effect time storage area 223q. It sets (S5012).

  Thereafter, a re-change effect is set (S5013), the extended effect flag 223p is set to ON (S5014), and the effect mode is set to effect mode C (S5015). Then, this process ends.

  The synchronous production management process 2 described above is the synchronous production management executed in the second embodiment described above in that the extended production setting process 2 is performed as a process related to the production mode D newly added in the present embodiment. Unlike the process (S1314 in FIG. 77), the other processes are the same.

  In this embodiment, even if the production mode D, that is, the time production period is 8 minutes, as in the other production modes, when the time production approaches 5 minutes (after 4 minutes and 57 seconds have elapsed), FIG. As shown in (a), the sign display mode in which the effect design is displayed with a slight shaking for 3 seconds (up to 5 minutes) is displayed. Therefore, the effect when the time effect period elapses 5 minutes can be made the same as the other pachinko machine 10 in which the effect mode B is set, and the sense of unity of the effect can be enhanced. Further, after the plurality of pachinko machines 10 perform the re-variation effect at the same timing, only the pachinko machine 10 for which the effect mode C or the effect mode D is selected performs the extension effect, and therefore the effect mode C or the effect A player who is playing the pachinko machine 10 in which the mode D is selected can feel the sense that his / her pachinko machine 10 has been selected and can immerse himself in superiority.

  In the control processing of the sound lamp control device 113 in the fourth embodiment described above, the time information acquired from the RTC 292 is used in the control related to the synchronous effect so that a plurality of pachinko machines 10 can provide a sense of unity. However, for example, in the case of enjoying a synchronized effect with only two adjacent units, the predetermined operation is executed by simultaneously performing a predetermined operation on the frame button 22 without using the RTC 292. The time production may be started from. By configuring in this way, it is possible to enjoy a time effect at a favorite timing, and to suppress a problem that the player gets bored with the game at an early stage.

  In addition, in this embodiment, the effect data (display mode) dedicated to the time effect is used, but the effect data for the time effect is set from the effect data (effect data in the normal state) used outside the time effect period. May be used. This makes it possible to reduce the amount of effect data. In the case of using such a configuration, it is preferable to provide means for limiting the production data set as the production data for the time production so that it is not displayed outside the time production period (normal state). Moreover, you may combine the synchronization method of the effect aspect mentioned above, respectively.

<Regarding Control Processing of Display Control Device 114 in Fourth Embodiment>
Next, referring to FIG. 147 and FIG. 148, among the controls executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, they are different from the controls executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 of the second embodiment described above. The point will be described. In the present embodiment, in the hold command process 2 (S2461 in FIG. 147), eight effects are generated in the process when a command related to the special continuation effect or the additional effect is received, and in the effect command process 2 (S2463 in FIG. 148). The point of difference is that a process when an effect command related to a special continuation effect or an additional effect is received is added. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the location same as each control performed by MPU231 of the display control apparatus 114 of 2nd Embodiment mentioned above, and description is abbreviate | omitted.

  First, with reference to FIG. 147, the hold command process 2 (S2461) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114 will be described. FIG. 147 is a flowchart showing the hold command process 2 (S2461).

  When the hold command process 2 (S2461) is executed, the processes from S2801 to S2807 are executed as in the second embodiment described above. If it is determined in S2805 that the received command is not an effect of eight (S2805: No), it is determined whether the received command is a special continuation effect (S2851). If it is determined that the received command is the special continuation effect (S2851: Yes), the corresponding reserved symbol is changed to the special continuation effect symbol and set in the display data table (S2852).

  On the other hand, if the received command is not a special continuation effect (S2851: No), it is determined whether the received command is an additional effect (S2853). If it is determined that the received command is not an additional effect (S2853: No), other hold display settings are executed (S2807), and this process ends.

  On the other hand, if the received command is an additional effect (S2853: Yes), the corresponding reserved symbol is changed to the additional effect symbol and set in the display data table (S2854). Then, other hold display settings are executed (S2807), and this process ends. The change to the additional effect design is to change to the “?” Design shown in FIG.

  The hold command processing 2 in the present embodiment is configured to process and set the received command related to the number of held and the received command related to the effect using the hold symbol at different timings. In other words, even if both a command related to the number of hold and a command related to the effect using the hold symbol are stored in the command buffer area, the command determination process (S2302 in FIG. 86) is performed after the command related to the hold number is first processed. , The command related to the effect using the reserved symbol is processed. By configuring in this way, when the reserved symbol is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, the normal reserved symbol is once displayed, and the displayed reserved symbol is then the effect symbol. It is possible to reliably perform display that changes. Therefore, the player can visually grasp that the number of reserved symbols has increased and the increased reserved symbols have changed to production symbols.

  The above configuration can be further effective by being executed with eight effects performed in the present embodiment. That is, the eight effects performed in the present embodiment are effects that can be executed when the number of reserved items reaches eight, and one effect mode (character string) is displayed using eight reserved symbols. (FIG. 111 (a)). When such a reserved symbol effect is performed, if the process of displaying the eighth reserved symbol and the process of displaying the eight effect are performed simultaneously, seven hold symbols are displayed on the display screen of the third symbol. There was a risk that the display would suddenly be switched to 8 effects. If the hold display is changed in this manner, it becomes difficult for the player to visually recognize that the eighth hold symbol has occurred. On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, even if both the command related to the number of reserved items and the command related to the production using the reserved symbols are stored in the command buffer area, first, after processing the command related to the reserved number, The command determination process (S2302 in FIG. 86) is looped, and then the command process related to the effect using the reserved symbol is performed, so that the time lag between the command process related to the reserved number and the command related to the effect using the reserved symbol Can be provided, and the above-described problems can be prevented.

  It should be noted that the period for displaying the eighth reserved symbol only needs to be such that the player can recognize the increased display of the reserved symbol (20 milliseconds or more). If necessary, the eighth reserved symbol is displayed. You may provide the process which provides time delay (it delays the timing which displays 8 effects) after displaying it until it displays 8 effects.

  Moreover, it is good to include the display data in which eight normal hold symbols are displayed at the beginning of the display data regarding the eight effect symbols set in the display data table in S2806 of FIG. By doing so, it is possible to reliably display eight normal reserved symbols when processing and displaying commands related to eight effects.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 148, the effect command process 2 (S2463) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 148 is a flowchart showing effect command processing 2 (S2463). This effect command process 2 is the addition of processes corresponding to commands for eight effects, special continuation effects, and additional effects to the effect command process (S2413 in FIG. 90) executed in the second embodiment described above. Since other parts are the same, description thereof is omitted.

  First, when the effect command process 2 (S2463) is executed, the effect command process (S2413) executed in the second embodiment described above is performed. The processing from S2901 to S2904 is executed. If it is determined in S2903 that the effect is not a pseudo extension effect (S2903: No), it is determined whether the received command is one of eight effects, a special continuation effect, or an additional effect (S2951). . If none of the eight effects, the special continuation effects, or the additional effects (S2951: No), the processes from S2907 to S2912 are executed in the same manner as in the second embodiment described above, and this process ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in S2951 that the received command is one of eight effects, special continuation effects, or additional effects (S2951: Yes), the eight effects corresponding to the command and the special continuation effects are provided. Alternatively, a display data table for additional effects is set in the display data table buffer.

  In the present embodiment, the technology for setting various effects display related to the variation of the third symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the time information acquired from the RTC 292 has been described. May be performed based on the time information acquired from the RTC 292. By doing so, the player concentrates on the game to feel a little uncomfortable feeling, and the motivation for the game can be increased.

  In addition to the effect display related to the variation of the third symbol, various effect displays may be set based on the time information acquired from the RTC 292. For example, in the effect related to the jackpot game, the start timing of the jackpot video and jackpot sound to be executed may be controlled by the time information acquired from the RTC 292. Specifically, the award game executed when the result of the determination made based on the ball entering the winning entrance (entrance entrance) is a determination result that provides a predetermined privilege (big hit) , A timing at which a bonus effect (a jackpot video, jackpot voice (BGM), etc.) provided as a bonus game is started is set to a predetermined timing (for example, 00 seconds per minute) based on time information acquired from the clock means (RTC292). Control). By configuring in this way, even if the adjacent pachinko machine 10 is a big hit with a slight time difference (for example, a time difference of about 30 seconds), the big hit effect (video and audio) executed during the big hit game is synchronized. Therefore, it is possible to provide an effect with a sense of unity even during the jackpot game.

  Furthermore, by synchronizing the timing of the effect that informs the gaming state after the jackpot game that is performed during the jackpot game (the effect that informs whether or not it will be in a promiscuous state after the jackpot game is finished), a more integrated effect can be achieved. It becomes possible to provide.

  Further, in the case where the effect during the jackpot game is synchronized based on the time information acquired from the RTC 292, even if the contents of the effect (video or audio) during the jackpot game are different between the adjacent pachinko machines 10. Good. For example, by providing a female pattern and a male pattern as the sound during a jackpot game, it is possible to provide effects with different contents by combining different effects depending on the synchronized effects during the jackpot game.

  In the present embodiment, a technique based on the time information acquired from the RTC 292 is used in order to execute an effect with a sense of unity in the adjacent pachinko machine 10, but other techniques may be employed. For example, an informing unit that informs the pachinko machine 10 of information based on the game in an identifiable manner (information indicating that the jackpot game is being played or information indicating that the determination result of whether or not the hit determination result is a big hit is stored in a light-emitting manner. Display unit) and a detection unit (light detection sensor) for detecting a notification mode of the notification unit, and information notified to the notification unit by the pachinko machine 10 is displayed on the pachinko machine 10 adjacent to the pachinko machine 10. Even if it comprises so that the information based on the game of the adjacent pachinko machine 10 can be discriminate | determined by a detection part detecting, and the adjoining pachinko machine 10 synchronizes based on the discrimination result Good. With this configuration, for example, in the adjacent pachinko machine 10, it is possible to execute an effect such that one of them is a big hit in a synchronized manner.

<Fifth Embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 149 to 159, a pachinko machine 10 according to a fifth embodiment will be described. In the fifth embodiment, the display control related to the fourth embodiment described above in which the configuration of the distribution unit 1164 is related to the third symbol display device 81 (main screen) and the spherical liquid crystal device 670 (sub-screen) is the third embodiment. It differs from a form, About another structure, it is the same as each embodiment mentioned above. The same parts are denoted by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof is omitted.

  The difference between the configuration of the distribution unit 1164 of the fifth embodiment and that of the fourth embodiment will be described in detail. The configuration is such that the balls that have entered the distribution unit 1164 are distributed in three directions, and the through gate 67 (1067). Are different from each other in the distribution unit 1164.

  Further, the difference from the third embodiment in the display control of the fifth embodiment will be described in detail. A pseudo variation display is displayed on the sub liquid crystal based on the determination result of the determination result of the stored / not-held. The display control is different from the point that the display contents displayed on the main liquid crystal and the sub liquid crystal can be switched.

  FIG. 149 is a front view of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 according to the fifth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 149, below the variable display device unit 80 provided on the front surface of the game board 13, a distribution unit 1164 into which a ball can enter is disposed. The balls that have entered the distribution unit 1164 are configured to be distributed to a first winning port 1964a, a left second winning port 1964b, or a through gate 1067, which will be described later.

  Here, the configuration of the distribution unit 1164 will be described with reference to FIG. 150A and 150B are diagrams showing the internal structure of the distribution unit 1164. FIG. Since the structure of the two distribution members 1900 and 1950 provided in the distribution unit 1164 is the same as that of the distribution member 900 used in the above-described fourth embodiment, the description thereof is omitted. For convenience of describing this embodiment, different reference numerals are given.

  First, the flow when a sphere enters the distribution unit 1164 will be described with reference to FIG. The ball that has entered the distribution unit 1164 passes through the ball sensor 1164, and the ball is stored in the storage portion 1900c of the first distribution member 1900 provided in the upper part of the distribution unit 1164. It flows down while rotating 1900 clockwise, is guided to the guiding member 1900z2, and is accommodated in the accommodating portion 1950c of the second distributing member 1950.

  The balls accommodated in the accommodating portion 1950c of the second distribution member 1950 flow down while rotating the second distribution member 1950 clockwise by its own weight, and enter the first winning opening 1964a. Next, the ball that has entered the sorting unit 1164 is housed in the housing portion 1900a of the first sorting member, flows down while rotating the first sorting member 1900 counterclockwise, is guided to the guiding member 1900z1, and the through gate 1067 is passed through. pass. The ball that has passed through the through gate 1067 passes through a hole (not shown) provided on the surface of the game board 13 and flows down to the back surface of the pachinko machine 10.

  Then, the ball that has entered the sorting unit 1164 is housed in the first sorting member housing portion 1900c, flows down while rotating the first sorting member 1900 clockwise, is guided to the guiding member 1900z2, and is second sorted. The member 1950 is accommodated in the accommodating portion 1950a.

  The ball accommodated in the accommodating portion 1950a of the second distribution member 1950 flows down while rotating the second distribution member 1950 counterclockwise by its own weight, and enters the second left winning port 1964b. Then, the ball that has entered the distribution unit 1164 passes through the through gate 1067 along the same path as the flow passing through the through gate 1067 described above.

  As described above, the distribution unit 1164 used in the present embodiment repeatedly distributes the balls that have entered the balls in the order of the first winning port 1964a → the through gate 1067 → the second left winning port 1964b → the through gate 1067. It is configured as follows.

  In this way, by providing a plurality of winning holes and through gates in one distribution unit 1164, it becomes possible to make the installation space of various devices (winning holes, through gates, etc.) provided on the game board surface compact. Furthermore, it is possible to provide the pachinko machine 10 which improves the interest of the further game by performing decoration and production using the vacant space on the game board surface.

  Furthermore, in the distribution unit 1164 in this embodiment, two distribution members having the same configuration as the distribution member 900 used in the distribution unit 1064 of the fourth embodiment described above are provided, so that the balls are distributed in three directions. Therefore, it is possible to use the same sorting member for the two-way and three-way ball distribution in the distribution unit according to the game play of the pachinko machine 10, thereby reducing the cost. It becomes possible.

  The distribution unit 1164 in this embodiment uses a configuration in which the ball distribution destination is changed by the weight of the flowing ball, but a configuration in which the ball distribution destination is changed using an electrical drive source may be used. Good.

  In the distribution unit 1164 in the present embodiment, the ratio of distribution to the first winning port 1964a, the second left winning port 1964b, and the through gate 1067 is. Although the one-to-one-to-one-to-two ratio is used, a configuration in which all of them are uniformly distributed may be used.

  In this embodiment, a ball detection sensor 1164 that detects a ball that has entered the distribution unit 1164 is provided. This is used for control to detect a clogged ball in the distribution unit 1164, and a ball that has entered the distribution unit 1164 within a predetermined time passes through the through gate 1067, the first winning port 1964a, or the left second winning port. This control is performed by discriminating whether the ball enters any of 1964b. Each of the through gate 1067, the first winning opening 1964a, and the left second winning opening 1964b is provided with a detection sensor (not shown) that detects that a ball has entered (passed).

  Furthermore, in this embodiment, in order to discover an act of illegally operating the sorting members 1900 and 1950 provided in the sorting unit 1164 and guiding the ball that has entered the sorting unit 1164 to a specific location, the through gate 1067 is used. The order of entering (passing) the first winning opening 1964a or the left second winning opening 1964b is memorized and compared with the entering order mechanically distributed by the distributing unit 1164. Judging.

  In addition, when the detection sensor which detects the ball | bowl which entered the left 2nd winning hole 1964b and the right 2nd winning hole 640 collectively is provided, a ball | bowl can enter the right 2nd winning hole 640. In a gaming state (during time reduction, during probability change, etc.), control is performed so as not to perform the above-described fraud discrimination. By doing so, it is possible to easily find the act of restricting the rotation of the sorting members 1900 and 1950 and causing the game ball to continuously enter a specific location (for example, the second left winning opening 1964b). it can.

  Moreover, in order to prevent the above-mentioned fraudulent act, it is preferable that the ball is allowed to flow down only when the sorting members 1900 and 1950 are rotated. Specifically, in the distribution unit 1164 shown in FIG. 150 (a), a portion is formed in which the distance between the top of the wall surface constituting the distribution member housing portion and the inner wall of the distribution unit 1164 is less than one sphere. The distribution unit 1164 may be configured as described above. With this configuration, the ball cannot flow down within the sorting unit 1164 unless the sorting member rotates, and therefore the act of causing the ball to flow down to a specific location with the turning of the sorting member restricted. Can be prevented.

  Next, effect control displayed on the third symbol display device 81 of the pachinko machine 10 in the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 151 is a time chart for explaining a flow related to a special symbol variation effect performed using a third symbol display device 81 (main screen) and a spherical liquid crystal device 670 (sub-screen) described later. As shown in FIG. 151, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment indicates that the game ball has won a prize at the entrance, and the main variation (variation based on the variation pattern command) displayed in association with the variation of the special symbol. It is configured to be able to execute pre-pseudo variation that is variably displayed based on the winning command shown.

  First, the special symbol variation period shown in FIG. 151 is a period during which the special symbol is variably displayed on the first symbol display device 37. Variation periods of special symbols corresponding to winnings 1 to 5 to be described later are indicated as fluctuations 1 to 5, respectively. The number of reserved balls for a special symbol is the number that holds the determination result of the special symbol, and the ball wins a prize at the first entrance or the second entrance when the special symbol is fluctuating or a big hit game. Will increase, and will decrease when a new special symbol change starts.

  The winning indicates whether or not a ball has won at the first entrance or the second entrance. In FIG. 151, for convenience of explanation, the first winning ball is shown as winning 1, hereinafter winning 2, winning 3, winning 4, and winning 5.

  The 1st entrance or the 2nd entrance is configured to determine whether or not the jackpot game is won when the ball enters, and to pay out the winning ball. Is not performed when the number of balls entered exceeds the number of reserved memories. On the other hand, the payout of prize balls is executed for all incoming balls. Here, a ball that enters each entrance and can receive a payout of a prize ball is indicated as an entrance, and a ball that enters each entrance and receives a winning / no-win game determination The description will be continued below.

  On the lower side of the time chart of FIG. 151, the third symbol variation 1 which is a variation display of the third symbol dynamically displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (main screen) and the spherical liquid crystal device 670 (sub-screen). From FIG. 3, the third symbol variation 5 is shown.

  The third symbol variation is composed of a main variation corresponding to the variation of the special symbol and a prior pseudo variation corresponding to the reception timing of the winning command, and this variation is displayed on the spherical liquid crystal device on the third symbol display device 81. 670 is configured to execute pre-pseudo variation.

  Pre-pseudo variation means that the variation content of the third symbol is determined based on the information included in the winning command, and the period before the actual variation is started (the remaining variation time of the variation display where the variation has already started, The third symbol is fluctuated in a pseudo manner using a period in which the variation time corresponding to the reserved symbol stored in advance is combined.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 151, the winning timing of the ball and the variation timing of the third symbol will be described. First, when a winning 1 occurs when the number of reserved balls of the special symbol is 0, the special symbol variation (variation 1) is started, and the third symbol display device 81 starts the main variation of the third symbol. (This variation of the third symbol variation 1). Then, when winning 2 occurs while the variation 1 is being performed, the number of reserved balls of the special symbol increases to 1. Based on the occurrence of the winning 2, the preliminary pseudo variation of the third symbol variation 2 is started on the spherical liquid crystal device 670 (sub-screen). Thereafter, when winning 3 is generated, the number of special symbol reserved balls is increased to 2, and a preliminary pseudo variation of the third symbol variation 3 is generated, but the spherical liquid crystal device 670 (sub-screen) continues to have the third symbol variation 2 Pre-pseudo variation is displayed.

  In the present embodiment, when the preliminary simulated variation is duplicated, the preliminary simulated variation corresponding to the reserved symbol selected by the player is displayed on the spherical liquid crystal device 670, and the player does not select the reserved symbol. Then, the preliminary pseudo variation corresponding to the reserved symbol for which the next variation is started is displayed on the spherical liquid crystal device 670. In addition, this figure demonstrates the case where a player does not select a holding symbol. Therefore, even at the timing when the winning 3 is generated, the prior pseudo fluctuation of the third symbol fluctuation 2 based on the winning 2 where the main fluctuation is started next is displayed.

  Note that the method of displaying the prior pseudo variation on the spherical liquid crystal device 670 (sub-screen) is not limited to the display method of the present embodiment. For example, all the prior pseudo variations can be displayed simultaneously. Alternatively, a plurality of pre-pseudo fluctuations displayed at the same time may be displayed as selected by the player. Further, only when the player selects the prior pseudo-variable display, the prior pseudo-variable may be displayed on the spherical liquid crystal device 670 (sub-screen), or when the player does not select the prior pseudo-variable display. The prior pseudo-variable display corresponding to the reserved symbol in which the effect (prefetching effect) with a high degree of expectation of jackpot is being executed may be displayed.

  When the variation 1 of the special symbol ends and the timing at which the variation 2 starts, the number of reserved balls of the special symbol decreases by one, and the third symbol variation 2 is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (main screen). This variation is started, and the preliminary pseudo variation of the third symbol variation 3 is started on the spherical liquid crystal device 670 (sub-screen). At this timing, the third symbol variation 2 is switched from the preliminary pseudo variation performed in the spherical liquid crystal device 670 (sub-screen) to the main variation performed in the third symbol display device. In order to eliminate a sense of incongruity in the switching of the display, an effect of fading out the variation display of the prior pseudo variation is performed in accordance with the timing when the prior pseudo variation is completed (the timing when the previous main variation is stopped). By doing in this way, it becomes possible to continue the effect of the prior pseudo fluctuation performed in the spherical liquid crystal device 670 and the effect of the main fluctuation performed in the third symbol display device without a sense of incongruity. Moreover, the uncomfortable feeling is also eliminated by making the background in which the third symbol variation is performed the same between the prior pseudo variation and the main variation. Thereafter, the same processing is performed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 152 and FIG. 153, a display screen on which the prior pseudo variation of the third symbol variation and the main variation are performed will be described. FIG. 152 (a) is a schematic diagram showing a state in which the main variation is performed in the third symbol display device 81 as the main screen and the prior pseudo variation is performed in the spherical liquid crystal device 670 as the sub screen.

  The third symbol display device 81 (hereinafter referred to as the main screen) displays the variation of the third symbol in the main display area Dm and displays the reserved symbol in the sub display area Ds as in the second embodiment described above. The description of the same contents is omitted.

  On the main screen in the present embodiment, a mark (black circle) is displayed on the reserved symbol displayed in the sub display area Ds so that the reserved symbol corresponding to the pre-pseudo fluctuation currently being performed can be identified. Yes. In FIG. 152 (a), it is displayed that the prior pseudo-variation corresponding to the reserved symbol “1” is being performed in the spherical liquid crystal device 670 (hereinafter referred to as a sub screen). By using such a configuration, the player can easily grasp which reserved symbol corresponds to which of the reserved symbols among a plurality of reserved symbols. In addition, the reserved symbol “3” is displayed in a mode different from the other reserved symbols, indicating that the degree of expectation of jackpot is high.

  In addition, “screen switching push” is displayed on the right side of the sub display area Ds. This is a display for notifying the player that the display contents of the main screen and the sub screen can be switched. The configuration for switching between the main screen and the sub screen will be described later.

  FIG. 152 (b) is a schematic diagram showing a state in which prior pseudo fluctuation is performed on the main screen and main fluctuation is performed on the sub screen. FIG. 152 (b) is displayed in the image and sub-symbol displayed in the main symbol by operating the frame button 22 and executing the screen switching operation in the state where FIG. 152 (a) is displayed. The image is switched. Specifically, the image data displayed on the main display area Dm of the main screen is switched between the image data displayed on the sub-screen and the sub-display area Ds is displayed as shown in FIG. ). In this way, by switching the contents displayed on the main screen and the sub screen by the player's operation, the player can select an effect that he / she is interested in and can view the effect on the main screen. It becomes like this.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 105, the main screen has a size about six times that of the sub screen, and the variable display displayed on the main screen is overwhelming. Can be provided. In pachinko machines equipped with screens of different sizes, using this configuration, the player is interested in a variety of changes displayed simultaneously (main change and prior pseudo change). Since the display can be selected and the selected variation display can be displayed on the main screen, a desired effect can be provided to the player on a more powerful screen.

  FIG. 153 (a) is a schematic diagram showing a state in which prior pseudo fluctuation is performed on the main screen and main fluctuation is performed on the sub screen. FIG. 153 (a) shows a state in which the player changes the target of preliminary pseudo-change from the reserved symbol “1” to the reserved symbol “3” in the state where FIG. 152 (b) is displayed. The reserved symbol that is subject to prior pseudo-variation is configured to be selectable by the player operating the frame button 22, and a mark (black circle) is placed on the reserved symbol “3” selected by the player. Is attached.

  The main screen displays a pre-pseudo fluctuation corresponding to the reserved symbol “3”, and a mode “chance!” Indicating that the expectation of jackpot is high.

  FIG. 153 (b) is a schematic diagram showing a state in which the main variation using the reserved symbol that is the target of the prior pseudo variation selected in FIG. 153 (a) is performed on the main screen. As shown in this figure, when the main fluctuation using the reserved symbol selected as the target of the prior pseudo-variation is started and when the preliminary pseudo-variation ends, each fluctuation is displayed on the main screen. The display contents on the display screen are automatically switched. Further, the mode “chance!”, Which is displayed from the prior pseudo-variation display and indicates that the expectation degree of jackpot is high, is also continuously displayed in this variation display. By configuring in this way, even if the pre-fluctuation change changes to the main change, it is possible to provide an effect with continuity and prevent the player from being confused. .

  In this figure, since there is no reserved symbol, the preliminary pseudo-variable display is not performed on the sub screen. As described above, when the prior pseudo-variable display is not performed, it is preferable to use the sub screen as an effect of the main variation display displayed on the main screen.

  As described above, the prior variation display and the main variation display executed on the main screen and the sub screen have been described using the schematic diagrams of the respective screens, but the following can be considered as effects displayed on each screen. .

  First, even if the display time of this variation display is set to be short, that is, the variation time of the special symbol is set to be short, sufficiently inform the player whether or not the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit. In order to make it possible to select, the pre-pseudo-fluctuation effect that shows the expected degree of the lottery result of the corresponding special symbol (for example, the comment display effect that suggests the stop symbol of the third symbol or the character equipment is selected and determined) Expected result suggestion effect, and in this variation effect, a result display effect is provided as an effect to display the lottery result (an effect that the third symbol stops or an effect that the character attacks the enemy) .

  Even if this variation time is set to be short in order to increase the efficiency of the game by performing such an effect, by performing the expectation suggestion effect by the prior pseudo variation effect, the player can draw the special symbol lottery result We can wait while enjoying being displayed.

  Secondly, when the display mode of the reserved symbol displayed on the third display device 81 is selected so that the player can experience the effect desired by the player for as long as possible. The display mode (for example, displaying a plurality of characters) that suggests the content of the displayed prior pseudo-variation is displayed, and when the player selects a desired reserved symbol, the character displayed in the selected reserved symbol appears. The effect to be displayed is displayed in advance pseudo-variation.

  By performing such an effect, the player can enjoy a desired effect as a prior pseudo-variable effect while performing a lottery game with a special symbol as before. In addition, since the desired effect is provided by using the prior pseudo-change effect instead of the actual effect, it is possible to experience the desired effect for a long time.

  In addition, it is possible to achieve further effects by setting so that the character that appeared in the prior pseudo-variation effect also appears in the main variation effect using the reserved symbol corresponding to the prior pseudo-variation effect Become.

  As described above, the prior pseudo variation effect of the present embodiment has been described, but a configuration other than the above-described configuration may be adopted as long as the configuration has the same effect.

  For example, in this embodiment, the display of the sub display area Ds is displayed on the main screen without switching so that the player is not confused, but the display of the sub display area Ds may be switched together. By doing in this way, it becomes possible to reduce the processing burden regarding generation of image data in the display control device 114.

  Note that the prior pseudo variation used in the present embodiment includes not only the variation of the third symbol but also the mode displayed in the main display area Dm with the variation of the third symbol. Story development and background image changes are also included.

  The operation for switching between the main screen and the sub screen may be configured to be valid only within a predetermined period. For example, it is preferable that the screen can be switched only while the third symbol corresponding to this variation is changing at high speed. By doing in this way, it is not necessary to switch the screen during a period in which processing related to games is concentrated (period during which processing related to stop display of the third symbol is performed), and the processing load on the control device can be reduced.

  Further, in a state where the prior pseudo fluctuation is being executed on the sub-screen, it may be configured to be able to select a reserved symbol that is a target of the prior pseudo fluctuation.

  In the present embodiment, the preliminary pseudo variation effect corresponding to the reserved symbol of the special symbol is executed on the sub-screen. However, for example, the preliminary pseudo variation effect corresponding to the reserved symbol of the normal symbol may be performed. In particular, in the pachinko machine 10 having a configuration in which the start winning of the special symbol and the start winning of the normal symbol are regularly distributed like the distribution unit 1164 described in the present embodiment, the reserved symbol of the normal symbol is displayed. Since the predetermined number can be maintained, it is possible to enjoy the pre-pseudo fluctuation effect.

<Electric Configuration in Fifth Embodiment>
Next, the electrical configuration of the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In the present embodiment, the point that the spherical liquid crystal device 670 is connected to the display control device 114 and the content of the RAM 233 of the display control device 114 are changed with respect to the third embodiment described above. Is different. Since the other points are the same as those of the third embodiment described above, detailed description thereof is omitted.

  First, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 according to the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 154 is a block diagram illustrating an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 according to the fifth embodiment.

  This embodiment is different from the third embodiment described above in that it clearly indicates that the spherical liquid crystal device 670 is connected to the display control device 114. In the present embodiment, a ball entrance sensor 1164a shown in FIG. 150 is newly provided, but it is handled as a part of various switches 208.

  FIG. 155 is a block diagram illustrating an electrical configuration of the display control device 114 of the pachinko machine 10 according to the fifth embodiment. This embodiment is different from the above-described third embodiment in that a switching flag 233o is provided in the RAM 233 of the display control device 114.

  The switching flag 233o is a flag used to determine whether to switch the display between the main screen (third symbol display device 81) and the sub screen (spherical liquid crystal device 670), and is a command executed by the display control device 114. In the determination process 2, when it is determined that there is a switching command, it is set to ON (S2556 in FIG. 158), and in the command determination process 2, the identification number corresponding to the pre-pseudo-variable effect is assigned. When it is determined that there is a variation pattern command, it is set to OFF (S2554 in FIG. 158).

<Control Process Performed by Audio Lamp Control Device in Fifth Embodiment>
Next, a control process executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 in the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 156 and 157. The fifth embodiment is different from the above-described fourth embodiment in that a preliminary pseudo variation setting process is executed in the main process. Since the other points are the same, the same parts are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof is omitted.

  First, the main process 3 executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 156 is a flowchart showing the main process 3 in the fifth embodiment. This main process 3 is similar to the main process 2 (see FIG. 133) in the fourth embodiment described above, and executes the processes from S1301 to S1354, and then performs the prior pseudo fluctuation setting process (S1355) added in the present embodiment. Run. Then, similarly to the main process 2 described above, the processes from S1317 to S1321 are executed, and this process is repeated.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 157, the prior pseudo fluctuation setting process (S1355) will be described. FIG. 157 is a flowchart showing the prior pseudo fluctuation setting process (S1355). This pre-pseudo fluctuation setting process (S1355) is a process for setting the pre-pseudo fluctuation displayed on the main screen and the sub screen based on the winning command and the player's operation.

  When the pre-pseudo-variation setting process (S1355) is set, it is first determined whether or not a special symbol winning command has been received (S5101). If a special symbol winning command has not been received (S5101: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, when a special symbol winning command is received (S5101: Yes), a pre-pseudo-variable effect is selected based on the winning command (S5102).

  In S5102, it is analyzed whether the information included in the winning command is jackpot, missed super reach, or missed, and a predetermined variation pattern is selected from the variation pattern selection table 222a based on the analysis result. Note that the variation pattern selection table 222 of the present embodiment also stores a plurality of variation patterns of prior pseudo variation effects. The selected variation pattern is temporarily stored in the RAM 223 of the sound lamp control device 113.

  Next, it is determined whether or not a reserved symbol is selected (S5103). This is to determine whether or not the player is selecting and operating a reserved symbol for which a pre-pseudo-variable effect is to be executed from among a plurality of reserved symbols, and can be selected by operating the frame button 22 doing.

  If it is determined in S5103 that the reserved symbol is not selected (S5103: No), the identification information corresponding to the oldest reserved symbol and the pre-pseudo variation effect are set (S5107). The oldest reserved symbol is a reserved symbol corresponding to the oldest reserved memory in the information stored on hold. In other words, the special symbol whose change starts after the special symbol that is currently changing is stopped. A reserved symbol corresponding to a symbol.

  Further, the identification information is given so that individual winning information can be identified, and is information that allows various commands created based on a single ball winning at the entrance to be linked. It is given to the header part of each command. Based on this identification information, a command (holding ball number command, winning command) created in the start winning process (see FIG. 61) executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, and a special symbol variation starting process (see FIG. 60). ) Commands having different transmission timings such as commands (variation pattern commands, stop type commands) created in (1) can be linked by the MPU 211 of the audio lamp control device 113.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in S5103 that the reserved symbol has been selected (S5103: Yes), identification information corresponding to the selected reserved symbol and a prior pseudo-variable effect are set.

  Next, it is determined whether a switching operation has been performed (S5105). This is to determine whether or not an operation for switching the display content between the main screen and the sub screen has been performed. When it is determined that there is no switching operation (S5105: No), this processing is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that there is a switching operation (S5105: Yes), a switching command is set (S5106), and this process is terminated.

  Next, the command determination process 2 (S2352) executed by the MPU 221 of the display control apparatus 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 158 is a flowchart showing the command determination process 2 (S2352). The command determination process 2 (S2352) is a process executed in the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 221 of the display control device 114. The V interrupt process is the same as that in the second embodiment described above. Therefore, the description is omitted.

  Further, the processing from S2404 to S2417 executed in the command determination processing is executed in the other command processing (S2553) in the command determination processing 2, and the description of the contents is omitted.

  When the command determination process 2 (S2352) is executed, the processes from S2401 to S2403 are performed similarly to the command determination process executed in the second embodiment described above. And it is discriminate | determined whether there exists the display variation pattern command to which the identification information corresponding to a prior pseudo variation production is provided (S2551). If it is determined that there is no variation pattern command to which identification information corresponding to the prior pseudo variation effect is given (S2551: No), it is then determined whether there is a switching command (S2552). If there is no switching command (S2552: No), other command processing is executed (S2553), and this processing is looped.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in S2551 that there is a display variation pattern command to which identification information corresponding to the prior pseudo variation effect is given (S2552: Yes), the switching flag 233o is set to OFF (S2554). ), The pre-pseudo fluctuation effect is ended (S2555). Then, the process proceeds to S2552.

  If it is determined in S2552 that there is a switching command (S2552: Yes), the switching flag 233o is set to ON, and the process proceeds to S2553.

  By setting the switching flag 233o by the command determination processing 2 described above, it is possible to switch the display content between the main screen and the sub screen in the drawing processing described later. Also, in order to end the pre-pseudo variation effect using the identification information given to the variation pattern command transmitted from the main controller 110, in the gaming machine in which the variation time of the special symbol changes depending on the number of symbols retained at the beginning of the variation Even if there is, it becomes possible to execute the prior pseudo-variation until immediately before the start of the main variation.

  Next, the rendering process 2 (S2356) executed by the MPU 221 of the display control apparatus 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 159 is a flowchart showing the drawing process 2 (S2356). The drawing process 2 (S2356) is a process performed to switch display contents between the main screen and the sub screen.

  In the drawing process 2 (S2356), first, a first drawing list is generated (S3901). The first drawing list is a drawing list related to the variation display (main variation display) of the third symbol performed in response to the variation of the special symbol. Next, a second drawing list is generated (S3902). The second drawing list is a drawing list related to the variation display (preliminary pseudo variation display) of the third symbol set based on the special symbol winning command.

  And it is discriminate | determined whether the switch flag 233o is set to ON (S3903). If the switching flag 233o is set to ON (S3903: Yes), the first drawing list and the drawing target buffer information are transmitted to the image controller with the output destination as the sub-screen (S3904). Then, the output destination is the main screen, and the second drawing list and drawing target buffer information are transmitted to the image controller (S3905). That is, when the player operates the frame button 22 to switch the display content between the main screen and the sub screen, the switching flag is set to ON, and an image based on the first drawing list generated in S3901 is displayed on the sub screen. The image based on the second drawing list generated in S3902 is displayed on the main screen.

  Thereafter, the drawing target buffer flag is updated (S3906), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, if the switching flag 233o is not set to ON (S3903: No), the first drawing list and drawing target buffer information are transmitted to the image controller with the output destination as the main screen (S3907). Then, using the output destination as a sub-screen, the second drawing list and drawing target buffer information are transmitted to the image controller (S3908), and the process proceeds to S3906.

  By using the prior pseudo variation described above, it is possible to solve the problems of the prior art described below.

  Conventionally, there has been an effect of changing the mode of a reserved symbol based on information included in a winning command. By using this conventional technology, it is possible to notify the player that there is a high expectation that the determination result of the success / failure determination result is a big hit among the reserved symbols stored on hold, Until the start of the change of the special symbol based on the reserved memory having a high expectation level that is a big hit, it is necessary to continue to see the change display of the third symbol corresponding to the change of the other special symbols. In recent years, there are also pachinko machines that can receive a lot of pass / fail judgments by shortening the variation time of special symbols, but with such pachinko machines, the third symbol corresponding to the variation of special symbols The fluctuation display of the game is also shortened, and there is a problem that the game is not interesting.

  With respect to the above-described problem, in the present embodiment, prior pseudo-variation is performed before the actual variation corresponding to the winning command is started based on information included in the winning command, so that the expectation level that is a big hit is From the time a prize command corresponding to a high hold memory is received until the actual fluctuation corresponding to the prize command is started, the preliminary pseudo fluctuation created based on the information included in the prize command is displayed. The player can view the variation display of the third symbol based on the reserved memory with a high expectation of jackpot while the third variation of the third symbol based on the other reserved memory is being performed. Thus, it becomes possible to give interest to the variable display of the third symbol. Furthermore, by setting the special symbol variation time short, even if the main variation time of the third symbol is shortened, the variation time of the third symbol based on one prize is lengthened by providing a preliminary pseudo variation. It is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  Further, the present invention may be implemented in a pachinko machine of a type different from the above embodiment. For example, once a big hit, a pachinko machine that raises the expected value of the big hit until a big hit state occurs (for example, two times or three times) including that (for example, a two-time right item, a three-time right item) May also be implemented. Further, after the jackpot symbol is displayed, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value on the condition that a ball is won in a predetermined area. Further, the present invention may be implemented in a pachinko machine that has a special area such as a V-zone and has a special gaming state as a necessary condition for winning a ball in the special area. Further, in addition to the slot machine and the pachinko machine, the game machine may be implemented as various game machines such as an alepacchi, a sparrow ball, a game machine in which a so-called pachinko machine and a slot machine are integrated.

  As a specific example of a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are integrated, a display device that displays a fixed display of symbols after variably displaying a symbol string composed of a plurality of symbols is provided, and a handle for ball launching is not provided. Things. In this case, after throwing a predetermined amount of spheres based on a predetermined operation (button operation), for example, the change of the symbol is started due to the operation of the operation lever, for example, due to the operation of the stop switch, or With the passage of time, the variation of the symbol is stopped, and a special game that gives a predetermined game value to the player is generated on the condition that the determined symbol at the time of stoppage is a so-called jackpot symbol. In this case, a large amount of balls are paid out to the lower tray. If such a gaming machine is used in place of a slot machine, only a ball can be handled as a gaming value in the gaming hall. Therefore, the gaming value seen in the current gaming hall in which pachinko machines and slot machines are mixed is used. Problems such as the burden on equipment due to the separate handling of medals and balls and restrictions on the location of the gaming machine can be solved.

  Moreover, you may comprise so that the structure of said each embodiment may be implemented combining all or one part.

  You may comprise combining some or all of each above-described embodiment and its modification. Moreover, although comprised with the some control apparatus, you may make it comprise not only that but one integrated control apparatus.

  The concept of various inventions included in the above-described embodiment in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention is shown below.

<About the concept of the invention taking the protruding operation unit 400 as an example>
In a gaming machine including a driving unit that generates a driving force and a displacement member that is displaced by the driving force generated by the driving unit, the displacement member is formed to be rotatable between a retracted position and a rotating position. A base-side displacement member that is disposed on the base-side displacement member and is formed so as to be displaceable between a reference position and an overhanging position projecting outward from the base-side displacement member with respect to the reference position. A displacement member, and a first operation for rotating the proximal displacement member between the retracted position and the rotational position, and the relative displacement member with respect to the proximal displacement member at the reference position and the extended position. A game machine A1 that is capable of executing a second action that is displaced between each other.

  Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is known a gaming machine that produces an effect by rotating a displacement member around a base end side rotatably supported (Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2011-92634). For example, see paragraphs 0175-0189, FIG. 83)). According to this gaming machine, by rotating the displacement member in one direction, the distal end side of the displacement member is disposed at a predetermined position which is the front surface of the liquid crystal display device, while the displacement member is in a direction opposite to the one direction. By rotating in the other direction, the displacement member is retracted out of the display area (retreat position) of the liquid crystal display device. However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, if the outer shape of the displacement member is small, it is difficult to make the displacement member fully visible to the player at a predetermined position on the front surface of the liquid crystal display device, and the effect of presentation is sufficiently exerted. On the other hand, if the outer shape of the displacement member is large, there is a problem that a large space is required outside the display area (retracted position). The gaming machine A1 is made to solve the above-described problems, and allows the player to sufficiently recognize the displacement member at a predetermined position while suppressing the space required for the retracted position. An object is to provide a gaming machine.

  That is, according to the gaming machine A1, the displacement member is disposed on the base side displacement member that is formed to be rotatable between the retracted position and the rotation position, and the reference position and the reference position are disposed on the base side displacement member. A relative displacement member formed so as to be displaceable between the projecting positions projecting outward from the base side displacement member, and a first operation for rotating the base side displacement member between the retracted position and the rotational position; Since the second operation of displacing the relative displacement member relative to the base displacement member between the reference position and the extended position can be executed, the base displacement member at the retracted position is rotated by the first operation. When disposing at the position, the relative displacement member at the reference position is disposed at the projecting position by the second operation, so that the relative displacement member can be projected outward from the base side displacement member. Therefore, since the displacement member can be enlarged as a whole, the displacement member can be sufficiently visually recognized by the player at the rotational position, and the effect of the effect can be sufficiently exhibited.

  On the other hand, when the base side displacement member at the rotation position is arranged at the retracted position by the first operation, the relative displacement member by the extended position is arranged at the reference position by the second operation, whereby the base of the relative displacement member is arranged. The outward protrusion from the side displacement member can be suppressed. Therefore, since the displacement member can be reduced as a whole, the space required to accommodate the displacement member at the retracted position can be suppressed. As a result, it is possible to secure a space for disposing other parts and devices.

  The second operation may be performed at least until the second operation is arranged at the retracted position (that is, until the first operation is completed). Therefore, at least a part of the first operation and at least a part of the second operation may be executed in an overlapping manner.

  The gaming machine A1 includes a front member that is disposed in front of a moving plane of the displacement member and that has an opening, and the relative displacement when the base-side displacement member 440 is disposed at the rotational position by the first operation. When at least a part of the member is visible to the player through the opening of the front member, and the relative displacement member is disposed at the extended position by the second operation, the front member of the relative displacement member A gaming machine A2 characterized in that an area visible to the player through the opening is enlarged.

  According to the gaming machine A2, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine A1, the relative displacement member that has been retracted to the retracted position is first caused to appear in the opening of the front member by a rotational motion (first operation), and the relative displacement is achieved. Making the player visually recognize only a part of the member, and then performing an effect of enlarging the region in which the player can visually recognize the relative displacement member through the opening of the front member by a linear motion (second motion). Can do.

  In the gaming machine A2, the relative displacement member is slidably disposed on the base side displacement member, and the second operation is performed by moving the relative displacement member relative to the base side displacement member with the reference position and the overhang. A gaming machine A3 that is slid and displaced between positions.

  According to the gaming machine A3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A2, the relative displacement member is slidably disposed on the base side displacement member, and the second operation is performed with respect to the base side displacement member. Since the slide displacement is performed between the reference position and the overhang position, for example, the relative movement member is stretched from the reference position as compared with a case where the second operation is a mode in which the relative displacement member is rotated with respect to the base displacement member. A space necessary for displacing to the extended position can be suppressed, and accordingly, a space for disposing other parts and devices can be secured. In addition, since the displacement mode of the relative displacement member by the second motion can be made different from the displacement mode of the base displacement member by the first motion, the effect of performing the first motion and the second motion Can be increased.

  In the gaming machine A3, the relative displacement member is disposed in a posture along the longitudinal direction of the base displacement member, and the direction of the slide displacement is a direction along the longitudinal direction. A gaming machine A4 characterized by this.

  According to the gaming machine A4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A3, the relative displacement member is arranged in a posture along the longitudinal direction of the base side displacement member, and the direction of the slide displacement is mutually mutual. Since it is set as the direction along the longitudinal direction, the displacement member can be expanded and contracted as a whole by the slide displacement along the longitudinal direction of the relative displacement member with respect to the base side displacement member. Therefore, in the rotation position, the displacement member is enlarged as a whole by extension, so that the player can be made fully visible, and the effect can be sufficiently exhibited. On the other hand, at the retracted position, the displacement member can be made smaller as a whole by shortening, so that the space required to accommodate the displacement member can be suppressed, and a space for arranging other parts and devices is secured. can do.

  In addition, according to the gaming machine A4, the relative displacement member that has been retracted to the retracted position first appears from the side of the opening of the front member by a rotational motion (first operation), and a part of the relative displacement member Only the player can visually recognize only, and then the linear movement (second operation) is extended toward the opening of the front member to enlarge the area where the player can visually recognize the relative displacement member. be able to. Therefore, the visual recognition area of the relative displacement member can be enlarged by a motion form (linear motion) different from the motion form at the time of appearance (rotational motion), and the visual recognition area is expanded by the unexpectedness due to the change of the motion form and the linear motion. It is possible to make the player feel a sense of speed by being played and a sense of unity of the combined action by being performed continuously while being combined. As a result, it is possible to obtain an effect that cannot be achieved with a configuration in which the relative displacement member simply protrudes and retracts with respect to the opening of the front member only by linear motion (a configuration in which the retracted position and the extended position are reciprocated).

  The gaming machine A4 includes a transmission unit that transmits the driving force of the driving unit to the displacement member, and the transmission unit is disposed at a position overlapping the displacement member disposed at the retracted position in a front view. A gaming machine A5 characterized by this.

  According to the gaming machine A5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A4, the gaming machine A5 includes transmission means for transmitting the driving force of the driving means to the displacement member, and the transmission means is in front view with the displacement member disposed at the retracted position. Since it is disposed at the overlapping position, the dead space formed on the back side of the displacement member disposed at the retracted position can be effectively utilized as the space for disposing the transmission means.

  The gaming machine A5 includes a holding member that holds the driving unit, the transmission unit, and the displacement member, and the driving unit and the displacement member are disposed on one surface side of the holding member, and the displacement member has a longitudinal direction thereof. A gaming machine A6, wherein the driving means is disposed in the retracted position in a posture in which the driving means is positioned on an extension line of the game machine.

  According to the gaming machine A6, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A5, the driving means and the displacement member are disposed on one surface side of the holding member. For example, the driving device is driven on one surface side and the other surface side of the holding member. Compared with the case where the means and the displacement member are respectively disposed, the size in the direction connecting the one surface side and the other surface side of the holding member can be reduced. Furthermore, since the displacement member is disposed at the retracted position in a posture in which the drive unit is positioned on the extension line in the longitudinal direction, the displacement member and the drive unit can be disposed linearly. Therefore, the space required as the retreat position can be efficiently suppressed.

  In any one of the gaming machines A1 to A6, the game machine includes: a transmission unit that transmits the driving force of the driving unit to the displacement member; and a holding member that holds the transmission unit. The transmission member drives the driving unit. A rotating member that is rotated by receiving a force, and a predetermined position between the one side position and the other side position is pivotally supported at a position eccentric from the rotation center of the rotating member, and the one side position is rotated by the holding member. A link member pivotally supported so that the other side position is connected to a relative displacement member of the displacement member, and when the rotation member is rotated between a first rotation position and an intermediate rotation position, As the link member is displaced, the base side displacement member is rotated via the relative displacement member of the displacement member, whereby the first operation is performed, and the rotation member is moved between the intermediate rotation position and the second rotation position. If the rotation is Gaming machine A7, wherein a relative displacement member of the displacement member in association with the displacement of the click member is displaced relative to the base-side displacement member, the second operation is performed.

  According to the gaming machine A7, the link member pivotally supports a predetermined position between the one-side position and the other-side position at a position eccentric from the rotation center of the rotating member, and the one-side position is pivoted to the holding member. Since the other side position is connected to the relative displacement member of the displacement member, the rotation member is rotated by the driving force of the drive means, so that the rotation of the rotation member is changed to the relative displacement member of the displacement member via the link member. Can communicate. In this case, when the rotation member is rotated between the first rotation position and the intermediate rotation position, the base side displacement member can be rotated via the relative displacement member of the displacement member in accordance with the displacement of the link member. Can perform actions. On the other hand, when the rotation member is rotated between the intermediate rotation position and the second rotation position, the relative displacement member of the displacement member can be displaced relative to the base side displacement member with the displacement of the link member, and the second operation Can be executed. That is, according to the gaming machine A6, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines A1 to A6, two different operations of the first operation and the second operation can be performed by one driving means, so that the component cost can be reduced. This can reduce the product cost accordingly.

  In addition, the transmission means may have a structure in which a gear is provided at one side position of the link member, and a gear provided on the outer periphery of the rotation member is meshed with the gear to displace the link member. Space required for arrangement of members and link members increases. On the other hand, in the gaming machine A6, since the predetermined position between the one side position and the other side position of the link member is pivotally supported by the rotating member, the rotating member and the link member can be arranged in an overlapping state in a front view, The space required for disposing the rotating member and the link member can be suppressed by the overlap.

  Furthermore, since the relative displacement member and the holding member are connected via the transmission member, the swing of the relative displacement member can be suppressed using the rigidity of the holding member.

  In any one of the gaming machines A1 to A7, the displacement trajectory of the displacement member when the proximal displacement member of the displacement member is rotated by the first operation is disposed at a position where at least a part thereof overlaps in front view. A gaming machine A8 comprising a decorative member.

  According to the gaming machine A8, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines A1 to A7, when the base side displacement member of the displacement member is rotated by the first operation, at least the displacement member and the decorative member are arranged in front view. It can be crossed in part, and the production effect can be enhanced.

  In the gaming machine A8, the displacement member is configured such that one side in the longitudinal direction of the base side displacement member is a rotation center in the first operation, and the relative displacement member is in the longitudinal direction on the front side of the base side displacement member. The second operation is configured such that the relative displacement member is slid between the reference position and the extended position with respect to the base displacement member, and the decorative member is The displacement movement at the rotation tip side of the displacement member when the proximal displacement member is rotated by the first operation is disposed at a position where at least a part thereof overlaps in the front view, and the first operation causes the base displacement member to rotate. When the side displacement member is arranged at the rotational position, the overlap with the displacement member in front view is not formed, and the relative displacement member has the rotation center side on the front side rather than the rotation tip side. Gaming machine A9, characterized in that it is location shape.

  According to the gaming machine A9, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A8, the relative displacement member disposed on the front side of the base side displacement member has a shape in which the rotation center side is located on the front side rather than the rotation tip side, that is, Since the rotation tip side is shaped to be located behind the back side, the contact between the relative displacement member and the decorative member can be suppressed when the base side displacement member is rotated by the first operation. In this case, since the displacement member has one side in the longitudinal direction of the base side displacement member as the rotation center in the first operation, the rotation tip side that is the free end is likely to swing back and forth during the first operation, and is in contact with the decorative member. Is likely to occur. Therefore, the configuration of the gaming machine A9 is particularly effective.

  On the other hand, when the relative displacement member is slid from the reference position to the overhang position by the second operation, the relative displacement member disposed on the front side of the base side displacement member is located on the front side of the rotation center side of the rotation tip side. By adopting the shape located on the side, the relative displacement member can be disposed more forward (side closer to the player) and the force can be increased accordingly.

  In the gaming machine A9, the shape in which the rotation center side of the relative displacement member is located on the front side rather than the rotation tip side of the relative displacement member is an arbitrary shape from the rotation tip side to the rotation center side. It may be changed stepwise, or may be changed gradually in a straight line or curved line.

  In any one of the gaming machines A6 to A9, a pin member provided on one of the base side displacement member or the relative displacement member and a pin member provided on the other side of the base side displacement member or the relative displacement member can be slidably displaced. A slide groove that receives and allows the relative displacement member to slide relative to the proximal displacement member, and the position where the other side position of the link member is connected to the relative displacement member is relative to the pin member relative to the pin member. A gaming machine A10 that is on the distal side in the sliding direction of the displacement member.

  According to the gaming machine A10, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines A6 to A9, the position where the other side position of the link member is connected to the relative displacement member is the front end side in the sliding direction of the relative displacement member rather than the pin member. Therefore, the location where the relative displacement member is supported by the holding member via the link member can be brought closer to the distal end side in the sliding direction of the relative displacement member. In other words, the location where the relative displacement member is supported by the holding member via the link member can be moved away from the location where the proximal displacement member is pivotally supported by the holding member. As a result, it is possible to easily suppress the relative displacement member from shaking in the front-rear direction.

<About the concept of the invention taking the complex operation unit 500 as an example>
In a gaming machine comprising: a driving unit that generates a driving force; a driven member that is driven and displaced by the driving force generated by the driving unit; and a holding member that holds the driven member in a displaceable manner. A driven member connected to the driven member in a displaceable manner; and a displacement defining means for defining a displacement of the driven member with respect to the holding member. The displacement defining means allows the displacement of the driven member with respect to the holding member. By being defined, the driven member is displaced relative to the driven member when the driven member is displaced by the driving force of the driving means.

  Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, the liquid crystal display from the projecting position and the projecting position of the liquid crystal display device, for example, by the driving force from the driving means. There is known a gaming machine that produces an effect by displacing a displacement member between a retracted position retracted in a direction outside the display area of the apparatus (Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2011-200990 (for example, paragraph 0095, FIG. 11 to FIG. 15)). According to this gaming machine, a change is imparted to the displacement mode of the displacement member by switching the output direction of the driving means or making the output intermittent. However, since the conventional gaming machine described above is configured to change the output of the driving means, there is a problem that the control is complicated, while the displacement member is displaced according to the change in the output of the driving means. Since only the speed is changed and the displacement direction remains constant, there is a problem that a sufficient change is not given to the mode of displacement. The gaming machine B1 is made in order to solve the above-described problems, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine that can change the displacement mode of the displacement member while keeping the output of the driving means constant. To do.

  That is, according to the gaming machine B1, when the driven member is displaced by being driven by the driving force of the driving means, the displacement defining means defines the displacement of the driven member with respect to the holding member, so that the displacement of the driven member is determined. Accordingly, the driven member can be driven while being relatively displaced with respect to the driven member. That is, even when the driven member is displaced along a linear or arc-shaped fixed track, for example, the driven member can be displaced along a track different from the driven member. Moreover, since the change of the displacement mode is formed by the relative displacement of the driven member with respect to the driven member, even if the driven member is displaced at a constant speed, it is different from the driven member. The driven member can be displaced along the track. Therefore, it is possible to change the displacement mode of the driven member while keeping the output of the driving means constant.

  In the gaming machine B1, the displacement defining means includes a first groove formed in a groove shape in one of the driven member or the holding member, and the other of the driven member or the holding member guided along the first groove. And a first guided portion formed on the gaming machine B2.

  According to the gaming machine B2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine B1, the displacement defining means includes the first groove portion and the first guided portion, and the first guided portion is guided along the first groove portion. The displacement of the driven member relative to the holding member can be defined. Therefore, the driven member is displaced by being driven by the driving force of the driving means, so that the relative displacement of the driven member with respect to the driven member can be formed according to the outline (shape) of the first groove portion. That is, by setting the outline (shape) of the first groove portion, the mode of relative displacement of the driven member with respect to the driven member can be arbitrarily set. As described above, since the displacement defining means is constituted by the groove-shaped part (first groove part) and the part guided by the part (first guided part), the structure is simplified and the product cost is reduced. At the same time, the reliability and durability of the movable part can be improved.

  In the gaming machine B1 or B2, the driven member is connected to the driven member at least in a rotatable state.

  According to the gaming machine B3, in the gaming machine B1 or B2, since the driven member is connected to the driven member at least in a rotatable state, when the driven member is relatively displaced along with the displacement of the driven member, The relative angle of the driven member with respect to the driven member can be changed, and the player can recognize a strong change in impression as a change in the displacement mode.

  In the gaming machine B3, the driven member is connected to the driven member in a rotatable and slidable state.

  According to the gaming machine B4, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine B3, the driven member is connected to the driven member in a rotatable and slidable state, so that the driven member is relatively moved along with the displacement of the driven member. When displacing, not only can the relative angle of the driven member with respect to the driven member be changed by rotation, but also the relative position of both can be changed by slide displacement. The variation of change that can be given can be increased.

  In the gaming machine B4, the displacement defining means includes a second groove portion formed in a groove shape in one of the driven member or the holding member, and the other of the driven member or the holding member guided along the second groove portion. And a second guided portion formed on the gaming machine B5.

  According to the gaming machine B5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine B4, the displacement defining means includes the second groove portion and the second guided portion, and the second guided portion is guided along the second groove portion. The displacement of the driven member relative to the holding member can be defined. Therefore, the driven member is displaced by the driving force of the driving means, so that the relative displacement of the driven member with respect to the driven member can be formed according to the contour (shape) of the second groove portion. That is, by setting the outline (shape) of the second groove portion, the mode of relative displacement of the driven member with respect to the driven member can be arbitrarily set. In particular, when the driven member is connected to the driven member so as to be rotatable and slidable, the guide structure is a combination of the first groove portion and the first guided portion, and the combination of the second groove portion and the second guided portion. By providing both with the guide structure, not only can the variation of the change that can be given to the mode of displacement be increased, but even when the displaceable direction of the driven member relative to the driven member is multidirectional, the displacement can be reduced to two. Since it can guide with a guide structure, it can control that displacement becomes unstable and can aim at improvement in reliability as a movable member.

  In the gaming machine B5, as in the case described above, the displacement defining means is constituted by the groove-shaped part (second groove part) and the part guided by the part (second guided part). As a result, the product cost can be reduced and the reliability and durability of the movable member can be improved.

  In the gaming machine B5, the second groove portion is formed in the holding member, the second guided portion is formed in the driven member, and the driven member is configured such that the second guided portion is rotatable and slide-displaced. A groove-like connection groove portion that is inserted in a possible state, and the second guided portion is inserted into the connection groove portion so that the driven member is rotatable and slidable in the driven member. A gaming machine B6 that is connected.

  According to the gaming machine B6, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine B5, the second groove portion is formed in the holding member, the second guided portion is formed in the driven member, and the second guided portion is the driven member. Since the driven member is connected to the driven member in a rotatable and slidable state by being inserted into the connecting groove portion, the driven member is held by being guided by the second groove portion to the second guided portion. Both the role of defining the displacement with respect to the member and the role of connecting the driven member to the driven member so as to be relatively displaceable by being inserted through the connection groove portion can be combined. As a result, the number of parts can be reduced to reduce the product cost, and the structure can be simplified to improve the reliability and durability of the movable member.

  In the gaming machine B6, at least a portion where the second groove portion is formed is interposed between the driven member and the driven member, and the driven member is the second groove portion of the holding member. The gaming machine B7 is provided with a contact portion that is in contact with a peripheral edge of the second guide portion, and the contact portion is formed in a concentric circular shape with the second guided portion.

  According to the gaming machine B7, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine B6, the driven member includes a contact portion that is in contact with the peripheral edge of the second groove portion of the holding member, and the contact portion is a second guided portion. The contact area between the contact part and the holding part (periphery of the second groove part) even when the driven member is rotated with respect to the holding member (second groove part). It is possible to suppress the support reaction force from changing. As a result, the driven member can be displaced in a stable state.

  In any of the gaming machines B1 to B7, the holding member can be displaced by the driving force of the driving means, and the driven member can be displaced in accordance with the displacement of the driven member. The game machine B8 is formed so as to be capable of holding the driving means, the driven member, and the driven member.

  According to the gaming machine B8, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines B1 to B7, the holding member can be displaced by the driving force of the driving means, and the displacement of the driven member can be reduced. Accordingly, the driving means, the driven member, and the driven member are formed so as to be able to be held in a state in which the driven member is displaceable, so that one device in which the driving means, the driven member, and the driven member are held by the holding member. As a unit. Thereby, it is possible to reduce the manufacturing cost when assembling the unit itself and the manufacturing cost when assembling the gaming machine by assembling the unit to the gaming machine main body.

  In the gaming machine B8, the first groove portion is formed in the holding member, and the first guided portion is formed in a driven member.

  According to the gaming machine B9, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine B8, the first groove portion is formed in the holding member and the first guided portion is formed in the driven member, so that the first groove portion is formed. It is easy to secure space. That is, a space for forming the first groove portion is made by using the dead space of the holding member that must be formed in a relatively large outer shape in order to hold the driving means, the driven member, and the driven member into a unit. It can be secured. Thereby, the outline (shape) of a 1st groove part and the freedom degree of extension length can be increased, and the variation of the change which can be provided to the aspect of a displacement can be increased correspondingly.

  In the gaming machine B9, the displacement defining means includes a second groove portion formed in a groove shape in the holding member, and a second guided portion formed in the driven member while being guided along the second groove portion. The holding member includes a first facing portion and a second facing portion that face each other with the driven member interposed therebetween, and the first groove portion is formed in one of the first facing portion or the second facing portion. And the second groove portion is formed on the other of the first facing portion and the second facing portion.

  According to the gaming machine B10, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine B9, the first groove portion is formed in one of the first facing portion and the second facing portion of the holding member facing each other with the driven member interposed therebetween, and the other Since the second groove portion is formed, the first groove portion and the second groove portion can be formed without considering the formation position of the counterpart. That is, when both the first groove portion and the second groove portion are formed in one of the first facing portion and the second facing portion, it is necessary to form the first groove portion and the second groove portion so as not to intersect with each other. The degree of freedom is limited. On the other hand, according to the gaming machine B10, in both the first groove portion and the second groove portion, its contour (shape) and extension length can be set without considering the positional relationship with the opponent, The degree of freedom can be increased, and the variation of the change that can be given to the displacement mode can be increased accordingly.

  In any of the gaming machines B5 to B7, the gaming machine B11 is characterized in that at least one of the first groove and the second groove has a radius at a starting end or a terminal end larger than a reference value.

  According to the gaming machine B11, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines B5 to B7, in the initial stage of starting the driving of the driven member in the stopped state, the load is reduced and the driving is smoothly performed. Can be started.

  Any one of the gaming machines B5 to B7 includes a shielding member that shields the driven member invisible, and at least one of the first groove and the second groove has a portion of the driven member outside the area of the shielding member. The gaming machine B12 is characterized in that a radius in a corresponding region is made smaller than a reference value during a period from when the entire driven member is exposed outside the region of the shielding member until the driven member starts to be exposed.

  According to the gaming machine B12, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines B5 to B7, the movement of the driven member can be accelerated in a range where a part of the driven member is shielded. An effect in which the member suddenly appears and an effect in which the driven member is quickly hidden by the shielding member can be performed.

<Concept of Invention with Rotation Operation Unit 600 as an Example>
A holding member; a first rotating body and a second rotating body that are rotatably disposed on the holding member; and a driving unit that applies a rotational driving force to the first rotating body and the second rotating body. In the gaming machine, the second rotating body is formed in an annular shape, and is fitted on the first rotating body concentrically.

  Here, there is a game machine such as a pachinko machine that produces an effect by rotating a plurality of rotating bodies (Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2011-30847 (see, for example, paragraph 0162, FIGS. 42 to 46)). According to this gaming machine, a plurality of rotating bodies arranged apart from each other on the left and right are rotated in synchronization in the same direction to give a sense of unity to the effects. However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, since a plurality of rotating bodies are arranged apart from each other on the left and right, it is difficult for the player to recognize the rotations associated with each other, and by rotating the plurality of rotating bodies. There was a problem that the effect of the production could not be fully exhibited. The gaming machine C1 is made in order to solve the above-described problems, and makes it easy for the player to recognize the rotations of the plurality of rotating bodies by associating the rotations of the rotating bodies with each other. It aims at providing the gaming machine which can fully exhibit the effect of.

  That is, according to the gaming machine C1, the second rotating body is formed in an annular shape and is externally fitted concentrically with the first rotating body, so that the first rotating body and the second rotating body are connected to each other. Can be rotated concentrically. Accordingly, the rotation of the first rotator and the rotation of the second rotator can be associated with each other so that the player can easily recognize them, and as a result, the effect of rendering by rotating each of the plurality of rotators can be sufficiently exhibited. Can do.

  In the gaming machine C1, the first rotating body is formed in a cylindrical shape, the gaming machine C2.

  According to the gaming machine C2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C1, the first rotating body is formed in a cylindrical shape, so that an effect member or the like can be disposed on the inner peripheral side of the first rotating body. Thus, it is possible to produce an effect of rotating the first rotating body surrounding the periphery of the effect member and the second rotating body surrounding the periphery of the first rotating body around the effect member. As a result, the effect of rotating the plurality of rotating bodies can be more effectively performed.

  In the gaming machine C1 or C2, the first rotating body includes a main body portion that is inserted through the holding member, a one-side flange portion that projects outwardly in a flange shape on one axial side of the main body portion, and one of them. A second flange that projects outwardly on the other side in the axial direction opposite to the side flange, and is opposed to the first flange with the holding member interposed therebetween. A gaming machine C3, which is externally fitted to a main body portion of the first rotating body and is disposed between a one-side flange portion of the first rotating body and a holding member.

  According to the gaming machine C3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C1 or C2, the first rotating body is formed and held on the main body portion inserted through the holding member and on one side and the other side of the main body portion in the axial direction. A second flange that is externally fitted to the main body of the first rotor, and the one flange and the holding member of the first rotor. Therefore, the holding structure of the first rotating body and the second rotating body by the holding member can be simplified.

  That is, according to the above configuration, since the main body portion of the first rotating body is inserted through the holding member, the first rotating body can be rotatably held by the holding member. Further, the other side flange portion of the first rotating body is brought into contact with the holding member, so that the displacement of the first rotating body in one axial direction can be restricted, and the one side flange portion of the first rotating body performs the second rotation. The displacement of the first rotating body in the other axial direction can be regulated by contacting the body and the second rotating body contacting the holding member.

  Furthermore, since the 2nd rotary body is externally fitted by the main-body part of a 1st rotary body, a 2nd rotary body can be rotatably hold | maintained to a holding member via the main-body part of a 1st rotary body. Further, the second rotating body is brought into contact with one side flange portion of the first rotating body, and the other flange portion of the first rotating body is brought into contact with the holding member, whereby one axial direction of the second rotating body is made. The displacement of the second rotating body in the other axial direction can be regulated by contacting the second rotating body with the holding member.

  The gaming machine C3 includes a first gear and a second gear which are disposed on the holding member and transmit the rotational driving force of the driving means to the first rotating body and the second rotating body, respectively, and the first rotation A gaming machine C4, wherein the body and the second rotating body are respectively provided with gears meshed with the first gear and the second gear on the outer peripheral surface.

  According to the gaming machine C4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C3, the first gear and the second gear disposed on the holding member and transmitting the rotational driving force of the driving means to the first rotating body and the second rotating body, respectively. The first and second rotating bodies are provided with gears that are meshed with the first gear and the second gear, respectively, on the outer peripheral surface. Thus, the structure for transmitting the rotational driving force of the driving means to the first rotating body and the second rotating body can be simplified. In particular, when the main body portion of the first rotating body is formed in a cylindrical shape and a production member or the like is disposed on the inner peripheral side of the main body portion, the first gear is provided on the outer peripheral surfaces of the first rotating body and the second rotating body. And the structure engaged with the second gear is effective.

  In the gaming machine C4, the second gear is disposed on one side of the holding member, and the first gear is disposed on the other side of the holding member opposite to the one side. Is engaged with a gear engraved on the outer peripheral surface of the other flange portion of the first rotating body, and the second gear is engaged with a gear engraved on the outer peripheral surface of the second rotating body. A gaming machine C5 characterized by that.

  According to the gaming machine C5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C4, the second gear is arranged on one side of the holding member and the first gear is arranged on the other side of the holding member opposite to the one side. The first gear is meshed with a gear engraved on the outer peripheral surface of the other side flange portion of the first rotating body, and the second gear is engaged with the gear engraved on the outer peripheral surface of the second rotating body. For example, the first gear and the second gear are compared with the case where the first gear and the second gear are respectively meshed with the first rotating body and the second rotating body on one side of the holding member. The structure for transmitting the rotational driving force of the driving means to the first rotating body and the second rotating body via the gear can be simplified.

  Further, the first gear and the other side flange portion of the first rotating body with which the first gear is engaged are arranged with the one side flange portion and main body portion of the first rotating body and the second rotating body. By being arranged on the other side opposite to the one side of the holding member, the player can view the one side of the holding member from the front side with the first gear and the other flange portion of the first rotating body. It can be shielded by the holding member. That is, the structure that shields the first gear and the other flange portion of the first rotating body from being invisible can be simplified using the holding member.

  In either the gaming machine C4 or C5, first transmission means for transmitting the rotational driving force of the driving means to the first gear, and second transmission means for transmitting the rotational driving force of the driving means to the second gear. And a gaming machine C6.

  According to the gaming machine C6, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C4 or C5, the first transmission means and the second transmission means for transmitting the rotational driving force of the driving means to the first gear and the second gear, respectively, are provided. The one rotating body and the second rotating body can be rotated by one driving means. In this case, the rotational driving force of the driving means can be transmitted to the first gear by the first transmission means and to the second gear by the second transmission means by different transmission paths. Therefore, for example, by setting the number of gears and the reduction ratio for each transmission path, even if the two rotating bodies are rotated by one driving means, the two rotating bodies (first rotation) The rotation modes of the body and the second rotating body) can be varied. As a result, the effect of rotating the plurality of rotating bodies can be more effectively performed.

  In any of the gaming machines C4 to C6, the holding member includes a cylindrical portion that is formed in a cylindrical shape and protrudes toward the one side, and the first member is provided on an inner peripheral side of the cylindrical portion of the holding member. A gaming machine C7, wherein the main body portion of the rotating body is rotatably disposed on the outer peripheral side of the cylindrical portion of the holding member.

  According to the gaming machine C7, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines C4 to C6, the holding member includes a cylindrical portion that is formed in a cylindrical shape and protrudes to one side, and the cylindrical shape of the holding member Since the main body portion of the first rotating body is rotatably disposed on the inner peripheral side of the portion and the second rotating body is rotatably disposed on the outer peripheral side of the cylindrical portion of the holding member, the second rotating body is disposed on the holding member. It can be externally fitted to the main body portion of the first rotating body via the cylindrical portion. That is, not only the first rotating body but also the second rotating body can be held by the holding member. Thereby, since the arrangement positions of the first rotating body and the second rotating body can be defined with reference to the holding members, gears engraved on the outer peripheral surfaces of the first rotating body and the second rotating body, The positional relationship between the first gear and the second gear disposed on the holding member can be defined with reference to the holding member. Therefore, it is possible to stabilize the engagement between the gears carved on the outer peripheral surfaces of the first rotating body and the second rotating body, the first gear, and the second gear. As a result, it is possible to suppress uneven wear of the gears and suppress drive resistance.

  In the gaming machine C7, the first rotating body includes a plurality of protruding portions that protrude from the outer peripheral surface of the main body portion, extend in the axial direction of the main body portion, and are scattered at predetermined intervals in the circumferential direction. A gaming machine C8 characterized by comprising.

  According to the gaming machine C8, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C7, the main body portion of the first rotating body protrudes from the outer peripheral surface of the main body portion and extends in the axial direction of the main body portion, and has a predetermined interval in the circumferential direction. Since the plurality of projecting portions that are scattered apart are provided, the contact region between the main body portion of the first rotating body and the cylindrical portion of the holding member is limited to the projecting portion, and the main body portion of the first rotating body is It can be smoothly rotated on the inner peripheral side of the cylindrical portion of the holding member.

  In addition, it is preferable that a protrusion part is curved by the circular arc shape from which the shape of the cross section cut | disconnected by the plane orthogonal to the axial direction of a main-body part becomes convex outward. The contact area between the inner surface of the cylindrical portion of the holding member can be suppressed, and the main body portion of the first rotating body can be rotated more smoothly on the inner peripheral side of the cylindrical portion of the holding member. It is.

  In the gaming machine C8, the main body portion of the first rotating body is formed in a cylindrical shape, and the first rotating body projects from the inner peripheral surface of the main body portion and extends in the axial direction of the main body portion. A gaming machine C9, comprising a plurality of inner protrusions disposed at the same phase as the protrusions.

  According to the gaming machine C9, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C8, the main body portion of the first rotating body is formed in a cylindrical shape, and the first rotating body protrudes from the inner peripheral surface of the main body portion, and the axial direction of the main body portion And a plurality of inner protrusions disposed at a position that is in phase with the protrusions (that is, on the back side of the region where the protrusions are formed). When molding with a resin mold, the shape of the main body portion of the first rotating body can be made uniform (symmetrical shape) on the outer peripheral surface side and the inner peripheral surface side to ensure the moldability. .

  In the gaming machine C9, in the first rotating body, the main body portion is divided in the axial direction, the divided portions are fastened and fixed by screws, and the screws are fastened to positions corresponding to the protruding portions. A gaming machine C10 characterized by that.

  According to the gaming machine C10, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C9, the first rotating body has the main body portion divided in the axial direction, and the divided portions are fastened and fixed by screws, and the screws are protruding portions. In other words, since the projecting portion also serves as a screw fastening portion for fastening the screw, the strength of the screw fastening portion can be ensured.

  In any one of the gaming machines C1 to C10, one side of the holding member is disposed at a position that overlaps at least one rotation locus of the first rotating body or the second rotating body when viewed from the front, and is configured to emit light. A gaming machine C11 comprising a light emitting means.

  According to the gaming machine C11, in any of the gaming machines C1 to C10, one side of the holding member is disposed at a position overlapping with at least one rotation locus of the first rotating body or the second rotating body in a front view. Since the light emitting means is provided, when the first rotating body and the second rotating body are rotated concentrically, the light emitted by the light emitting means is played on the rotation locus of at least one of the first rotating body or the second rotating body. Can be visually recognized. That is, it is possible to perform an effect of rotating the first rotating body and the second rotating body at positions overlapping with light emission by the light emitting means, and as a result, an effect of rotating each of the plurality of rotating bodies more effectively. It can be carried out.

  In the gaming machine C11, at least one of the first rotating body and the second rotating body includes a first portion in which the light emitting means is formed in a region where a rotation locus overlaps the light emitting means in a front view and the first portion. The gaming machine C12 is characterized in that the second portions where the light emitting means are formed invisible are alternately arranged in the circumferential direction.

  According to the gaming machine C12, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C11, at least one of the first rotating body and the second rotating body has the light emitting means visible in a region where the rotation locus overlaps the light emitting means in a front view. Since the first part to be formed and the second part in which the light emitting means cannot be visually recognized are alternately arranged in the circumferential direction, the first rotating body and the second rotating body are rotated when the first rotating body and the second rotating body are rotated. As the portion and the second portion alternately pass in front of the light emitting means, the player can intermittently visually recognize the light emitted from the light emitting means. That is, while rotating the first rotating body and the second rotating body, it is possible to perform an effect of associating intermittent light emission of the light emitting means with the rotation, and as a result, an effect of rotating a plurality of rotating bodies, respectively. Can be performed more effectively.

<Characteristic D group> 8 hold effects (exciting time)
An acquisition unit that acquires information based on the establishment of the acquisition condition, a storage unit that stores the information acquired by the acquisition unit, and the information acquired by the acquisition unit based on the establishment of the determination condition Based on a predetermined trigger, a determination unit for determining whether or not to perform the determination, a display unit for displaying an identification symbol corresponding to the one piece of information stored in the storage unit before the determination condition is satisfied, and The design variable means for changing the display mode of the identification symbol, the variable determination means for determining the identification symbol that can be changed by the symbol variable means, and the variable determination means are determined to be variable. Variable notification means for notifying the identification symbol, and the variable determination means has a predetermined number or more of the information stored in the storage means. In particular, based, the symbol varying means gaming machine is characterized in that what determines different the identification symbols and the normal time as the identification symbols which can be varied by D1.

  Here, in a conventional gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a lottery is performed in accordance with the winning of a game ball at the start opening, and a variation effect or a jackpot effect according to the lottery result is displayed on the liquid crystal screen. A gaming machine has been proposed that stores a lottery right up to a certain number and notifies the number by a symbol when winning at the start opening (for example, JP2013-13528A). However, in this type of pachinko machine, when the lottery content that is stored on hold is determined and notified first, the willingness to win at the starting port will decline thereafter, and the game is stopped and the lottery result is awaited. There was a problem that the game was played and the player was bored. The gaming machine D1 is made to solve the above-described problems and the like, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine that can reduce a problem that the player gets bored with the game at an early stage.

  According to the gaming machine D1, information is acquired by the acquisition unit based on the establishment of the acquisition condition. The information acquired by the acquisition unit is stored in the storage unit. Based on the establishment of the determination condition, the success / failure determination is executed by the success / failure determination means based on the information acquired by the acquisition means. An identification symbol corresponding to one information stored in the storage means before the determination condition is satisfied is displayed by the display means. Based on a predetermined opportunity, the display mode of the identification symbol is varied by the symbol varying means. An identification symbol that can be varied by the symbol varying means is determined by the variable determining means. The identification symbol determined to be variable by the variable determination unit is notified by the variable notification unit. The variable determining means is an identification symbol that is variable as the identification symbol that can be varied by the symbol variable means based on the fact that the number of pieces of information stored in the memory means is a predetermined number or more. The symbol is determined by the variable determining means. Accordingly, it is possible to prompt the player to play a game so that information is stored up to a predetermined number. Therefore, the player's willingness to play a game can be increased, and there is an effect that the trouble that the player gets bored of the game at an early stage can be reduced.

  The gaming machine D1 includes an operation means that can be operated by a player, and an operation determination means that determines that the operation means has been operated. The predetermined operation is triggered by the operation determination means by the operation means. A gaming machine D2 characterized in that it is determined that it has been operated.

  According to the gaming machine D2, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine D1, the following effects are achieved. That is, it is determined by the operation determination means that the operation means operable by the player has been operated. A predetermined trigger is triggered when it is determined by the operation determining means that the operating means has been operated. Thereby, pleasure to operate the operating means can be increased. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress a problem that the player gets bored early.

  In the gaming machine D1 or D2, the variable determining means determines that the plurality of identification symbols are variably determined based on the number of the information being a predetermined number or more. Characteristic gaming machine D3.

  According to the gaming machine D3, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine D1 or D2, the variable decision means can be variably set for a plurality of identification symbols based on the fact that the number of information is equal to or more than a predetermined number. Since it is determined, there is an effect that the player can be urged to play a game so as to store a predetermined number or more of information.

  In the gaming machine D3, when the variable determining means is determined to be variable with respect to a plurality of the identification symbols, a predetermined order is determined based on determining that the operation is determined by the operation determining means. The gaming machine D4 is characterized in that the identification symbol of 1 is changed and displayed by the symbol changing means.

  According to the gaming machine D4, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine D3, it is determined that the operation is determined by the operation determining unit when the variable determining unit variably determines the plurality of identification symbols. Based on this, since one identification symbol is changed and displayed by the symbol variable means in a predetermined order, there is an effect that it is possible to notify the player in an easy-to-understand manner.

  In any one of the gaming machines D1 to D4, the game variable means includes pre-adjustment determination means for executing determination of success / failure based on the information stored in the storage means before the determination condition is satisfied. The game machine D5 is characterized in that the information corresponding to the identification symbol to be varied is varied and displayed in a notification mode based on the result of the validity determination by the prior validity determination means.

  According to the gaming machine D5, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines D1 to D4, the following effects are produced. In other words, the prior / impossible determination is executed by the prior determination / non-permission determination unit based on the information stored in the storage unit before the determination condition is satisfied. The information corresponding to the identification symbol to be varied is displayed by being varied by the symbol varying means in a notification manner based on the result of the validity determination by the prior validity determining means. Thereby, the success / failure determination result can be notified to the player before the determination result is notified. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can play a game with an interest in the display mode that is changed by the symbol changing means.

  In the gaming machine D5, when a plurality of the identification symbols are determined to be variable by the variable determination means, any one of the information corresponding to the identification symbols determined to be variable The gaming machine D6 is characterized in that it is changed and displayed by the symbol variable means in a notification mode based on the determination result determined by the prior adequacy determination means.

  According to the gaming machine D6, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine D5, when a plurality of identification symbols are determined to be variable by the variable determining means, the information corresponding to the identification symbol determined to be variable is stored. Among them, since any information is variably displayed by the symbol variable means in the notification mode based on the determination result determined by the prior determination unit, it is known before the determination result is displayed as the identification symbol. It is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  In the gaming machine D6, when a plurality of the identification symbols are variably determined by the variable determining means, a plurality of the identification symbols are displayed in a variable manner to display one notification mode. A gaming machine D7 characterized by being.

  According to the gaming machine D7, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine D6, when a plurality of identification symbols are variably determined by the variable determining means, the plurality of identification symbols can be changed and displayed. Since the notification mode is displayed, there is an effect that it is possible to improve the interest of the game by diversifying the notification mode.

<Characteristic D 'group> 8 hold effects 2 (exciting time)
Based on the establishment of the acquisition condition, the acquisition means capable of acquiring information, the storage means for storing the information acquired by the acquisition means, and if the determination condition is satisfied, the information stored in the storage means A determination unit that performs determination based on the information; a display unit that displays at least an identification symbol corresponding to the information before the determination is performed by the determination unit out of the information stored in the storage unit; The display means when the number of the information before the determination by the determination means among the information stored in the storage means is greater than or equal to a predetermined number based on the trigger of A game machine D′ 1 comprising: a symbol changing means for changing a display mode of at least the predetermined number of the identification symbols displayed on the screen to a predetermined display mode.

  Here, in a conventional gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a lottery is performed in accordance with the winning of a game ball at the start opening, and a variation effect or a jackpot effect according to the lottery result is displayed on the liquid crystal screen. A gaming machine has been proposed that stores a lottery right up to a certain number and notifies the number by a symbol when winning at the start opening (for example, JP2013-13528A). However, in this type of pachinko machine, when the lottery content that is stored on hold is determined and notified first, the willingness to win at the starting point will decline thereafter, and the game is stopped and the lottery result is waited for. There was a problem that the game was played and the player was bored. The gaming machine D′ 1 is made in order to solve the above-described problems, and aims to provide a gaming machine that can reduce a problem that the player gets bored with the game at an early stage. .

  According to the gaming machine D′ 1, information is acquired by the acquisition unit based on the establishment of the acquisition condition, and the information acquired by the acquisition unit is stored by the storage unit. When the determination condition is satisfied, the determination based on the information acquired by the acquisition unit is executed by the determination unit. The display means displays at least an identification symbol corresponding to information before execution of the determination by the determination means among the information stored in the storage means. Based on a predetermined trigger, when the number of pieces of information stored in the storage unit before execution of the determination by the determination unit is equal to or greater than a predetermined number, the design variable unit displays the information on the display unit. The display mode of at least a predetermined number of identification symbols displayed is changed to a predetermined display mode.

  Accordingly, it is possible to prompt the player to play a game so that information is stored up to a predetermined number. Therefore, the player's willingness to play a game can be increased, and there is an effect that the trouble that the player gets bored of the game at an early stage can be reduced.

  The gaming machine D′ 1 includes an operation unit that can be operated by a player, and an operation determination unit that determines that the operation unit has been operated. The predetermined trigger is controlled by the operation determination unit. A gaming machine D′ 2 characterized in that it is determined that the means has been operated.

  According to the gaming machine D′ 2, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine D′ 1, the following effects are achieved. That is, it is determined by the operation determination means that the operation means operable by the player has been operated. A case where the operation determination unit determines that the operation unit is operated is a predetermined opportunity. Thereby, pleasure to operate the operating means can be increased. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress a problem that the player gets bored early.

  In the gaming machine D′ 2, a variable that makes it possible to identify an identifying symbol whose display mode is variable when the operation determination unit determines that the operation unit is operated before the operation unit is operated. A gaming machine D'3 comprising a notification means.

  According to the gaming machine D′ 3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine D′ 2, the identification symbol that changes the display mode when it is determined that the operation means is operated by the variable notification means is displayed by the variable notification means. Since the notification is made in a specific manner before the operation means is operated, the player can operate the operation means in a state in which the display pattern of the identification symbol is variable, and the enjoyment of operating the operation means Can be increased. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress a problem that the player gets bored early.

  In the gaming machine D′ 3, the variable notification unit displays a display mode when the operation determination unit determines that the operation unit is operated by changing the display mode of the identification symbol to a variable notification mode. The gaming machine D′ 4 is characterized in that an identification symbol that is variable is informed so as to be specified before the operation means is operated.

  According to the gaming machine D′ 4, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine D′ 3, the variable notification means performs notification by changing the identification symbol itself into the variable notification mode, so that the player can display which identification symbol display mode. There is an effect that it is possible to easily grasp whether or not is variable.

  In the gaming machine D′ 4, when the plurality of identification symbols are changed to the variable notification mode by the variable notification unit, the predetermined number is determined based on the determination that the operation determination unit has operated. The gaming machine D′ 5 is characterized in that the one identification symbol is changed and displayed by the symbol changing means in the same order.

  According to the gaming machine D′ 5, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine D′ 4, it is determined that the operation determining unit has operated the plurality of identification symbols when the plurality of identification symbols are changed to the variable notification mode. Based on this, since one identification symbol is changed and displayed in a predetermined order, there is an effect that the player can be notified in an easy-to-understand manner.

  In any of the gaming machines D′ 1 to D′ 5, the game machine has pre-determination means for executing determination based on the information stored in the storage means before execution of determination by the determination means. The symbol changing means changes a display mode of the identification symbol to a predetermined display mode in a notification mode based on the determination result determined by the prior determination unit. 6.

  According to the gaming machine D′ 6, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines D′ 1 to D′ 5, the following effects are produced. That is, before the determination based on the determination condition is performed, the determination is performed by the prior determination unit based on the information stored in the storage unit. Then, the display mode of the identification symbol is changed to a predetermined display mode and displayed in the notification mode based on the determination result by the prior determination unit. Thereby, the determination result of the prior determination means can be notified to the player before the determination means is executed. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can play a game with an interest in the display mode that is changed by the symbol changing means.

  In the gaming machine D′ 6, the predetermined order is an order in which the information corresponding to the identification symbol is stored in the storage unit, and the symbol variable unit includes a display mode of the identification symbol. The gaming machine D′ 7 is characterized in that the display mode of the identification symbol corresponding to the latter half of the order is changed to the notification mode.

  According to the gaming machine D′ 7, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine D′ 6, the following effects are achieved. That is, the order in which the display mode of the identification symbols is changed by the symbol changing means is the order stored in the storage means, and the display mode of the identification symbols corresponding to the latter half of the order is changed to the notification mode. Thereby, pleasure to operate the operating means can be increased. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress a problem that the player gets bored early.

  In any one of the gaming machines D′ 1 to D′ 7, while the identification symbol changed to the predetermined display mode by the symbol changing unit is displayed on the display unit, the storage unit newly stores the identification symbol. The gaming machine D′ 8 is characterized by further comprising an additional symbol changing means for changing the display mode of the identification symbol corresponding to the information to the predetermined display mode based on the predetermined trigger.

  According to the gaming machine D′ 8, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines D′ 1 to D′ 7, the following effects are achieved. That is, the display mode of the identification symbol corresponding to the information newly stored by the storage unit while the identification symbol changed to the predetermined display mode by the symbol variable unit is displayed on the display unit based on the predetermined trigger. Then, it is changed to a predetermined display mode by the additional symbol changing means. Accordingly, it is possible to prompt the player to continue playing even after information is stored up to a predetermined number or more. Therefore, the player's willingness to play a game can be increased, and there is an effect that the trouble that the player gets bored of the game at an early stage can be reduced.

  In any of the gaming machines D′ 1 to D′ 8, when all the information corresponding to the identification symbol changed to the predetermined display mode by the symbol changing unit is determined by the determining unit, Of the information stored in the storage means, when the number of the information before execution of the determination by the determination means is equal to or greater than a predetermined second predetermined number, based on a predetermined trigger, A gaming machine D'9, comprising: a second symbol changing means for changing a display mode of at least the second predetermined number of the identification symbols displayed on the display unit to a predetermined second mode.

  According to the gaming machine D′ 9, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines D′ 1 to D′ 8, the following effects are produced. That is, when all the information corresponding to the identification symbol changed to the predetermined display mode by the symbol changing unit is determined by the determining unit, the determination unit executes the determination of the information stored in the storage unit. When the number of pieces of information before being performed is equal to or more than a predetermined second predetermined number, at least a second predetermined number of identification symbols displayed on the display means by the second symbol variable means based on a predetermined trigger Is changed to a predetermined second mode. Thus, after the player has played the game so that the information is stored up to a predetermined number or more, the player can be prompted to play the game again so that the information is stored up to the second predetermined number or more. Therefore, the player's willingness to play a game can be increased, and there is an effect that the trouble that the player gets bored of the game at an early stage can be reduced.

  In any one of the gaming machines D′ 1 to D′ 9, the predetermined display mode is a combination of a plurality of display modes of the identification symbols to form a single display mode. 10.

  According to the gaming machine D′ 10, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines D′ 1 to D′ 9, the display mode of a plurality of identification symbols is combined into one display mode. It is possible to increase the player's willingness to play the game by making the display mode of the player have an unexpectedness.

<Characteristic E group> A blank symbol is displayed in place of a push button notice. A lottery means for executing a lottery based on the establishment of a lottery condition, and a lottery result obtained by the lottery means between a plurality of different main symbols and the main symbol. By displaying a plurality of symbol sequences composed of sub-symbols different from symbols and displaying them side by side, the display means that can display the combination of the main symbols in a stopped display of each symbol sequence, and a specific lottery result on the display means In accordance with the fact that a predetermined condition is satisfied in a gaming machine having a privilege granting means for granting a privilege advantageous to a player based on the combination of the main symbols indicating The sub-design variable means for changing the display mode of the sub-symbol of the displayed symbol sequence and the composite display mode obtained by combining the sub-designs variably displayed by the sub-design variable means are displayed. A combination determining means for determining whether or not to display based on a lottery result by the lottery means, and displaying the combination display mode on the display means based on the determination by the combination determining means to display in the combined display mode. A gaming machine E1 characterized by having a combined display mode display means.

  Here, in a conventional gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a pachinko machine that draws a lottery in accordance with the winning of a game ball at the start opening and displays a variation effect and a jackpot effect according to the lottery result on the liquid crystal screen Are known. In such production, various patterns of production such as production for giving the player a sense of expectation and production for increasing the player's willingness to participate in the game are executed, and the interest of the game is improved. . In this type of pachinko machine, a game machine is proposed in which operation means (switches, etc.) that can be operated by the player are provided in the game machine, and the player can change the performance of the game by operating the operation means. (For example, JP 2010-075741 A). In such a pachinko machine, for example, there is one that executes a lottery to change the game effect when the operation means is operated, in order to execute various effects when the player operates the operation means. . However, in this type of pachinko machine, the player's operation changes the game effect at a certain timing and the player has a monotonous impression of the game, and the player gets bored with the game early. There was a problem. The gaming machine E1 is made to solve the above-described problems and the like, and aims to provide a gaming machine that can prevent the player from getting bored of the game at an early stage.

  According to the gaming machine E1, lottery is executed by the lottery means based on the establishment of the lottery conditions. The lottery result by the lottery means is displayed by stopping the main symbol between each symbol sequence by displaying a plurality of symbol sequences composed of a plurality of different main symbols and sub-designs different from the main symbol between the symbols. The combination is displayed by the display means. Based on the display of the main symbol combination indicating the specific lottery result on the display means, a privilege advantageous to the player is given by the privilege giving means. Based on the establishment of the predetermined condition, the display mode of the sub-symbol of the symbol sequence that has been stopped is varied by the sub-symbol varying means. Whether or not to display in a combined display form in which the sub-designs variably displayed by the sub-design variable means are combined is determined by the synthesis determining means based on the lottery result by the lottery means. The composite display mode is displayed on the display unit by the composite display mode display unit based on the determination by the synthesis determination unit that the composite display mode is displayed. Thereby, an effect with a fresh taste can be provided to the player by displaying the composite display mode. Therefore, there is an effect that the trouble that the player gets bored with the game at an early stage can be reduced.

  In the gaming machine E1, when it is determined that the operation means operable by the player, the operation determination means for determining that the operation means has been operated, and the operation determination means, the sub-design variable means The game machine E2, further comprising: an operation variable display means for changing the display mode of the sub-design to a specific display mode when the display mode of the sub-symbol is displayed.

  According to the gaming machine E2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine E1, the following effects are produced. That is, it is determined by the operation determination means that the operation means operable by the player has been operated. If it is determined that the operation is determined by the operation determining means, and if the sub-symbol display mode is changed and displayed by the sub-symbol variable means, the display mode is changed to a specific display mode by the operation variable display means. Displayed. Thereby, the pleasure that a player operates an operation means can be increased. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can participate in the game.

  In the gaming machine E2, the operation variable display means changes the display form of the sub-design to one of the specific display forms among the plurality of specific display forms based on the lottery result by the lottery means. A gaming machine E3 characterized by being displayed.

  According to the gaming machine E3, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine E2, the display pattern of the sub-design is changed to one specific display mode among a plurality of specific display modes based on the lottery result by the lottery means. Since it is displayed by the operation variable display means, it is possible to diversify the display mode of the sub-symbols and to provide a player with a fresh effect.

  In any of the gaming machines E1 to E3, after the symbol string is dynamically displayed for a predetermined period, the symbol string stopping means for stopping and displaying the symbol string in a predetermined order, and two or more symbols by the symbol string stopping means Dynamic display period determining means for determining a dynamic display period of the symbol sequence when the sequence is stopped and one or more symbol sequences are dynamically displayed, and the predetermined condition is satisfied In such a case, the dynamic display period determining means determines a specific dynamic display period different from the normal time.

  According to the gaming machine E4, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines E1 to E3, the following effects are produced. That is, after the symbol sequence is dynamically displayed for a predetermined period, the symbol sequence is stopped and displayed by the symbol sequence stopping means in a predetermined order. When two or more symbol sequences are stopped and displayed by the symbol sequence stopping unit and one or more symbol sequences are dynamically displayed, the dynamic display period of the symbol sequence is determined by the dynamic display period determining unit. The When the predetermined condition is satisfied, the dynamic display period determining unit determines a specific dynamic display period different from the normal time by the dynamic display period determining unit.

  As a result, it can be determined that the sub-symbol is variably displayed depending on the specific dynamic display period. Therefore, the player can play a game with interest during the dynamic display period. Therefore, there is an effect that the trouble that the player gets bored with the game can be reduced.

  In any one of the gaming machines E1 to E4, the combination determination means is configured to easily determine the combination display mode when the lottery result by the lottery means is the specific lottery result. Characteristic gaming machine E5.

  According to the gaming machine E5, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machines E1 to E4, when the lottery result by the lottery means is a specific lottery result, the composition display mode is easily determined by the composition determining means. There is an effect that the game can be played in the hope that the composite display mode is displayed, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  In any of the gaming machines E1 to E5, when the composite display mode is displayed, based on the fact that the operation determining means has been operated by the operation determining means, based on the lottery result by the lottery means The gaming machine E6 is characterized by comprising a composition variable means for displaying the composition display mode variably displayed in a specific display mode.

  According to the gaming machine E6, in addition to the effect produced by any of the gaming machines E1 to E5, when the composite display mode is displayed, based on the fact that the operating means has been operated by the operation determining means, Since the composite display mode is variably displayed by the composite variable unit in the specific display mode based on the lottery result by the lottery unit, the player can intervene in the game and reduce the trouble of getting bored early in the game There is an effect that can be done.

  In the gaming machine E6, when it is determined by the combination determination means that the display is performed in the combination display mode, the operation means operates the display mode that is variably displayed by the sub-symbol variable means. The gaming machine E7 is characterized by having prohibiting means for prohibiting variable display even if it is determined that it has been played.

  According to the gaming machine E7, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine E6, when it is determined to be displayed in the composite display mode by the composite determination unit, the display mode variably displayed by the sub-symbol variable unit is determined as the operation discrimination Even if it is determined that the operating means has been operated by the means, since the prohibiting means prohibits variable display, the composite display mode is displayed by operating the operating means before the composite display mode is displayed. There is an effect that it can be determined whether or not.

<Characteristic E 'group> A blank design is displayed as a push button notice 2
A determination means for executing determination based on the establishment of the determination condition, and a symbol string provided with a plurality of different main symbols and sub-patterns different from the main symbol are displayed as identification information indicating the determination result by the determination means. Display means, dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the symbol string on the display means, dynamic display period determining means for determining a period for dynamically displaying the symbol string by the dynamic display means, In a gaming machine having a first privilege granting unit that grants a first privilege that is advantageous to a player when the identification information indicating a specific determination result is displayed on the display unit, a predetermined condition is established. The sub-symbol variable means for changing the display mode of the sub-symbol during the dynamic display period, and when the sub-symbol is changed and displayed in a specific display mode by the sub-symbol variable means. Of the dynamic display period Gaming machine E'1, characterized in that the Ri period is one having a specific effect execution means for executing a specific effect.

  Here, in a conventional gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a pachinko machine that draws a lottery in accordance with the winning of a game ball at the start opening and displays a variation effect and a jackpot effect according to the lottery result on the liquid crystal screen Are known. In such production, various patterns of production such as production for giving the player a sense of expectation and production for increasing the player's willingness to participate in the game are executed, and the interest of the game is improved. . In this type of pachinko machine, a game machine is proposed in which operation means (switches, etc.) that can be operated by the player are provided in the game machine, and the player can change the performance of the game by operating the operation means. (For example, JP 2010-075741 A). In such a pachinko machine, for example, a player who performs a lottery to change a game effect when the operation means is operated to perform various effects when the player operates the operation means. is there. However, in this type of pachinko machine, the player's operation changes the game effect at a certain timing and the player has a monotonous impression of the game, and the player gets bored with the game early. There was a problem. The gaming machine E′1 is made to solve the above-described problems and the like, and aims to provide a gaming machine that can prevent the player from getting bored of the game at an early stage.

  According to the gaming machine E′1, the determination is performed by the determination unit based on the establishment of the determination condition. As the identification information indicating the determination result by the determination unit, a symbol row provided with a plurality of different main symbols and sub-designs different from the main symbol is displayed on the display unit. The symbol string is dynamically displayed on the display means by the dynamic display means. The dynamic display period determination means determines the period during which the symbol string is dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means. When identification information indicating a specific determination result is displayed on the display unit, the first privilege that is advantageous to the player is provided by the first privilege providing unit. When the predetermined condition is satisfied, the sub-symbol changing means changes the display mode of the sub-symbol during the dynamic display period. When the sub-symbol is displayed in a specific display mode, the specific effect is executed by the specific effect executing means according to the remaining period of the dynamic display period. Thereby, the production | presentation with a fresh taste using a sub-pattern can be provided. Therefore, there is an effect that the trouble that the player gets bored with the game at an early stage can be reduced.

  In the gaming machine E′1, the specific effect is a combined display mode in which a plurality of sub-designs having the specific display mode are synthesized after being changed to the specific display mode by the sub-pattern changing unit. A gaming machine E′2, which is an effect to be displayed.

  According to the gaming machine E′2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine E′1, in order to display a composite display mode in which a plurality of sub-designs having a specific display mode are combined as a specific performance, a fresh taste is displayed to the player. There is an effect that it is possible to provide a certain effect and to reduce the trouble that the player gets bored with the game early.

  The gaming machine E′1 or E′2 has operation means that can be operated by the player and predetermined condition determination means for determining whether the predetermined condition is satisfied based on the operation of the operation means. Characteristic gaming machine E'3.

  According to the gaming machine E′3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine E′1 or E′2, the predetermined condition determining means determines whether the predetermined condition is satisfied based on the operation of the operating means operable by the player. Therefore, the pleasure that the player operates the operating means can be increased. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can participate in the game.

  In the gaming machine E′3, the sub-design variable means is displayed in the specific display mode based on the operation means being operated when the sub-design is displayed in the specific display mode. A gaming machine E'4, wherein the sub-design is variably displayed in the composite display mode.

  According to the gaming machine E′4, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine E′3, based on the operation of the operating means, the sub-design is changed from the specific display mode to the composite display mode and displayed. In order to execute a specific performance, the player must actively operate the operation means, and the player can be prompted to operate the operation means. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can participate in the game.

  In any one of the gaming machines E′1 to E′4, the display means displays a plurality of the symbol strings as identification information indicating the determination result by the determination means, and the plurality of symbol strings are displayed for a predetermined period. And a symbol sequence stop means for stopping and displaying in a predetermined order based on a determination result by the determination means after the dynamic display, and the specific effect is executed by the specific effect execution means. If there is a game machine E'5, the number of sub-designs to be stopped and displayed is made different based on the determination result by the determination means.

  According to the gaming machine E′5, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines E′1 to E′4, the following effects are produced. That is, the display means displays a plurality of symbol strings as identification information indicating the determination result by the determining means. After a plurality of symbol sequences are dynamically displayed for a predetermined period, the symbol sequence stopping means is stopped and displayed in a predetermined order based on the determination result by the determining means. When a specific effect is being executed by the specific effect executing means, the number of sub-designs to be stopped and displayed is varied based on the determination result by the determining means. Thereby, the specific effect using the sub-design can be set as an effect based on the determination result by the determining means, and a fresh effect using the sub-design can be provided. Therefore, there is an effect that the trouble that the player gets bored with the game at an early stage can be reduced.

  When the determination result of the determination means is a specific determination result, or when the determination result of the determination means is highly likely to be a specific determination result, the number of sub-symbols stopped and displayed by the symbol row stop means is increased. Good. By doing in this way, when the number of sub-symbols is large, the jackpot expectation is increased, and the player can be interested in a specific performance. Therefore, there is an effect that the trouble that the player gets bored with the game at an early stage can be reduced.

  In any one of the gaming machines E′1 to E′5, the sub-design variable unit varies the sub-design to the specific display mode when the determination result by the determination unit is the specific determination result. The game machine E′6 is configured to be easily displayed.

  According to the gaming machine E′6, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines E′1 to E′5, the sub-design variable means displays the sub-design when the judgment result by the judgment means is a specific judgment result. Since it is configured to be easily displayed by changing to a specific display mode, it is possible to play a game in the hope that a specific display mode is displayed, and there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

  In any one of the gaming machines E′2 to E′6, the specific display mode is a display in which the display mode of the sub-design is variably displayed, and the combined effect mode is the specific display mode. It is a character string obtained by combining a plurality of sub-designs that have become display modes, and the specific effect is a combination of at least a part of characters displayed as the specific display mode and displaying the composite effect mode. A gaming machine E'7 characterized by this.

  According to the gaming machine E′7, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines E′2 to E′6, the following effects are produced. That is, a character string as a combined effect mode is displayed by synthesizing a plurality of displayed sub-designs changed to characters as a specific display mode. A combined effect form in which at least a part of characters displayed as the specific display form is combined is displayed as the specific effect. Thereby, the player can expect the character string displayed as a synthetic | combination display mode by seeing the several character displayed as a specific display mode. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to provide the player with a fresh effect and to suppress a problem that the player gets bored with the game at an early stage.

  In addition, among the characters displayed as the specific display mode, it may be possible to partially notify that the character string displayed as the combined display mode is used before the combined display mode is displayed. By doing in this way, the hint which anticipates the character string displayed as a synthetic | combination display aspect can be provided, and there exists an effect that a player can be entertained.

  In any of the gaming machines E′3 to E′7, from the effect storage means for storing a plurality of effects executed when the dynamic display is performed, and the effects stored in the effect storage means, When the predetermined condition establishment determining means determines that the predetermined condition is satisfied, the first effect including the specific effect is selected, and the predetermined condition establishment determining means is satisfied. An effect selection means for selecting a second effect that does not include the specific effect when it is not determined, and a gaming machine E′8.

  According to the gaming machine E′8, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines E′3 to E′7, the following effects are produced. That is, a plurality of effects to be executed when dynamic display is performed by the effect storage means. Based on the determination result of the predetermined condition establishment determining means, the first effect or the second effect is selected by the effect selecting means. Thereby, a different effect is selected based on the determination result of the predetermined condition establishment determining means during the dynamic display. Therefore, since only the effect during the dynamic display can be changed based on the determination result of the predetermined condition establishment determination means, there is an effect that the data amount related to the dynamic display can be reduced.

<Feature F group> An extension effect is executed at the end of SPGT. A display means capable of displaying an effect mode, and a time measuring means capable of timing even when the power supplied to the gaming machine is below a predetermined voltage value. And an acquisition means for acquiring time information from the time measurement means, an elapsed time determination means for determining the elapsed time based on the time information acquired from the acquisition means, and a predetermined elapsed time by the elapsed time determination means If it is determined that the display mode is switched to the specific display mode and the display mode is displayed until the predetermined period elapses, the switch display unit displays the predetermined mode when the predetermined period elapses. And an extension period setting means for setting an extension period for displaying the specific effect mode in an extended manner when it is determined that it is established. A gaming machine F1.

  Here, in a conventional gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, an RTC (real time clock) is provided in the gaming machine, and the same performance is executed at the same timing among a plurality of gaming machines with reference to time data measured by the RTC. A gaming machine configured to change the display mode is known (for example, JP 2013-31695 A). In such a pachinko machine, the display mode is changed when the RTC reaches a preset time. However, in this type of pachinko machine, there is a problem that the player's willingness to play declines when the period during which the display mode is changed ends, and the player gets bored with the game. The gaming machine F1 is made to solve the above-described problems and the like, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine that can suppress a problem that the player gets bored with the game at an early stage.

  According to the gaming machine F1, the effect mode is displayed by the display means. Even when the electric power supplied to the gaming machine is in a power interruption state where the electric power is less than or equal to a predetermined voltage value, the time is measured. Time information is acquired from the time measuring means by the acquiring means. Based on the time information acquired from the acquisition means, the elapsed time is determined by the elapsed time determination means. When the elapsed time determining means determines that the predetermined elapsed time has elapsed, the effect mode displayed on the display means is switched to the specific effect mode and displayed by the switching display means until the predetermined period elapses. When it is determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied when the predetermined period has elapsed, the extension period setting unit sets the extension period for displaying the specific effect mode in an extended manner. Thereby, since the case where the period when a specific production | presentation aspect is displayed is extended and the case where it is not extended changes with whether predetermined conditions are satisfied, an unexpected production | presentation can be provided to a player. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress a problem that the player gets bored with the game at an early stage.

  In the gaming machine F1, an acquisition unit that acquires information based on the establishment of the acquisition condition, a storage unit that stores the information acquired by the acquisition unit, and the information based on the establishment of the lottery condition The lottery is executed based on the lottery means for executing the lottery, the display means for displaying the identification information indicating the lottery result by the lottery means, and the information acquired by the acquisition means before the lottery condition is satisfied. And the predetermined condition is configured to be easily established when the information determined as a specific lottery result is stored by the preliminary lottery means. Characteristic gaming machine F2.

  According to the gaming machine F2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine F1, the following effects are produced. That is, information is acquired by the acquisition unit based on the establishment of the acquisition condition. The information acquired by the acquisition unit is stored in the storage unit. Based on the establishment of the lottery conditions, lottery is performed on the information by the lottery means. Identification information indicating the lottery result by the lottery means is displayed by the display means. Based on the information acquired by the acquisition means before the lottery conditions are satisfied, the lottery is executed by the preliminary lottery means. The predetermined condition is easily established when information determined as a specific lottery result by the preliminary lottery means is stored. Thereby, it can be anticipated that it is a specific lottery result by extending the period in which a specific production mode is displayed. Therefore, there is an effect that a game can be performed in the hope that the period during which a specific effect mode is displayed is extended.

  The gaming machine F2 includes a dynamic display period determining unit that determines a period for dynamically displaying the identification information, and the elapsed time before the period determined by the dynamic display period determining unit elapses. When the game has elapsed, the identification information is temporarily stopped and displayed.

  According to the gaming machine F3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine F2, the following effects are produced. That is, the period for dynamically displaying the identification information is determined by the dynamic display period determining means. If the elapsed time elapses before the period determined by the dynamic display period determining means elapses, the identification information is temporarily stopped and displayed. Thereby, dynamic display can be temporarily stopped according to the end timing of the period during which a specific effect mode is displayed. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can determine the end timing in an easily understandable manner.

  In the gaming machine F3, the identification information is displayed in a specific dynamic display mode for a predetermined period until the elapsed time elapses.

  According to the gaming machine F4, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine F3, the identification information is displayed in a specific dynamic display mode in a predetermined period until the elapsed time elapses. There is an effect that it can be discriminated by the dynamic display mode.

<Characteristic F 'group> 2 to execute an extension effect at the end of SPGT
Display means capable of displaying an effect mode, predetermined period setting means capable of setting a predetermined period, predetermined period determining means for determining whether the predetermined period is set by the predetermined period setting means, and the predetermined period determining means When the predetermined period is determined, the switching display means for switching the effect mode displayed on the display means to a specific effect mode, and the predetermined period has passed and the predetermined condition is satisfied. And an extension period setting means for setting an extension period in which the period for displaying the specific effect mode is extended and displayed.

  Here, in a conventional gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a gaming machine configured to execute the same effect at the same timing or change the display mode between a plurality of gaming machines has been known ( For example, JP, 2013-31695, A). In such a pachinko machine, for example, an RTC (real time clock) is mounted, and the display mode is changed when the time information acquired from the RTC reaches a preset time. However, in this type of pachinko machine, there is a problem that the player's willingness to play declines when the period during which the display mode is changed ends, and the player gets bored with the game. The gaming machine F′1 is made in order to solve the above-mentioned problems, and aims to provide a gaming machine that can suppress a problem that the player gets bored with the game at an early stage.

  According to the gaming machine F′1, the effect mode is displayed on the display means. Whether the predetermined period is set by the predetermined period setting means is determined by the predetermined period determination means. When it is determined that the period is the predetermined period, the effect mode displayed on the display unit by the switching display unit is switched to the specific effect mode and displayed. When it is determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied when the predetermined period elapses, the extended period setting unit extends the period for displaying the specific effect mode. Thereby, since the period when a specific production | presentation aspect is displayed changes with establishment of predetermined conditions, the production | presentation which is unexpected can be provided to a player. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress a problem that the player gets bored with the game at an early stage.

  In the gaming machine F′1, a clocking means capable of timing, an acquisition means for acquiring time information from the clocking means, and an elapsed time determination for determining an elapsed time based on the time information acquired from the acquisition means And the predetermined period setting means sets the predetermined period based on the time information acquired from the time measuring means, and the predetermined period determining means is the time information acquired from the time measuring means. The gaming machine F′2 is characterized in that it is determined whether or not the predetermined period is reached.

  According to the gaming machine F′2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine F′1, the following effects are produced. That is, the acquisition unit acquires time information from the time measurement unit, and the elapsed time determination unit determines the elapsed time based on the time information. Based on the time information acquired from the time measuring means, a predetermined period is set by the predetermined period setting means, and based on the time information acquired from the time measuring means, it is determined whether the predetermined period is reached. Thereby, since a specific production | presentation aspect comes to be displayed based on time information, the production | presentation aspect with a sense of unity can be displayed with a some pachinko machine. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress a problem that the player gets bored with the game at an early stage.

  In the gaming machine F′2, information acquisition means for acquiring information based on the establishment of the acquisition condition, storage means for storing the information acquired by the information acquisition means, and Determination means for executing determination on information, and pre-determination means for executing determination based on the information acquired by the information acquisition means before the determination condition is satisfied, wherein the predetermined condition is The gaming machine F′3 is configured to be easily established when the information determined as a specific determination result by the prior determination unit is stored.

  According to the gaming machine F′3, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine F′2, the following effects are achieved. That is, the information acquired by the information acquisition means based on the establishment of the acquisition condition is stored in the storage means, and the determination on the information is executed by the determination means based on the satisfaction of the determination condition. The determination is executed based on the information acquired by the information acquisition unit before the determination condition is satisfied by the prior determination unit. The predetermined condition is easily established when the information determined as the specific determination result by the prior determination unit is stored. Thereby, it can be anticipated that it is a specific determination result by extending the period in which a specific production mode is displayed. Therefore, there is an effect that a game can be performed in the hope that the period during which a specific effect mode is displayed is extended.

  The gaming machine F′2 or F′3 has information input means capable of inputting specific information, and the predetermined period setting means includes the specific information input by the information input means and the time measuring means. Based on the acquired time information, the period for performing the specific effect mode is set to at least a first predetermined period that is the predetermined period and a second predetermined period that is different from the predetermined period. A gaming machine F′4.

  According to the gaming machine F′4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine F′2 or F′3, the following effects are produced. That is, specific information is input by the information input means. The predetermined period setting unit sets a period during which a specific effect mode is performed based on the specific information input by the information input unit and the time information acquired from the time measuring unit. Accordingly, it is possible to set a period during which a specific effect mode is performed based on the two pieces of information that can be input and the time information. Therefore, by combining two pieces of information, it is possible to set a plurality of patterns for a period during which a specific effect mode is performed, so that it is possible to provide an unexpected effect. In addition, there is an effect that a period for performing a specific effect mode can be changed by changing time information without changing inputable information.

  In the gaming machine F′4, the predetermined period setting means sets a period longer than the first predetermined period as the second predetermined period.

  According to the gaming machine F′5, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine F′4, the second predetermined period set by the predetermined period setting means is set as a period longer than the first predetermined period, so that a specific When the production mode lasts longer than the first predetermined period, the player is made to imagine whether it is an extended period based on the establishment of the predetermined condition or a period set as the second predetermined period. However, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the problem that the player gets bored with the game early.

  Any one of the gaming machines F′3 to F′5 has a dynamic display period determining means for determining a period for dynamically displaying the identification information, and the period determined by the dynamic display period determining means has elapsed. A game machine F′6 having temporary stop display means for displaying the identification information with a temporary stop display when the elapsed time has elapsed before the display.

  According to the gaming machine F′6, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines F′3 to F′5, the following effects are produced. That is, the period for dynamically displaying the identification information is determined by the dynamic display period determining means. If the elapsed time elapses before the period determined by the dynamic display period determining means elapses, the identification information is temporarily stopped and displayed. Thereby, dynamic display can be temporarily stopped according to the end timing of the period during which a specific effect mode is displayed. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can determine the end timing in an easily understandable manner.

  In the gaming machine F′6, when the temporary stop display means displays the temporary stop and the extension period is set by the extension period setting means, after the predetermined period has passed, a specific effect is displayed. A gaming machine F′7 having a specific effect display means for displaying a display mode on the display means.

  According to the gaming machine F′7, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine F′6, the following effects are produced. That is, when the temporary stop display means displays the temporary stop and the extension period setting means sets the extension period, the specific effect display means displays the specific effect display mode after the predetermined period has elapsed. To display. Thereby, since the specific effect display mode is displayed from the state in which the extended period is set to the temporary stop display, the player from the temporary stop display same as the surrounding players Since different specific effect display modes are displayed, a sense of superiority can be felt. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

  The gaming machine F'7 has a suggestion effect display means for displaying an indication effect suggesting that the extension period is set during the predetermined period on the display means. F'8.

  According to the gaming machine F′8, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine F′7, a suggestion effect that suggests that the extension period is set by the suggestion effect display means is displayed on the display means during the predetermined period. Therefore, the player's willingness to play a game can be increased, and there is an effect that the problem that the player gets bored of the game at an early stage can be suppressed.

  In any of the gaming machines F′2 to F′8, the timing means is configured to be able to count even when no power is supplied to the gaming machine. Machine F'9.

  According to the gaming machine F′9, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines F′2 to F′8, it is possible for the timing means to time even when no power is supplied to the gaming machine. The time can always be measured regardless of the power-on state of the gaming machine, and there is an effect that a specific effect mode can be accurately executed based on the time information.

  In any one of the gaming machines F′2 to F′9, the timing unit includes a correcting unit capable of correcting the current time.

  According to the gaming machine F′10, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines F′2 to F′9, the time measuring means can correct the current time by the correcting means, and therefore based on the time information. Thus, there is an effect that a specific production mode can be accurately executed.

  In any of the gaming machines F′4 to F′10, the information input means is set with a period in which information can be input, and the gaming machine F′11.

  According to the gaming machine F′11, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines F′4 to F′10, the period during which information can be input is set by the information input means. By making it outside the possible period, there is no effect that the period during which the specific effect mode is displayed during business is not changed, and the specific effect mode can be executed at a desired timing.

  In the gaming machine F′11, the acquisition unit acquires day information as the time information, and the predetermined period setting unit has a different period for displaying the specific effect mode due to different day information. A gaming machine F′12 that is set as described above.

  According to the gaming machine F′12, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine F′11, the day of the week information is acquired by the acquisition unit, and the specific effect mode is displayed by the predetermined period setting unit because the acquired day of week information is different. Since the period to perform is set to be different, there is an effect that it is possible to change the period for performing the specific effect mode by changing the day information without changing the inputable information.

  In any one of the gaming machines F′4 to F′12, the predetermined period setting means can set a plurality of periods for displaying the specific effect mode in time series. Machine F'13.

  According to the gaming machine F′13, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines F′4 to F′12, a plurality of periods for displaying a specific effect mode are set in time series by the predetermined period setting means. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to simplify the work of setting a period for performing a specific performance mode.

  In the gaming machine F′13, the acquisition unit acquires time information as the time information, and the predetermined period setting unit can set a period for displaying the specific effect mode from a plurality of different periods. Even if the period for displaying the specific effect mode is changed by the predetermined period setting means, the timing for executing the display of the specific effect mode is unified based on the time information. A gaming machine F′14 characterized by being.

  According to the gaming machine F′14, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine F′13, the following effects are produced. That is, the acquisition unit acquires time information. The predetermined period setting means can set a period for displaying a specific effect mode from a plurality of different periods, and even when different periods are set, the timing for executing the display of the specific effect mode is unified based on time information To do. Thereby, even if the period for displaying the specific effect mode is different, the timing at which the display of the specific effect mode is executed can be unified, so that the player can display the specific effect mode. The length of the period during which a specific performance mode is displayed cannot be determined depending on the timing. Therefore, it becomes possible for the player to play the game while interested in whether or not the period during which the specific effect mode is displayed exceeds the predetermined period, and the player can be prevented from getting bored with the game at an early stage. effective.

  In the gaming machines F′1 to F′14, a display timing for setting a timing for executing the display of the effect mode displayed on the display unit within a predetermined period set by the predetermined period setting unit. Waiting until the timing set by the display timing setting means, the setting means, the effect mode executing means for executing the effect mode based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, and the execution of the effect mode by the effect mode executing means A gaming machine F′15, characterized in that the game machine F′15 includes a production mode standby means.

  According to the gaming machine F′15, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines F′1 to F′14, the following effects are produced. That is, the display timing setting unit sets the display timing of the effect mode displayed on the display unit at a predetermined interval within the predetermined period set by the predetermined period setting unit. The execution of the selection mode performed by the production mode execution unit based on the establishment of the predetermined condition is made to wait until the timing set by the production mode standby unit. Thereby, the effect mode executed within the predetermined period is also executed at a predetermined timing. Therefore, it is possible to produce a sense of unity among a plurality of gaming machines, and to suppress an inconvenience that the player gets bored with the game at an early stage.

  In the gaming machines F′2 to F′14, a display execution time for setting a time for displaying the effect mode displayed on the display unit at a predetermined time interval based on the time information acquired by the acquisition unit. An effect mode for executing the effect mode by the setting mode, the effect mode executing unit for executing the effect mode based on the establishment of the predetermined condition, and waiting for the time set by the display execution time setting unit. A gaming machine F'16 comprising a waiting means.

  According to the gaming machine F′16, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines F′2 to F′14, the following effects are produced. That is, the display execution time setting means sets the display execution time displayed on the display means at predetermined time intervals based on the time information acquired by the acquisition means. The execution of the selection mode performed by the production mode execution unit based on the establishment of the predetermined condition is set by the production mode standby unit and waits until the time. Thereby, the effect mode executed within the predetermined period is also executed in a predetermined time. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to produce a sense of unity among a plurality of gaming machines, and to suppress a problem that the player gets bored with the game at an early stage.

  Any one of the gaming machines F′1 to F′16 has an operation unit capable of performing a predetermined input operation, and the predetermined period setting unit sets the predetermined period based on the predetermined input operation by the operation unit. A gaming machine F'17 that is to be set.

  According to the gaming machine F′17, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines F′1 to F′16, the predetermined period by the predetermined period setting unit is set based on the predetermined operation by the operation unit. There is an effect that the predetermined period can be easily set to a desired period.

  In any of the gaming machines F′1 to F′17, effect information output means for outputting effect information including at least specific effect mode information based on the specific effect mode displayed on the display means, and output of the effect information Effect information input means capable of inputting information corresponding to the effect information output by the means, specific effect mode setting means for setting the specific effect mode based on information input by the effect information input means, A gaming machine F′18 characterized by comprising:

  According to the gaming machine F′18, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines F′1 to F′18, the following effects are produced. That is, the production information output unit outputs production information including at least specific production mode information based on the specific production mode displayed on the display unit. Information corresponding to the effect information is input by the effect information input means. The specific effect mode setting means sets a specific effect mode based on the information input by the effect information input means. Thereby, since the specific effect aspect displayed with another pachinko machine can be set, it becomes possible to synchronize an effect aspect freely. Therefore, the player's willingness to play a game can be increased, and there is an effect that the trouble that the player gets bored with the gaming machine at an early stage can be reduced.

  In addition, it is good to include the information of the time when a specific effect is displayed on the effect information which this game machine F'18 outputs. By doing in this way, there exists an effect that the time when a specific production | presentation aspect is displayed can be synchronized no matter what timing the specific production | presentation aspect setting means performs.

  In the gaming machine F′18, the effect information output means displays the effect information on the display means in a manner that can be acquired by an external device.

  According to the gaming machine F′19, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine F′18, the presentation information is output in a mode (for example, a two-dimensional information code) that the presentation information output means can acquire by an external device (for example, a portable terminal). Since it displays, there exists an effect that the setting operation | work of the specific effect aspect by a specific effect aspect setting means can be made easy.

<Characteristic G group> Symbol size displayed with fish-eye liquid crystal First display means having a display area configured by arranging a plurality of first pixels configured in a first display size, and the first display means A second display means having a display area arranged in the vicinity of the display area and configured by arranging a plurality of second pixels each having a second display size smaller than the first display size; Display control means capable of moving and displaying the same symbol data from the display means to the second display means or from the second display means to the first display means. Machine G1.

  Here, in a gaming machine such as a conventional pachinko machine, a gaming machine that provides a novel presentation mode by arranging a plurality of display devices and providing each player with a different display mode has been proposed (for example, JP, 2005-270417, A). However, in this type of pachinko machine, there is a problem in that the control burden that increases the load for display control increases. The gaming machine G1 has been made to solve the above-described problems and the like, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine that can reduce the control load.

  According to the gaming machine G1, the first display means is configured by a display area configured by arranging a plurality of first pixels configured in the first display size. The second display means is configured by a display area that is arranged in the vicinity of the display area of the first display means and is configured by arranging a plurality of second pixels having a second display size smaller than the first display size. ing. The same symbol data is moved and displayed by the display control means from the first display means to the second display means or from the second display means to the first display means. Thereby, by displaying the same display data on different display means, it is possible to display symbols with different display sizes. Therefore, even when the display size of the symbol is changed and displayed, the load of the control process for changing the display data enlargement rate or the like can be reduced. Therefore, there is an effect that the control load can be reduced.

  In the gaming machine G1, the gaming machine G2 is configured such that the first display size and the second display size are each configured with a predetermined enlargement ratio.

  According to the gaming machine G2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine G1, the first display size and the second display size are each configured with a predetermined enlargement ratio, so that the size of the displayed symbol is a predetermined enlargement. There is an effect that it can be displayed differently depending on the rate.

  In the gaming machine G1 or G2, the gaming machine G3 is characterized in that the symbol data displayed in common with the first display means and the second display means is image information scroll-displayed.

  According to the gaming machine G3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine G1 or G2, the symbol data displayed in common on the first display means and the second display means is image information that is scroll-displayed. There is an effect that the symbols can be scroll-displayed across the first display means and the second display means, and a fresh effect can be provided to the player.

  In any one of the gaming machines G1 to G3, a storage unit storing the symbol data to be displayed by the display control unit, the symbol data is acquired from the storage unit, and the acquired symbol data is stored in the display control unit. Display data setting means for setting an enlargement ratio to be displayed on the display, wherein the display control means is moved from the first display means to the second display means or from the second display means to the first display means. In the game machine G4, the symbol data set with the display data setting means is moved and displayed.

  According to the gaming machine G4, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines G1 to G3, the following effects are produced. That is, the symbol data displayed by the display control means is stored by the storage means. The display data setting unit sets an enlargement ratio for acquiring the symbol data from the storage unit and displaying the acquired symbol data on the display control unit. When the display control means moves the first display means to the second display means or from the second display means to the first display means for display, the symbol data of the same magnification set by the display data setting means is displayed. It is displayed by being moved by the control means. As a result, the display size of the symbols can be displayed differently between the first display means and the second display means without changing the enlargement ratio. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to reduce the load caused by the process of changing the display size of the symbols for display.

  In any of the gaming machines G1 to G4, the first display means has a display area larger than that of the second display means.

  According to the gaming machine G5, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines G1 to G4, the first display means has a larger display area than the second display means, so that a different impression is displayed to the player. There is an effect that the production can be performed.

  One of the gaming machines G1 to G5 has lottery means for executing a lottery based on the establishment of the lottery conditions, and the display control means dynamically displays identification information indicating a lottery result by the lottery means using the symbol. A gaming machine G6 characterized by being displayed.

  According to the gaming machine G6, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines G1 to G5, the following effects are produced. That is, lottery is executed by the lottery means based on the establishment of the lottery conditions. In the display control means, the identification information indicating the lottery result by the lottery means is dynamically displayed as a symbol by the display control means. As a result, the lottery result can be discriminated by the design, and the player can be interested in the dynamic display of the design.

  In the gaming machine G6, the symbol indicating the identification information is set to the first display means at the enlargement ratio after scrolling and displaying the data set at the predetermined enlargement ratio on the second display means. The gaming machine G7 is characterized in that after being moved and displayed with the information, the first display means is scroll-displayed with data set at a predetermined enlargement ratio.

  According to the gaming machine G7, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine G6, the symbol indicating the identification information is displayed on the first display after scrolling and displaying the data set at a predetermined magnification on the second display means. Since the display control means scrolls the symbol indicating the identification information with the data set at the predetermined enlargement ratio on the first display means after the information is moved and displayed on the means with the information set at the enlargement ratio, the second display means When the display unit is moved from the display unit to the first display unit for display, when the display is changed with the enlargement factor, the processing for changing the enlargement factor can be reduced.

<Characteristic G 'group> Symbol size 2 displayed with fisheye liquid crystal
A first display unit having a display area configured by arranging a plurality of first pixels configured in a first display size; and the first display unit disposed adjacent to the display area of the first display unit. A second display unit having a display area configured by arranging a plurality of second pixels each having a second display size smaller than the second display unit, and the second display unit or the second display unit. And a display control means capable of moving and displaying the same symbol data on the first display means.

  Here, in a gaming machine such as a conventional pachinko machine, a gaming machine that provides a novel presentation mode by arranging a plurality of display devices and providing each player with a different display mode has been proposed (for example, JP, 2005-270417, A). However, in this type of pachinko machine, there is a problem that a control burden that increases a load for display control increases. The gaming machine G′1 has been made to solve the above-described problems, and aims to provide a gaming machine that can reduce the control burden.

  According to the gaming machine G′1, the first display means is configured by a display area configured by arranging a plurality of first pixels configured in the first display size. The second display means is configured by a display area that is arranged in the vicinity of the display area of the first display means and is configured by arranging a plurality of second pixels having a second display size smaller than the first display size. ing. The same symbol data is moved and displayed by the display control means from the first display means to the second display means or from the second display means to the first display means. Thereby, by displaying the same display data on different display means, it is possible to display symbols with different display sizes. Therefore, even when the display size of the symbol is changed and displayed, the load of the control process for changing the display data enlargement rate or the like can be reduced. Therefore, there is an effect that the control load can be reduced.

  In the gaming machine G′1, the first display size and the second display size are each configured with a predetermined enlargement ratio, the gaming machine G′2.

  According to the gaming machine G′2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine G′1, the first display size and the second display size are each configured with a predetermined enlargement ratio, so the size of the displayed symbol Can be displayed differently at a predetermined enlargement ratio.

  In the gaming machine G′1 or G′2, the gaming machine G is characterized in that the symbol data displayed in common on the first display means and the second display means is scrolled image information. '3.

  According to the gaming machine G′3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine G′1 or G′2, the symbol data displayed in common with the first display means and the second display means is a scroll-displayed image. Since it is information, the symbols can be scroll-displayed across the first display means and the second display means, and there is an effect that a fresh effect can be provided to the player.

  In any of the gaming machines G′1 to G′3, the symbol data displayed by the display control unit is stored, the symbol data is acquired from the storage unit, and the acquired symbol data is stored. Display data setting means for setting an enlargement ratio to be displayed on the display control means, the display control means from the first display means to the second display means or from the second display means to the first display. The game machine G'4 is characterized in that when it is moved to the means for display, the symbol data having the same magnification set by the display data setting means is moved and displayed.

  According to the gaming machine G′4, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines G′1 to G′3, the following effects are produced. That is, the symbol data displayed by the display control means is stored by the storage means. The display data setting unit sets an enlargement ratio for acquiring the symbol data from the storage unit and displaying the acquired symbol data on the display control unit. When the display control means moves the first display means to the second display means or from the second display means to the first display means for display, the symbol data of the same magnification set by the display data setting means is displayed. It is displayed by being moved by the control means. As a result, the display size of the symbols can be displayed differently between the first display means and the second display means without changing the enlargement ratio. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to reduce the load caused by the process of changing the display size of the symbols for display.

  In any one of the gaming machines G′1 to G′4, the first display means has a larger display area than the second display means.

  According to the gaming machine G′5, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines G′1 to G′4, the first display means has a larger display area than the second display means. There is an effect that it is possible to perform display effects with different impressions.

  One of the gaming machines G′1 to G′5 has lottery means for executing lottery based on the establishment of the lottery conditions, and the display control means displays identification information indicating the lottery result by the lottery means. A gaming machine G'6 that is dynamically displayed with a symbol.

  According to the gaming machine G′6, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines G′1 to G′5, the following effects are produced. That is, lottery is executed by the lottery means based on the establishment of the lottery conditions. In the display control means, the identification information indicating the lottery result by the lottery means is dynamically displayed as a symbol by the display control means. As a result, the lottery result can be discriminated by the design, and the player can be interested in the dynamic display of the design.

  In the gaming machine G′6, the symbol indicating the identification information is displayed by scrolling the data set at a predetermined enlargement ratio on the second display means and displaying the enlarged display on the first display means at the enlargement ratio. The gaming machine G'7 is characterized in that after being moved and displayed with the set information, the first display means is scroll-displayed with data set at a predetermined enlargement ratio.

  According to the gaming machine G'7, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine G'6, the symbol indicating the identification information is displayed after the data set at a predetermined enlargement ratio is scrolled and displayed on the second display means. After the display is moved and displayed with the information set at the enlargement ratio on the first display means, the display control means scrolls the symbol indicating the identification information with the data set at the predetermined enlargement ratio on the first display means. Therefore, when the display is moved from the second display means to the first display means and the display is changed with the enlargement ratio, the process of changing the enlargement ratio can be reduced.

<Characteristic H group> Pre-pseudo-variation on sub-screen First display means having a specific first display area, second display means having a second display area different from the first display area, acquisition conditions Based on the establishment, it is determined that an acquisition unit capable of acquiring information, a display control unit that displays an effect based on the information on the first display unit or the second display unit, and that a predetermined condition is established. A condition determination unit, and when the condition determination unit determines that a predetermined condition is satisfied, the display control unit displays an effect based on the information in the first display area or the first display area. A gaming machine H1 that is displayed by moving from one of the two display areas to the other display area.

  Here, in a conventional gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is one in which a display device such as a liquid crystal display device is provided and various effect images are displayed on the display device (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2013-13528). . However, although the above-described gaming machine can display various effect images, since there is only one place where the effect image is displayed, an unexpected game using the effect image is provided. There was a problem that the player could get bored. The gaming machine H1 is made in order to solve the above-described problems, and provides a gaming machine that can relieve the player's tiredness by providing an unexpected game using an effect image. The purpose is to provide.

  According to the gaming machine H1, the display control means displays an effect based on the information acquired by the acquiring means on the first display means having the first display area or the second display means having the second display area. Is done. Then, when it is determined that the predetermined condition is satisfied by the condition determining means, the effect displayed in either the first display area or the second display area is moved to the other display area. Therefore, it is possible to provide an unexpected game, and it is possible to alleviate the player's tiredness.

  In the gaming machine H1, a storage unit that stores the information acquired by the acquisition unit, a determination unit that executes a determination based on the information stored in the storage unit when a determination condition is satisfied, and As the effect based on the determination result by the determination means, the dynamic display control means for causing the first display means to perform dynamic display for a predetermined time, and before the determination by the determination means is performed, the storage means Pre-determination means for performing pre-determination based on the stored information, and pre-dynamic display for causing the second display means to perform pre-dynamic display as the effect based on the pre-determination result by the pre-determination means A gaming machine H2 characterized by comprising control means.

  Here, in a conventional gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a lottery is performed in accordance with the winning of a game ball in a winning opening, and a variation display according to the lottery result is performed, and the right of the lottery is held and stored There is a gaming machine that performs an effect (so-called pre-reading effect) for changing the display mode during the variable display based on the contents of the lottery in the reserved memory (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-16499). However, in the gaming machine described above, a single display means performs a variable display according to the lottery result and a display of the prefetching effect described above. When performing a prefetching effect corresponding to a specific reserved memory, However, since the effect mainly on the specific reserved memory is forcibly performed, there is a problem that the player is not interested in the variable display for the other reserved memory. The gaming machine H1 is provided to solve the above-described problems, and provides a gaming machine that can prevent a player from becoming less interested while performing an effect based on a reserved memory. Objective.

  According to the gaming machine H2, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine H1, the following effects are achieved. That is, when the determination condition is satisfied, the determination unit executes determination based on the information stored in the storage unit, and causes the first display unit to perform dynamic display as an effect based on the determination result. Prior determination is performed by the prior determination means based on information stored in the storage means before execution of determination by the determination means, and dynamic display in advance on the second display means as an effect based on the prior determination result To do. As a result, the dynamic display is displayed on the first display means, and the preliminary dynamic display is displayed on the second display means. The result of the target display can be watched. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the player's interest in the dynamic display from being lowered.

  In the gaming machine H2, the storage means is capable of storing a plurality of the information up to a predetermined number, and an information selection means for selecting arbitrary information from the plurality of information stored in the storage means. The gaming machine H3 is characterized in that the prior dynamic display control means performs a prior dynamic display corresponding to the information selected by the information selection means.

  According to the gaming machine H3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine H2, the following effects are produced. That is, the storage means stores a plurality of pieces of information up to a predetermined number, and the information selection means selects arbitrary information from the stored pieces of information. The pre-dynamic display control means causes the pre-dynamic display according to the information selected by the information selection means to be performed. As a result, a pre-dynamic display based on information desired by the player is displayed. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's tiredness can be reduced.

  In the gaming machine H3, the second display means is configured to be able to display a plurality of prior dynamic displays corresponding to the plurality of information stored in the storage means, and the information selection means Arbitrary prior dynamic display is selected from a plurality of prior dynamic displays displayed on the second display means.

  According to the gaming machine H4, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine H3, a plurality of prior dynamic displays corresponding to a plurality of information stored in the storage means are displayed on the second display means, and the displayed plurality Since any pre-dynamic display is selected from the previous dynamic display by the information selection means, there is an effect that the player can easily select a desired pre-dynamic display.

  In the gaming machine H3 or H4, the game machine H3 or H4 has a reserved symbol display control means for displaying a reserved symbol corresponding to at least the information before the determination by the determining means is performed among the information stored in the storage means. The information selection means is for selecting an arbitrary reserved symbol from a plurality of reserved symbols displayed by the reserved symbol display control means, and the prior dynamic display control means is selected by the information selection means. The game machine H5 is characterized in that it performs a pre-dynamic display corresponding to the reserved symbol.

  According to the gaming machine H5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine H3 or H4, the following effects are produced. That is, the reserved symbol display control means displays a reserved symbol corresponding to at least information before the determination by the determining means is performed among the information stored in the storage means. An arbitrary reserved symbol is selected from the displayed plurality of reserved symbols by the information selection means, and the prior dynamic display control means performs a pre-dynamic display corresponding to the selected reserved symbol. As a result, any pre-dynamic display can be selected while viewing the displayed reserved symbols. Therefore, there is an effect that it becomes easy for the player to select a desired prior dynamic display.

  In the gaming machine H5, the gaming machine H6 has an identifying means for displaying the reserved symbols selected by the reserved symbol selecting means in an identifiable manner.

  According to the gaming machine H6, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine H5, the holding symbol selected by the holding symbol selecting means is displayed in an identifiable manner by the identifying means, so that the holding corresponding to the displayed prior dynamic display There is an effect that it is possible to easily grasp which symbol is.

  The gaming machine H5 or H6 has a holding symbol display mode variable means for changing the display mode of the holding symbol to a predetermined display mode that suggests the display content of the pre-dynamic display corresponding to the holding symbol. A gaming machine H7.

  According to the gaming machine H7, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine H5 or H6, the predetermined display that suggests the display content of the pre-dynamic display corresponding to the reserved symbol by the reserved symbol display mode variable means Since the mode is changed, there is an effect that the player can easily select a desired prior dynamic display.

  In any one of the gaming machines H1 to H7, the game machine includes an information specifying unit that specifies the information used for the determination by the determination unit and the information used for the determination by the prior determination unit, The dynamic display control means satisfies a determination condition in which a determination is made by the determination means based on the one information for a prior dynamic display displayed based on the one information specified by the information specifying means. In such a case, the gaming machine H8 is characterized in that the advance variation display is stopped.

  According to the gaming machine H8, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines H1 to H7, the following effects are produced. That is, information used for determination by the determination unit and information used for determination by the prior determination unit are specified by the information specifying unit. A prior dynamic display displayed based on one piece of information specified by the information specifying unit is stopped when a determination condition is established that a determination unit performs a determination based on the one piece of information by the prior dynamic display control unit. Let Thereby, the preliminary dynamic display based on one information can be stopped at the timing when the dynamic display based on one information is started. Therefore, the prior dynamic display arbitrarily selected by the player can be displayed so as to switch to the dynamic display without a sense of incongruity. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the player's interest in the dynamic display or the prior dynamic display from being lowered.

  In any of the gaming machines H1 to H8, there is provided a switching means for switching between display contents displayed on the first display means and display contents displayed on the second display means. .

  According to the gaming machine H9, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines H1 to H8, the switching means switches the display content displayed on the first display means and the display content displayed on the second display means. There is an effect that the player can display the desired display contents on the desired display means, and the problem that the player can get into the game at an early stage can be reduced.

  In the gaming machine H9, when the prior dynamic display corresponding to the one information selected by the information selection means is displayed by the switching means on the first display means, the switching means When the dynamic display corresponding to the information is started, the dynamic display is switched to display the dynamic display on the first display means.

  According to the gaming machine H10, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine H9, the following effects are achieved. That is, in the case where the first dynamic display corresponding to the one information is displayed on the first display by the switching means, the switching means displays the dynamic display corresponding to the one information on the first display. Switch to display. Thereby, when the prior dynamic display corresponding to the information arbitrarily selected by the player is displayed on the first display means, the dynamic display corresponding to the information is continuously displayed on the first display means. Therefore, it is possible to display so that the prior dynamic display can be switched to the dynamic display without a sense of incongruity. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the player's interest in the dynamic display or the prior dynamic display from being lowered.

  In any one of the gaming machines H8 to H10, the prior dynamic display includes at least a determination result mode display based on a determination result of the prior determination unit, and corresponds to one piece of information specified by the information specifying unit. The gaming machine H11 is characterized in that the determination result mode display displayed by the prior dynamic display is continuously displayed on the dynamic display corresponding to the one information.

  According to the gaming machine H11, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines H8 to H10, the following effects are produced. That is, as the prior dynamic display, at least a determination result mode display based on the determination result of the prior determination unit is displayed, and the determination result mode displayed in the prior dynamic display corresponding to one piece of information specified by the information specifying unit The display is also continuously displayed on the dynamic display corresponding to one piece of information. Thereby, since the determination result mode display is displayed across the prior dynamic display and the dynamic display, it is possible to perform an effect of continuing the prior dynamic display and the dynamic display without a sense of incongruity. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the player's interest in the dynamic display or the prior dynamic display from being lowered.

<Characteristic group I> Synchronous effect Based on the display unit capable of displaying an effect mode, an information input unit capable of inputting predetermined information, and the predetermined information input by the information input unit, a specific effect mode is selected. An effect period setting means for setting a period that can be displayed on the display means, and a specific effect that executes the specific effect mode based on the fact that a predetermined condition is established within the period set by the effect period setting means. A game machine I1 having a mode execution means.

  Here, in a conventional gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is one that executes a synchronized effect at a predetermined time (for example, JP-A-2007-252534). However, since the gaming machine described above performs the control to execute the synchronization effect according to the time, there is a problem that the timing for performing the synchronization effect becomes monotonous and the player gets bored. The gaming machine I1 has been made to solve the above-described problems, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine that can alleviate the player's tiredness.

  According to the gaming machine I1, the effect mode is displayed on the display means. Based on the predetermined information input by the information input means, a period during which a specific effect mode can be displayed on the display means is set by the effect period setting means. A specific effect is executed by the specific effect mode executing means based on the fact that a predetermined condition is satisfied within the period. Thereby, the period which can display a specific production | presentation aspect can be set based on the input predetermined information. Therefore, it is possible to set and change the period during which a specific effect mode can be displayed, and to relax the player's tiredness. Also, by inputting the same information as predetermined information between the gaming machines arranged side by side, it is possible to experience dynamic display at a desired timing, and it is possible to alleviate the player's tiredness .

  In the gaming machine I1, the game machine I1 includes a timing unit capable of timing, and a time information acquisition unit that acquires time information from the timing unit, and the production period setting unit is acquired by the time information acquisition unit A gaming machine I2 characterized in that, based on time information and information input to the information input means, a period during which a specific effect mode can be displayed on the display means is set.

  According to the gaming machine I2, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine I1, the following effects are achieved. That is, the time information measured by the time measuring means is acquired by the time information acquiring means, and a period during which a specific effect can be displayed on the display means is set based on the time information and the information input to the information input means. . Thereby, the period which can display a specific production | presentation aspect can be set based on two information of time information and the information input by the information input means. Therefore, various periods can be set by combining information, and the player's tiredness can be alleviated.

  In the gaming machine I1 or I2, within a period set by the effect period setting means, a specific effect mode execution timing setting means for setting a timing for executing the specific effect mode, and after the predetermined condition is satisfied A specific production mode execution standby unit for waiting for execution of the specific production mode for a period until the execution of the specific production mode set by the execution timing setting unit. A gaming machine I3.

  According to the gaming machine I3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine I1 or the gaming machine I2, the following effects are produced. That is, within the period set by the effect period setting means, the timing for executing the specific effect mode is set by the specific effect mode execution timing setting means. For a period from when the predetermined condition is satisfied to when the specific production mode set by the execution timing setting unit is executed, the specific production mode execution standby unit waits for the specific production mode. Thereby, there exists an effect that the execution timing of a specific production | presentation aspect can be unified.

  In any one of the gaming machines I1 to I3, an effect mode storage unit that stores a plurality of effect modes, and a specification that sets the specific effect mode from a plurality of effect modes stored in the effect mode storage unit A gaming machine I4 having a production mode setting means.

  According to the gaming machine I4, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines I1 to I3, the following effects are achieved. A plurality of effect modes are stored in the effect mode storage means, and a specific effect mode is set from the effect modes by the specific effect mode setting means. Thereby, since the specific production | presentation aspect which can be displayed within the period set by the production | presentation period setting means is set from several production | generation aspects, it becomes unnecessary to prepare the data for specific production | generation aspects. Therefore, there is an effect that the data amount can be reduced.

  In the gaming machine I4, the specific effect mode setting means sets the specific effect mode based on the time information acquired from the time measuring means.

  According to the gaming machine I5, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine I4, the specific performance mode is set based on the time information acquired by the specific performance mode setting unit from the time measuring unit. There is an effect that can be.

  The gaming machine I4 includes operation means that can be operated by a player, and operation determination means for determining that the operation means has been operated in a predetermined manner. The specific effect mode setting means is the operation determination The gaming machine I6 is characterized in that the specific effect mode is set based on a predetermined operation determined by the means.

  According to the gaming machine I6, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine I4, a predetermined operation is performed by the operation means operable by the player, and a specific effect mode is set based on the predetermined operation determined by the operation determination means Therefore, there is an effect that the effect mode desired by the player can be set to a specific effect mode.

  In any one of the gaming machines I4 to I6, a specific effect that restricts the effect mode set as the specific effect mode by the specific effect mode setting unit so as not to be executed outside the period set by the effect period setting unit. A gaming machine I7 having a mode execution restriction means.

  According to the gaming machine I7, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines I4 to I6, the effect mode set as the specific effect mode by the specific effect mode setting means by the specific effect mode execution restricting means is the effect period setting means. Since it is restricted so that it is not executed during a period other than the period set in, there is an effect that it is possible to provide a special feeling of production while eliminating the need to prepare data for a specific production mode.

  In any one of the gaming machines I1 to I7, the production information output means for outputting the production information including at least the specific production mode information based on the specific production mode displayed on the display unit, and the production information output unit outputs the production information. Production information input means capable of inputting information corresponding to the production information, and specific production mode setting means for setting the specific production mode based on the information input by the production information input means. A featured gaming machine I8.

  According to the gaming machine I8, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines I1 to I7, the following effects are achieved. That is, the production information output unit outputs production information including at least specific production mode information based on the specific production mode displayed on the display unit. Information corresponding to the effect information is input by the effect information input means. The specific effect mode setting means sets a specific effect mode based on the information input by the effect information input means. Thereby, since the specific effect aspect displayed with another pachinko machine can be set, it becomes possible to synchronize an effect aspect freely. Therefore, the player's willingness to play a game can be increased, and there is an effect that the trouble that the player gets bored with the gaming machine at an early stage can be reduced.

  In addition, it is good to include the information of the time when a specific effect is displayed on the effect information which this game machine I8 outputs. By doing in this way, there exists an effect that the time when a specific production | presentation aspect is displayed can be synchronized no matter what timing the specific production | presentation aspect setting means performs.

  In the gaming machine I8, the effect information output means displays the effect information on the display means in a manner that can be acquired by an external device.

  According to the gaming machine I9, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine I8, the presentation information output means displays the presentation information in a mode (for example, a two-dimensional information code) that can be acquired by an external device (for example, a portable terminal). There is an effect that it is possible to facilitate the setting work of the specific production mode by the specific production mode setting means.

  Gaming machines A1 to A8, B1 to B10, C1 to C12, D1 to D7, D'1 to D'10, E1 to E7, E'1 to E'8, F1 to F4, F'1 to F'19, A gaming machine K1, wherein the gaming machine is a slot machine in any one of G1 to G7, G′1 to G′7, H1 to H11, and I1 to I9. Above all, the basic configuration of the slot machine is “equipped with variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information, and for operating the starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). As a result, the dynamic display of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed. The game machine is provided with special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on the condition that the confirmed identification information is specific identification information. In this case, examples of the game media include coins and medals.

  Gaming machines A1 to A8, B1 to B10, C1 to C12, D1 to D7, D'1 to D'10, E1 to E7, E'1 to E'8, F1 to F4, F'1 to F'19, A gaming machine K2, wherein in any one of G1 to G7, G'1 to G'7, H1 to H11, and I1 to I9, the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine. Above all, the basic configuration of a pachinko gaming machine is provided with an operation handle, and a ball is launched into a predetermined game area according to the operation of the operation handle, and the ball is placed in an operation port disposed at a predetermined position in the game area. As a necessary condition for winning (or passing through the operating port), the identification information dynamically displayed on the display means is determined and stopped after a predetermined time. In addition, when a special gaming state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning opening) disposed at a predetermined position in the gaming area is opened in a predetermined manner so that a ball can be won, and a value corresponding to the number of winnings is obtained. Examples include those to which values (including data written on magnetic cards as well as premium balls) are given.

Gaming machines A1 to A8, B1 to B10, C1 to C12, D1 to D7, D'1 to D'10, E1 to E7, E'1 to E'8, F1 to F4, F'1 to F'19, Any of G1 to G7, G'1 to G'7, H1 to H11, and I1 to I9, the gaming machine is a combination of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. . Among them, the basic configuration of the merged gaming machine includes “a variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information, and a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). Due to the operation of the identification information, the change of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the operation means for stop (for example, the stop button) or when a predetermined time elapses. Special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on the condition that the fixed identification information at the time of stoppage is specific identification information, and using a ball as a game medium, and the identification information The game machine is configured such that a predetermined number of balls are required at the start of the dynamic display, and a large number of balls are paid out when the special gaming state occurs.
<Others>
Conventionally, a lottery is performed in accordance with the winning of a game ball at the start opening, and a variation effect or a jackpot effect according to the lottery result is displayed on the liquid crystal screen. A gaming machine has been proposed that stores a lottery right up to a certain number and notifies the number by a symbol when winning at the start opening (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2013-13528). ).
In this type of pachinko machine, when the lottery contents stored on hold are determined and notified first, the willingness to win at the starting point will decline after that, and the game will stop and wait for the lottery result. As a result, the player was bored.
This technical idea has been made to solve the above-described problems, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine that can reduce a problem that a player gets bored with a game early.
<Means>
In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine of the technical idea 1 includes an acquisition unit capable of acquiring information based on the establishment of an acquisition condition, a storage unit in which the information acquired by the acquisition unit is stored, When the determination condition is satisfied, a determination unit that performs determination based on the information stored in the storage unit, and the information stored in the storage unit before the determination is performed by the determination unit Display means for displaying at least an identification symbol corresponding to the information, and the number of the information before the determination by the determination means is performed among the information stored in the storage means based on a predetermined trigger Symbol variable means for changing the display mode of at least the predetermined number of the identification symbols displayed on the display unit to a predetermined display mode when the predetermined number is greater than or equal to a predetermined number , It is those with a.
The gaming machine of the technical idea 2 includes an operation means that can be operated by a player in the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1, and an operation determination means that determines that the operation means has been operated. The predetermined opportunity is when the operation determination unit determines that the operation unit is operated.
In the gaming machine of technical idea 3, in the gaming machine of technical idea 2, when the operation determining unit determines that the operating unit has been operated, an identification symbol whose display mode is changed is displayed on the operating unit. It is provided with variable notification means for performing notification in an identifiable manner before the is operated.
The gaming machine according to the technical idea 4 is the gaming machine according to the technical idea 3, wherein the variable notification unit changes the display mode of the identification symbol to a variable notification mode, so that the operation determination unit changes the display unit by the operation determination unit. An identification symbol whose display mode changes when it is determined that it has been operated is notified so as to be specified before the operation means is operated.
The gaming machine of technical idea 5 is operated by the operation determining means in the gaming machine of technical idea 4 when the plurality of identification symbols are changed to the variable notification mode by the variable notification means. The identification symbols of 1 are changed and displayed by the symbol changing means in a predetermined order on the basis of the determination as having been made.
<Effect>
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1, information is acquired by the acquisition unit based on the establishment of the acquisition condition, and the information acquired by the acquisition unit is stored by the storage unit. When the determination condition is satisfied, the determination based on the information acquired by the acquisition unit is executed by the determination unit. The display means displays at least an identification symbol corresponding to information before execution of the determination by the determination means among the information stored in the storage means. Based on a predetermined trigger, when the number of pieces of information stored in the storage unit before execution of the determination by the determination unit is equal to or greater than a predetermined number, the design variable unit displays the information on the display unit. The display mode of at least a predetermined number of identification symbols displayed is changed to a predetermined display mode.
Accordingly, it is possible to prompt the player to play a game so that information is stored up to a predetermined number. Therefore, the player's willingness to play a game can be increased, and there is an effect that the trouble that the player gets bored of the game at an early stage can be reduced.
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1, the following effects are achieved. That is, it is determined by the operation determination means that the operation means operable by the player has been operated. A case where the operation determination unit determines that the operation unit is operated is a predetermined opportunity.
Thereby, pleasure to operate the operating means can be increased. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress a problem that the player gets bored early.
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 3, in addition to the effect achieved by the gaming machine described in the technical idea 2, the identification pattern whose display mode is variable when it is determined that the operating unit is operated by the variable notification unit Is notified by the variable notification means so as to be specified before the operation means is operated.
Thereby, the player can operate the operation means in a state in which the display form of the identification symbol is variable, and the pleasure of operating the operation means can be increased. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress a problem that the player gets bored early.
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 4, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine described in the technical idea 3, the variable notification means performs notification by changing the identification symbol itself into the variable notification mode, so that the player There is an effect that it is possible to easily grasp which identification symbol display mode is variable.
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 5, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine described in the technical idea 4, when the plurality of identification symbols are changed to the variable notification mode by the variable notification unit, the operation determination unit Since one identification symbol is changed and displayed in a predetermined order based on the determination that it has been operated, there is an effect that the player can be notified in an easy-to-understand manner.

10 Pachinko machines (game machines)
22 Frame button (operation means)
81 3rd symbol display device (display means)
203a Special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area (part of storage means)
203b Special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area (part of storage means )
S305-size by means S406, S411 part of acquiring hand stage S1411 symbol varying means

Claims (2)

An acquisition means capable of acquiring information based on the establishment of the acquisition condition;
Storage means for storing the information acquired by the acquisition means;
Discrimination means for executing discrimination based on the information stored in the storage means;
Display means for displaying identification information for indicating the discrimination result by the discrimination means;
When the identification information for indicating the specific determination result is displayed on the display means, privilege granting means capable of giving a privilege advantageous to the player;
Among the information stored in the storage unit, an identification symbol display unit that causes the display unit to display an identification symbol corresponding to the information before determination by the determination unit;
In a gaming machine having an operation means operable by a player,
When a predetermined number or more of the identification symbols are displayed based on a predetermined opportunity, the display mode of the plurality of identification symbols displayed on the display unit can be changed to a predetermined display mode. Design variable means;
Specific mode display means for displaying a plurality of identification symbols changed to the predetermined display mode in a specific mode corresponding to the content determined by the determination unit based on the operation of the operation unit;
The specific aspect display means includes
The combination of those plurality of said identification symbols is variably displayed state, and are not to constitute a particular manner corresponding to what is determined by said discriminating means,
Corresponding to the fact that the information is newly stored in the storage means in a state where at least a part of the identification symbols of the plurality of identification symbols variably displayed so as to constitute the specific mode is displayed. Then, when the identification symbol is newly displayed, the newly stored identification information is determined by the determination unit based on the operation of the operation unit. A gaming machine that is configured to be variably displayed so as to be in a specific mode corresponding to the above .   2. The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the display means is constituted by a liquid crystal display.

Images